DS-7316HQI-K4 - Dictaphone Hikvision - Free user manual and instructions
Find the device manual for free DS-7316HQI-K4 Hikvision in PDF.
User questions about DS-7316HQI-K4 Hikvision
0 question about this device. Answer the ones you know or ask your own.
Ask a new question about this device
Download the instructions for your Dictaphone in PDF format for free! Find your manual DS-7316HQI-K4 - Hikvision and take your electronic device back in hand. On this page are published all the documents necessary for the use of your device. DS-7316HQI-K4 by Hikvision.
USER MANUAL DS-7316HQI-K4 Hikvision
natural_image
Abstract graphic with geometric shapes and a red flag featuring a globe and hand (no text or symbols)ser +anual
Digital Video Recorder (DVR)
DS-73xxH>I-K4, DS-73xxHQI-K4, DS-90xxH>I-K8
ser +anual
CO≤YRIGH= ©2017 Hangzhou Hikvision Digital =echnology Co., Ltd.
ALL RIGH=S RESERVED.
Any and all information, including, among others, wordings, pictures, graphs are the properties of Hangzhou Hikvision Digital = echnology Co., Ltd. or its subsidiaries (hereinafter referred to be "Hikvision"). = his user manual (hereinafter referred to be "the +anual") cannot be reproduced, changed, translated, or distributed, partially or wholly, by any means, without the prior written permission of Hikvision. >nless otherwise stipulated, Hikvision does not make any warranties, guarantees or representations, express or implied, regarding to the +anual.
About this +anual
=his +anual is applicable to =urbo HD Digital Video Recorder (DVR).
=he +anual includes instructions for using and managing the product. ≤ictures, charts, images and all other information hereinafter are for description and explanation only. =he information contained in the +anual is subject to change, without notice, due to firmware updates or other reasons. ≤lease find the latest version in the company website (http://overseas.hikvision.com/en/).
≤lease use this user manual under the guidance of professionals.
=rademarks Acknowledgement
HIKVISION and other Hikvision trademarks and logos are the properties of Hikvision in various jurisdictions. Other trademarks and logos mentioned below are the properties of their respective owners.
Legal Disclaimer
=O =HE +AXI+>+ EX=E×= ≤ER+I==ED BY A≤≤LICABLE LAV, =HE ≤ROD>C= DESCRIBED, VI=H I=S HARDVARE, SOF=VARE A×D FIR+VARE, IS ≤ROVIDED "AS IS", VI=H ALL FA>L=S A×D ERRORS, A×D HIKVISIO× +AKES ×O VARRA×=IES, EX≤RESS OR I+≤LIED, I×CL>DI×G VI=HO>= LI+I=A=IO×, +ERCHA×=ABILI=Y, SA=ISFAC=ORY Q>ALI=Y, FI=×ESS FOR A ≤AR=IC>LAR ≤>R≤OSE, A×D ×O×-I×FRI×GE+E×= OF =HIRD ≤AR=Y. I× ×O EVE×= VILL HIKVISIO×, I=S DIREC=ORS, OFFICERS, E+≤LOYEES, OR AGE×=S BE LIABLE =O YO> FOR A×Y S≤ECIAL, CO×SEQ>E×=IAL, I×CIDEX=AL, OR I×DIREC= DA+AGES, I×CL>DI×G, A+O×G O=HERS, DA+AGES FOR LOSS OF B>SI×ESS ≤ROFI=S, B>SI×ESS I×=ERR>≤=IO×, OR LOSS OF DA=A OR DOC>+E×=A=IO×, I× CO××EC=IO× VI=H =HE >SE OF =HIS ≤ROD>C=, EVE× IF HIKVISIO× HAS BEE× ADVISED OF =HE ≤OSSIBILI=Y OF S>CH DA+AGES.
REGARDI×G =O =HE ≤ROD>C= √I=H |x=ER×E= ACCESS, =HE >SE OF ≤ROD>C= SHALL BE √HOLLY A= YO>R Ov× RISKS. HIKVISIO× SHALL ×O= =AKE A×Y RES≤O×SIBILI=ES FOR AB×OR+AL O≤ERA=IO×, ≤RIVACY LEAKAGE OR O=HER DA+AGES RES>L=I×G FRO+ CYBER A==ACK, HACKER A==ACK, VIR>S I×S≤EC=IO×, OR O=HER I×=ER×E= SEC>RI=Y RISKS; HOWEVER, HIKVISIO× √ILL ≤ROVIDE =I+ELY =ECH×ICAL S>≤≤OR= IF REQ>IRED.
S>RVEILLA×CE LAVS VARY BY J>RISDIC=IO×. ≤LEASE CHECK ALL RELEVA×= LAVS I× YO>R J>RISDIC=IO× BEFORE >SI×G =HIS ≤ROD>C= I× ORDER =O E×S>RE =HA= YO>R >SE CO×FOR+S =HE A≤≤LICABLE LAV. HIKVISIO× SHALL ×O= BE LIABLE I× =HE EVE×= =HA= =HIS ≤ROD>C= IS >SED VI=H ILLEG1=I+A=E ≤>R≤OSES.
IX =HE EVEx= OF A×Y CO×FLIC=S BE=VEE× =HIS +A×>AL A×D =HE A≤≤LICABLE LAV, =HE LA=ER ≤REVAILS.
Regulatory Information
F<< Information
≤lease take attention that changes or modification not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
F<< compliance: =his equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. =these limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. =his equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.
F<<
=his device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. =his device may not cause harmful interference.
2. =his device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
EU

=his product and - if applicable - the supplied accessories too are marked with "CE" and comply therefore with the applicable harmonized European standards listed under the E+C Directive 2014/30/E>, the LVD Directive 2014/35/E>, the RoHS Directive 2011/65/E>.

2012/19/E> (VEEE directive): ≤products marked with this symbol cannot be disposed of as unsorted municipal waste in the European >nion. For proper recycling, return this product to your local supplier upon the purchase of equivalent new equipment, or dispose of it at designated collection points. For more information see: www.recyclethis.info

2006/66/EC (battery directive): =his product contains a battery that cannot be disposed of as unsorted municipal waste in the European >nion. See the product documentation for specific battery information. =he battery is marked with this symbol, which may include lettering to indicate cadmium (Cd), lead ( ≤ b), or mercury (Hg). For proper recycling, return the battery to
your supplier or to a designated collection point. For more information see: www.recyclethis.info
Industry >3
=his device meets the CA× ICES-3 (A)/×+B-3(A) standards requirements.
4pplicable Models
This manual is applicable to the models listed in the following table.
Series Model DS-73xxHUI-K4 DS-7304HUI-K4DS-7308HUI-K4DS-7316HUI-K4 DS-73xxHQI-K4 DS-7308HQI-K4DS-7316HQI-K4DS-7332HQI-K4 DS-90xxHUI-K8 DS-9008HUI-K8DS-9016HUI-K8
Symbol
The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Symbol Description 
Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement important points of the main text. 
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if not avoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss, performance degradation, or unexpected results. 
Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk, which if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
Safety Instructions
- Proper configuration of all passwords and other security settings is the responsibility of the installer and/or end-user.
- In the use of the product, you must be in strict compliance with the electrical safety regulations of the nation and region. Please refer to technical specifications for detailed information.
- Input voltage should meet both the SELV (Safety Extra Low Voltage) and the Limited Power Source with 100 to 240 VAC, 12 VDC or 48 VDC according to the IEC60950-1 standard. Refer to technical specifications for detailed information.
- Do not connect several devices to one power adapter as adapter overload may cause over-heating or a fire hazard.
- Please make sure that the plug is firmly connected to the power socket.
- If smoke, odor or noise rise from the device, turn off the power at once and unplug the power cable, and then please contact the service center.
Preventive and
Before connecting and operating your device, please be advised of the following tips:
- Ensure unit is installed in a well-ventilated, dust-free environment.
- >nit is designed for indoor use only.
- Keep all liquids away from the device.
- Ensure environmental conditions meet factory specifications.
- Ensure unit is properly secured to a rack or shelf. Major shocks or jolts to the unit as a result of dropping it may cause damage to the sensitive electronics within the unit.
- >se the device in conjunction with an >≤ S if possible.
- ≤ower down the unit before connecting and disconnecting accessories and peripherals.
- A factory recommended HDD should be used for this device.
- Improper use or replacement of the battery may result in hazard of explosion. Replace with the same or equivalent type only. Dispose of used batteries according to the instructions provided by the battery manufacturer.
- Ensure to use the attached power adaptor only and not to change the adaptor randomly.
≤roduct Key Features
"eneral
- Connectable to =urboHD and analog cameras
- Supports >=C protocol for connecting camera over coa x
- Connectable to 1 ≤ cameras
\- =he analog signal inputs including =urboHD and CVBS can be automatically recognized without configuration
• Each channel supports dual-stream. And sub-stream supports up to vD1 resolution
• =he main stream of H>I Series supports up to 5 M≤ resolution of all the channels (H>I Series)
\- 5 M≤ long distance transmission can be enabled for the analog cameras (H>1 Series)
\- Independent configuration for each channel, including resolution, frame rate, bit rate, image quality, etc.
\- =he minimum frame rate for main stream and sub-stream is 1 fps
\- Encoding for both video stream and video & audio stream; audio and video synchronization during composite stream encoding
• Supports enabling H.265+/H.264+ to ensure high video quality with lowered bit rate
\- H.265+/H.265/H.264+/H.264 encoding for the main stream, and H.265/H.264 encoding for the sub-stream of analog cameras
\- Connectable to H.265 and H.264 I≤ cameras
- Defog level, night to day sensitivity, day to night sensitivity, IR light brightness, day/night mode, and vDR switch configurable for the connected analog cameras supporting these parameters
- 4 MP/5 MP signal switch for the supported analog cameras
• Vatermark technology
Local Monitoring
• HDMI output at up to 4K (3840 × 2160) resolution
- There are two HDMI interfaces of which the HDMI1 and VGA interfaces share simultaneous output. For HDMI1/VGA output, up to 1920 × 1080 resolution is supported. For HDMI2 output, up to 4K (3840 × 2160) resolution is supported
• 1/4/6/8/9/16/25/36 screen live view is supported, and the display sequence of screens is adjustable

NOTE
If the sum of the analog and IP channels exceeds 25, up to 32-window division mode is supported for the VGA/HDMI1 output
• Live view screen can be switched in group and manual switch and automatic cycle live view are also provided, the interval of automatic cycle can be adjusted
• CVBS output only serves as the aux output or live view output
- Quick setting menu is provided for live view
- The selected live view channel can be shielded
- VCA information overlay in live view for the supported analog cameras and in smart playback for the supported analog and IP cameras
- Motion detection, video-tampering detection, video e xception alarm, video loss alarm, and VCA alarm functions
• 1-ch analog camera supports people counting and heat map functions
- HUI Series supports line crossing detection and intrusion detection of all channels, and 2-ch sudden scene change detection.
• The enhanced VCA mode conflicts with the 2K/4K output and 4 MP/5 MP signal input (HUI Series)
- Privacy mask
- Several PTZ protocols (including Omnicast VMS of Genetec) supported; PTZ preset, patrol and pattern
- Zooming in/out by clicking the mouse and PTZ tracing by dragging mouse.
H" Management
• Each disk can have a maximum of 8 TB storage capacity
- 8 network disks (8 NAS disks, 8 IP SAN disks, or n N AS disks + m IP SAN disks (n+m ≤ 8)) can be connected
- Remaining recording time of the HDD can be viewed
• Supports cloud storage
• S.+.A.R.=. and bad sector detection
- HDD sleeping function
- HDD property: redundancy, read-only, read/write (R/V)
• HDD group management
• HDD quota management; different capacity can be assigned to different channels
- Hot-swappable HDD supports RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 5, RAID 6, and RAID 10 storage schemes, and can be enabled and disabled on your demand. 16 arrays can be configured (DS-90xxH>I-K8 only)
Recording,
• Holiday recording schedule configuration
• Cycle and non-cycle recording modes
• ×normal and event video encoding parameters
- + multiple recording types: manual, continuous, alarm, motion, motion | alarm, motion & alarm, and event
• Supports ≤OS triggered recording
- Eight recording time periods with separated recording types
• Supports Channel-+ackup
- Exports data to a >SB or eSA=A device
- Exports video clips when playback
• Video and Log, Video and ≤layer, and ≤layer are selectable to export for backup
• +anagement and maintenance of backup devices
4larms and Exceptions
- Configurable arming time of alarm input/output
- Alarms for video loss, motion detection, video tampe ring, illegal login, network disconnected, I≤confliction, record/capture exception, HDD error, and HDD full, etc.
- Alarm triggers full screen monitoring, audio alarm, notifying surveillance center, sending email and alarm output
• One-key disarms the linkage actions of the alarm input
- ≤ = < linking for the VCA alarm
• VCA detection alarm is supported
• Supports ≤OS triggered alarm
• Supports coaxial alarm (requires camera with alarm I/O)
- System will automatically reboot when a problem is detected in an attempt to restore normal functionality
Other Local "unctions
• +anual and automatic video quality diagnostics
- Operable by mouse and remote control
- =hree-level user management; admin user can create m any operating account and define their operating permission, which includes the permission to access any channel
• Completeness of operation, alarm, exceptions and log writing and searching
• +anually triggering and clearing alarms
- Importing and exporting of configuration file of devices
- Getting cameras type information automatically
• >nlock pattern for device login for the admin
• Clear-text password available
- G>ID file can be exported for use in resetting the password
- + multiple connected analog cameras supporting =urboHD can be upgraded simultaneously via the DVR
Network "unctions
- Self-adaptive 100+ or 1000+ network interface
- 1 ≤ v6 is supported
- C ≤ / I ≤ protocol, ≤ ≤ ≤ oE , DHC ≤ D×S, DD×S, x = ≤ , SAD ≤ , S+= ≤ , ×FS, iSCSI, >≤ n ≤^TM , and H== ≤ S are supported
- Supports access by Hik-Connect. If you enable Hik-Connect, the device will remind you the Internet access risk and ask you to confirm the “=erms of Service” and “≤rivacy Statement” before enabling the service. You should create a verification code to connect to Hik-Connect.
- = C ≤, > D ≤ , and R = ≤ for unicast
• Auto/+anual port mapping by >≤ n≤^TM
- Remote search, playback, download, locking and unlocking the record files, and downloading files broken transfer resume
- Remote parameters setup; remote import/export of device parameters
- Remote viewing of the device status, system logs and alarm status
- Remote keyboard operation
- Remote HDD formatting and program upgrading
- Remote system restart and shutdown
• Supports upgrading via remote F=≤ server
• RS-485 transparent channel transmission
- Alarm and exception information can be sent to the remote host
- Remotely start/stop recording
- Remotely start/stop alarm output
- Remote ≤ = < control
• =wo-way audio and voice broadcasting
• Output bandwidth limit configurable
- Embedded Veb server
- If DHC≤ is enabled, you can enable D×S DHC≤ or disable it and edit the ≤referred D×S Server and Alternate D×S Server
'evvelopment Scalability
- SDK for Windows and Linux system
- Source code of application software for demo
• Development support and training for application system
Table of
≤roduct Key Features ....5
1 Introduction....15
1.1 Front ≤anel....15
1.2 IR Remote Control Operations....17
1.2.1 =roubleshooting Remote Control....19
1.3 >SB +ouse Operation....19
1.4 Input + method Description 20
1.5 Rear ≤anel 20
2 Getting Started....22
2.1 Starting >p and Shutting Down the DVR 22
2.1.1 Starting the DVR....22
2.1.2 Shutting Down/Logging Out/Rebooting the DVR 22
2.2 Activating the Device 23
2.3 >sing the >nlock ≤attern for Login 24
2.3.1 Configuring the >nlock ≤attern .....25
2.3.2 Logging in via >nlock ≤attern .....26
2.3.3 Login and Logout....27
2.3.3.1 >ser Login....27
2.3.4 Resetting Your ≤assword 28
2.3.5 Adding and Connecting I≤ Cameras....30
2.3.5.1 Activating an I≤ Camera....30
2.3.6 Adding an Online I≤ Camera 33
2.3.7 Editing the Connected I≤ Camera 37
2.3.8 Configuring Signal Input Channel....39
2.3.9 Configuring 5 +≤ Long Distance =transmission....40
3 Live View....41
3.1 Introduction 41
3.2 Live View Icons....41
3.3 Live View +ode Operations....42
3.3.1 >sing the +ouse in Live View....43
3.3.2 Switching +ain/Aux Output 43
3.3.3 Quick Setting =oulbar in Live View +ode 44
3.4 Channel-sing >SB Flash Drives, >SB HDDs....103
5.14.2 Backup by Event Search....105
5.14.3 Back >p Video Clips....106
5.15 +anaging Backup Devices 107
6 Alarm Settings....108
6.1 Setting +otion Detection....108
6.2 Setting Sensor Alarms....110
6.2.1 Detecting Video Loss....112
6.2.2 Detecting Video =ampering 113
6.3 Setting All-Day Video Quality Diagnostics 115
6.3 Setting All-Day Video Quality Diagnostics 115
6.4 Handling Exceptions....116
7 Setting Alarm Response Actions....118
8 ≤OS Configuration....121
8.1 Configuring ≤OS Settings....121
8.2 Configuring Overlay Channel 125
8.3 Configuring ≤OS Alarm....126
9 VCA Alarm 128
9.1 Face Detection 128
9.2 Vehicle Detection....130
9.3 Line Crossing Detection....131
9.4 Intrusion Detection....133
9.5 Region Entrance Detection 134
9.6 Region Exiting Detection....135
9.7 Loitering Detection 136
9.8 ≤eople Gathering Detection....136
9.9 Fast +oving Detection....136
9.10 ≤arking Detection....136
9.11 >nattended Baggage Detection 137
9.12 Object Removal Detection....137
9.13 Audio Exception Detection 137
9.14 Defocus Detection....138
9.15 Sudden Scene Change....139
9.16 ≤IR Alarm....139
10 VCA Search....140
10.1 Behavior Search 140
10.2 ≤late Search....141
10.3 ≤eople Counting....142
10.4 Heat +ap....143
11 ×network Settings....144
11.1 Configuring General Settings 144
11.2 Configuring Advanced Settings....146
11.2.1 Configuring ≤≤≤oE Settings....146
11.2.2 Configuring Hik-Connect....147
11.2.3 Configuring DD×S....149
11.2.4 Configuring x=≤ Server 150
11.2.5 Configuring ×A=....151
11.2.6 Configuring +ore Settings....153
11.2.7 Configuring H==≤S ≤ort....154
11.2.8 Configuring E-+ail....156
11.2.9 Checking ×etwork =raffic....158
11.3 Configuring × network Detection ..... 159
11.3.1 =esting × network Delay and ≤acket Loss 159
11.3.2 Exporting × network ≤acket ...... 159
11.3.3 Checking ×network Status....160
11.3.4 Checking x network Statistics....161
12 RAID....162
12.1 Configuring Array 162
12.1.1 Enable RAID....163
12.1.2 One-=ouch Configuration 163
12.1.3 +anually Creating Array....165
12.1.4 Rebuilding Array....167
12.1.5 Automatically Rebuilding Array 168
12.1.6 +anually Rebuilding Array....169
12.1.7 Deleting Array 170
13 Checking and Editing Firmware 171
14 HDD +anagement 172
14.1 Initializing HDDs....172
14.2 +anaging ×etwork HDD 174
14.3 +anaging HDD Group....176
14.3.1 Setting HDD Groups 176
14.4 Setting HDD ≤property....178
14.5 Configuring Quota +ode 179
14.6 Configuring Cloud Storage 181
14.7 Configuring Disk Clone....183
14.8 Checking HDD Status....185
14.9 Checking S.+A.R.= Information....186
14.10 Detecting Bad Sectors 186
14.11 Configuring HDD Error Alarms 187
15 Camera Settings....188
15.1 Configuring OSD Settings....188
15.2 Configuring ≤rivacy +ask....190
15.3 Configuring Video ≤parameters....190
15.3.1 Configuring Image Settings....190
15.3.2 Configuring Camera ≤ parameters Settings....191
16 DVR +anagement and +aintenance....193
16.1 Viewing System Information....193
16.2 Searching Log Files....193
16.3 Importing/Exporting I≤ Camera Info....196
16.4 Importing/Exporting Configuration Files....196
16.5 >pgrading System ....197
16.5.1 >pgrading by Local Backup Device 197
16.5.2 >pgrading by F=≤....197
16.6 >pgrading Camera....198
16.7 Restoring Default Settings....199
17 Other 200
17.1 Configuring General Settings 200
17.2 Configuring RS-232 Serial ≤ort 201
17.3 Configuring DS= Settings....202
17.4 Configuring +ore Settings 202
17.5 +anaging >ser Accounts 205
17.5.1 Adding a >ser....205
17.5.2 Deleting a >ser....208
17.5.3 Editing a >ser 209
18 Appendix 212
18.1 Specifications 212
18.1.1 DS-73xxH>I-K4 212
18.1.2 DS-90xxH>I-K8 213
18.1.3 DS-73xxHQI-K4 214
18.2 Glossary....215
18.3 =roubleshooting....216
18.4 List of Compatible Hikvision I≤ Cameras....220
18.5 List of Compatible = hird-≤arty I ≤ Cameras ......220
NOTE/ Figures in this manual are for illustration only; your screens may differ.
1 Introduction
1.1 Front ≤anel

text_image
Hikvision
7
1
2
4
8
3
6
5
Figure 1, DS-73xxH>I-K4, DS-73xxHQI-K4 Front ≤anel
=able 1-1 DS-73xxH>I-K4, DS-73xxHQI-K4 Front ≤anel Description
x0. xame Function Description 1 ≤OVER =urns green when DVR is powered up READY =urnsgreen, indicating that the DVR is functioning properly S=A=>S =urns green when device is controlled by an IR remote =urns red when controlled by a keyboard and purple when IR remote and keyboard is used at the same time ALAR+ =urns red when a sensor alarm is detected HDD Flickers red when data is being read from or written to HDD =x/Rx Flickers green when network connection is functioning properly 2 DVD-R/V Slot for DVD-R/V 3 Composite Keys SHIF= Switches between the numeric or letter input and functions of the composite keys. (Input letter or numbers when the light is out; Realize functions when the light is red.) 1/+Ex> Enters numeral "1"Accessesthe main menu interface 2/ABC/F1 Enters numeral "2" Enters letters "ABC" =he F1 button when used in a list field will select all items in the list =urns on/off ≤=< light in ≤=< Control mode, and use it to zoom out the image Switches between main and spot video output in live view or playback mode. 3/DEF/F2 Enters numeral "3" Enters letters "DEF" >ses the F2 button is used to change the tab pages <ooms in the image in ≤=< control mode 4/GHI/ESC Enters numeral "4" Enters letters "GHI" Exits and back to the previous menu 5/JKL/EDI= Enters numeral "5" Enters letters "JKL" Deletescharacters before cursor Check the checkbox and select the Ox/OFF switch Starts/stops record clipping in playback 6/+×O/≤LAY Enters numeral "6" Enters letters "+×O" Accesses to playback interface in ≤slayback mode 7/≤QRS/REC Enters numeral "7" Enters letters "≤QRS" Accesses to manual record interface+ anually enables/disables record 8/=>V/≤=< Enters numeral "8" Enters letters "=>V" Accesses ≤=< control interface 9/√XY</≤REV Enters numeral "9" Enters letters "√XY<" +ulti-channel display in live view 0/A Enters numeral "0" ×0. ×ame Function Description Shifts the input methods in the editing text field. (>pper and lowercase, alphabet, symbols or numeric input). 4 DIREC=IO× ×avigates between different fields and items in menus >ses the >p and Down button s to speed up and slow down the playing of video files in ≤layback mode.=he Left and Right button will select the next and previous record files. Cycles through channels in Live View mode. Controlsthe movement of the ≤=< camera in ≤=< control mode Ex=ER Confirms selection in any of the menu modes Checks the checkbox ≤lays or pauses the playing of video files in ≤layback mode Advances the video by a single frame in single-frame ≤layback mode Stops/starts auto switch in Auto-switch mode 5 ≤OVER ≤ower on/off switch 6 JOG SH>=LE Control Moves the active selection up and down in a menu Cycles through different channels in live view mode Jumps 30s forward/backward in video files in the playback mode Controlsthe movement of the ≤=< camera in ≤=< control mode Moves the active selection up and down in a menu 7 >SB Interface >niversal Serial Bus (>SB) ports for additional devices such as >SB mous e and >SB Hard Disk Drive (HDD) 8 IR Receiver Receiver for IR remote control

text_image
1
HIKVISION
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
HITKVISION
100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100
DIN
SOT
AVTS
RLOOMA
FOCS+
INT
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
Figure 2, DS-90xxH>I-K8 Front ≤anel
=able 1-2 DS-90xxH>I-K8 Front ≤anel Description
×0. ×ame Function Description 1 ALARM Red when a sensor alarm is detected READY Blue, indicating that the DVR is functioning properly S=A=>S Blue when device is controlled by an IR remote Red when controlled by a keyboard and purple when IR remote and keyboard is used at the same time HDD Flickers red when data is being read from or written to HDD MODEM Flickers blue when network connection is functioning properly =x/Rx Blue when the device is in armed status; at this time, an alarm is enabled when an event is detected. G>ARD =urns off when the device is unarmed. =he arm/disarm status can be changed by pressing and holding on the ESC button for more than 3 seconds in live view mode. Red when a sensor alarm is detected 2 IR Receiver Receiver for IR remote 3 Front ≤anel Lock Lock or unlock the panel by the key 4 DVD-R/V Slot for DVD-R/V 5 Alphanumeric Buttons Switches to the corresponding channel in live view or ≤=< control mode Inputs numbers and characters in edit mode Switches between different channels in playback mode Blue when the corresponding channel is recording; turns red when the channel is in network transmission status; turns pink when the channel is recording and transmitting. 6 >SB Interfaces >niversal Serial Bus ports for additional devices such as >S B mouse and >SB Hard Disk Drive (HDD) 7 ESC Returns to the previous menu ≤resses for arming/disarming the device in live view mode REC/SHO= Enters the Manual Record settings menu ≤resses this button followed by a numeric button to call a ≤=< preset in ≤=< control settings =urns audio on/off in the playback mode ≤LAY/A>=0 Enters the playback mode Automatically scans in the ≤=< control menu <OOM+ No. Name Function Description A/FOC>S+ Adjusts focus in the ≤=< Control menu Switches between input methods (upper and lower case alphabet, symbols and numeric input). EDI=/IRIS+ Edits text fields. when editing text fields, it also deletes the ch aracter in front of the cursor Checks the checkbox in the checkbox fields Adjusts the iris of the camera in ≤=< control mode Generates video clips for backup in playback mode Enters/exits the folder of >SB device and eSA=A HDD MAIN/S≤O=/<OOM- Switches between main and spot output <ooms out the image in ≤=< control mode F1/LIGH= Selects all items on the list when used in a list field =urns on/off ≤=< light (if applicable) in ≤=< control mode Switches between play and reverse play in playback mode F2/A>X Cycles through tab pages Switches between channels in synchronous playback mode MEN>/VI≤ER Returns to the Main menu (after successful login) ≤resses and holds the button for five seconds to turn off audible key beep Starts wiper (if applicable) in ≤=< control mode Shows/hides the control interface in playback mode ≤REV/FOC>S- Switches between single screen and multi-screen mode Adjusts the focus in conjunction with the A/FOC>S+ button in ≤=< control mode ≤=</IRIS- Enters the ≤=< Control mode Adjusts the iris of the ≤=< camera in ≤=< control mode 8 DIREC=ION Navigates between different fields and items in menus >ses the >p and Down buttons to speed up and slow down the playing of video files in ≤slayback mode. =he Left and Right button will select the next and previous record files. Cycles through channels in Live View mode Controls the movement of the ≤=< camera in ≤=< control mode EN=ER Confirms selection in any of the menu modes. Checks the checkbox ≤lays or pauses the playing of video files in ≤slayback mode Advances the video by a single frame in single-frame ≤slayback mode Stops/starts auto switch in Auto-switch mode 9 JOG SH>=LE Control Moves the active selection up and down in a menu Cycles through different channels in live view mode Jumps 30s forward/backward in video files in the playback mode Controls the movement of the ≤=< camera in ≤=< control mode 10 ≤OVER ON/OFF ≤ower on/off switch
1.2 IR Remote Control Operations
=he DVR may also be controlled with the included IR remote control.

NOTE
If your system is secured with a password pattern, press ESC on the remote to display the password input window and input the password by using a keyboard.

NOTE
Batteries (2 × AAA) must be installed before operation.

text_image
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
ABC
JKI
TUV
MNO
MNO
ABC
JKI
TUV
MNO
ABC
JKI
TUV
MNO
ABC
JKI
TUV
MNO
ABC
JKI
TUV
MNO
ABC
JKI
TUV
MNO
ABC
JKI
TUV
MNO
ABC
JKI
TUV
MNO
ABC
JKI
TUV
MNO
ABC
JKI
TUV
MNO
ABC
JKI
TUV
Figure 3, Remote Control
=he keys on the remote control resemble the ones found on the front panel. See =able 1-3.
=able 1-3 Description of the IR Remote Control Buttons
×o. ×ame Description 1 ≤OVER ≤ower on/off the device. ≤ower on/off the device by pressing and holding the button for 5 seconds. 2 ME×> Button ≤ress the button to return to the main menu (after successful login). ≤ress and hold the button for 5 seconds will turn off audible key beep. In ≤=< Control mode, the ME×> button will start wiper (if applicable). In ≤slayback mode, it is used to show/hide the control interface. 3 REC Button Enter the Manual Record setting menu. In ≤=< control settings, press the button and then you can call a ≤=< preset by pressing ×umeric button. It is also used to turn audio on/off in the ≤slayback mode. 4 DIREC=IO× Button ×avgiate between different fields and items in menus. In the ≤slayback mode, the >p and Down button is used to speed up and slow down recorded video. =he Left and Right button will select the next and previous record files. In Live View mode, these buttons can be used to cycle through channels. In ≤=< control mode, it can control the movement of the ≤=< camera. Ex=ER Button Confirm selection in any of the menu modes. It can also be used to tick checkbox fields. In ≤slayback mode, it can be used to play or pause the video. In single-frame ≤slayback mode, pressing the button will advance the video by a single frame. 5 ≤=< Button In Auto-switch mode, it can be used to stop /start auto switch. 6 DEV Enables/Disables Remote Control. 7 Alphanumeric Buttons Switch to the corresponding channel in Live view or ≤=< Control mode. Input numbers and characters in Edit mode. Switch between different channels in the ≤slayback mode. 8 ESC Button Back to the previous menu. ≤ress for Arming/disarming the device in Live View mode. 9 ≤LAY Button =he button is used to enter the All-day ≤slayback mode. It is also used to auto scan in the ≤=< Control menu. 10 ≤REV Button Switch between single screen and multi-screen mode. In ≤=< Control mode, it is used to adjust the focus in conjunction with the A/FOC>S+ button.
1.2.1 = roubleshooting Remote Control

NOTE
+ake sure batteries have been installed properly. Also, note that the remote control must be aimed at the IR receiver on the ×VR front panel.
If there is no response after pressing any button on the remote, follow the procedure below to troubleshoot.
1. Go to M enu > Configuration > General > More Settings by operating the front control panel or the mouse.
2. Check and remember the DVR ×o. =he default DVR ×o. is 255. =his number valid for all IR remote controls.
3. ≤ress DEV on the remote control.
4. Enter the DVR ×o. in Step 2.
5. ≤ress ENTER on the remote.
If the front panel Status indicator turns blue, the remote control is operating properly. If the Status indicator does not turn blue and there is no response, check the following:
- Batteries are installed correctly and the polarities are not reversed.
- Batteries are fresh and not out of charge.
• IR receiver is not obstructed.
If the remote still does not function, change the remote and try again, or contact the device provider.
1.3 >SB +ouse Operation
A regular 3-button (Left/Right/Scroll-wheel) >SB mouse can also be used with this DVR.
1. ≤lug mouse into a >SB interface on the DVR. =he mouse should automatically be detected. If not, the mouse might not be compatible. Refer to your mouse provider.
=able 1-4 Description of the +ouse Control
xame Action Description Left-Click Single-Click Live view: Select channel and show the quick set menu.+enu: Select and enter Double-Click Live view: Switch between single-screen and multi-screen. Drag ≤=< control: Wheeling.≤rivacy mask and motion detection: Select target area.Digital zoom-in: Drag and select target area.Live view: Drag channel/time bar. Right-Click Single-Click Live view: Show menu.+enu: Exit current menu to upper level menu. Scroll-vheel Scrolling up Live view: ≤previous screen.+enu: ≤previous item. Scrolling down Live view: ×ext screen.+enu: ×ext item.
1.4 Input + method Description

text_image
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0
q w e r t y u i o p
a s d f g h j k l
↑ z x c v b n m ←x
123/..
Figure 4, Soft Keyboard
Description of the buttons on the soft keyboard:
=able 1-5 Description of the Soft Keyboard Icons
Icon Description Icon Description 0 ... 9 ×umber A ... Z English letter Lowercase/>ppercase Backspace 123/.. ABC Switch the keyboard Space ≤ositioning the cursor Enter #+= Symbols Reserved
1.5 Rear ≤anel

NOTE
=he rear panel varies by model. Refer to the actual product. =he following figures are for reference only.

text_image
AUDIO IN
AUDIO OUT
LINE IN
1 2 3 7 13
15 14
eSATA
VIDEO IN
Video Out
HDMI1
HDMI2
VGA
LAN2
RS-232
LAN1
RS-485 KR ALABIN OUT
ALABIN
1 4 2 5 8 9 12 11
Figure 5, DS-73xxH>I-K4 Rear ≤anel

text_image
AUDIO IN
AUDIO OUT
LINE IN
1 2 3 7 13
15 14
eSATA
1 2 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
VIDEO IN
Video Out
R5-232
HDMI2
VGA
LAN
RS-480
RS-A/ANIN OUT
AUDIO IN
1 4 2 5 8 9 12 11
Figure 6, DS-73xxHQI-K4 Rear ≤anel

text_image
3
7 13 6 15 14 16
VGA
CVBS LINE IN
LOOP OUT
AUDIO OUT
eSATA
RS-232 LAN2
LAN1 ALAMIN OUT
1 4 2 5 8 9 12
VIDEO OUT
HDMI2
HDMI1 VGA LAN1
AUDIO IN
Figure 7, DS-90xxH>I-K8 Rear ≤anel
Table 1-6 Description of DS-73xxH>I-K4, DS-73xxHQI-K4, and DS90xxH>I-K8 Rear ≤anel
No. Item Description 1 VIDEO IN BNC interface for TurboHD and analog video input. 2 VIDEO O>T BNC connector for video output. 3 A>DIO IN/LOO≤ O>T (for DS-90xxH>I-K8) RCA connector 4 >SB ≤ort >niversal Serial Bus (>SB) port for additional devices. 5 HDMI1/VGF Simultaneous HDMI1/VGA output. Display local video output and menu. 6 HDMI2 HDMI2 video output connector (DS-73xxH>I-K4 and DS-90xxH>I-K8) 7 A>DIO O>T RCA connector 8 Network Interface Connector for network (DS-73xxH>I-K4 and DS-90xxH>I-K8 = x2, DS-73xxH>I-K4 = x1) 9 RS -485 and Alarm Interface Connector for RS-485 devices. T+ and T- pins connect toR+ and R - pins of ≤T D+, D- pin connects to Ta, Tb pin of controller. For cascading devices, the first DVR's D+, D- pin should be connected with the D+, D- pin of the next DVR. Connector for alarm input Connector for alarm output 10 ≤ower Supply 100 to240 VAC power supply 11 ≤ower Switch Switch for turning on/off the device 12 GND Ground 13 LINE IN BNC connector for audio input 14 eSATA Connects external SATA HDD, CD/DVC-RV 15 RS-232 Interface Connector for RS-232 devices 16 ALARM O>T Connector for alarm output 17 A>DIO IN (for DS-90xxH>I-K8) RCA connector
2 Getting Started
2.1 Starting Up and Shutting Down the DVR
Purpose
≤roper startup and shutdown procedures are crucial to expanding the life of the DVR.
+efore You Start
Check that the voltage of the power supply is the same with the DVR's requirement, and the ground connection is working properly.
2.1.1 Starting the DVR
Check that the power supply is plugged into an electrical outlet. It is HIGHLY recommended that an Uninterruptible ≤ ower Supply (U ≤ S) be used in conjunction with the device.
Turn on the power switch on the rear panel, and the ≤ lower indicator LED should turn on indicating that the unit begins to start up.
After startup, the ≤ower indicator LED remains on.
2.1.2 Shutting Down/Logging Out/Rebooting the DVR
1. Go to Menu > Maintenance.

text_image
System Maintenance
System Logs
Import/Export
Upgrade
Default
Network Detect
HDD Detect
Start Time
09-23-2017
00:00:30
End Time
09-23-2017
23:59:59
Major Type
Shutdown
Miner Type
Alarm Input
Alarm Output
Motion Detect
Motion Detect
Video Tamper
Video Tamper
Kosovo Started
POS Stopped
Video Quality Diagnostics Alarm Started
Logout
Shutdown
Reboot
Cancel
Export All
Search
Figure 8, Shutdown Menu
2. Click Ⓞ (lower left corner of screen) to display the Shutdown window.
3. Click one of the following:
\- Logout – Logs the current user out of the system.
- Shutdown – Shuts system down.
- Reboot – Shuts system down and reboots.
-
text_image
Attention
? Shut down the system?
Yes No
Figure 9, Shutdown ≤rompt
2.2 Activating the Device
Purpose
For the first-time access, you need to activate the device by setting an admin password. ×o operation is allowed before activation. You can also activate the device via Veb Browser, SAD≤, or Client Software.
1. Input the same password in the
text_image
Activation
User Name
Create New Password
Confirm New Password
admin
Hikvision1
Strong
Valid password range [8-16]. You can use a combination of numbers,
lowercase, uppercase and special character for your password with at
least two kinds of them contained.
OK Cancel
Figure 10, Settings Admin ≤assword

WARNING
STRON" P4SSWOR' RENOTE
Clear text password is supported. Click 📄 to see the clear text of the password. Click the icon again and the password again becomes invisible.
3. After the device is activated, the Attention box pops up as below.

text_image
Attention
The device is activated. Properly keep your password. Export the GUID file for password resetting?
Yes No
Figure 11, Attention Window
4. (Optional) Click Yes to export the G>ID. =he Reset ≤assword interface pops up. Click Export to export the G>ID to the >SB flash drive for password resetting.

text_image
Reset Password
Device Name
USB Flash Disk 1-1
Refresh
Name Size Type Edit Date
Folder 11-18-2015 11:20:43
GUID_606524190_20161118112048.bin 128B File 11-18-2016 11:20:48
Free Space 7170.54MB
New Folder Export Back
Figure 12, Export G>ID
5. After exporting the G>ID, the Attention box pops up as below. Click Yes to duplicate the password or No to cancel it.

text_image
Attention
Duplicate the password to IP cameras
that are connected with default protocol.
Yes No
Figure 13, Duplicate the ≤assword
2.3 >sing the >nlock ≤attern for Login
Purpose
An admin can configure an unlock pattern for device login.
2.3.1 Configuring the >nlock ≤attern
After the device is activated, enter the following interface to configure the device unlock pattern.

text_image
Set Unlock Pattern
Draw the unlock pattern first.
Figure 14, Set >nlock ≤attern
1. >se the mouse to draw a pattern among the nine dots on the screen. Release the mouse when the pattern is done.

flowchart
graph TD
A["Start"] --> B{Decision}
B -->|Yes| C["OK"]
B -->|No| D["End"]
C --> E["Action"]
D --> F["Action"]
Figure 15, Draw the ≤attern
i NOTE
Connect at least four dots to draw the pattern.
Each dot can be connected only once.
2. Draw the same pattern again to confirm it. When the two patterns match, the pattern is configured successfully.

text_image
Set Unlock Pattern
Draw pattern again to confirm.
Figure 16, Confirm the ≤attern
If the two patterns are different, you must set the pattern again.

text_image
Set Unlock Pattern
The two patterns are different. Try
again.
Figure 17, Reset the ≤attern
2.3.2 Logging in via >nlock ≤attern

NOTE
Only the admin user has the permission to unlock the device.
Configure the pattern first before unlocking.
1. Right-click the mouse on the screen and select the menu to enter the interface.

text_image
Unlock
admin
Draw the unlock pattern first.
Forget My P...
Switch User
Figure 18, Draw the >nlock ≤attern
2. Draw the pre-defined pattern to unlock to enter the menu operation.
i NOTE
You can right click the mouse to log in via the normal mode.
If you have forgotten your pattern, you can select the "orget My Pattern or Switch User option to enter the normal login dialog box.
when the pattern you draw is different from the pattern you have configured, try again.
If you draw the wrong pattern seven times, the account will lock for one minute.

text_image
Login
User Name admin
Password
Forget Password OK Cancel
Figure 19, ×normal Login Dialog Box
2.3.3 Login and Logout
2.3.3.1 >ser Login
Purpose
You must log in to the device before operating the menu and other functions.
1. Select the User Name in the drop-down list.

text_image
Login
User Name admin
Password
Forget Password OK Cancel
Figure 20, Login Interface
2. Input the Password.
3. Click OK to log in.

NOTE
In the Login interface, for the admin user, if you have entered the wrong password seven times, the account will be locked for 60 seconds. For operators, if you have entered the wrong password for five times, the account will be locked for 60 seconds.

text_image
Attention
Incorrect password. You still have 6 chances.
Please try again.
OK
Figure 21, >ser Account ≤rotection for the Admin

text_image
Attention
Incorrect password. You still have 4 chances.
Please try again.
OK
Figure 22, >ser Account ≤rotection for the Operator
2.3.4 Resetting Your ≤assword
Purpose
If you forget the admin password, you can reset the password by importing the G>ID file, which was exported and saved in the local >SB flash drive after you activated the device.
1. On the user login interface, click "orget Password to enter the Import G>ID interface.

text_image
Reset Password
Device Name USB Flash Disk 1-1 Refresh
Name Size Type Edit Date Delete Play
4.bmp 6750.06KB File 09-02-2016 11:52:28
5.bmp 6750.06KB File 09-02-2016 11:52:32
6.bmp 6750.06KB File 09-02-2016 11:52:42
7.bmp 6750.06KB File 09-02-2016 11:52:10
8.bmp 6750.06KB File 09-02-2016 11:52:16
9.bmp 6750.06KB File 09-02-2016 11:52:24
GUID_583574624_20160... 12GB File 09-09-2016 14:10:37
Free Space 14.26GB
New Folder Import Back
Figure 23, Import G>ID
2. Select the G>ID file from the >SB flash drive and click Import to pop up the Reset ≤assword interface.

text_image
Reset Password
User Name admin
Create New Pass...
Confirm New Pass...
✓ Valid password range [8-16]. You can use a combination of numbers,
lowercase, uppercase and special character for your password with at
least two kinds of them contained.
OK Cancel
Figure 24, Reset ≤assword
3. Input the new password and confirm the password.
4. Click OK to save the new password. =hen the Attention box pops up as shown below.

text_image
Attention
The password is reset. The GUID file is ineffective. Export a new GUID file.
OK
Figure 25, G>ID File Imported
5. Click OK and the Attention box as below pops up to remind you to duplicate the password of the device to I ≤ cameras that are connected with default protocol. Click Yes to duplicate the password or No to cancel it.

text_image
Attention
Duplicate the password to IP cameras
that are connected with default protocol.
Yes No
Figure 26, Duplicate the ≤assword
i NOTE
=o retrieve a forgotten password, you must export the G>ID file first.
Once the password is reset, the G>ID file will be invalid. You can export a new G>ID file.
2.3.5 Adding and Connecting I≤ Cameras
2.3.5.1 Activating an I≤ Camera
Purpose
Before adding the camera, make sure the I≤ camera to be added is in active status.
1. Select Add IP Camera from the right-click menu in live view mode or go to Menu> Camera> IP Camera.
For the I≤ camera detected online in the same network segment, the Security status shows whether it is active or inactive.

text_image
Cameras Setup
IP Camera IP Camera Import/Export
Camera
Add/Delete Status Security IP Camera Add/ Edit Upgr Camera Name Protocol
D1 20E2103 HIKVISION
D2 Strong Pass... 192.168.10.4 2DE2103
Strong Pass... 192.168.10.109 4A25 HIKVISION
Active 192.168.10.2
Active 192.168.10.6
Active 192.168.10.7
Active 192.168.10.63
Active 192.168.10.110
HIKVISION
Hikvision
Hikvision
Hikvision
Hikvision
Refresh One-touch Activ Upgrade Delete One-touch Adding Custom Adding
Max. IP Camera Number: 2
Net Receive Mio Bandwidth: 120Mbps
Figure 27, I≤ Camera +anagement Interface
2. Click the inactive icon of the camera to enter the following interface to activate it. You can also select multiple cameras
from the list and click the One-touch 4activate to activate the cameras in batch.

text_image
Activation
User Name: admin
Password:
Valid password range [8-16]. You can
use a combination of numbers,
lowercase, uppercase and special
character for your password with at least
two kinds of them contained.
Confirm New Password
Ok Cancel
Figure 28, Activate the Camera
3. Set the password of the camera to activate it.
Use 4dmin Password: If you check this checkbox, the camera(s) will be configured with the admin password of the operating DVR.
text_image
Activation
User Name: admin
Password: •••••••••
RISKY
Valid password range [8-16]. You can
use a combination of numbers,
lowercase, uppercase and special
character for your password with at least
two kinds of them contained.
Confirm New Password: ••••••••••|
Ok Cancel
Figure 29, Level 0 (Inadequate) Strength ≤assword

text_image
Activation
User Name: admin
Password: **********
ATTENTION
Invalid Password
RISKY
No kind of them contained.
Confirm New Password: ********#
Ok Cancel
Figure 30, Invalid ≤assword +essay

text_image
Activation
User Name: admin
Password: •••••••••
WEAK
Valid password range [8-16]. You can
use a combination of numbers,
lowercase, uppercase and special
character for your password with at least
two kinds of them contained.
Confirm New Password: ••••••••••
Ok Cancel
Figure 31, Level 1 ≤ password Strength

text_image
Activation
User Name: admin
Password: *****
FAIR
Valid password range [8-16]. You can
use a combination of numbers,
lowercase, uppercase and special
character for your password with at least
two kinds of them contained.
Confirm New Password: *****
Ok Cancel
Figure 32, Level 2 ≤ password Strength

text_image
Activation
User Name: admin
Password: •••••••••
Strong
Valid password range [8-16]. You can
use a combination of numbers,
lowercase, uppercase and special
character for your password with at least
two kinds of them contained.
Confirm New Password: ••••••••••
Ok Cancel
Figure 33, Level 3 and Level 4 ≤ password Strength

WARNING
STRONG PASSWORD RECOMMENDED – ve highly recommend you create a strong password of your own choosing (using a minimum of eight characters, including at least three of the following categories: upper case letters, lower case letters, numbers, and special characters) in order to increase the security of your product. Ve also recommend that you reset your password regularly. Especially in high security systems, resetting the password monthly or weekly can better protect your product.
4. Click OK to finish activating the I≤ camera.=he camera security status will change to Active.
2.3.6 Adding an Online I≤ Camera
Purpose
Before you can get a live view or record of the video, add the network cameras to the device's connection list.
Before You Start
Ensure the network connection is valid and correct.
- OPTION 1
1. Select Add IP Camera from the right-click menu in live view mode or go to Menu > Camera > IP Camera.

text_image
Cameras Setup
Analog IP Camera IP Camera ImportExport
P Cameras List
Camera ID: 001200000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
IPC Status: Connected Connected and Support Preview Here Not Connected
Open
Week Px: 19.163.167
Camera 51
HKVISION DS-2CD4224F-ZS 8888
443716488
V5.3 Build 150...
Active 192 188 254...
HKVISION DS-2CD2143FW... 8888
498375488
V5.3 Build 150...
Active 192 188 254...
HKVISION DS-2CD4185F-Z 8888
510891983
V5.3 Build 150...
Active 192 188 254...
HKVISION DS-ZDE2185-DE... 8888
497555561
V5.3 Build 150...
Active 192 188 254...
HKVISION DS-2CD4333FW... 8888
506634726
V5.3 Build 151...
Active 192 188 254...
HKVISION DS-2CD4A25FW... 8888
579492463
V5.3 Build 169...
Active 192 188 254...
HKVISION DS-2CD4A5FE-ZD1 8888
511137153
V5.3 Build 169...
Active 192 188 254...
HKVISION DS-2CD4333FAD-1888
456332664
V5.3 Build 151...
Active 192 188 254...
HKVISION DS-2CD4113FW... 8888
496329537
V5.3 Build 159...
Active 192 188 254...
HKVISION DS-2CD4WMEFS... 8888
452755562
V5.3 Build 161...
Options
One-touch Active
Upgrade
Details
One-touch Adding
Custom Adding
Figure 34, I≤ Camera +anagement Interface
2. Online cameras with the same network segment will be detected and displayed in the camera list.
3. Select the I≤ camera from the list and click add the camera (with the same admin password of the DVR). Or you can click One-touch Adding to add all cameras (with the same admin password) from the list.
i NOTE
+ake sure the camera to add has already been activated by setting the admin password, and the admin password of the camera is the same as the DVR's.
4. (Optional) Check the Enable H.265 checkbox (for Initial Access) for the connected I≤ camera supporting H.265.=hen the I≤ camera will be encoded with H.265.
5. (For encoders with multiple channels only) check the Channel ≤ort checkbox in the pop-up window, as shown in the following figure, and click OK to add multiple channels.

text_image
Channel Port
✓ Channel Port ✓ 1 ✓ 2 ✓ 3 ✓ 4 ✓ 5
OK Cancel
Figure 35, Select + multiple Channels
• OPTION 2
1. On the I≤ Camera +anagement interface, click
text_image
Add IP Camera (Custom)
1 192.168.254.36 1 DS-2CD4... HIKVISION 8000
2 192.168.254.196 1 DS-2CD4... HIKVISION 8000
3 10.102.102.187 1 DS-2CD6... HIKVISION 8000
4 192.168.254.146 1 DS-2CD6... HIKVISION 8000
5 192.168.254.103 1 DS-2CD4... HIKVISION 8000
6 192.168.254.116 1 DS-2CD4... HIKVISION 8000
7 192.168.254.24 1 DS-2CD4 HIKVISION 8000
IP Camera Address 192.168.254.36
Protocol HIKVISION
Management Port 8000
User Name admin
Admin Password
Search Add Cancel
Figure 36, Custom Adding I≤ Camera Interface
2. You can edit the I ≤ address, protocol, management port, and other information of the I ≤ camera to be added.

NOTE
If the I≤ camera to add has not been activated, activate it from the I≤ camera list on the IP
text_image
IP Camera Management
Camera... Add/Delete Status Security IP Camera Address Edit Upgrade Camera No
D1 Strong Pass 10.16.1.250 IPdome
Active 10.16.2.109
Active 10.16.2.222
Refresh One-touch Activ Upgrade Delete One-touch Adding Custom Adding
Enable H.215 (For Initial Access)
Net Receive Idle Bandwidth: 318Mbps
Exit
Figure 37, Successfully Added I≤ Cameras
=able 1-7 Explanation of the Icons
Icon Explanation Icon Explanation 
EDIT (Pen): Press to edit basic IP camera parameters 
ADD (+): Press to add the detected IP camera 
DISCONNECTED (!): Camera is disconnected; click the icon to get camera's exception information 
DELETE (Trash Can): Press to delete the camera 
PLAY (Right Triangle): Play connected camera's live video 
ADVANCED (Gear): Press to go to advanced settings window. 
UPGRADE (Up Arrow): Upgrade the connected camera's firmware 
DASH: No advanced settings available for this camera 
REPAIR (?): Press to attempt to repair the connection Securitycolumn SECURITY: Shows camera status (active/inactive) or password strength (strong/medium/weak/risky)
4. (Optional) Check the E nable H.265 checkbox (For Initial Access) for the connected I≤ camera supporting H.265.=hen the I≤ camera will be encoded with H.265.
2.3.7 Editing the Connected I≤ Camera
Purpose
After adding the I≤ cameras, the basic information of the camera is listed on the interface, and you can configure the basic settings of the I≤ cameras.
1. Click ☑ to edit the parameters. You can edit the I≤ address, protocol, and other parameters.

text_image
Edit IP Camera
IP Camera No. D1
IP Camera Address 10.9.6.48
Protocol HIKVISION
Management Port 8000
Video Port 1
Camera User Name adults
Camera Password
OK Cancel
Figure 38, Edit I≤ Camera
text_image
Network Password
Advance Settings
IP Camera No. D2
IP Camera Address 10.102.102.2
Management Port 8000
Apply OK Cancel
Figure 39, ×network Configuration of the Camera
4. You can edit the camera network information and the password.

text_image
Advance Settings
Network Password
IP Camera No. D2
Current Password
New Password
Confirm
✓ Valid password range [8-16]. You can use a combination of numbers,
lowercase, uppercase and special character for your password with at
least two kinds of them contained.
Apply OK Cancel
Figure 40, ≤assword Configuration of the Camera
5. Click OK to save the settings and exit the interface.
2.3.8 Configuring Signal Input Channel

NOTE
This chapter is applicable only to DS-73xx/90xxHUI-K Series DVRs.
Purpose
You can configure the analog and I ≤ signal input types and enable 5 M ≤ long distance transmission.
1. Go to Menu > Camera > Signal Input Status.

text_image
Cameras Setup
Signal Input Status IP Camera IP Camera Import/Export
Camera HD/CVBS IP
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
A16
Max. IP Camera Number 2
5MP Long Distance Transmission
Apply
Figure 41, Signal Input Status
2. Check this checkbox to select different signal input types: HD/CVBS and I≤. If you select HD/CVBS, four types of analog signal inputs including TurboHD and CVBS can be connected randomly for the selected channel. If you select I≤, an I≤ camera can be connected to the selected channel.
3. Click 4pply to save the settings.
You can view the maximum number I≤ cameras in the Max. IP 2.3.9 Configuring 5 M≤ Long Distance Transmission

NOTE
This chapter is applicable only to HUI Series DVRs.
Purpose
You can configure 5 M≤ long distance transmission on the Signal Input Status interface.
1. Go to Menu > Camera > Signal Input Status.

text_image
Cameras Setup
Signal Import Status: IP Camera IP Camera Import/Export
Camera
A1
A2
A3
A4
Max. IP Camera Number
5MP Long Distance Transmission
HD/CVBC
Apply
Figure 42, Signal Input Status (for DS-73xx/90xxHUI Series)
2. Click enter the 5 M≤ Long Distance Transmission Settings interface.

text_image
Trigger Channel
Analog A1 A2 A3 A4
Apply OK Cancel
Figure 43, 5 +≤ Long Distance =transmission Settings
3. Check this checkbox to enable 5 +≤ Long Distance =transmission of the selected channel.
4. Click 4pply to save the settings.
3 Live View
3.1 Introduction
Live View shows the video image from each camera in real time. =he DVR will automatically enter Live View mode when powered on. It is also at the very top of the menu hierarchy, thus hitting ESC multiple times (depending on which menu you're on) will bring you back to Live View mode.
3.2 Live View Icons
In Live View mode, there are icons at the right top of the screen for each channel, showing the status of the record and alarms in the channel, so that you can know whether the channel is recorded, or if there are alarms as soon as possible.
=able 1-8 Description of Live View Icons
Icons Description 
Alarm (video loss, tampering, motion detection, VCA, or sensor alarm) [SWKS] Record (manual record, schedule record, motion detection, or alarm triggered record) [OXBS] Alarm & Record [Y8TS] Event/Exception (motion detection, sensor alarm, or exception information.
3.3 Live View Mode Operations
There are many functions provided in Live View mode. The functions are listed below.
• Single Screen: show only one screen on the monitor.
• Multi-screen: show multiple screens on the monitor simultaneously.
- Start Auto-switch: the screen is auto switched to the next one. You must set the dwell time for each screen on the configuration menu before enabling the auto-switch. Menu > Configuration > Live View > Dwell Time.
- Start Recording: normal record and motion detection record are supported.
• Output Mode: set the output mode to Standard, Bright, Gentle, or Vivid.
- Playback: play back the recorded videos for the current day.
- Aux/Main Monitor: the DVR checks the output interface connections to define the main and auxiliary output interfaces. When the aux output is enabled, the main output cannot perform any operations; you can perform some basic operations on the Live View mode for the Aux output.
There are two HDMI interfaces. HDMI1 and VGA interfaces share simultaneous output. The priority level for the main and aux output is HDMI2 > VGA/HDMI1. The CVBS output only serves as the aux output or Live View output.
Table 1-9 Priorities of Outputs
S.N. HDMI2 VGA/HDMI1 CVBS Main output Auxiliary output For Live View Output Only 1 √ √ √ or × HDMI2 VGA/HDMI1 CVBS 2 √ or × × √ or × HDMI2 CVBS VGA/HDMI1 3 × √ √ or × VGA/HDMI1 CVBS HDMI2
For other DVRs with CVBS output, the VGA/HDMI output is the main output, and the CVBS output is the aux output.
Table 1-10 Priorities of Outputs
S.N. HDMI VGA CVBS Main output Auxiliary output 1 or × or × or × VGA/HDMI CVBS

NOTE
√ means the interface is in use, × means the interface is out of use or the connection is invalid. HDMI, VGA, and CVBS can be used at the same time.
3.3.1 >sing the +ouse in Live View
Refer to =able 1-11 for the description of mouse operation in live view mode.
=able 1-11 +ouse Operation in Live View
×ame Description +enu Enter the main menu of the system by right clicking the mouse. Single Screen Switch to the single full screen by choosing channel number from the drop-down list. +ulti -Screen Adjust the screen layout by selecting from the drop-down list. ≤previous Screen Switch to the previous screen. ×ext Screen Switch to the next screen. Start/Stop Auto-Switch Enable/disable the auto-switch of the screens.
NOTE=he dwell time of the live view configuration must be set before using Start 4uto -Switch. Start Recording Start recording of all channels, Continuous Record, and +otion Detection Record are selectable from the drop-down list. Add I≤ Camera A shortcut to enter the I≤ camera management interface.(For HDVR series only) ≤layback Enter the playback interface and start playing back the video of the selected channel immediately ≤=< Control A shortcut to enter the ≤=< control interface of the selected camera. Output +ode Output +ode is configurable with Standard, Bright, Gentle and Vivid options. Aux +onitor Switch to the auxiliary output mode and the operation for the main output is disabled.
NOTEIf you enter Aux monitor mode and the Aux monitor is not connected, the mouse operation is disabled. You need to switch back to the +ain output with the F1 button on front panel or VOIP/MON button on IR remote control and then press the Enter button.

text_image
Common Menu
Menu
Single Screen
Multi-screen
Previous Screen
Next Screen
Start Auto-switch
Start Recording
Add IP Camera
Playback
PTZ Control
Output Mode
Figure 44, Right-click +enu
3.3.2 Switching +ain/Aux Output

NOTE
=he CVBS output only serves as the aux output or Live View output.
1. >se the mouse wheel to double-click on the HD+I1/VGA, or HD+I2, or HD+I/VGA output screen, and the following message box pops up.

text_image
Tip
Double-click the mouse again to
switch the auxiliary and main output?
Cancel
Figure 45, Switch Main and Aux Output
2. Use the mouse wheel to double-click on the screen ag ain to switch to the aux output, or click NOTE
You can select the Menu Output Mode under Menu > Configuration > General > More Settings to 4uto, HDMI1/VG4 and HDMI2 and then reboot the device to switch the main output.
3.3.3 Quick Setting Toolbar in Live View Mode
On the screen of each channel, there is a quick setting toolbar that appears when you click the screen.

text_image
Screenshot of a software toolbar with icons for video, audio, audio playback, and camera control functions
Figure 46, Quick Setting Toolbar
Refer to Table below for description of the Quick Setting Toolbar icons.
Table 1-12 Description of Quick Setting Toolbar Icons
Icons Description Icons Description Icons Description 
Start/Stop Manual Recording 
Instant Playback 
4udio On/Mute 
PTZ <ontrol [DW23] Digital Zoom [BXWW] Image Settings 

Face Detection [AQHW] Information [YKC0] [XSW4] Live View Strategy [WW06] Fisheye

Instant ≤ layback shows only the record in the last five minutes. If no record is found, it means there is no record during the last five minutes.

Digital Zoom zooms in the live image. You can zoom in the image to different proportions (1 to 16x) by moving the sliding bar. You can also scroll the mouse wheel to control the zoom in/out.

natural_image
Highway scene with multiple vehicles and residential buildings in the background (no visible text or symbols)
Figure 47, Digital
text_image
Image Settings
Time Segment 00:00-24:00
Mode Custom
146
255
255
OK
Figure 48, Image Settings

Enable Face Detection by clicking the icon. =he dialog pops up as shown in Figure 3-6. Click Yes and the full-screen live view of the channel is enabled. Click to exit from full-screen mode. You can configure face detection only when it is supported by the connected camera.

text_image
Attention
Enable face detection?
Yes No
Figure 49, Enable Face Detection

+ove the mouse onto the Information icon to show the real-time stream information, including the frame rate, bit rate, resolution, and stream type.

Figure 50, Information

NOTE
when an H.264 I≤ camera is connected, the stream type is displayed as H.264. when an I≤ camera supporting H.264+ is connected, the stream type is displayed as H.264+. when I≤ camera supporting H.265 is connected, the stream type is displayed as H.265. when I≤ camera supporting H.265+ is connected, the stream type is displayed as H.265+.

For analog cameras supporting VCA, click the icon to show the VCA information. =he configured or quadrilateral in the VCA configuration and target frame(s) will be shown on live view. Click the again to hide the VCA information.

text_image
12-13-2016 Tue 10:29:36
Camera 01
Figure 51, Enable VCA Information Overlay

NOTE
In Live View, only analog cameras support VCA information overlay.
Enable VCA function first before showing the VCA information.
=he VCA information is hidden by default. If the connected analog camera does not support VCA, the icon displays grey and cannot be operated.
For analog cameras, the VCA information includes line crossing detection and intrusion detection.
=he DVR supports VCA information overlay of only one channel. If you enable the function of one channel, the other channels will disable the function automatically.
Both single window and multi-window display modes support VCA information overlay.
Only the main output supports VCA information overlay. When switching to the aux output, the VCA information overlay of main output is disabled.
For analog cameras, if the camera number does not exceed the limit for line crossing detection and intrusion detection, the VCA information overlay can be enabled for all the analog cameras' enabled line crossing detection and intrusion detection. If the camera number exceeds the limit for line crossing detection, intrusion detection, and sudden scene change detection, only the cameras' enabled line crossing detection and intrusion detection support VCA information overlay. Disabling line crossing detection and intrusion detection remotely will not affect the VCA information overlay in the local live view.
3.4 Channel-Zero Encoding
Purpose
Channel-Zero Encoding provides a way to view many channels in real time from a Veb browser or CMS (Client Management System) software by decreasing the bandwidth requirement without affecting the image quality.
1. Go to Menu > Configuration > Live View > Channel-Zero Encoding.

text_image
System Configuration
General View Channel-Zero Encoding
Enable Channel-Zero Encoding
Frame Rate 12fps
Max. Bitrate Mode General
Max. Bitrate(Kbps) 1024
Apply
Figure 52, Live View Channel-Zero Encoding
2. Check the Enable Channel-Zero Encoding checkbox.
3. Configure the Frame Rate, Max. Bitrate Mode, and Max. Bitrate.
4. Click 4 pply to activate the settings.
5. After you set the Channel-Zero encoding, you can view 16 channels in one screen in the remote client or Veb browser.
3.5 Adjusting Live View Settings
Purpose
Live View settings can be customized. You can configure the output interface, dwell time for screen to be shown, mute or turn on the audio, the screen number for each channel, etc.
1. Go to Menu > System Configuration > Live View > General.

text_image
System Configuration
General View Channel Zero Encoding
Video Output Interface HDMI
Live View Mode 4*4
Dwell Time No Switch
Enable Audio Output ✓
Volume
Event Output HDMI
Full Screen Monitoring Dwell Time 5s
Apply
Figure 53, Live View General
2. The settings available in this menu include:
• Video Output Interface: Selects the output to configure the settings.
3. You can select VG4/HDMI1, HDMI2, Main 4. Set the camera order.
1) Click the View tab and select Video Output Interface from the drop-down list.

text_image
System Configuration
General View Channel Zero Encoding
Video Output Interface HDMI
Live View Mode 4 * 4
Dwell Time No Switch
Enable Audio Output
Volume
Event Output HDMI
Full Screen Monitoring Dwell Time 5s
Apply
Figure 54, Live View Camera Order
2) Click a window to select it, then double-click a camera to display in the camera list. Setting an 'X' means the window will not display any camera.
3) You can also click 📋 to start live view of all channels in order and click 📋 to stop live view of all channels. Click 📋 to go to the previous or next page.
4) Click 4pply.

NOTE
If the sum of the analog and I≤ channels exceeds 25, up to 32-window division mode is supported for the VGA/HDMI1 output.
3.6 Manual Video Quality Diagnostics
Purpose
The video quality of the analog channels can be diagnosed manually and you can view the diagnostic results from a list.
1. Go to Menu > Manual > Manual Video Quality Diagnostics.

text_image
Manual Video Quality Diagnostics
✓ Analog ✓ A1 ✓ A2 ✓ A3 ✓ A4 ✓ A5 ✓ A6 ✓ A7 ✓ A8
✓ A9 ✓ A10 ✓ A11 ✓ A12 ✓ A13 ✓ A14 ✓ A15 ✓ A16
Figure 55, Video Quality Diagnostics
2. Check the checkboxes to select the channels for diagnostics.
3. Click 'iagnose, and the results will be displayed on a list. You can view the video status and diagnostics time of the selected channels.

text_image
Manual Video Quality Diagnostics
Analog
A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8
A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16
Diagnostics Result
Camera No. Diagnostics Result Diagnostics Time
A1 Normal 25-04-2014 14:54:17
A2 Normal 25-04-2014 14:54:18
A9 Normal 25-04-2014 14:54:18
A3 Normal 25-04-2014 14:54:18
A10 Normal 25-04-2014 14:54:18
A4 Normal 25-04-2014 14:54:18
A5 Normal 25-04-2014 14:54:18
A11 Normal 25-04-2014 14:54:18
A6 Normal 25-04-2014 14:54:19
A12 Normal 25-04-2014 14:54:19
A7 Normal 25-04-2014 14:54:19
A8 Normal 25-04-2014 14:54:19
A13 Normal 25-04-2014 14:54:19
A14 Normal 25-04-2014 14:54:19
Diagnose Back
Figure 56, Diagnostics Result

NOTE
Connect the camera to the device for the video quality diagnostics.
Three exception types can be diagnosed: Blurred Image, Abnormal Brightness, and Color Cast.
4 ≤TZ Controls
4.1 Configuring ≤TZ Settings
Purpose
Follow the following procedure to set ≤TZ parameters. Configure ≤TZ parameters before you control the ≤TZ camera.
1. Go to Menu > Camera > ≤TZ.

text_image
Cameras Setup
Camera [A1] Camera 01
Preset
Set Clear Clear All Call
Patrol 1
Set Clear Clear All Call
Pattern 1
Start Stop Clear All
Linear Scan
Left Limit Right Limit
PTZ Parameter Enable Omnicast Control
Zoom -
Focus -
Iris -
Speed
PTZ
Figure 57, ≤=< Settings
2. Select the camera for ≤=< setting in the
text_image
PTZ Parameter Settings
Baud Rate 9600
Data Bit 8
Stop Bit 1
Parity None
Flow Ctrl None
PTZ Protocol UTC(Coaxitron)
Address 0
Address range: 0~255
Copy OK Cancel
Figure 58, ≤=< General
4. Select the parameters of the ≤=< camera from the drop-down list.

NOTE
All the parameters should be exactly the same as the ≤=< camera parameters.
For >=C cameras/domes connected, you can select the ≤=< protocol to >=C. +ake sure the protocol selected here is supported by the connected camera/dome.
when the UTC protocol is selected, all the other parameters such as baud rate, data bit, stop bit, parity, and flow control are not configurable.
5. (Optional) Click
text_image
Copy to
Analog
A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6
A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12
A13 A14 A15 A16
OK Cancel
Figure 59, Copy to Other Channels
6. Click OK to save the settings.
7. (Optional) Check the Enable Omnicast 4.2 Setting ≤TZ ≤ resets, ≤atrols, and ≤atterns
+efore You Start
Ensure that the presets, patrols, and patterns are supported by ≤TZ protocols.
4.2.1 Customizing ≤ resets
Purpose
Follow the steps below to set the preset location you want the ≤TZ camera to point to when an event occurs.
1. Go to Menu > Camera > ≤TZ.

text_image
Cameras Setup
Camera [A1] Camera 01
Preset
Set Clear Clear All Call
Petrol 1
Set Clear Clear All Call
Pattern 1
Start Stop Clear All
Linear Scan
Left Limit Right Limit
PTZ Parameter Enable Omnicast Control
Zoom -
Focus -
Iris -
Speed
PTZ
Figure 60, ≤=< Settings
2. >se the directional button to position the camera to the location you want to set the preset. =he zoom and focus operations can be recorded in the preset as well.
3. Enter the preset ×o. (1 to 255) in the preset text field, and click Set to link the location to the preset.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to save more presets.
5. Click 4.2.2 Calling ≤ resets
EU

=his product and - if applicable - the supplied accessories too are marked with "CE" and comply therefore with the applicable harmonized European standards listed under the E+C Directive 2014/30/E>, the LVD Directive 2014/35/E>, the RoHS Directive 2011/65/E>.

2012/19/E> (VEEE directive): ≤products marked with this symbol cannot be disposed of as unsorted municipal waste in the European >nion. For proper recycling, return this product to your local supplier upon the purchase of equivalent new equipment, or dispose of it at designated collection points. For more information see: www.recyclethis.info

2006/66/EC (battery directive): =his product contains a battery that cannot be disposed of as unsorted municipal waste in the European >nion. See the product documentation for specific battery information. =he battery is marked with this symbol, which may include lettering to indicate cadmium (Cd), lead ( ≤ b), or mercury (Hg). For proper recycling, return the battery to
your supplier or to a designated collection point. For more information see: www.recyclethis.info
Industry >3
=his device meets the CA× ICES-3 (A)/×+B-3(A) standards requirements.
4pplicable Models
This manual is applicable to the models listed in the following table.
Series Model DS-73xxHUI-K4 DS-7304HUI-K4DS-7308HUI-K4DS-7316HUI-K4 DS-73xxHQI-K4 DS-7308HQI-K4DS-7316HQI-K4DS-7332HQI-K4 DS-90xxHUI-K8 DS-9008HUI-K8DS-9016HUI-K8
Symbol
The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Symbol Description 
Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement important points of the main text. 
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if not avoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss, performance degradation, or unexpected results. 
Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk, which if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
Safety Instructions
- Proper configuration of all passwords and other security settings is the responsibility of the installer and/or end-user.
- In the use of the product, you must be in strict compliance with the electrical safety regulations of the nation and region. Please refer to technical specifications for detailed information.
- Input voltage should meet both the SELV (Safety Extra Low Voltage) and the Limited Power Source with 100 to 240 VAC, 12 VDC or 48 VDC according to the IEC60950-1 standard. Refer to technical specifications for detailed information.
- Do not connect several devices to one power adapter as adapter overload may cause over-heating or a fire hazard.
- Please make sure that the plug is firmly connected to the power socket.
- If smoke, odor or noise rise from the device, turn off the power at once and unplug the power cable, and then please contact the service center.
Preventive and
Before connecting and operating your device, please be advised of the following tips:
- Ensure unit is installed in a well-ventilated, dust-free environment.
- >nit is designed for indoor use only.
- Keep all liquids away from the device.
- Ensure environmental conditions meet factory specifications.
- Ensure unit is properly secured to a rack or shelf. Major shocks or jolts to the unit as a result of dropping it may cause damage to the sensitive electronics within the unit.
- >se the device in conjunction with an >≤ S if possible.
- ≤ower down the unit before connecting and disconnecting accessories and peripherals.
- A factory recommended HDD should be used for this device.
- Improper use or replacement of the battery may result in hazard of explosion. Replace with the same or equivalent type only. Dispose of used batteries according to the instructions provided by the battery manufacturer.
- Ensure to use the attached power adaptor only and not to change the adaptor randomly.
≤roduct Key Features
"eneral
- Connectable to =urboHD and analog cameras
- Supports >=C protocol for connecting camera over coa x
- Connectable to 1 ≤ cameras
\- =he analog signal inputs including =urboHD and CVBS can be automatically recognized without configuration
• Each channel supports dual-stream. And sub-stream supports up to vD1 resolution
• =he main stream of H>I Series supports up to 5 M≤ resolution of all the channels (H>I Series)
\- 5 M≤ long distance transmission can be enabled for the analog cameras (H>1 Series)
\- Independent configuration for each channel, including resolution, frame rate, bit rate, image quality, etc.
\- =he minimum frame rate for main stream and sub-stream is 1 fps
\- Encoding for both video stream and video & audio stream; audio and video synchronization during composite stream encoding
• Supports enabling H.265+/H.264+ to ensure high video quality with lowered bit rate
\- H.265+/H.265/H.264+/H.264 encoding for the main stream, and H.265/H.264 encoding for the sub-stream of analog cameras
\- Connectable to H.265 and H.264 I≤ cameras
- Defog level, night to day sensitivity, day to night sensitivity, IR light brightness, day/night mode, and vDR switch configurable for the connected analog cameras supporting these parameters
- 4 MP/5 MP signal switch for the supported analog cameras
• Vatermark technology
Local Monitoring
• HDMI output at up to 4K (3840 × 2160) resolution
- There are two HDMI interfaces of which the HDMI1 and VGA interfaces share simultaneous output. For HDMI1/VGA output, up to 1920 × 1080 resolution is supported. For HDMI2 output, up to 4K (3840 × 2160) resolution is supported
• 1/4/6/8/9/16/25/36 screen live view is supported, and the display sequence of screens is adjustable

NOTE
If the sum of the analog and IP channels exceeds 25, up to 32-window division mode is supported for the VGA/HDMI1 output
• Live view screen can be switched in group and manual switch and automatic cycle live view are also provided, the interval of automatic cycle can be adjusted
• CVBS output only serves as the aux output or live view output
- Quick setting menu is provided for live view
- The selected live view channel can be shielded
- VCA information overlay in live view for the supported analog cameras and in smart playback for the supported analog and IP cameras
- Motion detection, video-tampering detection, video e xception alarm, video loss alarm, and VCA alarm functions
• 1-ch analog camera supports people counting and heat map functions
- HUI Series supports line crossing detection and intrusion detection of all channels, and 2-ch sudden scene change detection.
• The enhanced VCA mode conflicts with the 2K/4K output and 4 MP/5 MP signal input (HUI Series)
- Privacy mask
- Several PTZ protocols (including Omnicast VMS of Genetec) supported; PTZ preset, patrol and pattern
- Zooming in/out by clicking the mouse and PTZ tracing by dragging mouse.
H" Management
• Each disk can have a maximum of 8 TB storage capacity
- 8 network disks (8 NAS disks, 8 IP SAN disks, or n N AS disks + m IP SAN disks (n+m ≤ 8)) can be connected
- Remaining recording time of the HDD can be viewed
• Supports cloud storage
• S.+.A.R.=. and bad sector detection
- HDD sleeping function
- HDD property: redundancy, read-only, read/write (R/V)
• HDD group management
• HDD quota management; different capacity can be assigned to different channels
- Hot-swappable HDD supports RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 5, RAID 6, and RAID 10 storage schemes, and can be enabled and disabled on your demand. 16 arrays can be configured (DS-90xxH>I-K8 only)
Recording,
• Holiday recording schedule configuration
• Cycle and non-cycle recording modes
• ×normal and event video encoding parameters
- + multiple recording types: manual, continuous, alarm, motion, motion | alarm, motion & alarm, and event
• Supports ≤OS triggered recording
- Eight recording time periods with separated recording types
• Supports Channel-+ackup
- Exports data to a >SB or eSA=A device
- Exports video clips when playback
• Video and Log, Video and ≤layer, and ≤layer are selectable to export for backup
• +anagement and maintenance of backup devices
4larms and Exceptions
- Configurable arming time of alarm input/output
- Alarms for video loss, motion detection, video tampe ring, illegal login, network disconnected, I≤confliction, record/capture exception, HDD error, and HDD full, etc.
- Alarm triggers full screen monitoring, audio alarm, notifying surveillance center, sending email and alarm output
• One-key disarms the linkage actions of the alarm input
- ≤ = < linking for the VCA alarm
• VCA detection alarm is supported
• Supports ≤OS triggered alarm
• Supports coaxial alarm (requires camera with alarm I/O)
- System will automatically reboot when a problem is detected in an attempt to restore normal functionality
Other Local "unctions
• +anual and automatic video quality diagnostics
- Operable by mouse and remote control
- =hree-level user management; admin user can create m any operating account and define their operating permission, which includes the permission to access any channel
• Completeness of operation, alarm, exceptions and log writing and searching
• +anually triggering and clearing alarms
- Importing and exporting of configuration file of devices
- Getting cameras type information automatically
• >nlock pattern for device login for the admin
• Clear-text password available
- G>ID file can be exported for use in resetting the password
- + multiple connected analog cameras supporting =urboHD can be upgraded simultaneously via the DVR
Network "unctions
- Self-adaptive 100+ or 1000+ network interface
- 1 ≤ v6 is supported
- C ≤ / I ≤ protocol, ≤ ≤ ≤ oE , DHC ≤ D×S, DD×S, x = ≤ , SAD ≤ , S+= ≤ , ×FS, iSCSI, >≤ n ≤^TM , and H== ≤ S are supported
- Supports access by Hik-Connect. If you enable Hik-Connect, the device will remind you the Internet access risk and ask you to confirm the “=erms of Service” and “≤rivacy Statement” before enabling the service. You should create a verification code to connect to Hik-Connect.
- = C ≤, > D ≤ , and R = ≤ for unicast
• Auto/+anual port mapping by >≤ n≤^TM
- Remote search, playback, download, locking and unlocking the record files, and downloading files broken transfer resume
- Remote parameters setup; remote import/export of device parameters
- Remote viewing of the device status, system logs and alarm status
- Remote keyboard operation
- Remote HDD formatting and program upgrading
- Remote system restart and shutdown
• Supports upgrading via remote F=≤ server
• RS-485 transparent channel transmission
- Alarm and exception information can be sent to the remote host
- Remotely start/stop recording
- Remotely start/stop alarm output
- Remote ≤ = < control
• =wo-way audio and voice broadcasting
• Output bandwidth limit configurable
- Embedded Veb server
- If DHC≤ is enabled, you can enable D×S DHC≤ or disable it and edit the ≤referred D×S Server and Alternate D×S Server
'evvelopment Scalability
- SDK for Windows and Linux system
- Source code of application software for demo
• Development support and training for application system
Table of
≤roduct Key Features ....5
1 Introduction....15
1.1 Front ≤anel....15
1.2 IR Remote Control Operations....17
1.2.1 =roubleshooting Remote Control....19
1.3 >SB +ouse Operation....19
1.4 Input + method Description 20
1.5 Rear ≤anel 20
2 Getting Started....22
2.1 Starting >p and Shutting Down the DVR 22
2.1.1 Starting the DVR....22
2.1.2 Shutting Down/Logging Out/Rebooting the DVR 22
2.2 Activating the Device 23
2.3 >sing the >nlock ≤attern for Login 24
2.3.1 Configuring the >nlock ≤attern .....25
2.3.2 Logging in via >nlock ≤attern .....26
2.3.3 Login and Logout....27
2.3.3.1 >ser Login....27
2.3.4 Resetting Your ≤assword 28
2.3.5 Adding and Connecting I≤ Cameras....30
2.3.5.1 Activating an I≤ Camera....30
2.3.6 Adding an Online I≤ Camera 33
2.3.7 Editing the Connected I≤ Camera 37
2.3.8 Configuring Signal Input Channel....39
2.3.9 Configuring 5 +≤ Long Distance =transmission....40
3 Live View....41
3.1 Introduction 41
3.2 Live View Icons....41
3.3 Live View +ode Operations....42
3.3.1 >sing the +ouse in Live View....43
3.3.2 Switching +ain/Aux Output 43
3.3.3 Quick Setting =oulbar in Live View +ode 44
3.4 Channel-sing >SB Flash Drives, >SB HDDs....103
5.14.2 Backup by Event Search....105
5.14.3 Back >p Video Clips....106
5.15 +anaging Backup Devices 107
6 Alarm Settings....108
6.1 Setting +otion Detection....108
6.2 Setting Sensor Alarms....110
6.2.1 Detecting Video Loss....112
6.2.2 Detecting Video =ampering 113
6.3 Setting All-Day Video Quality Diagnostics 115
6.3 Setting All-Day Video Quality Diagnostics 115
6.4 Handling Exceptions....116
7 Setting Alarm Response Actions....118
8 ≤OS Configuration....121
8.1 Configuring ≤OS Settings....121
8.2 Configuring Overlay Channel 125
8.3 Configuring ≤OS Alarm....126
9 VCA Alarm 128
9.1 Face Detection 128
9.2 Vehicle Detection....130
9.3 Line Crossing Detection....131
9.4 Intrusion Detection....133
9.5 Region Entrance Detection 134
9.6 Region Exiting Detection....135
9.7 Loitering Detection 136
9.8 ≤eople Gathering Detection....136
9.9 Fast +oving Detection....136
9.10 ≤arking Detection....136
9.11 >nattended Baggage Detection 137
9.12 Object Removal Detection....137
9.13 Audio Exception Detection 137
9.14 Defocus Detection....138
9.15 Sudden Scene Change....139
9.16 ≤IR Alarm....139
10 VCA Search....140
10.1 Behavior Search 140
10.2 ≤late Search....141
10.3 ≤eople Counting....142
10.4 Heat +ap....143
11 ×network Settings....144
11.1 Configuring General Settings 144
11.2 Configuring Advanced Settings....146
11.2.1 Configuring ≤≤≤oE Settings....146
11.2.2 Configuring Hik-Connect....147
11.2.3 Configuring DD×S....149
11.2.4 Configuring x=≤ Server 150
11.2.5 Configuring ×A=....151
11.2.6 Configuring +ore Settings....153
11.2.7 Configuring H==≤S ≤ort....154
11.2.8 Configuring E-+ail....156
11.2.9 Checking ×etwork =raffic....158
11.3 Configuring × network Detection ..... 159
11.3.1 =esting × network Delay and ≤acket Loss 159
11.3.2 Exporting × network ≤acket ...... 159
11.3.3 Checking ×network Status....160
11.3.4 Checking x network Statistics....161
12 RAID....162
12.1 Configuring Array 162
12.1.1 Enable RAID....163
12.1.2 One-=ouch Configuration 163
12.1.3 +anually Creating Array....165
12.1.4 Rebuilding Array....167
12.1.5 Automatically Rebuilding Array 168
12.1.6 +anually Rebuilding Array....169
12.1.7 Deleting Array 170
13 Checking and Editing Firmware 171
14 HDD +anagement 172
14.1 Initializing HDDs....172
14.2 +anaging ×etwork HDD 174
14.3 +anaging HDD Group....176
14.3.1 Setting HDD Groups 176
14.4 Setting HDD ≤property....178
14.5 Configuring Quota +ode 179
14.6 Configuring Cloud Storage 181
14.7 Configuring Disk Clone....183
14.8 Checking HDD Status....185
14.9 Checking S.+A.R.= Information....186
14.10 Detecting Bad Sectors 186
14.11 Configuring HDD Error Alarms 187
15 Camera Settings....188
15.1 Configuring OSD Settings....188
15.2 Configuring ≤rivacy +ask....190
15.3 Configuring Video ≤parameters....190
15.3.1 Configuring Image Settings....190
15.3.2 Configuring Camera ≤ parameters Settings....191
16 DVR +anagement and +aintenance....193
16.1 Viewing System Information....193
16.2 Searching Log Files....193
16.3 Importing/Exporting I≤ Camera Info....196
16.4 Importing/Exporting Configuration Files....196
16.5 >pgrading System ....197
16.5.1 >pgrading by Local Backup Device 197
16.5.2 >pgrading by F=≤....197
16.6 >pgrading Camera....198
16.7 Restoring Default Settings....199
17 Other 200
17.1 Configuring General Settings 200
17.2 Configuring RS-232 Serial ≤ort 201
17.3 Configuring DS= Settings....202
17.4 Configuring +ore Settings 202
17.5 +anaging >ser Accounts 205
17.5.1 Adding a >ser....205
17.5.2 Deleting a >ser....208
17.5.3 Editing a >ser 209
18 Appendix 212
18.1 Specifications 212
18.1.1 DS-73xxH>I-K4 212
18.1.2 DS-90xxH>I-K8 213
18.1.3 DS-73xxHQI-K4 214
18.2 Glossary....215
18.3 =roubleshooting....216
18.4 List of Compatible Hikvision I≤ Cameras....220
18.5 List of Compatible = hird-≤arty I ≤ Cameras ......220
NOTE/ Figures in this manual are for illustration only; your screens may differ.
1 Introduction
1.1 Front ≤anel

text_image
Hikvision
7
1
2
4
8
3
6
5
Figure 1, DS-73xxH>I-K4, DS-73xxHQI-K4 Front ≤anel
=able 1-1 DS-73xxH>I-K4, DS-73xxHQI-K4 Front ≤anel Description
x0. xame Function Description 1 ≤OVER =urns green when DVR is powered up READY =urnsgreen, indicating that the DVR is functioning properly S=A=>S =urns green when device is controlled by an IR remote =urns red when controlled by a keyboard and purple when IR remote and keyboard is used at the same time ALAR+ =urns red when a sensor alarm is detected HDD Flickers red when data is being read from or written to HDD =x/Rx Flickers green when network connection is functioning properly 2 DVD-R/V Slot for DVD-R/V 3 Composite Keys SHIF= Switches between the numeric or letter input and functions of the composite keys. (Input letter or numbers when the light is out; Realize functions when the light is red.) 1/+Ex> Enters numeral "1"Accessesthe main menu interface 2/ABC/F1 Enters numeral "2" Enters letters "ABC" =he F1 button when used in a list field will select all items in the list =urns on/off ≤=< light in ≤=< Control mode, and use it to zoom out the image Switches between main and spot video output in live view or playback mode. 3/DEF/F2 Enters numeral "3" Enters letters "DEF" >ses the F2 button is used to change the tab pages <ooms in the image in ≤=< control mode 4/GHI/ESC Enters numeral "4" Enters letters "GHI" Exits and back to the previous menu 5/JKL/EDI= Enters numeral "5" Enters letters "JKL" Deletescharacters before cursor Check the checkbox and select the Ox/OFF switch Starts/stops record clipping in playback 6/+×O/≤LAY Enters numeral "6" Enters letters "+×O" Accesses to playback interface in ≤slayback mode 7/≤QRS/REC Enters numeral "7" Enters letters "≤QRS" Accesses to manual record interface+ anually enables/disables record 8/=>V/≤=< Enters numeral "8" Enters letters "=>V" Accesses ≤=< control interface 9/√XY</≤REV Enters numeral "9" Enters letters "√XY<" +ulti-channel display in live view 0/A Enters numeral "0" ×0. ×ame Function Description Shifts the input methods in the editing text field. (>pper and lowercase, alphabet, symbols or numeric input). 4 DIREC=IO× ×avigates between different fields and items in menus >ses the >p and Down button s to speed up and slow down the playing of video files in ≤layback mode.=he Left and Right button will select the next and previous record files. Cycles through channels in Live View mode. Controlsthe movement of the ≤=< camera in ≤=< control mode Ex=ER Confirms selection in any of the menu modes Checks the checkbox ≤lays or pauses the playing of video files in ≤layback mode Advances the video by a single frame in single-frame ≤layback mode Stops/starts auto switch in Auto-switch mode 5 ≤OVER ≤ower on/off switch 6 JOG SH>=LE Control Moves the active selection up and down in a menu Cycles through different channels in live view mode Jumps 30s forward/backward in video files in the playback mode Controlsthe movement of the ≤=< camera in ≤=< control mode Moves the active selection up and down in a menu 7 >SB Interface >niversal Serial Bus (>SB) ports for additional devices such as >SB mous e and >SB Hard Disk Drive (HDD) 8 IR Receiver Receiver for IR remote control

text_image
1
HIKVISION
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
HITKVISION
100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100
DIN
SOT
AVTS
RLOOMA
FOCS+
INT
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
Figure 2, DS-90xxH>I-K8 Front ≤anel
=able 1-2 DS-90xxH>I-K8 Front ≤anel Description
×0. ×ame Function Description 1 ALARM Red when a sensor alarm is detected READY Blue, indicating that the DVR is functioning properly S=A=>S Blue when device is controlled by an IR remote Red when controlled by a keyboard and purple when IR remote and keyboard is used at the same time HDD Flickers red when data is being read from or written to HDD MODEM Flickers blue when network connection is functioning properly =x/Rx Blue when the device is in armed status; at this time, an alarm is enabled when an event is detected. G>ARD =urns off when the device is unarmed. =he arm/disarm status can be changed by pressing and holding on the ESC button for more than 3 seconds in live view mode. Red when a sensor alarm is detected 2 IR Receiver Receiver for IR remote 3 Front ≤anel Lock Lock or unlock the panel by the key 4 DVD-R/V Slot for DVD-R/V 5 Alphanumeric Buttons Switches to the corresponding channel in live view or ≤=< control mode Inputs numbers and characters in edit mode Switches between different channels in playback mode Blue when the corresponding channel is recording; turns red when the channel is in network transmission status; turns pink when the channel is recording and transmitting. 6 >SB Interfaces >niversal Serial Bus ports for additional devices such as >S B mouse and >SB Hard Disk Drive (HDD) 7 ESC Returns to the previous menu ≤resses for arming/disarming the device in live view mode REC/SHO= Enters the Manual Record settings menu ≤resses this button followed by a numeric button to call a ≤=< preset in ≤=< control settings =urns audio on/off in the playback mode ≤LAY/A>=0 Enters the playback mode Automatically scans in the ≤=< control menu <OOM+ No. Name Function Description A/FOC>S+ Adjusts focus in the ≤=< Control menu Switches between input methods (upper and lower case alphabet, symbols and numeric input). EDI=/IRIS+ Edits text fields. when editing text fields, it also deletes the ch aracter in front of the cursor Checks the checkbox in the checkbox fields Adjusts the iris of the camera in ≤=< control mode Generates video clips for backup in playback mode Enters/exits the folder of >SB device and eSA=A HDD MAIN/S≤O=/<OOM- Switches between main and spot output <ooms out the image in ≤=< control mode F1/LIGH= Selects all items on the list when used in a list field =urns on/off ≤=< light (if applicable) in ≤=< control mode Switches between play and reverse play in playback mode F2/A>X Cycles through tab pages Switches between channels in synchronous playback mode MEN>/VI≤ER Returns to the Main menu (after successful login) ≤resses and holds the button for five seconds to turn off audible key beep Starts wiper (if applicable) in ≤=< control mode Shows/hides the control interface in playback mode ≤REV/FOC>S- Switches between single screen and multi-screen mode Adjusts the focus in conjunction with the A/FOC>S+ button in ≤=< control mode ≤=</IRIS- Enters the ≤=< Control mode Adjusts the iris of the ≤=< camera in ≤=< control mode 8 DIREC=ION Navigates between different fields and items in menus >ses the >p and Down buttons to speed up and slow down the playing of video files in ≤slayback mode. =he Left and Right button will select the next and previous record files. Cycles through channels in Live View mode Controls the movement of the ≤=< camera in ≤=< control mode EN=ER Confirms selection in any of the menu modes. Checks the checkbox ≤lays or pauses the playing of video files in ≤slayback mode Advances the video by a single frame in single-frame ≤slayback mode Stops/starts auto switch in Auto-switch mode 9 JOG SH>=LE Control Moves the active selection up and down in a menu Cycles through different channels in live view mode Jumps 30s forward/backward in video files in the playback mode Controls the movement of the ≤=< camera in ≤=< control mode 10 ≤OVER ON/OFF ≤ower on/off switch
1.2 IR Remote Control Operations
=he DVR may also be controlled with the included IR remote control.

NOTE
If your system is secured with a password pattern, press ESC on the remote to display the password input window and input the password by using a keyboard.

NOTE
Batteries (2 × AAA) must be installed before operation.

text_image
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
ABC
JKI
TUV
MNO
MNO
ABC
JKI
TUV
MNO
ABC
JKI
TUV
MNO
ABC
JKI
TUV
MNO
ABC
JKI
TUV
MNO
ABC
JKI
TUV
MNO
ABC
JKI
TUV
MNO
ABC
JKI
TUV
MNO
ABC
JKI
TUV
MNO
ABC
JKI
TUV
MNO
ABC
JKI
TUV
Figure 3, Remote Control
=he keys on the remote control resemble the ones found on the front panel. See =able 1-3.
=able 1-3 Description of the IR Remote Control Buttons
×o. ×ame Description 1 ≤OVER ≤ower on/off the device. ≤ower on/off the device by pressing and holding the button for 5 seconds. 2 ME×> Button ≤ress the button to return to the main menu (after successful login). ≤ress and hold the button for 5 seconds will turn off audible key beep. In ≤=< Control mode, the ME×> button will start wiper (if applicable). In ≤slayback mode, it is used to show/hide the control interface. 3 REC Button Enter the Manual Record setting menu. In ≤=< control settings, press the button and then you can call a ≤=< preset by pressing ×umeric button. It is also used to turn audio on/off in the ≤slayback mode. 4 DIREC=IO× Button ×avgiate between different fields and items in menus. In the ≤slayback mode, the >p and Down button is used to speed up and slow down recorded video. =he Left and Right button will select the next and previous record files. In Live View mode, these buttons can be used to cycle through channels. In ≤=< control mode, it can control the movement of the ≤=< camera. Ex=ER Button Confirm selection in any of the menu modes. It can also be used to tick checkbox fields. In ≤slayback mode, it can be used to play or pause the video. In single-frame ≤slayback mode, pressing the button will advance the video by a single frame. 5 ≤=< Button In Auto-switch mode, it can be used to stop /start auto switch. 6 DEV Enables/Disables Remote Control. 7 Alphanumeric Buttons Switch to the corresponding channel in Live view or ≤=< Control mode. Input numbers and characters in Edit mode. Switch between different channels in the ≤slayback mode. 8 ESC Button Back to the previous menu. ≤ress for Arming/disarming the device in Live View mode. 9 ≤LAY Button =he button is used to enter the All-day ≤slayback mode. It is also used to auto scan in the ≤=< Control menu. 10 ≤REV Button Switch between single screen and multi-screen mode. In ≤=< Control mode, it is used to adjust the focus in conjunction with the A/FOC>S+ button.
1.2.1 = roubleshooting Remote Control

NOTE
+ake sure batteries have been installed properly. Also, note that the remote control must be aimed at the IR receiver on the ×VR front panel.
If there is no response after pressing any button on the remote, follow the procedure below to troubleshoot.
1. Go to M enu > Configuration > General > More Settings by operating the front control panel or the mouse.
2. Check and remember the DVR ×o. =he default DVR ×o. is 255. =his number valid for all IR remote controls.
3. ≤ress DEV on the remote control.
4. Enter the DVR ×o. in Step 2.
5. ≤ress ENTER on the remote.
If the front panel Status indicator turns blue, the remote control is operating properly. If the Status indicator does not turn blue and there is no response, check the following:
- Batteries are installed correctly and the polarities are not reversed.
- Batteries are fresh and not out of charge.
• IR receiver is not obstructed.
If the remote still does not function, change the remote and try again, or contact the device provider.
1.3 >SB +ouse Operation
A regular 3-button (Left/Right/Scroll-wheel) >SB mouse can also be used with this DVR.
1. ≤lug mouse into a >SB interface on the DVR. =he mouse should automatically be detected. If not, the mouse might not be compatible. Refer to your mouse provider.
=able 1-4 Description of the +ouse Control
xame Action Description Left-Click Single-Click Live view: Select channel and show the quick set menu.+enu: Select and enter Double-Click Live view: Switch between single-screen and multi-screen. Drag ≤=< control: Wheeling.≤rivacy mask and motion detection: Select target area.Digital zoom-in: Drag and select target area.Live view: Drag channel/time bar. Right-Click Single-Click Live view: Show menu.+enu: Exit current menu to upper level menu. Scroll-vheel Scrolling up Live view: ≤previous screen.+enu: ≤previous item. Scrolling down Live view: ×ext screen.+enu: ×ext item.
1.4 Input + method Description

text_image
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0
q w e r t y u i o p
a s d f g h j k l
↑ z x c v b n m ←x
123/..
Figure 4, Soft Keyboard
Description of the buttons on the soft keyboard:
=able 1-5 Description of the Soft Keyboard Icons
Icon Description Icon Description 0 ... 9 ×umber A ... Z English letter Lowercase/>ppercase Backspace 123/.. ABC Switch the keyboard Space ≤ositioning the cursor Enter #+= Symbols Reserved
1.5 Rear ≤anel

NOTE
=he rear panel varies by model. Refer to the actual product. =he following figures are for reference only.

text_image
AUDIO IN
AUDIO OUT
LINE IN
1 2 3 7 13
15 14
eSATA
VIDEO IN
Video Out
HDMI1
HDMI2
VGA
LAN2
RS-232
LAN1
RS-485 KR ALABIN OUT
ALABIN
1 4 2 5 8 9 12 11
Figure 5, DS-73xxH>I-K4 Rear ≤anel

text_image
AUDIO IN
AUDIO OUT
LINE IN
1 2 3 7 13
15 14
eSATA
1 2 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
VIDEO IN
Video Out
R5-232
HDMI2
VGA
LAN
RS-480
RS-A/ANIN OUT
AUDIO IN
1 4 2 5 8 9 12 11
Figure 6, DS-73xxHQI-K4 Rear ≤anel

text_image
3
7 13 6 15 14 16
VGA
CVBS LINE IN
LOOP OUT
AUDIO OUT
eSATA
RS-232 LAN2
LAN1 ALAMIN OUT
1 4 2 5 8 9 12
VIDEO OUT
HDMI2
HDMI1 VGA LAN1
AUDIO IN
Figure 7, DS-90xxH>I-K8 Rear ≤anel
Table 1-6 Description of DS-73xxH>I-K4, DS-73xxHQI-K4, and DS90xxH>I-K8 Rear ≤anel
No. Item Description 1 VIDEO IN BNC interface for TurboHD and analog video input. 2 VIDEO O>T BNC connector for video output. 3 A>DIO IN/LOO≤ O>T (for DS-90xxH>I-K8) RCA connector 4 >SB ≤ort >niversal Serial Bus (>SB) port for additional devices. 5 HDMI1/VGF Simultaneous HDMI1/VGA output. Display local video output and menu. 6 HDMI2 HDMI2 video output connector (DS-73xxH>I-K4 and DS-90xxH>I-K8) 7 A>DIO O>T RCA connector 8 Network Interface Connector for network (DS-73xxH>I-K4 and DS-90xxH>I-K8 = x2, DS-73xxH>I-K4 = x1) 9 RS -485 and Alarm Interface Connector for RS-485 devices. T+ and T- pins connect toR+ and R - pins of ≤T D+, D- pin connects to Ta, Tb pin of controller. For cascading devices, the first DVR's D+, D- pin should be connected with the D+, D- pin of the next DVR. Connector for alarm input Connector for alarm output 10 ≤ower Supply 100 to240 VAC power supply 11 ≤ower Switch Switch for turning on/off the device 12 GND Ground 13 LINE IN BNC connector for audio input 14 eSATA Connects external SATA HDD, CD/DVC-RV 15 RS-232 Interface Connector for RS-232 devices 16 ALARM O>T Connector for alarm output 17 A>DIO IN (for DS-90xxH>I-K8) RCA connector
2 Getting Started
2.1 Starting Up and Shutting Down the DVR
Purpose
≤roper startup and shutdown procedures are crucial to expanding the life of the DVR.
+efore You Start
Check that the voltage of the power supply is the same with the DVR's requirement, and the ground connection is working properly.
2.1.1 Starting the DVR
Check that the power supply is plugged into an electrical outlet. It is HIGHLY recommended that an Uninterruptible ≤ ower Supply (U ≤ S) be used in conjunction with the device.
Turn on the power switch on the rear panel, and the ≤ lower indicator LED should turn on indicating that the unit begins to start up.
After startup, the ≤ower indicator LED remains on.
2.1.2 Shutting Down/Logging Out/Rebooting the DVR
1. Go to Menu > Maintenance.

text_image
System Maintenance
System Logs
Import/Export
Upgrade
Default
Network Detect
HDD Detect
Start Time
09-23-2017
00:00:30
End Time
09-23-2017
23:59:59
Major Type
Shutdown
Miner Type
Alarm Input
Alarm Output
Motion Detect
Motion Detect
Video Tamper
Video Tamper
Kosovo Started
POS Stopped
Video Quality Diagnostics Alarm Started
Logout
Shutdown
Reboot
Cancel
Export All
Search
Figure 8, Shutdown Menu
2. Click Ⓞ (lower left corner of screen) to display the Shutdown window.
3. Click one of the following:
\- Logout – Logs the current user out of the system.
- Shutdown – Shuts system down.
- Reboot – Shuts system down and reboots.
-
text_image
Attention
? Shut down the system?
Yes No
Figure 9, Shutdown ≤rompt
2.2 Activating the Device
Purpose
For the first-time access, you need to activate the device by setting an admin password. ×o operation is allowed before activation. You can also activate the device via Veb Browser, SAD≤, or Client Software.
1. Input the same password in the
text_image
Activation
User Name
Create New Password
Confirm New Password
admin
Hikvision1
Strong
Valid password range [8-16]. You can use a combination of numbers,
lowercase, uppercase and special character for your password with at
least two kinds of them contained.
OK Cancel
Figure 10, Settings Admin ≤assword

WARNING
STRON" P4SSWOR' RENOTE
Clear text password is supported. Click 📄 to see the clear text of the password. Click the icon again and the password again becomes invisible.
3. After the device is activated, the Attention box pops up as below.

text_image
Attention
The device is activated. Properly keep your password. Export the GUID file for password resetting?
Yes No
Figure 11, Attention Window
4. (Optional) Click Yes to export the G>ID. =he Reset ≤assword interface pops up. Click Export to export the G>ID to the >SB flash drive for password resetting.

text_image
Reset Password
Device Name
USB Flash Disk 1-1
Refresh
Name Size Type Edit Date
Folder 11-18-2015 11:20:43
GUID_606524190_20161118112048.bin 128B File 11-18-2016 11:20:48
Free Space 7170.54MB
New Folder Export Back
Figure 12, Export G>ID
5. After exporting the G>ID, the Attention box pops up as below. Click Yes to duplicate the password or No to cancel it.

text_image
Attention
Duplicate the password to IP cameras
that are connected with default protocol.
Yes No
Figure 13, Duplicate the ≤assword
2.3 >sing the >nlock ≤attern for Login
Purpose
An admin can configure an unlock pattern for device login.
2.3.1 Configuring the >nlock ≤attern
After the device is activated, enter the following interface to configure the device unlock pattern.

text_image
Set Unlock Pattern
Draw the unlock pattern first.
Figure 14, Set >nlock ≤attern
1. >se the mouse to draw a pattern among the nine dots on the screen. Release the mouse when the pattern is done.

flowchart
graph TD
A["Start"] --> B{Decision}
B -->|Yes| C["OK"]
B -->|No| D["End"]
C --> E["Action"]
D --> F["Action"]
Figure 15, Draw the ≤attern
i NOTE
Connect at least four dots to draw the pattern.
Each dot can be connected only once.
2. Draw the same pattern again to confirm it. When the two patterns match, the pattern is configured successfully.

text_image
Set Unlock Pattern
Draw pattern again to confirm.
Figure 16, Confirm the ≤attern
If the two patterns are different, you must set the pattern again.

text_image
Set Unlock Pattern
The two patterns are different. Try
again.
Figure 17, Reset the ≤attern
2.3.2 Logging in via >nlock ≤attern

NOTE
Only the admin user has the permission to unlock the device.
Configure the pattern first before unlocking.
1. Right-click the mouse on the screen and select the menu to enter the interface.

text_image
Unlock
admin
Draw the unlock pattern first.
Forget My P...
Switch User
Figure 18, Draw the >nlock ≤attern
2. Draw the pre-defined pattern to unlock to enter the menu operation.
i NOTE
You can right click the mouse to log in via the normal mode.
If you have forgotten your pattern, you can select the "orget My Pattern or Switch User option to enter the normal login dialog box.
when the pattern you draw is different from the pattern you have configured, try again.
If you draw the wrong pattern seven times, the account will lock for one minute.

text_image
Login
User Name admin
Password
Forget Password OK Cancel
Figure 19, ×normal Login Dialog Box
2.3.3 Login and Logout
2.3.3.1 >ser Login
Purpose
You must log in to the device before operating the menu and other functions.
1. Select the User Name in the drop-down list.

text_image
Login
User Name admin
Password
Forget Password OK Cancel
Figure 20, Login Interface
2. Input the Password.
3. Click OK to log in.

NOTE
In the Login interface, for the admin user, if you have entered the wrong password seven times, the account will be locked for 60 seconds. For operators, if you have entered the wrong password for five times, the account will be locked for 60 seconds.

text_image
Attention
Incorrect password. You still have 6 chances.
Please try again.
OK
Figure 21, >ser Account ≤rotection for the Admin

text_image
Attention
Incorrect password. You still have 4 chances.
Please try again.
OK
Figure 22, >ser Account ≤rotection for the Operator
2.3.4 Resetting Your ≤assword
Purpose
If you forget the admin password, you can reset the password by importing the G>ID file, which was exported and saved in the local >SB flash drive after you activated the device.
1. On the user login interface, click "orget Password to enter the Import G>ID interface.

text_image
Reset Password
Device Name USB Flash Disk 1-1 Refresh
Name Size Type Edit Date Delete Play
4.bmp 6750.06KB File 09-02-2016 11:52:28
5.bmp 6750.06KB File 09-02-2016 11:52:32
6.bmp 6750.06KB File 09-02-2016 11:52:42
7.bmp 6750.06KB File 09-02-2016 11:52:10
8.bmp 6750.06KB File 09-02-2016 11:52:16
9.bmp 6750.06KB File 09-02-2016 11:52:24
GUID_583574624_20160... 12GB File 09-09-2016 14:10:37
Free Space 14.26GB
New Folder Import Back
Figure 23, Import G>ID
2. Select the G>ID file from the >SB flash drive and click Import to pop up the Reset ≤assword interface.

text_image
Reset Password
User Name admin
Create New Pass...
Confirm New Pass...
✓ Valid password range [8-16]. You can use a combination of numbers,
lowercase, uppercase and special character for your password with at
least two kinds of them contained.
OK Cancel
Figure 24, Reset ≤assword
3. Input the new password and confirm the password.
4. Click OK to save the new password. =hen the Attention box pops up as shown below.

text_image
Attention
The password is reset. The GUID file is ineffective. Export a new GUID file.
OK
Figure 25, G>ID File Imported
5. Click OK and the Attention box as below pops up to remind you to duplicate the password of the device to I ≤ cameras that are connected with default protocol. Click Yes to duplicate the password or No to cancel it.

text_image
Attention
Duplicate the password to IP cameras
that are connected with default protocol.
Yes No
Figure 26, Duplicate the ≤assword
i NOTE
=o retrieve a forgotten password, you must export the G>ID file first.
Once the password is reset, the G>ID file will be invalid. You can export a new G>ID file.
2.3.5 Adding and Connecting I≤ Cameras
2.3.5.1 Activating an I≤ Camera
Purpose
Before adding the camera, make sure the I≤ camera to be added is in active status.
1. Select Add IP Camera from the right-click menu in live view mode or go to Menu> Camera> IP Camera.
For the I≤ camera detected online in the same network segment, the Security status shows whether it is active or inactive.

text_image
Cameras Setup
IP Camera IP Camera Import/Export
Camera
Add/Delete Status Security IP Camera Add/ Edit Upgr Camera Name Protocol
D1 20E2103 HIKVISION
D2 Strong Pass... 192.168.10.4 2DE2103
Strong Pass... 192.168.10.109 4A25 HIKVISION
Active 192.168.10.2
Active 192.168.10.6
Active 192.168.10.7
Active 192.168.10.63
Active 192.168.10.110
HIKVISION
Hikvision
Hikvision
Hikvision
Hikvision
Refresh One-touch Activ Upgrade Delete One-touch Adding Custom Adding
Max. IP Camera Number: 2
Net Receive Mio Bandwidth: 120Mbps
Figure 27, I≤ Camera +anagement Interface
2. Click the inactive icon of the camera to enter the following interface to activate it. You can also select multiple cameras
from the list and click the One-touch 4activate to activate the cameras in batch.

text_image
Activation
User Name: admin
Password:
Valid password range [8-16]. You can
use a combination of numbers,
lowercase, uppercase and special
character for your password with at least
two kinds of them contained.
Confirm New Password
Ok Cancel
Figure 28, Activate the Camera
3. Set the password of the camera to activate it.
Use 4dmin Password: If you check this checkbox, the camera(s) will be configured with the admin password of the operating DVR.
text_image
Activation
User Name: admin
Password: •••••••••
RISKY
Valid password range [8-16]. You can
use a combination of numbers,
lowercase, uppercase and special
character for your password with at least
two kinds of them contained.
Confirm New Password: ••••••••••|
Ok Cancel
Figure 29, Level 0 (Inadequate) Strength ≤assword

text_image
Activation
User Name: admin
Password: **********
ATTENTION
Invalid Password
RISKY
No kind of them contained.
Confirm New Password: ********#
Ok Cancel
Figure 30, Invalid ≤assword +essay

text_image
Activation
User Name: admin
Password: •••••••••
WEAK
Valid password range [8-16]. You can
use a combination of numbers,
lowercase, uppercase and special
character for your password with at least
two kinds of them contained.
Confirm New Password: ••••••••••
Ok Cancel
Figure 31, Level 1 ≤ password Strength

text_image
Activation
User Name: admin
Password: *****
FAIR
Valid password range [8-16]. You can
use a combination of numbers,
lowercase, uppercase and special
character for your password with at least
two kinds of them contained.
Confirm New Password: *****
Ok Cancel
Figure 32, Level 2 ≤ password Strength

text_image
Activation
User Name: admin
Password: •••••••••
Strong
Valid password range [8-16]. You can
use a combination of numbers,
lowercase, uppercase and special
character for your password with at least
two kinds of them contained.
Confirm New Password: ••••••••••
Ok Cancel
Figure 33, Level 3 and Level 4 ≤ password Strength

WARNING
STRONG PASSWORD RECOMMENDED – ve highly recommend you create a strong password of your own choosing (using a minimum of eight characters, including at least three of the following categories: upper case letters, lower case letters, numbers, and special characters) in order to increase the security of your product. Ve also recommend that you reset your password regularly. Especially in high security systems, resetting the password monthly or weekly can better protect your product.
4. Click OK to finish activating the I≤ camera.=he camera security status will change to Active.
2.3.6 Adding an Online I≤ Camera
Purpose
Before you can get a live view or record of the video, add the network cameras to the device's connection list.
Before You Start
Ensure the network connection is valid and correct.
- OPTION 1
1. Select Add IP Camera from the right-click menu in live view mode or go to Menu > Camera > IP Camera.

text_image
Cameras Setup
Analog IP Camera IP Camera ImportExport
P Cameras List
Camera ID: 001200000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
IPC Status: Connected Connected and Support Preview Here Not Connected
Open
Week Px: 19.163.167
Camera 51
HKVISION DS-2CD4224F-ZS 8888
443716488
V5.3 Build 150...
Active 192 188 254...
HKVISION DS-2CD2143FW... 8888
498375488
V5.3 Build 150...
Active 192 188 254...
HKVISION DS-2CD4185F-Z 8888
510891983
V5.3 Build 150...
Active 192 188 254...
HKVISION DS-ZDE2185-DE... 8888
497555561
V5.3 Build 150...
Active 192 188 254...
HKVISION DS-2CD4333FW... 8888
506634726
V5.3 Build 151...
Active 192 188 254...
HKVISION DS-2CD4A25FW... 8888
579492463
V5.3 Build 169...
Active 192 188 254...
HKVISION DS-2CD4A5FE-ZD1 8888
511137153
V5.3 Build 169...
Active 192 188 254...
HKVISION DS-2CD4333FAD-1888
456332664
V5.3 Build 151...
Active 192 188 254...
HKVISION DS-2CD4113FW... 8888
496329537
V5.3 Build 159...
Active 192 188 254...
HKVISION DS-2CD4WMEFS... 8888
452755562
V5.3 Build 161...
Options
One-touch Active
Upgrade
Details
One-touch Adding
Custom Adding
Figure 34, I≤ Camera +anagement Interface
2. Online cameras with the same network segment will be detected and displayed in the camera list.
3. Select the I≤ camera from the list and click add the camera (with the same admin password of the DVR). Or you can click One-touch Adding to add all cameras (with the same admin password) from the list.
i NOTE
+ake sure the camera to add has already been activated by setting the admin password, and the admin password of the camera is the same as the DVR's.
4. (Optional) Check the Enable H.265 checkbox (for Initial Access) for the connected I≤ camera supporting H.265.=hen the I≤ camera will be encoded with H.265.
5. (For encoders with multiple channels only) check the Channel ≤ort checkbox in the pop-up window, as shown in the following figure, and click OK to add multiple channels.

text_image
Channel Port
✓ Channel Port ✓ 1 ✓ 2 ✓ 3 ✓ 4 ✓ 5
OK Cancel
Figure 35, Select + multiple Channels
• OPTION 2
1. On the I≤ Camera +anagement interface, click
text_image
Add IP Camera (Custom)
1 192.168.254.36 1 DS-2CD4... HIKVISION 8000
2 192.168.254.196 1 DS-2CD4... HIKVISION 8000
3 10.102.102.187 1 DS-2CD6... HIKVISION 8000
4 192.168.254.146 1 DS-2CD6... HIKVISION 8000
5 192.168.254.103 1 DS-2CD4... HIKVISION 8000
6 192.168.254.116 1 DS-2CD4... HIKVISION 8000
7 192.168.254.24 1 DS-2CD4 HIKVISION 8000
IP Camera Address 192.168.254.36
Protocol HIKVISION
Management Port 8000
User Name admin
Admin Password
Search Add Cancel
Figure 36, Custom Adding I≤ Camera Interface
2. You can edit the I ≤ address, protocol, management port, and other information of the I ≤ camera to be added.

NOTE
If the I≤ camera to add has not been activated, activate it from the I≤ camera list on the IP
text_image
IP Camera Management
Camera... Add/Delete Status Security IP Camera Address Edit Upgrade Camera No
D1 Strong Pass 10.16.1.250 IPdome
Active 10.16.2.109
Active 10.16.2.222
Refresh One-touch Activ Upgrade Delete One-touch Adding Custom Adding
Enable H.215 (For Initial Access)
Net Receive Idle Bandwidth: 318Mbps
Exit
Figure 37, Successfully Added I≤ Cameras
=able 1-7 Explanation of the Icons
Icon Explanation Icon Explanation 
EDIT (Pen): Press to edit basic IP camera parameters 
ADD (+): Press to add the detected IP camera 
DISCONNECTED (!): Camera is disconnected; click the icon to get camera's exception information 
DELETE (Trash Can): Press to delete the camera 
PLAY (Right Triangle): Play connected camera's live video 
ADVANCED (Gear): Press to go to advanced settings window. 
UPGRADE (Up Arrow): Upgrade the connected camera's firmware 
DASH: No advanced settings available for this camera 
REPAIR (?): Press to attempt to repair the connection Securitycolumn SECURITY: Shows camera status (active/inactive) or password strength (strong/medium/weak/risky)
4. (Optional) Check the E nable H.265 checkbox (For Initial Access) for the connected I≤ camera supporting H.265.=hen the I≤ camera will be encoded with H.265.
2.3.7 Editing the Connected I≤ Camera
Purpose
After adding the I≤ cameras, the basic information of the camera is listed on the interface, and you can configure the basic settings of the I≤ cameras.
1. Click ☑ to edit the parameters. You can edit the I≤ address, protocol, and other parameters.

text_image
Edit IP Camera
IP Camera No. D1
IP Camera Address 10.9.6.48
Protocol HIKVISION
Management Port 8000
Video Port 1
Camera User Name adults
Camera Password
OK Cancel
Figure 38, Edit I≤ Camera
text_image
Network Password
Advance Settings
IP Camera No. D2
IP Camera Address 10.102.102.2
Management Port 8000
Apply OK Cancel
Figure 39, ×network Configuration of the Camera
4. You can edit the camera network information and the password.

text_image
Advance Settings
Network Password
IP Camera No. D2
Current Password
New Password
Confirm
✓ Valid password range [8-16]. You can use a combination of numbers,
lowercase, uppercase and special character for your password with at
least two kinds of them contained.
Apply OK Cancel
Figure 40, ≤assword Configuration of the Camera
5. Click OK to save the settings and exit the interface.
2.3.8 Configuring Signal Input Channel

NOTE
This chapter is applicable only to DS-73xx/90xxHUI-K Series DVRs.
Purpose
You can configure the analog and I ≤ signal input types and enable 5 M ≤ long distance transmission.
1. Go to Menu > Camera > Signal Input Status.

text_image
Cameras Setup
Signal Input Status IP Camera IP Camera Import/Export
Camera HD/CVBS IP
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
A16
Max. IP Camera Number 2
5MP Long Distance Transmission
Apply
Figure 41, Signal Input Status
2. Check this checkbox to select different signal input types: HD/CVBS and I≤. If you select HD/CVBS, four types of analog signal inputs including TurboHD and CVBS can be connected randomly for the selected channel. If you select I≤, an I≤ camera can be connected to the selected channel.
3. Click 4pply to save the settings.
You can view the maximum number I≤ cameras in the Max. IP 2.3.9 Configuring 5 M≤ Long Distance Transmission

NOTE
This chapter is applicable only to HUI Series DVRs.
Purpose
You can configure 5 M≤ long distance transmission on the Signal Input Status interface.
1. Go to Menu > Camera > Signal Input Status.

text_image
Cameras Setup
Signal Import Status: IP Camera IP Camera Import/Export
Camera
A1
A2
A3
A4
Max. IP Camera Number
5MP Long Distance Transmission
HD/CVBC
Apply
Figure 42, Signal Input Status (for DS-73xx/90xxHUI Series)
2. Click enter the 5 M≤ Long Distance Transmission Settings interface.

text_image
Trigger Channel
Analog A1 A2 A3 A4
Apply OK Cancel
Figure 43, 5 +≤ Long Distance =transmission Settings
3. Check this checkbox to enable 5 +≤ Long Distance =transmission of the selected channel.
4. Click 4pply to save the settings.
3 Live View
3.1 Introduction
Live View shows the video image from each camera in real time. =he DVR will automatically enter Live View mode when powered on. It is also at the very top of the menu hierarchy, thus hitting ESC multiple times (depending on which menu you're on) will bring you back to Live View mode.
3.2 Live View Icons
In Live View mode, there are icons at the right top of the screen for each channel, showing the status of the record and alarms in the channel, so that you can know whether the channel is recorded, or if there are alarms as soon as possible.
=able 1-8 Description of Live View Icons
Icons Description 
Alarm (video loss, tampering, motion detection, VCA, or sensor alarm) [SWKS] Record (manual record, schedule record, motion detection, or alarm triggered record) [OXBS] Alarm & Record [Y8TS] Event/Exception (motion detection, sensor alarm, or exception information.
3.3 Live View Mode Operations
There are many functions provided in Live View mode. The functions are listed below.
• Single Screen: show only one screen on the monitor.
• Multi-screen: show multiple screens on the monitor simultaneously.
- Start Auto-switch: the screen is auto switched to the next one. You must set the dwell time for each screen on the configuration menu before enabling the auto-switch. Menu > Configuration > Live View > Dwell Time.
- Start Recording: normal record and motion detection record are supported.
• Output Mode: set the output mode to Standard, Bright, Gentle, or Vivid.
- Playback: play back the recorded videos for the current day.
- Aux/Main Monitor: the DVR checks the output interface connections to define the main and auxiliary output interfaces. When the aux output is enabled, the main output cannot perform any operations; you can perform some basic operations on the Live View mode for the Aux output.
There are two HDMI interfaces. HDMI1 and VGA interfaces share simultaneous output. The priority level for the main and aux output is HDMI2 > VGA/HDMI1. The CVBS output only serves as the aux output or Live View output.
Table 1-9 Priorities of Outputs
S.N. HDMI2 VGA/HDMI1 CVBS Main output Auxiliary output For Live View Output Only 1 √ √ √ or × HDMI2 VGA/HDMI1 CVBS 2 √ or × × √ or × HDMI2 CVBS VGA/HDMI1 3 × √ √ or × VGA/HDMI1 CVBS HDMI2
For other DVRs with CVBS output, the VGA/HDMI output is the main output, and the CVBS output is the aux output.
Table 1-10 Priorities of Outputs
S.N. HDMI VGA CVBS Main output Auxiliary output 1 or × or × or × VGA/HDMI CVBS

NOTE
√ means the interface is in use, × means the interface is out of use or the connection is invalid. HDMI, VGA, and CVBS can be used at the same time.
3.3.1 >sing the +ouse in Live View
Refer to =able 1-11 for the description of mouse operation in live view mode.
=able 1-11 +ouse Operation in Live View
×ame Description +enu Enter the main menu of the system by right clicking the mouse. Single Screen Switch to the single full screen by choosing channel number from the drop-down list. +ulti -Screen Adjust the screen layout by selecting from the drop-down list. ≤previous Screen Switch to the previous screen. ×ext Screen Switch to the next screen. Start/Stop Auto-Switch Enable/disable the auto-switch of the screens.
NOTE=he dwell time of the live view configuration must be set before using Start 4uto -Switch. Start Recording Start recording of all channels, Continuous Record, and +otion Detection Record are selectable from the drop-down list. Add I≤ Camera A shortcut to enter the I≤ camera management interface.(For HDVR series only) ≤layback Enter the playback interface and start playing back the video of the selected channel immediately ≤=< Control A shortcut to enter the ≤=< control interface of the selected camera. Output +ode Output +ode is configurable with Standard, Bright, Gentle and Vivid options. Aux +onitor Switch to the auxiliary output mode and the operation for the main output is disabled.
NOTEIf you enter Aux monitor mode and the Aux monitor is not connected, the mouse operation is disabled. You need to switch back to the +ain output with the F1 button on front panel or VOIP/MON button on IR remote control and then press the Enter button.

text_image
Common Menu
Menu
Single Screen
Multi-screen
Previous Screen
Next Screen
Start Auto-switch
Start Recording
Add IP Camera
Playback
PTZ Control
Output Mode
Figure 44, Right-click +enu
3.3.2 Switching +ain/Aux Output

NOTE
=he CVBS output only serves as the aux output or Live View output.
1. >se the mouse wheel to double-click on the HD+I1/VGA, or HD+I2, or HD+I/VGA output screen, and the following message box pops up.

text_image
Tip
Double-click the mouse again to
switch the auxiliary and main output?
Cancel
Figure 45, Switch Main and Aux Output
2. Use the mouse wheel to double-click on the screen ag ain to switch to the aux output, or click NOTE
You can select the Menu Output Mode under Menu > Configuration > General > More Settings to 4uto, HDMI1/VG4 and HDMI2 and then reboot the device to switch the main output.
3.3.3 Quick Setting Toolbar in Live View Mode
On the screen of each channel, there is a quick setting toolbar that appears when you click the screen.

text_image
Screenshot of a software toolbar with icons for video, audio, audio playback, and camera control functions
Figure 46, Quick Setting Toolbar
Refer to Table below for description of the Quick Setting Toolbar icons.
Table 1-12 Description of Quick Setting Toolbar Icons
Icons Description Icons Description Icons Description 
Start/Stop Manual Recording 
Instant Playback 
4udio On/Mute 
PTZ <ontrol [DW23] Digital Zoom [BXWW] Image Settings 

Face Detection [AQHW] Information [YKC0] [XSW4] Live View Strategy [WW06] Fisheye

Instant ≤ layback shows only the record in the last five minutes. If no record is found, it means there is no record during the last five minutes.

Digital Zoom zooms in the live image. You can zoom in the image to different proportions (1 to 16x) by moving the sliding bar. You can also scroll the mouse wheel to control the zoom in/out.

natural_image
Highway scene with multiple vehicles and residential buildings in the background (no visible text or symbols)
Figure 47, Digital
text_image
Image Settings
Time Segment 00:00-24:00
Mode Custom
146
255
255
OK
Figure 48, Image Settings

Enable Face Detection by clicking the icon. =he dialog pops up as shown in Figure 3-6. Click Yes and the full-screen live view of the channel is enabled. Click to exit from full-screen mode. You can configure face detection only when it is supported by the connected camera.

text_image
Attention
Enable face detection?
Yes No
Figure 49, Enable Face Detection

+ove the mouse onto the Information icon to show the real-time stream information, including the frame rate, bit rate, resolution, and stream type.

Figure 50, Information

NOTE
when an H.264 I≤ camera is connected, the stream type is displayed as H.264. when an I≤ camera supporting H.264+ is connected, the stream type is displayed as H.264+. when I≤ camera supporting H.265 is connected, the stream type is displayed as H.265. when I≤ camera supporting H.265+ is connected, the stream type is displayed as H.265+.

For analog cameras supporting VCA, click the icon to show the VCA information. =he configured or quadrilateral in the VCA configuration and target frame(s) will be shown on live view. Click the again to hide the VCA information.

text_image
12-13-2016 Tue 10:29:36
Camera 01
Figure 51, Enable VCA Information Overlay

NOTE
In Live View, only analog cameras support VCA information overlay.
Enable VCA function first before showing the VCA information.
=he VCA information is hidden by default. If the connected analog camera does not support VCA, the icon displays grey and cannot be operated.
For analog cameras, the VCA information includes line crossing detection and intrusion detection.
=he DVR supports VCA information overlay of only one channel. If you enable the function of one channel, the other channels will disable the function automatically.
Both single window and multi-window display modes support VCA information overlay.
Only the main output supports VCA information overlay. When switching to the aux output, the VCA information overlay of main output is disabled.
For analog cameras, if the camera number does not exceed the limit for line crossing detection and intrusion detection, the VCA information overlay can be enabled for all the analog cameras' enabled line crossing detection and intrusion detection. If the camera number exceeds the limit for line crossing detection, intrusion detection, and sudden scene change detection, only the cameras' enabled line crossing detection and intrusion detection support VCA information overlay. Disabling line crossing detection and intrusion detection remotely will not affect the VCA information overlay in the local live view.
3.4 Channel-Zero Encoding
Purpose
Channel-Zero Encoding provides a way to view many channels in real time from a Veb browser or CMS (Client Management System) software by decreasing the bandwidth requirement without affecting the image quality.
1. Go to Menu > Configuration > Live View > Channel-Zero Encoding.

text_image
System Configuration
General View Channel-Zero Encoding
Enable Channel-Zero Encoding
Frame Rate 12fps
Max. Bitrate Mode General
Max. Bitrate(Kbps) 1024
Apply
Figure 52, Live View Channel-Zero Encoding
2. Check the Enable Channel-Zero Encoding checkbox.
3. Configure the Frame Rate, Max. Bitrate Mode, and Max. Bitrate.
4. Click 4 pply to activate the settings.
5. After you set the Channel-Zero encoding, you can view 16 channels in one screen in the remote client or Veb browser.
3.5 Adjusting Live View Settings
Purpose
Live View settings can be customized. You can configure the output interface, dwell time for screen to be shown, mute or turn on the audio, the screen number for each channel, etc.
1. Go to Menu > System Configuration > Live View > General.

text_image
System Configuration
General View Channel Zero Encoding
Video Output Interface HDMI
Live View Mode 4*4
Dwell Time No Switch
Enable Audio Output ✓
Volume
Event Output HDMI
Full Screen Monitoring Dwell Time 5s
Apply
Figure 53, Live View General
2. The settings available in this menu include:
• Video Output Interface: Selects the output to configure the settings.
3. You can select VG4/HDMI1, HDMI2, Main 4. Set the camera order.
1) Click the View tab and select Video Output Interface from the drop-down list.

text_image
System Configuration
General View Channel Zero Encoding
Video Output Interface HDMI
Live View Mode 4 * 4
Dwell Time No Switch
Enable Audio Output
Volume
Event Output HDMI
Full Screen Monitoring Dwell Time 5s
Apply
Figure 54, Live View Camera Order
2) Click a window to select it, then double-click a camera to display in the camera list. Setting an 'X' means the window will not display any camera.
3) You can also click 📋 to start live view of all channels in order and click 📋 to stop live view of all channels. Click 📋 to go to the previous or next page.
4) Click 4pply.

NOTE
If the sum of the analog and I≤ channels exceeds 25, up to 32-window division mode is supported for the VGA/HDMI1 output.
3.6 Manual Video Quality Diagnostics
Purpose
The video quality of the analog channels can be diagnosed manually and you can view the diagnostic results from a list.
1. Go to Menu > Manual > Manual Video Quality Diagnostics.

text_image
Manual Video Quality Diagnostics
✓ Analog ✓ A1 ✓ A2 ✓ A3 ✓ A4 ✓ A5 ✓ A6 ✓ A7 ✓ A8
✓ A9 ✓ A10 ✓ A11 ✓ A12 ✓ A13 ✓ A14 ✓ A15 ✓ A16
Figure 55, Video Quality Diagnostics
2. Check the checkboxes to select the channels for diagnostics.
3. Click 'iagnose, and the results will be displayed on a list. You can view the video status and diagnostics time of the selected channels.

text_image
Manual Video Quality Diagnostics
Analog
A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8
A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16
Diagnostics Result
Camera No. Diagnostics Result Diagnostics Time
A1 Normal 25-04-2014 14:54:17
A2 Normal 25-04-2014 14:54:18
A9 Normal 25-04-2014 14:54:18
A3 Normal 25-04-2014 14:54:18
A10 Normal 25-04-2014 14:54:18
A4 Normal 25-04-2014 14:54:18
A5 Normal 25-04-2014 14:54:18
A11 Normal 25-04-2014 14:54:18
A6 Normal 25-04-2014 14:54:19
A12 Normal 25-04-2014 14:54:19
A7 Normal 25-04-2014 14:54:19
A8 Normal 25-04-2014 14:54:19
A13 Normal 25-04-2014 14:54:19
A14 Normal 25-04-2014 14:54:19
Diagnose Back
Figure 56, Diagnostics Result

NOTE
Connect the camera to the device for the video quality diagnostics.
Three exception types can be diagnosed: Blurred Image, Abnormal Brightness, and Color Cast.
4 ≤TZ Controls
4.1 Configuring ≤TZ Settings
Purpose
Follow the following procedure to set ≤TZ parameters. Configure ≤TZ parameters before you control the ≤TZ camera.
1. Go to Menu > Camera > ≤TZ.

text_image
Cameras Setup
Camera [A1] Camera 01
Preset
Set Clear Clear All Call
Patrol 1
Set Clear Clear All Call
Pattern 1
Start Stop Clear All
Linear Scan
Left Limit Right Limit
PTZ Parameter Enable Omnicast Control
Zoom -
Focus -
Iris -
Speed
PTZ
Figure 57, ≤=< Settings
2. Select the camera for ≤=< setting in the
text_image
PTZ Parameter Settings
Baud Rate 9600
Data Bit 8
Stop Bit 1
Parity None
Flow Ctrl None
PTZ Protocol UTC(Coaxitron)
Address 0
Address range: 0~255
Copy OK Cancel
Figure 58, ≤=< General
4. Select the parameters of the ≤=< camera from the drop-down list.

NOTE
All the parameters should be exactly the same as the ≤=< camera parameters.
For >=C cameras/domes connected, you can select the ≤=< protocol to >=C. +ake sure the protocol selected here is supported by the connected camera/dome.
when the UTC protocol is selected, all the other parameters such as baud rate, data bit, stop bit, parity, and flow control are not configurable.
5. (Optional) Click
text_image
Copy to
Analog
A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6
A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12
A13 A14 A15 A16
OK Cancel
Figure 59, Copy to Other Channels
6. Click OK to save the settings.
7. (Optional) Check the Enable Omnicast 4.2 Setting ≤TZ ≤ resets, ≤atrols, and ≤atterns
+efore You Start
Ensure that the presets, patrols, and patterns are supported by ≤TZ protocols.
Industry >3
=his device meets the CA× ICES-3 (A)/×+B-3(A) standards requirements.
4pplicable Models
This manual is applicable to the models listed in the following table.
Series Model DS-73xxHUI-K4 DS-7304HUI-K4DS-7308HUI-K4DS-7316HUI-K4 DS-73xxHQI-K4 DS-7308HQI-K4DS-7316HQI-K4DS-7332HQI-K4 DS-90xxHUI-K8 DS-9008HUI-K8DS-9016HUI-K8
Symbol
The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Symbol Description 
Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement important points of the main text. 
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if not avoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss, performance degradation, or unexpected results. 
Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk, which if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
Safety Instructions
- Proper configuration of all passwords and other security settings is the responsibility of the installer and/or end-user.
- In the use of the product, you must be in strict compliance with the electrical safety regulations of the nation and region. Please refer to technical specifications for detailed information.
- Input voltage should meet both the SELV (Safety Extra Low Voltage) and the Limited Power Source with 100 to 240 VAC, 12 VDC or 48 VDC according to the IEC60950-1 standard. Refer to technical specifications for detailed information.
- Do not connect several devices to one power adapter as adapter overload may cause over-heating or a fire hazard.
- Please make sure that the plug is firmly connected to the power socket.
- If smoke, odor or noise rise from the device, turn off the power at once and unplug the power cable, and then please contact the service center.
Preventive and
Before connecting and operating your device, please be advised of the following tips:
- Ensure unit is installed in a well-ventilated, dust-free environment.
- >nit is designed for indoor use only.
- Keep all liquids away from the device.
- Ensure environmental conditions meet factory specifications.
- Ensure unit is properly secured to a rack or shelf. Major shocks or jolts to the unit as a result of dropping it may cause damage to the sensitive electronics within the unit.
- >se the device in conjunction with an >≤ S if possible.
- ≤ower down the unit before connecting and disconnecting accessories and peripherals.
- A factory recommended HDD should be used for this device.
- Improper use or replacement of the battery may result in hazard of explosion. Replace with the same or equivalent type only. Dispose of used batteries according to the instructions provided by the battery manufacturer.
- Ensure to use the attached power adaptor only and not to change the adaptor randomly.
≤roduct Key Features
"eneral
- Connectable to =urboHD and analog cameras
- Supports >=C protocol for connecting camera over coa x
- Connectable to 1 ≤ cameras
\- =he analog signal inputs including =urboHD and CVBS can be automatically recognized without configuration
• Each channel supports dual-stream. And sub-stream supports up to vD1 resolution
• =he main stream of H>I Series supports up to 5 M≤ resolution of all the channels (H>I Series)
\- 5 M≤ long distance transmission can be enabled for the analog cameras (H>1 Series)
\- Independent configuration for each channel, including resolution, frame rate, bit rate, image quality, etc.
\- =he minimum frame rate for main stream and sub-stream is 1 fps
\- Encoding for both video stream and video & audio stream; audio and video synchronization during composite stream encoding
• Supports enabling H.265+/H.264+ to ensure high video quality with lowered bit rate
\- H.265+/H.265/H.264+/H.264 encoding for the main stream, and H.265/H.264 encoding for the sub-stream of analog cameras
\- Connectable to H.265 and H.264 I≤ cameras
- Defog level, night to day sensitivity, day to night sensitivity, IR light brightness, day/night mode, and vDR switch configurable for the connected analog cameras supporting these parameters
- 4 MP/5 MP signal switch for the supported analog cameras
• Vatermark technology
Local Monitoring
• HDMI output at up to 4K (3840 × 2160) resolution
- There are two HDMI interfaces of which the HDMI1 and VGA interfaces share simultaneous output. For HDMI1/VGA output, up to 1920 × 1080 resolution is supported. For HDMI2 output, up to 4K (3840 × 2160) resolution is supported
• 1/4/6/8/9/16/25/36 screen live view is supported, and the display sequence of screens is adjustable

NOTE
If the sum of the analog and IP channels exceeds 25, up to 32-window division mode is supported for the VGA/HDMI1 output
• Live view screen can be switched in group and manual switch and automatic cycle live view are also provided, the interval of automatic cycle can be adjusted
• CVBS output only serves as the aux output or live view output
- Quick setting menu is provided for live view
- The selected live view channel can be shielded
- VCA information overlay in live view for the supported analog cameras and in smart playback for the supported analog and IP cameras
- Motion detection, video-tampering detection, video e xception alarm, video loss alarm, and VCA alarm functions
• 1-ch analog camera supports people counting and heat map functions
- HUI Series supports line crossing detection and intrusion detection of all channels, and 2-ch sudden scene change detection.
• The enhanced VCA mode conflicts with the 2K/4K output and 4 MP/5 MP signal input (HUI Series)
- Privacy mask
- Several PTZ protocols (including Omnicast VMS of Genetec) supported; PTZ preset, patrol and pattern
- Zooming in/out by clicking the mouse and PTZ tracing by dragging mouse.
H" Management
• Each disk can have a maximum of 8 TB storage capacity
- 8 network disks (8 NAS disks, 8 IP SAN disks, or n N AS disks + m IP SAN disks (n+m ≤ 8)) can be connected
- Remaining recording time of the HDD can be viewed
• Supports cloud storage
• S.+.A.R.=. and bad sector detection
- HDD sleeping function
- HDD property: redundancy, read-only, read/write (R/V)
• HDD group management
• HDD quota management; different capacity can be assigned to different channels
- Hot-swappable HDD supports RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 5, RAID 6, and RAID 10 storage schemes, and can be enabled and disabled on your demand. 16 arrays can be configured (DS-90xxH>I-K8 only)
Recording,
• Holiday recording schedule configuration
• Cycle and non-cycle recording modes
• ×normal and event video encoding parameters
- + multiple recording types: manual, continuous, alarm, motion, motion | alarm, motion & alarm, and event
• Supports ≤OS triggered recording
- Eight recording time periods with separated recording types
• Supports Channel-+ackup
- Exports data to a >SB or eSA=A device
- Exports video clips when playback
• Video and Log, Video and ≤layer, and ≤layer are selectable to export for backup
• +anagement and maintenance of backup devices
4larms and Exceptions
- Configurable arming time of alarm input/output
- Alarms for video loss, motion detection, video tampe ring, illegal login, network disconnected, I≤confliction, record/capture exception, HDD error, and HDD full, etc.
- Alarm triggers full screen monitoring, audio alarm, notifying surveillance center, sending email and alarm output
• One-key disarms the linkage actions of the alarm input
- ≤ = < linking for the VCA alarm
• VCA detection alarm is supported
• Supports ≤OS triggered alarm
• Supports coaxial alarm (requires camera with alarm I/O)
- System will automatically reboot when a problem is detected in an attempt to restore normal functionality
Other Local "unctions
• +anual and automatic video quality diagnostics
- Operable by mouse and remote control
- =hree-level user management; admin user can create m any operating account and define their operating permission, which includes the permission to access any channel
• Completeness of operation, alarm, exceptions and log writing and searching
• +anually triggering and clearing alarms
- Importing and exporting of configuration file of devices
- Getting cameras type information automatically
• >nlock pattern for device login for the admin
• Clear-text password available
- G>ID file can be exported for use in resetting the password
- + multiple connected analog cameras supporting =urboHD can be upgraded simultaneously via the DVR
Network "unctions
- Self-adaptive 100+ or 1000+ network interface
- 1 ≤ v6 is supported
- C ≤ / I ≤ protocol, ≤ ≤ ≤ oE , DHC ≤ D×S, DD×S, x = ≤ , SAD ≤ , S+= ≤ , ×FS, iSCSI, >≤ n ≤^TM , and H== ≤ S are supported
- Supports access by Hik-Connect. If you enable Hik-Connect, the device will remind you the Internet access risk and ask you to confirm the “=erms of Service” and “≤rivacy Statement” before enabling the service. You should create a verification code to connect to Hik-Connect.
- = C ≤, > D ≤ , and R = ≤ for unicast
• Auto/+anual port mapping by >≤ n≤^TM
- Remote search, playback, download, locking and unlocking the record files, and downloading files broken transfer resume
- Remote parameters setup; remote import/export of device parameters
- Remote viewing of the device status, system logs and alarm status
- Remote keyboard operation
- Remote HDD formatting and program upgrading
- Remote system restart and shutdown
• Supports upgrading via remote F=≤ server
• RS-485 transparent channel transmission
- Alarm and exception information can be sent to the remote host
- Remotely start/stop recording
- Remotely start/stop alarm output
- Remote ≤ = < control
• =wo-way audio and voice broadcasting
• Output bandwidth limit configurable
- Embedded Veb server
- If DHC≤ is enabled, you can enable D×S DHC≤ or disable it and edit the ≤referred D×S Server and Alternate D×S Server
'evvelopment Scalability
- SDK for Windows and Linux system
- Source code of application software for demo
• Development support and training for application system
Table of
≤roduct Key Features ....5
1 Introduction....15
1.1 Front ≤anel....15
1.2 IR Remote Control Operations....17
1.2.1 =roubleshooting Remote Control....19
1.3 >SB +ouse Operation....19
1.4 Input + method Description 20
1.5 Rear ≤anel 20
2 Getting Started....22
2.1 Starting >p and Shutting Down the DVR 22
2.1.1 Starting the DVR....22
2.1.2 Shutting Down/Logging Out/Rebooting the DVR 22
2.2 Activating the Device 23
2.3 >sing the >nlock ≤attern for Login 24
2.3.1 Configuring the >nlock ≤attern .....25
2.3.2 Logging in via >nlock ≤attern .....26
2.3.3 Login and Logout....27
2.3.3.1 >ser Login....27
2.3.4 Resetting Your ≤assword 28
2.3.5 Adding and Connecting I≤ Cameras....30
2.3.5.1 Activating an I≤ Camera....30
2.3.6 Adding an Online I≤ Camera 33
2.3.7 Editing the Connected I≤ Camera 37
2.3.8 Configuring Signal Input Channel....39
2.3.9 Configuring 5 +≤ Long Distance =transmission....40
3 Live View....41
3.1 Introduction 41
3.2 Live View Icons....41
3.3 Live View +ode Operations....42
3.3.1 >sing the +ouse in Live View....43
3.3.2 Switching +ain/Aux Output 43
3.3.3 Quick Setting =oulbar in Live View +ode 44
3.4 Channel-sing >SB Flash Drives, >SB HDDs....103
5.14.2 Backup by Event Search....105
5.14.3 Back >p Video Clips....106
5.15 +anaging Backup Devices 107
6 Alarm Settings....108
6.1 Setting +otion Detection....108
6.2 Setting Sensor Alarms....110
6.2.1 Detecting Video Loss....112
6.2.2 Detecting Video =ampering 113
6.3 Setting All-Day Video Quality Diagnostics 115
6.3 Setting All-Day Video Quality Diagnostics 115
6.4 Handling Exceptions....116
7 Setting Alarm Response Actions....118
8 ≤OS Configuration....121
8.1 Configuring ≤OS Settings....121
8.2 Configuring Overlay Channel 125
8.3 Configuring ≤OS Alarm....126
9 VCA Alarm 128
9.1 Face Detection 128
9.2 Vehicle Detection....130
9.3 Line Crossing Detection....131
9.4 Intrusion Detection....133
9.5 Region Entrance Detection 134
9.6 Region Exiting Detection....135
9.7 Loitering Detection 136
9.8 ≤eople Gathering Detection....136
9.9 Fast +oving Detection....136
9.10 ≤arking Detection....136
9.11 >nattended Baggage Detection 137
9.12 Object Removal Detection....137
9.13 Audio Exception Detection 137
9.14 Defocus Detection....138
9.15 Sudden Scene Change....139
9.16 ≤IR Alarm....139
10 VCA Search....140
10.1 Behavior Search 140
10.2 ≤late Search....141
10.3 ≤eople Counting....142
10.4 Heat +ap....143
11 ×network Settings....144
11.1 Configuring General Settings 144
11.2 Configuring Advanced Settings....146
11.2.1 Configuring ≤≤≤oE Settings....146
11.2.2 Configuring Hik-Connect....147
11.2.3 Configuring DD×S....149
11.2.4 Configuring x=≤ Server 150
11.2.5 Configuring ×A=....151
11.2.6 Configuring +ore Settings....153
11.2.7 Configuring H==≤S ≤ort....154
11.2.8 Configuring E-+ail....156
11.2.9 Checking ×etwork =raffic....158
11.3 Configuring × network Detection ..... 159
11.3.1 =esting × network Delay and ≤acket Loss 159
11.3.2 Exporting × network ≤acket ...... 159
11.3.3 Checking ×network Status....160
11.3.4 Checking x network Statistics....161
12 RAID....162
12.1 Configuring Array 162
12.1.1 Enable RAID....163
12.1.2 One-=ouch Configuration 163
12.1.3 +anually Creating Array....165
12.1.4 Rebuilding Array....167
12.1.5 Automatically Rebuilding Array 168
12.1.6 +anually Rebuilding Array....169
12.1.7 Deleting Array 170
13 Checking and Editing Firmware 171
14 HDD +anagement 172
14.1 Initializing HDDs....172
14.2 +anaging ×etwork HDD 174
14.3 +anaging HDD Group....176
14.3.1 Setting HDD Groups 176
14.4 Setting HDD ≤property....178
14.5 Configuring Quota +ode 179
14.6 Configuring Cloud Storage 181
14.7 Configuring Disk Clone....183
14.8 Checking HDD Status....185
14.9 Checking S.+A.R.= Information....186
14.10 Detecting Bad Sectors 186
14.11 Configuring HDD Error Alarms 187
15 Camera Settings....188
15.1 Configuring OSD Settings....188
15.2 Configuring ≤rivacy +ask....190
15.3 Configuring Video ≤parameters....190
15.3.1 Configuring Image Settings....190
15.3.2 Configuring Camera ≤ parameters Settings....191
16 DVR +anagement and +aintenance....193
16.1 Viewing System Information....193
16.2 Searching Log Files....193
16.3 Importing/Exporting I≤ Camera Info....196
16.4 Importing/Exporting Configuration Files....196
16.5 >pgrading System ....197
16.5.1 >pgrading by Local Backup Device 197
16.5.2 >pgrading by F=≤....197
16.6 >pgrading Camera....198
16.7 Restoring Default Settings....199
17 Other 200
17.1 Configuring General Settings 200
17.2 Configuring RS-232 Serial ≤ort 201
17.3 Configuring DS= Settings....202
17.4 Configuring +ore Settings 202
17.5 +anaging >ser Accounts 205
17.5.1 Adding a >ser....205
17.5.2 Deleting a >ser....208
17.5.3 Editing a >ser 209
18 Appendix 212
18.1 Specifications 212
18.1.1 DS-73xxH>I-K4 212
18.1.2 DS-90xxH>I-K8 213
18.1.3 DS-73xxHQI-K4 214
18.2 Glossary....215
18.3 =roubleshooting....216
18.4 List of Compatible Hikvision I≤ Cameras....220
18.5 List of Compatible = hird-≤arty I ≤ Cameras ......220
NOTE/ Figures in this manual are for illustration only; your screens may differ.
1 Introduction
1.1 Front ≤anel

text_image
Hikvision
7
1
2
4
8
3
6
5
Figure 1, DS-73xxH>I-K4, DS-73xxHQI-K4 Front ≤anel
=able 1-1 DS-73xxH>I-K4, DS-73xxHQI-K4 Front ≤anel Description
x0. xame Function Description 1 ≤OVER =urns green when DVR is powered up READY =urnsgreen, indicating that the DVR is functioning properly S=A=>S =urns green when device is controlled by an IR remote =urns red when controlled by a keyboard and purple when IR remote and keyboard is used at the same time ALAR+ =urns red when a sensor alarm is detected HDD Flickers red when data is being read from or written to HDD =x/Rx Flickers green when network connection is functioning properly 2 DVD-R/V Slot for DVD-R/V 3 Composite Keys SHIF= Switches between the numeric or letter input and functions of the composite keys. (Input letter or numbers when the light is out; Realize functions when the light is red.) 1/+Ex> Enters numeral "1"Accessesthe main menu interface 2/ABC/F1 Enters numeral "2" Enters letters "ABC" =he F1 button when used in a list field will select all items in the list =urns on/off ≤=< light in ≤=< Control mode, and use it to zoom out the image Switches between main and spot video output in live view or playback mode. 3/DEF/F2 Enters numeral "3" Enters letters "DEF" >ses the F2 button is used to change the tab pages <ooms in the image in ≤=< control mode 4/GHI/ESC Enters numeral "4" Enters letters "GHI" Exits and back to the previous menu 5/JKL/EDI= Enters numeral "5" Enters letters "JKL" Deletescharacters before cursor Check the checkbox and select the Ox/OFF switch Starts/stops record clipping in playback 6/+×O/≤LAY Enters numeral "6" Enters letters "+×O" Accesses to playback interface in ≤slayback mode 7/≤QRS/REC Enters numeral "7" Enters letters "≤QRS" Accesses to manual record interface+ anually enables/disables record 8/=>V/≤=< Enters numeral "8" Enters letters "=>V" Accesses ≤=< control interface 9/√XY</≤REV Enters numeral "9" Enters letters "√XY<" +ulti-channel display in live view 0/A Enters numeral "0" ×0. ×ame Function Description Shifts the input methods in the editing text field. (>pper and lowercase, alphabet, symbols or numeric input). 4 DIREC=IO× ×avigates between different fields and items in menus >ses the >p and Down button s to speed up and slow down the playing of video files in ≤layback mode.=he Left and Right button will select the next and previous record files. Cycles through channels in Live View mode. Controlsthe movement of the ≤=< camera in ≤=< control mode Ex=ER Confirms selection in any of the menu modes Checks the checkbox ≤lays or pauses the playing of video files in ≤layback mode Advances the video by a single frame in single-frame ≤layback mode Stops/starts auto switch in Auto-switch mode 5 ≤OVER ≤ower on/off switch 6 JOG SH>=LE Control Moves the active selection up and down in a menu Cycles through different channels in live view mode Jumps 30s forward/backward in video files in the playback mode Controlsthe movement of the ≤=< camera in ≤=< control mode Moves the active selection up and down in a menu 7 >SB Interface >niversal Serial Bus (>SB) ports for additional devices such as >SB mous e and >SB Hard Disk Drive (HDD) 8 IR Receiver Receiver for IR remote control

text_image
1
HIKVISION
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
HITKVISION
100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100
DIN
SOT
AVTS
RLOOMA
FOCS+
INT
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
Figure 2, DS-90xxH>I-K8 Front ≤anel
=able 1-2 DS-90xxH>I-K8 Front ≤anel Description
×0. ×ame Function Description 1 ALARM Red when a sensor alarm is detected READY Blue, indicating that the DVR is functioning properly S=A=>S Blue when device is controlled by an IR remote Red when controlled by a keyboard and purple when IR remote and keyboard is used at the same time HDD Flickers red when data is being read from or written to HDD MODEM Flickers blue when network connection is functioning properly =x/Rx Blue when the device is in armed status; at this time, an alarm is enabled when an event is detected. G>ARD =urns off when the device is unarmed. =he arm/disarm status can be changed by pressing and holding on the ESC button for more than 3 seconds in live view mode. Red when a sensor alarm is detected 2 IR Receiver Receiver for IR remote 3 Front ≤anel Lock Lock or unlock the panel by the key 4 DVD-R/V Slot for DVD-R/V 5 Alphanumeric Buttons Switches to the corresponding channel in live view or ≤=< control mode Inputs numbers and characters in edit mode Switches between different channels in playback mode Blue when the corresponding channel is recording; turns red when the channel is in network transmission status; turns pink when the channel is recording and transmitting. 6 >SB Interfaces >niversal Serial Bus ports for additional devices such as >S B mouse and >SB Hard Disk Drive (HDD) 7 ESC Returns to the previous menu ≤resses for arming/disarming the device in live view mode REC/SHO= Enters the Manual Record settings menu ≤resses this button followed by a numeric button to call a ≤=< preset in ≤=< control settings =urns audio on/off in the playback mode ≤LAY/A>=0 Enters the playback mode Automatically scans in the ≤=< control menu <OOM+ No. Name Function Description A/FOC>S+ Adjusts focus in the ≤=< Control menu Switches between input methods (upper and lower case alphabet, symbols and numeric input). EDI=/IRIS+ Edits text fields. when editing text fields, it also deletes the ch aracter in front of the cursor Checks the checkbox in the checkbox fields Adjusts the iris of the camera in ≤=< control mode Generates video clips for backup in playback mode Enters/exits the folder of >SB device and eSA=A HDD MAIN/S≤O=/<OOM- Switches between main and spot output <ooms out the image in ≤=< control mode F1/LIGH= Selects all items on the list when used in a list field =urns on/off ≤=< light (if applicable) in ≤=< control mode Switches between play and reverse play in playback mode F2/A>X Cycles through tab pages Switches between channels in synchronous playback mode MEN>/VI≤ER Returns to the Main menu (after successful login) ≤resses and holds the button for five seconds to turn off audible key beep Starts wiper (if applicable) in ≤=< control mode Shows/hides the control interface in playback mode ≤REV/FOC>S- Switches between single screen and multi-screen mode Adjusts the focus in conjunction with the A/FOC>S+ button in ≤=< control mode ≤=</IRIS- Enters the ≤=< Control mode Adjusts the iris of the ≤=< camera in ≤=< control mode 8 DIREC=ION Navigates between different fields and items in menus >ses the >p and Down buttons to speed up and slow down the playing of video files in ≤slayback mode. =he Left and Right button will select the next and previous record files. Cycles through channels in Live View mode Controls the movement of the ≤=< camera in ≤=< control mode EN=ER Confirms selection in any of the menu modes. Checks the checkbox ≤lays or pauses the playing of video files in ≤slayback mode Advances the video by a single frame in single-frame ≤slayback mode Stops/starts auto switch in Auto-switch mode 9 JOG SH>=LE Control Moves the active selection up and down in a menu Cycles through different channels in live view mode Jumps 30s forward/backward in video files in the playback mode Controls the movement of the ≤=< camera in ≤=< control mode 10 ≤OVER ON/OFF ≤ower on/off switch
1.2 IR Remote Control Operations
=he DVR may also be controlled with the included IR remote control.

NOTE
If your system is secured with a password pattern, press ESC on the remote to display the password input window and input the password by using a keyboard.

NOTE
Batteries (2 × AAA) must be installed before operation.

text_image
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
ABC
JKI
TUV
MNO
MNO
ABC
JKI
TUV
MNO
ABC
JKI
TUV
MNO
ABC
JKI
TUV
MNO
ABC
JKI
TUV
MNO
ABC
JKI
TUV
MNO
ABC
JKI
TUV
MNO
ABC
JKI
TUV
MNO
ABC
JKI
TUV
MNO
ABC
JKI
TUV
MNO
ABC
JKI
TUV
Figure 3, Remote Control
=he keys on the remote control resemble the ones found on the front panel. See =able 1-3.
=able 1-3 Description of the IR Remote Control Buttons
×o. ×ame Description 1 ≤OVER ≤ower on/off the device. ≤ower on/off the device by pressing and holding the button for 5 seconds. 2 ME×> Button ≤ress the button to return to the main menu (after successful login). ≤ress and hold the button for 5 seconds will turn off audible key beep. In ≤=< Control mode, the ME×> button will start wiper (if applicable). In ≤slayback mode, it is used to show/hide the control interface. 3 REC Button Enter the Manual Record setting menu. In ≤=< control settings, press the button and then you can call a ≤=< preset by pressing ×umeric button. It is also used to turn audio on/off in the ≤slayback mode. 4 DIREC=IO× Button ×avgiate between different fields and items in menus. In the ≤slayback mode, the >p and Down button is used to speed up and slow down recorded video. =he Left and Right button will select the next and previous record files. In Live View mode, these buttons can be used to cycle through channels. In ≤=< control mode, it can control the movement of the ≤=< camera. Ex=ER Button Confirm selection in any of the menu modes. It can also be used to tick checkbox fields. In ≤slayback mode, it can be used to play or pause the video. In single-frame ≤slayback mode, pressing the button will advance the video by a single frame. 5 ≤=< Button In Auto-switch mode, it can be used to stop /start auto switch. 6 DEV Enables/Disables Remote Control. 7 Alphanumeric Buttons Switch to the corresponding channel in Live view or ≤=< Control mode. Input numbers and characters in Edit mode. Switch between different channels in the ≤slayback mode. 8 ESC Button Back to the previous menu. ≤ress for Arming/disarming the device in Live View mode. 9 ≤LAY Button =he button is used to enter the All-day ≤slayback mode. It is also used to auto scan in the ≤=< Control menu. 10 ≤REV Button Switch between single screen and multi-screen mode. In ≤=< Control mode, it is used to adjust the focus in conjunction with the A/FOC>S+ button.
1.2.1 = roubleshooting Remote Control

NOTE
+ake sure batteries have been installed properly. Also, note that the remote control must be aimed at the IR receiver on the ×VR front panel.
If there is no response after pressing any button on the remote, follow the procedure below to troubleshoot.
1. Go to M enu > Configuration > General > More Settings by operating the front control panel or the mouse.
2. Check and remember the DVR ×o. =he default DVR ×o. is 255. =his number valid for all IR remote controls.
3. ≤ress DEV on the remote control.
4. Enter the DVR ×o. in Step 2.
5. ≤ress ENTER on the remote.
If the front panel Status indicator turns blue, the remote control is operating properly. If the Status indicator does not turn blue and there is no response, check the following:
- Batteries are installed correctly and the polarities are not reversed.
- Batteries are fresh and not out of charge.
• IR receiver is not obstructed.
If the remote still does not function, change the remote and try again, or contact the device provider.
1.3 >SB +ouse Operation
A regular 3-button (Left/Right/Scroll-wheel) >SB mouse can also be used with this DVR.
1. ≤lug mouse into a >SB interface on the DVR. =he mouse should automatically be detected. If not, the mouse might not be compatible. Refer to your mouse provider.
=able 1-4 Description of the +ouse Control
xame Action Description Left-Click Single-Click Live view: Select channel and show the quick set menu.+enu: Select and enter Double-Click Live view: Switch between single-screen and multi-screen. Drag ≤=< control: Wheeling.≤rivacy mask and motion detection: Select target area.Digital zoom-in: Drag and select target area.Live view: Drag channel/time bar. Right-Click Single-Click Live view: Show menu.+enu: Exit current menu to upper level menu. Scroll-vheel Scrolling up Live view: ≤previous screen.+enu: ≤previous item. Scrolling down Live view: ×ext screen.+enu: ×ext item.
1.4 Input + method Description

text_image
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0
q w e r t y u i o p
a s d f g h j k l
↑ z x c v b n m ←x
123/..
Figure 4, Soft Keyboard
Description of the buttons on the soft keyboard:
=able 1-5 Description of the Soft Keyboard Icons
Icon Description Icon Description 0 ... 9 ×umber A ... Z English letter Lowercase/>ppercase Backspace 123/.. ABC Switch the keyboard Space ≤ositioning the cursor Enter #+= Symbols Reserved
1.5 Rear ≤anel

NOTE
=he rear panel varies by model. Refer to the actual product. =he following figures are for reference only.

text_image
AUDIO IN
AUDIO OUT
LINE IN
1 2 3 7 13
15 14
eSATA
VIDEO IN
Video Out
HDMI1
HDMI2
VGA
LAN2
RS-232
LAN1
RS-485 KR ALABIN OUT
ALABIN
1 4 2 5 8 9 12 11
Figure 5, DS-73xxH>I-K4 Rear ≤anel

text_image
AUDIO IN
AUDIO OUT
LINE IN
1 2 3 7 13
15 14
eSATA
1 2 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
VIDEO IN
Video Out
R5-232
HDMI2
VGA
LAN
RS-480
RS-A/ANIN OUT
AUDIO IN
1 4 2 5 8 9 12 11
Figure 6, DS-73xxHQI-K4 Rear ≤anel

text_image
3
7 13 6 15 14 16
VGA
CVBS LINE IN
LOOP OUT
AUDIO OUT
eSATA
RS-232 LAN2
LAN1 ALAMIN OUT
1 4 2 5 8 9 12
VIDEO OUT
HDMI2
HDMI1 VGA LAN1
AUDIO IN
Figure 7, DS-90xxH>I-K8 Rear ≤anel
Table 1-6 Description of DS-73xxH>I-K4, DS-73xxHQI-K4, and DS90xxH>I-K8 Rear ≤anel
No. Item Description 1 VIDEO IN BNC interface for TurboHD and analog video input. 2 VIDEO O>T BNC connector for video output. 3 A>DIO IN/LOO≤ O>T (for DS-90xxH>I-K8) RCA connector 4 >SB ≤ort >niversal Serial Bus (>SB) port for additional devices. 5 HDMI1/VGF Simultaneous HDMI1/VGA output. Display local video output and menu. 6 HDMI2 HDMI2 video output connector (DS-73xxH>I-K4 and DS-90xxH>I-K8) 7 A>DIO O>T RCA connector 8 Network Interface Connector for network (DS-73xxH>I-K4 and DS-90xxH>I-K8 = x2, DS-73xxH>I-K4 = x1) 9 RS -485 and Alarm Interface Connector for RS-485 devices. T+ and T- pins connect toR+ and R - pins of ≤T D+, D- pin connects to Ta, Tb pin of controller. For cascading devices, the first DVR's D+, D- pin should be connected with the D+, D- pin of the next DVR. Connector for alarm input Connector for alarm output 10 ≤ower Supply 100 to240 VAC power supply 11 ≤ower Switch Switch for turning on/off the device 12 GND Ground 13 LINE IN BNC connector for audio input 14 eSATA Connects external SATA HDD, CD/DVC-RV 15 RS-232 Interface Connector for RS-232 devices 16 ALARM O>T Connector for alarm output 17 A>DIO IN (for DS-90xxH>I-K8) RCA connector
2 Getting Started
2.1 Starting Up and Shutting Down the DVR
Purpose
≤roper startup and shutdown procedures are crucial to expanding the life of the DVR.
+efore You Start
Check that the voltage of the power supply is the same with the DVR's requirement, and the ground connection is working properly.
2.1.1 Starting the DVR
Check that the power supply is plugged into an electrical outlet. It is HIGHLY recommended that an Uninterruptible ≤ ower Supply (U ≤ S) be used in conjunction with the device.
Turn on the power switch on the rear panel, and the ≤ lower indicator LED should turn on indicating that the unit begins to start up.
After startup, the ≤ower indicator LED remains on.
2.1.2 Shutting Down/Logging Out/Rebooting the DVR
1. Go to Menu > Maintenance.

text_image
System Maintenance
System Logs
Import/Export
Upgrade
Default
Network Detect
HDD Detect
Start Time
09-23-2017
00:00:30
End Time
09-23-2017
23:59:59
Major Type
Shutdown
Miner Type
Alarm Input
Alarm Output
Motion Detect
Motion Detect
Video Tamper
Video Tamper
Kosovo Started
POS Stopped
Video Quality Diagnostics Alarm Started
Logout
Shutdown
Reboot
Cancel
Export All
Search
Figure 8, Shutdown Menu
2. Click Ⓞ (lower left corner of screen) to display the Shutdown window.
3. Click one of the following:
\- Logout – Logs the current user out of the system.
- Shutdown – Shuts system down.
- Reboot – Shuts system down and reboots.
-
text_image
Attention
? Shut down the system?
Yes No
Figure 9, Shutdown ≤rompt
2.2 Activating the Device
Purpose
For the first-time access, you need to activate the device by setting an admin password. ×o operation is allowed before activation. You can also activate the device via Veb Browser, SAD≤, or Client Software.
1. Input the same password in the
text_image
Activation
User Name
Create New Password
Confirm New Password
admin
Hikvision1
Strong
Valid password range [8-16]. You can use a combination of numbers,
lowercase, uppercase and special character for your password with at
least two kinds of them contained.
OK Cancel
Figure 10, Settings Admin ≤assword

WARNING
STRON" P4SSWOR' RENOTE
Clear text password is supported. Click 📄 to see the clear text of the password. Click the icon again and the password again becomes invisible.
3. After the device is activated, the Attention box pops up as below.

text_image
Attention
The device is activated. Properly keep your password. Export the GUID file for password resetting?
Yes No
Figure 11, Attention Window
4. (Optional) Click Yes to export the G>ID. =he Reset ≤assword interface pops up. Click Export to export the G>ID to the >SB flash drive for password resetting.

text_image
Reset Password
Device Name
USB Flash Disk 1-1
Refresh
Name Size Type Edit Date
Folder 11-18-2015 11:20:43
GUID_606524190_20161118112048.bin 128B File 11-18-2016 11:20:48
Free Space 7170.54MB
New Folder Export Back
Figure 12, Export G>ID
5. After exporting the G>ID, the Attention box pops up as below. Click Yes to duplicate the password or No to cancel it.

text_image
Attention
Duplicate the password to IP cameras
that are connected with default protocol.
Yes No
Figure 13, Duplicate the ≤assword
2.3 >sing the >nlock ≤attern for Login
Purpose
An admin can configure an unlock pattern for device login.
2.3.1 Configuring the >nlock ≤attern
After the device is activated, enter the following interface to configure the device unlock pattern.

text_image
Set Unlock Pattern
Draw the unlock pattern first.
Figure 14, Set >nlock ≤attern
1. >se the mouse to draw a pattern among the nine dots on the screen. Release the mouse when the pattern is done.

flowchart
graph TD
A["Start"] --> B{Decision}
B -->|Yes| C["OK"]
B -->|No| D["End"]
C --> E["Action"]
D --> F["Action"]
Figure 15, Draw the ≤attern
i NOTE
Connect at least four dots to draw the pattern.
Each dot can be connected only once.
2. Draw the same pattern again to confirm it. When the two patterns match, the pattern is configured successfully.

text_image
Set Unlock Pattern
Draw pattern again to confirm.
Figure 16, Confirm the ≤attern
If the two patterns are different, you must set the pattern again.

text_image
Set Unlock Pattern
The two patterns are different. Try
again.
Figure 17, Reset the ≤attern
2.3.2 Logging in via >nlock ≤attern

NOTE
Only the admin user has the permission to unlock the device.
Configure the pattern first before unlocking.
1. Right-click the mouse on the screen and select the menu to enter the interface.

text_image
Unlock
admin
Draw the unlock pattern first.
Forget My P...
Switch User
Figure 18, Draw the >nlock ≤attern
2. Draw the pre-defined pattern to unlock to enter the menu operation.
i NOTE
You can right click the mouse to log in via the normal mode.
If you have forgotten your pattern, you can select the "orget My Pattern or Switch User option to enter the normal login dialog box.
when the pattern you draw is different from the pattern you have configured, try again.
If you draw the wrong pattern seven times, the account will lock for one minute.

text_image
Login
User Name admin
Password
Forget Password OK Cancel
Figure 19, ×normal Login Dialog Box
2.3.3 Login and Logout
2.3.3.1 >ser Login
Purpose
You must log in to the device before operating the menu and other functions.
1. Select the User Name in the drop-down list.

text_image
Login
User Name admin
Password
Forget Password OK Cancel
Figure 20, Login Interface
2. Input the Password.
3. Click OK to log in.

NOTE
In the Login interface, for the admin user, if you have entered the wrong password seven times, the account will be locked for 60 seconds. For operators, if you have entered the wrong password for five times, the account will be locked for 60 seconds.

text_image
Attention
Incorrect password. You still have 6 chances.
Please try again.
OK
Figure 21, >ser Account ≤rotection for the Admin

text_image
Attention
Incorrect password. You still have 4 chances.
Please try again.
OK
Figure 22, >ser Account ≤rotection for the Operator
2.3.4 Resetting Your ≤assword
Purpose
If you forget the admin password, you can reset the password by importing the G>ID file, which was exported and saved in the local >SB flash drive after you activated the device.
1. On the user login interface, click "orget Password to enter the Import G>ID interface.

text_image
Reset Password
Device Name USB Flash Disk 1-1 Refresh
Name Size Type Edit Date Delete Play
4.bmp 6750.06KB File 09-02-2016 11:52:28
5.bmp 6750.06KB File 09-02-2016 11:52:32
6.bmp 6750.06KB File 09-02-2016 11:52:42
7.bmp 6750.06KB File 09-02-2016 11:52:10
8.bmp 6750.06KB File 09-02-2016 11:52:16
9.bmp 6750.06KB File 09-02-2016 11:52:24
GUID_583574624_20160... 12GB File 09-09-2016 14:10:37
Free Space 14.26GB
New Folder Import Back
Figure 23, Import G>ID
2. Select the G>ID file from the >SB flash drive and click Import to pop up the Reset ≤assword interface.

text_image
Reset Password
User Name admin
Create New Pass...
Confirm New Pass...
✓ Valid password range [8-16]. You can use a combination of numbers,
lowercase, uppercase and special character for your password with at
least two kinds of them contained.
OK Cancel
Figure 24, Reset ≤assword
3. Input the new password and confirm the password.
4. Click OK to save the new password. =hen the Attention box pops up as shown below.

text_image
Attention
The password is reset. The GUID file is ineffective. Export a new GUID file.
OK
Figure 25, G>ID File Imported
5. Click OK and the Attention box as below pops up to remind you to duplicate the password of the device to I ≤ cameras that are connected with default protocol. Click Yes to duplicate the password or No to cancel it.

text_image
Attention
Duplicate the password to IP cameras
that are connected with default protocol.
Yes No
Figure 26, Duplicate the ≤assword
i NOTE
=o retrieve a forgotten password, you must export the G>ID file first.
Once the password is reset, the G>ID file will be invalid. You can export a new G>ID file.
2.3.5 Adding and Connecting I≤ Cameras
2.3.5.1 Activating an I≤ Camera
Purpose
Before adding the camera, make sure the I≤ camera to be added is in active status.
1. Select Add IP Camera from the right-click menu in live view mode or go to Menu> Camera> IP Camera.
For the I≤ camera detected online in the same network segment, the Security status shows whether it is active or inactive.

text_image
Cameras Setup
IP Camera IP Camera Import/Export
Camera
Add/Delete Status Security IP Camera Add/ Edit Upgr Camera Name Protocol
D1 20E2103 HIKVISION
D2 Strong Pass... 192.168.10.4 2DE2103
Strong Pass... 192.168.10.109 4A25 HIKVISION
Active 192.168.10.2
Active 192.168.10.6
Active 192.168.10.7
Active 192.168.10.63
Active 192.168.10.110
HIKVISION
Hikvision
Hikvision
Hikvision
Hikvision
Refresh One-touch Activ Upgrade Delete One-touch Adding Custom Adding
Max. IP Camera Number: 2
Net Receive Mio Bandwidth: 120Mbps
Figure 27, I≤ Camera +anagement Interface
2. Click the inactive icon of the camera to enter the following interface to activate it. You can also select multiple cameras
from the list and click the One-touch 4activate to activate the cameras in batch.

text_image
Activation
User Name: admin
Password:
Valid password range [8-16]. You can
use a combination of numbers,
lowercase, uppercase and special
character for your password with at least
two kinds of them contained.
Confirm New Password
Ok Cancel
Figure 28, Activate the Camera
3. Set the password of the camera to activate it.
Use 4dmin Password: If you check this checkbox, the camera(s) will be configured with the admin password of the operating DVR.
text_image
Activation
User Name: admin
Password: •••••••••
RISKY
Valid password range [8-16]. You can
use a combination of numbers,
lowercase, uppercase and special
character for your password with at least
two kinds of them contained.
Confirm New Password: ••••••••••|
Ok Cancel
Figure 29, Level 0 (Inadequate) Strength ≤assword

text_image
Activation
User Name: admin
Password: **********
ATTENTION
Invalid Password
RISKY
No kind of them contained.
Confirm New Password: ********#
Ok Cancel
Figure 30, Invalid ≤assword +essay

text_image
Activation
User Name: admin
Password: •••••••••
WEAK
Valid password range [8-16]. You can
use a combination of numbers,
lowercase, uppercase and special
character for your password with at least
two kinds of them contained.
Confirm New Password: ••••••••••
Ok Cancel
Figure 31, Level 1 ≤ password Strength

text_image
Activation
User Name: admin
Password: *****
FAIR
Valid password range [8-16]. You can
use a combination of numbers,
lowercase, uppercase and special
character for your password with at least
two kinds of them contained.
Confirm New Password: *****
Ok Cancel
Figure 32, Level 2 ≤ password Strength

text_image
Activation
User Name: admin
Password: •••••••••
Strong
Valid password range [8-16]. You can
use a combination of numbers,
lowercase, uppercase and special
character for your password with at least
two kinds of them contained.
Confirm New Password: ••••••••••
Ok Cancel
Figure 33, Level 3 and Level 4 ≤ password Strength

WARNING
STRONG PASSWORD RECOMMENDED – ve highly recommend you create a strong password of your own choosing (using a minimum of eight characters, including at least three of the following categories: upper case letters, lower case letters, numbers, and special characters) in order to increase the security of your product. Ve also recommend that you reset your password regularly. Especially in high security systems, resetting the password monthly or weekly can better protect your product.
4. Click OK to finish activating the I≤ camera.=he camera security status will change to Active.
2.3.6 Adding an Online I≤ Camera
Purpose
Before you can get a live view or record of the video, add the network cameras to the device's connection list.
Before You Start
Ensure the network connection is valid and correct.
- OPTION 1
1. Select Add IP Camera from the right-click menu in live view mode or go to Menu > Camera > IP Camera.

text_image
Cameras Setup
Analog IP Camera IP Camera ImportExport
P Cameras List
Camera ID: 001200000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
IPC Status: Connected Connected and Support Preview Here Not Connected
Open
Week Px: 19.163.167
Camera 51
HKVISION DS-2CD4224F-ZS 8888
443716488
V5.3 Build 150...
Active 192 188 254...
HKVISION DS-2CD2143FW... 8888
498375488
V5.3 Build 150...
Active 192 188 254...
HKVISION DS-2CD4185F-Z 8888
510891983
V5.3 Build 150...
Active 192 188 254...
HKVISION DS-ZDE2185-DE... 8888
497555561
V5.3 Build 150...
Active 192 188 254...
HKVISION DS-2CD4333FW... 8888
506634726
V5.3 Build 151...
Active 192 188 254...
HKVISION DS-2CD4A25FW... 8888
579492463
V5.3 Build 169...
Active 192 188 254...
HKVISION DS-2CD4A5FE-ZD1 8888
511137153
V5.3 Build 169...
Active 192 188 254...
HKVISION DS-2CD4333FAD-1888
456332664
V5.3 Build 151...
Active 192 188 254...
HKVISION DS-2CD4113FW... 8888
496329537
V5.3 Build 159...
Active 192 188 254...
HKVISION DS-2CD4WMEFS... 8888
452755562
V5.3 Build 161...
Options
One-touch Active
Upgrade
Details
One-touch Adding
Custom Adding
Figure 34, I≤ Camera +anagement Interface
2. Online cameras with the same network segment will be detected and displayed in the camera list.
3. Select the I≤ camera from the list and click add the camera (with the same admin password of the DVR). Or you can click One-touch Adding to add all cameras (with the same admin password) from the list.
i NOTE
+ake sure the camera to add has already been activated by setting the admin password, and the admin password of the camera is the same as the DVR's.
4. (Optional) Check the Enable H.265 checkbox (for Initial Access) for the connected I≤ camera supporting H.265.=hen the I≤ camera will be encoded with H.265.
5. (For encoders with multiple channels only) check the Channel ≤ort checkbox in the pop-up window, as shown in the following figure, and click OK to add multiple channels.

text_image
Channel Port
✓ Channel Port ✓ 1 ✓ 2 ✓ 3 ✓ 4 ✓ 5
OK Cancel
Figure 35, Select + multiple Channels
• OPTION 2
1. On the I≤ Camera +anagement interface, click
text_image
Add IP Camera (Custom)
1 192.168.254.36 1 DS-2CD4... HIKVISION 8000
2 192.168.254.196 1 DS-2CD4... HIKVISION 8000
3 10.102.102.187 1 DS-2CD6... HIKVISION 8000
4 192.168.254.146 1 DS-2CD6... HIKVISION 8000
5 192.168.254.103 1 DS-2CD4... HIKVISION 8000
6 192.168.254.116 1 DS-2CD4... HIKVISION 8000
7 192.168.254.24 1 DS-2CD4 HIKVISION 8000
IP Camera Address 192.168.254.36
Protocol HIKVISION
Management Port 8000
User Name admin
Admin Password
Search Add Cancel
Figure 36, Custom Adding I≤ Camera Interface
2. You can edit the I ≤ address, protocol, management port, and other information of the I ≤ camera to be added.

NOTE
If the I≤ camera to add has not been activated, activate it from the I≤ camera list on the IP
text_image
IP Camera Management
Camera... Add/Delete Status Security IP Camera Address Edit Upgrade Camera No
D1 Strong Pass 10.16.1.250 IPdome
Active 10.16.2.109
Active 10.16.2.222
Refresh One-touch Activ Upgrade Delete One-touch Adding Custom Adding
Enable H.215 (For Initial Access)
Net Receive Idle Bandwidth: 318Mbps
Exit
Figure 37, Successfully Added I≤ Cameras
=able 1-7 Explanation of the Icons
Icon Explanation Icon Explanation 
EDIT (Pen): Press to edit basic IP camera parameters 
ADD (+): Press to add the detected IP camera 
DISCONNECTED (!): Camera is disconnected; click the icon to get camera's exception information 
DELETE (Trash Can): Press to delete the camera 
PLAY (Right Triangle): Play connected camera's live video 
ADVANCED (Gear): Press to go to advanced settings window. 
UPGRADE (Up Arrow): Upgrade the connected camera's firmware 
DASH: No advanced settings available for this camera 
REPAIR (?): Press to attempt to repair the connection Securitycolumn SECURITY: Shows camera status (active/inactive) or password strength (strong/medium/weak/risky)
4. (Optional) Check the E nable H.265 checkbox (For Initial Access) for the connected I≤ camera supporting H.265.=hen the I≤ camera will be encoded with H.265.
2.3.7 Editing the Connected I≤ Camera
Purpose
After adding the I≤ cameras, the basic information of the camera is listed on the interface, and you can configure the basic settings of the I≤ cameras.
1. Click ☑ to edit the parameters. You can edit the I≤ address, protocol, and other parameters.

text_image
Edit IP Camera
IP Camera No. D1
IP Camera Address 10.9.6.48
Protocol HIKVISION
Management Port 8000
Video Port 1
Camera User Name adults
Camera Password
OK Cancel
Figure 38, Edit I≤ Camera
text_image
Network Password
Advance Settings
IP Camera No. D2
IP Camera Address 10.102.102.2
Management Port 8000
Apply OK Cancel
Figure 39, ×network Configuration of the Camera
4. You can edit the camera network information and the password.

text_image
Advance Settings
Network Password
IP Camera No. D2
Current Password
New Password
Confirm
✓ Valid password range [8-16]. You can use a combination of numbers,
lowercase, uppercase and special character for your password with at
least two kinds of them contained.
Apply OK Cancel
Figure 40, ≤assword Configuration of the Camera
5. Click OK to save the settings and exit the interface.
2.3.8 Configuring Signal Input Channel

NOTE
This chapter is applicable only to DS-73xx/90xxHUI-K Series DVRs.
Purpose
You can configure the analog and I ≤ signal input types and enable 5 M ≤ long distance transmission.
1. Go to Menu > Camera > Signal Input Status.

text_image
Cameras Setup
Signal Input Status IP Camera IP Camera Import/Export
Camera HD/CVBS IP
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
A16
Max. IP Camera Number 2
5MP Long Distance Transmission
Apply
Figure 41, Signal Input Status
2. Check this checkbox to select different signal input types: HD/CVBS and I≤. If you select HD/CVBS, four types of analog signal inputs including TurboHD and CVBS can be connected randomly for the selected channel. If you select I≤, an I≤ camera can be connected to the selected channel.
3. Click 4pply to save the settings.
You can view the maximum number I≤ cameras in the Max. IP 2.3.9 Configuring 5 M≤ Long Distance Transmission

NOTE
This chapter is applicable only to HUI Series DVRs.
Purpose
You can configure 5 M≤ long distance transmission on the Signal Input Status interface.
1. Go to Menu > Camera > Signal Input Status.

text_image
Cameras Setup
Signal Import Status: IP Camera IP Camera Import/Export
Camera
A1
A2
A3
A4
Max. IP Camera Number
5MP Long Distance Transmission
HD/CVBC
Apply
Figure 42, Signal Input Status (for DS-73xx/90xxHUI Series)
2. Click enter the 5 M≤ Long Distance Transmission Settings interface.

text_image
Trigger Channel
Analog A1 A2 A3 A4
Apply OK Cancel
Figure 43, 5 +≤ Long Distance =transmission Settings
3. Check this checkbox to enable 5 +≤ Long Distance =transmission of the selected channel.
4. Click 4pply to save the settings.
3 Live View
3.1 Introduction
Live View shows the video image from each camera in real time. =he DVR will automatically enter Live View mode when powered on. It is also at the very top of the menu hierarchy, thus hitting ESC multiple times (depending on which menu you're on) will bring you back to Live View mode.
3.2 Live View Icons
In Live View mode, there are icons at the right top of the screen for each channel, showing the status of the record and alarms in the channel, so that you can know whether the channel is recorded, or if there are alarms as soon as possible.
=able 1-8 Description of Live View Icons
Icons Description 
Alarm (video loss, tampering, motion detection, VCA, or sensor alarm) [SWKS] Record (manual record, schedule record, motion detection, or alarm triggered record) [OXBS] Alarm & Record [Y8TS] Event/Exception (motion detection, sensor alarm, or exception information.
3.3 Live View Mode Operations
There are many functions provided in Live View mode. The functions are listed below.
• Single Screen: show only one screen on the monitor.
• Multi-screen: show multiple screens on the monitor simultaneously.
- Start Auto-switch: the screen is auto switched to the next one. You must set the dwell time for each screen on the configuration menu before enabling the auto-switch. Menu > Configuration > Live View > Dwell Time.
- Start Recording: normal record and motion detection record are supported.
• Output Mode: set the output mode to Standard, Bright, Gentle, or Vivid.
- Playback: play back the recorded videos for the current day.
- Aux/Main Monitor: the DVR checks the output interface connections to define the main and auxiliary output interfaces. When the aux output is enabled, the main output cannot perform any operations; you can perform some basic operations on the Live View mode for the Aux output.
There are two HDMI interfaces. HDMI1 and VGA interfaces share simultaneous output. The priority level for the main and aux output is HDMI2 > VGA/HDMI1. The CVBS output only serves as the aux output or Live View output.
Table 1-9 Priorities of Outputs
S.N. HDMI2 VGA/HDMI1 CVBS Main output Auxiliary output For Live View Output Only 1 √ √ √ or × HDMI2 VGA/HDMI1 CVBS 2 √ or × × √ or × HDMI2 CVBS VGA/HDMI1 3 × √ √ or × VGA/HDMI1 CVBS HDMI2
For other DVRs with CVBS output, the VGA/HDMI output is the main output, and the CVBS output is the aux output.
Table 1-10 Priorities of Outputs
S.N. HDMI VGA CVBS Main output Auxiliary output 1 or × or × or × VGA/HDMI CVBS

NOTE
√ means the interface is in use, × means the interface is out of use or the connection is invalid. HDMI, VGA, and CVBS can be used at the same time.
3.3.1 >sing the +ouse in Live View
Refer to =able 1-11 for the description of mouse operation in live view mode.
=able 1-11 +ouse Operation in Live View
×ame Description +enu Enter the main menu of the system by right clicking the mouse. Single Screen Switch to the single full screen by choosing channel number from the drop-down list. +ulti -Screen Adjust the screen layout by selecting from the drop-down list. ≤previous Screen Switch to the previous screen. ×ext Screen Switch to the next screen. Start/Stop Auto-Switch Enable/disable the auto-switch of the screens.
NOTE=he dwell time of the live view configuration must be set before using Start 4uto -Switch. Start Recording Start recording of all channels, Continuous Record, and +otion Detection Record are selectable from the drop-down list. Add I≤ Camera A shortcut to enter the I≤ camera management interface.(For HDVR series only) ≤layback Enter the playback interface and start playing back the video of the selected channel immediately ≤=< Control A shortcut to enter the ≤=< control interface of the selected camera. Output +ode Output +ode is configurable with Standard, Bright, Gentle and Vivid options. Aux +onitor Switch to the auxiliary output mode and the operation for the main output is disabled.
NOTEIf you enter Aux monitor mode and the Aux monitor is not connected, the mouse operation is disabled. You need to switch back to the +ain output with the F1 button on front panel or VOIP/MON button on IR remote control and then press the Enter button.

text_image
Common Menu
Menu
Single Screen
Multi-screen
Previous Screen
Next Screen
Start Auto-switch
Start Recording
Add IP Camera
Playback
PTZ Control
Output Mode
Figure 44, Right-click +enu
3.3.2 Switching +ain/Aux Output

NOTE
=he CVBS output only serves as the aux output or Live View output.
1. >se the mouse wheel to double-click on the HD+I1/VGA, or HD+I2, or HD+I/VGA output screen, and the following message box pops up.

text_image
Tip
Double-click the mouse again to
switch the auxiliary and main output?
Cancel
Figure 45, Switch Main and Aux Output
2. Use the mouse wheel to double-click on the screen ag ain to switch to the aux output, or click NOTE
You can select the Menu Output Mode under Menu > Configuration > General > More Settings to 4uto, HDMI1/VG4 and HDMI2 and then reboot the device to switch the main output.
3.3.3 Quick Setting Toolbar in Live View Mode
On the screen of each channel, there is a quick setting toolbar that appears when you click the screen.

text_image
Screenshot of a software toolbar with icons for video, audio, audio playback, and camera control functions
Figure 46, Quick Setting Toolbar
Refer to Table below for description of the Quick Setting Toolbar icons.
Table 1-12 Description of Quick Setting Toolbar Icons
Icons Description Icons Description Icons Description 
Start/Stop Manual Recording 
Instant Playback 
4udio On/Mute 
PTZ <ontrol [DW23] Digital Zoom [BXWW] Image Settings 

Face Detection [AQHW] Information [YKC0] [XSW4] Live View Strategy [WW06] Fisheye

Instant ≤ layback shows only the record in the last five minutes. If no record is found, it means there is no record during the last five minutes.

Digital Zoom zooms in the live image. You can zoom in the image to different proportions (1 to 16x) by moving the sliding bar. You can also scroll the mouse wheel to control the zoom in/out.

natural_image
Highway scene with multiple vehicles and residential buildings in the background (no visible text or symbols)
Figure 47, Digital
text_image
Image Settings
Time Segment 00:00-24:00
Mode Custom
146
255
255
OK
Figure 48, Image Settings

Enable Face Detection by clicking the icon. =he dialog pops up as shown in Figure 3-6. Click Yes and the full-screen live view of the channel is enabled. Click to exit from full-screen mode. You can configure face detection only when it is supported by the connected camera.

text_image
Attention
Enable face detection?
Yes No
Figure 49, Enable Face Detection

+ove the mouse onto the Information icon to show the real-time stream information, including the frame rate, bit rate, resolution, and stream type.

Figure 50, Information

NOTE
when an H.264 I≤ camera is connected, the stream type is displayed as H.264. when an I≤ camera supporting H.264+ is connected, the stream type is displayed as H.264+. when I≤ camera supporting H.265 is connected, the stream type is displayed as H.265. when I≤ camera supporting H.265+ is connected, the stream type is displayed as H.265+.

For analog cameras supporting VCA, click the icon to show the VCA information. =he configured or quadrilateral in the VCA configuration and target frame(s) will be shown on live view. Click the again to hide the VCA information.

text_image
12-13-2016 Tue 10:29:36
Camera 01
Figure 51, Enable VCA Information Overlay

NOTE
In Live View, only analog cameras support VCA information overlay.
Enable VCA function first before showing the VCA information.
=he VCA information is hidden by default. If the connected analog camera does not support VCA, the icon displays grey and cannot be operated.
For analog cameras, the VCA information includes line crossing detection and intrusion detection.
=he DVR supports VCA information overlay of only one channel. If you enable the function of one channel, the other channels will disable the function automatically.
Both single window and multi-window display modes support VCA information overlay.
Only the main output supports VCA information overlay. When switching to the aux output, the VCA information overlay of main output is disabled.
For analog cameras, if the camera number does not exceed the limit for line crossing detection and intrusion detection, the VCA information overlay can be enabled for all the analog cameras' enabled line crossing detection and intrusion detection. If the camera number exceeds the limit for line crossing detection, intrusion detection, and sudden scene change detection, only the cameras' enabled line crossing detection and intrusion detection support VCA information overlay. Disabling line crossing detection and intrusion detection remotely will not affect the VCA information overlay in the local live view.
3.4 Channel-Zero Encoding
Purpose
Channel-Zero Encoding provides a way to view many channels in real time from a Veb browser or CMS (Client Management System) software by decreasing the bandwidth requirement without affecting the image quality.
1. Go to Menu > Configuration > Live View > Channel-Zero Encoding.

text_image
System Configuration
General View Channel-Zero Encoding
Enable Channel-Zero Encoding
Frame Rate 12fps
Max. Bitrate Mode General
Max. Bitrate(Kbps) 1024
Apply
Figure 52, Live View Channel-Zero Encoding
2. Check the Enable Channel-Zero Encoding checkbox.
3. Configure the Frame Rate, Max. Bitrate Mode, and Max. Bitrate.
4. Click 4 pply to activate the settings.
5. After you set the Channel-Zero encoding, you can view 16 channels in one screen in the remote client or Veb browser.
3.5 Adjusting Live View Settings
Purpose
Live View settings can be customized. You can configure the output interface, dwell time for screen to be shown, mute or turn on the audio, the screen number for each channel, etc.
1. Go to Menu > System Configuration > Live View > General.

text_image
System Configuration
General View Channel Zero Encoding
Video Output Interface HDMI
Live View Mode 4*4
Dwell Time No Switch
Enable Audio Output ✓
Volume
Event Output HDMI
Full Screen Monitoring Dwell Time 5s
Apply
Figure 53, Live View General
2. The settings available in this menu include:
• Video Output Interface: Selects the output to configure the settings.
3. You can select VG4/HDMI1, HDMI2, Main 4. Set the camera order.
1) Click the View tab and select Video Output Interface from the drop-down list.

4pplicable Models
This manual is applicable to the models listed in the following table.| Series Model | |
| DS-73xxHUI-K4 | DS-7304HUI-K4DS-7308HUI-K4DS-7316HUI-K4 |
| DS-73xxHQI-K4 | DS-7308HQI-K4DS-7316HQI-K4DS-7332HQI-K4 |
| DS-90xxHUI-K8 | DS-9008HUI-K8DS-9016HUI-K8 |
Symbol
The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Symbol Description 
Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement important points of the main text. 
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if not avoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss, performance degradation, or unexpected results. 
Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk, which if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
Safety Instructions
- Proper configuration of all passwords and other security settings is the responsibility of the installer and/or end-user.
- In the use of the product, you must be in strict compliance with the electrical safety regulations of the nation and region. Please refer to technical specifications for detailed information.
- Input voltage should meet both the SELV (Safety Extra Low Voltage) and the Limited Power Source with 100 to 240 VAC, 12 VDC or 48 VDC according to the IEC60950-1 standard. Refer to technical specifications for detailed information.
- Do not connect several devices to one power adapter as adapter overload may cause over-heating or a fire hazard.
- Please make sure that the plug is firmly connected to the power socket.
- If smoke, odor or noise rise from the device, turn off the power at once and unplug the power cable, and then please contact the service center.
Preventive and
Before connecting and operating your device, please be advised of the following tips:
- Ensure unit is installed in a well-ventilated, dust-free environment.
- >nit is designed for indoor use only.
- Keep all liquids away from the device.
- Ensure environmental conditions meet factory specifications.
- Ensure unit is properly secured to a rack or shelf. Major shocks or jolts to the unit as a result of dropping it may cause damage to the sensitive electronics within the unit.
- >se the device in conjunction with an >≤ S if possible.
- ≤ower down the unit before connecting and disconnecting accessories and peripherals.
- A factory recommended HDD should be used for this device.
- Improper use or replacement of the battery may result in hazard of explosion. Replace with the same or equivalent type only. Dispose of used batteries according to the instructions provided by the battery manufacturer.
- Ensure to use the attached power adaptor only and not to change the adaptor randomly.
≤roduct Key Features
"eneral
- Connectable to =urboHD and analog cameras
- Supports >=C protocol for connecting camera over coa x
- Connectable to 1 ≤ cameras
\- =he analog signal inputs including =urboHD and CVBS can be automatically recognized without configuration
• Each channel supports dual-stream. And sub-stream supports up to vD1 resolution
• =he main stream of H>I Series supports up to 5 M≤ resolution of all the channels (H>I Series)
\- 5 M≤ long distance transmission can be enabled for the analog cameras (H>1 Series)
\- Independent configuration for each channel, including resolution, frame rate, bit rate, image quality, etc.
\- =he minimum frame rate for main stream and sub-stream is 1 fps
\- Encoding for both video stream and video & audio stream; audio and video synchronization during composite stream encoding
• Supports enabling H.265+/H.264+ to ensure high video quality with lowered bit rate
\- H.265+/H.265/H.264+/H.264 encoding for the main stream, and H.265/H.264 encoding for the sub-stream of analog cameras
\- Connectable to H.265 and H.264 I≤ cameras
- Defog level, night to day sensitivity, day to night sensitivity, IR light brightness, day/night mode, and vDR switch configurable for the connected analog cameras supporting these parameters
- 4 MP/5 MP signal switch for the supported analog cameras
• Vatermark technology
Local Monitoring
• HDMI output at up to 4K (3840 × 2160) resolution
- There are two HDMI interfaces of which the HDMI1 and VGA interfaces share simultaneous output. For HDMI1/VGA output, up to 1920 × 1080 resolution is supported. For HDMI2 output, up to 4K (3840 × 2160) resolution is supported
• 1/4/6/8/9/16/25/36 screen live view is supported, and the display sequence of screens is adjustable

NOTE
If the sum of the analog and IP channels exceeds 25, up to 32-window division mode is supported for the VGA/HDMI1 output
• Live view screen can be switched in group and manual switch and automatic cycle live view are also provided, the interval of automatic cycle can be adjusted
• CVBS output only serves as the aux output or live view output
- Quick setting menu is provided for live view
- The selected live view channel can be shielded
- VCA information overlay in live view for the supported analog cameras and in smart playback for the supported analog and IP cameras
- Motion detection, video-tampering detection, video e xception alarm, video loss alarm, and VCA alarm functions
• 1-ch analog camera supports people counting and heat map functions
- HUI Series supports line crossing detection and intrusion detection of all channels, and 2-ch sudden scene change detection.
• The enhanced VCA mode conflicts with the 2K/4K output and 4 MP/5 MP signal input (HUI Series)
- Privacy mask
- Several PTZ protocols (including Omnicast VMS of Genetec) supported; PTZ preset, patrol and pattern
- Zooming in/out by clicking the mouse and PTZ tracing by dragging mouse.
H" Management
• Each disk can have a maximum of 8 TB storage capacity
- 8 network disks (8 NAS disks, 8 IP SAN disks, or n N AS disks + m IP SAN disks (n+m ≤ 8)) can be connected
- Remaining recording time of the HDD can be viewed
• Supports cloud storage
• S.+.A.R.=. and bad sector detection
- HDD sleeping function
- HDD property: redundancy, read-only, read/write (R/V)
• HDD group management
• HDD quota management; different capacity can be assigned to different channels
- Hot-swappable HDD supports RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 5, RAID 6, and RAID 10 storage schemes, and can be enabled and disabled on your demand. 16 arrays can be configured (DS-90xxH>I-K8 only)
Recording,
• Holiday recording schedule configuration
• Cycle and non-cycle recording modes
• ×normal and event video encoding parameters
- + multiple recording types: manual, continuous, alarm, motion, motion | alarm, motion & alarm, and event
• Supports ≤OS triggered recording
- Eight recording time periods with separated recording types
• Supports Channel-+ackup
- Exports data to a >SB or eSA=A device
- Exports video clips when playback
• Video and Log, Video and ≤layer, and ≤layer are selectable to export for backup
• +anagement and maintenance of backup devices
4larms and Exceptions
- Configurable arming time of alarm input/output
- Alarms for video loss, motion detection, video tampe ring, illegal login, network disconnected, I≤confliction, record/capture exception, HDD error, and HDD full, etc.
- Alarm triggers full screen monitoring, audio alarm, notifying surveillance center, sending email and alarm output
• One-key disarms the linkage actions of the alarm input
- ≤ = < linking for the VCA alarm
• VCA detection alarm is supported
• Supports ≤OS triggered alarm
• Supports coaxial alarm (requires camera with alarm I/O)
- System will automatically reboot when a problem is detected in an attempt to restore normal functionality
Other Local "unctions
• +anual and automatic video quality diagnostics
- Operable by mouse and remote control
- =hree-level user management; admin user can create m any operating account and define their operating permission, which includes the permission to access any channel
• Completeness of operation, alarm, exceptions and log writing and searching
• +anually triggering and clearing alarms
- Importing and exporting of configuration file of devices
- Getting cameras type information automatically
• >nlock pattern for device login for the admin
• Clear-text password available
- G>ID file can be exported for use in resetting the password
- + multiple connected analog cameras supporting =urboHD can be upgraded simultaneously via the DVR
Network "unctions
- Self-adaptive 100+ or 1000+ network interface
- 1 ≤ v6 is supported
- C ≤ / I ≤ protocol, ≤ ≤ ≤ oE , DHC ≤ D×S, DD×S, x = ≤ , SAD ≤ , S+= ≤ , ×FS, iSCSI, >≤ n ≤^TM , and H== ≤ S are supported
- Supports access by Hik-Connect. If you enable Hik-Connect, the device will remind you the Internet access risk and ask you to confirm the “=erms of Service” and “≤rivacy Statement” before enabling the service. You should create a verification code to connect to Hik-Connect.
- = C ≤, > D ≤ , and R = ≤ for unicast
• Auto/+anual port mapping by >≤ n≤^TM
- Remote search, playback, download, locking and unlocking the record files, and downloading files broken transfer resume
- Remote parameters setup; remote import/export of device parameters
- Remote viewing of the device status, system logs and alarm status
- Remote keyboard operation
- Remote HDD formatting and program upgrading
- Remote system restart and shutdown
• Supports upgrading via remote F=≤ server
• RS-485 transparent channel transmission
- Alarm and exception information can be sent to the remote host
- Remotely start/stop recording
- Remotely start/stop alarm output
- Remote ≤ = < control
• =wo-way audio and voice broadcasting
• Output bandwidth limit configurable
- Embedded Veb server
- If DHC≤ is enabled, you can enable D×S DHC≤ or disable it and edit the ≤referred D×S Server and Alternate D×S Server
'evvelopment Scalability
- SDK for Windows and Linux system
- Source code of application software for demo
• Development support and training for application system
Table of
≤roduct Key Features ....5
1 Introduction....15
1.1 Front ≤anel....15
1.2 IR Remote Control Operations....17
1.2.1 =roubleshooting Remote Control....19
1.3 >SB +ouse Operation....19
1.4 Input + method Description 20
1.5 Rear ≤anel 20
2 Getting Started....22
2.1 Starting >p and Shutting Down the DVR 22
2.1.1 Starting the DVR....22
2.1.2 Shutting Down/Logging Out/Rebooting the DVR 22
2.2 Activating the Device 23
2.3 >sing the >nlock ≤attern for Login 24
2.3.1 Configuring the >nlock ≤attern .....25
2.3.2 Logging in via >nlock ≤attern .....26
2.3.3 Login and Logout....27
2.3.3.1 >ser Login....27
2.3.4 Resetting Your ≤assword 28
2.3.5 Adding and Connecting I≤ Cameras....30
2.3.5.1 Activating an I≤ Camera....30
2.3.6 Adding an Online I≤ Camera 33
2.3.7 Editing the Connected I≤ Camera 37
2.3.8 Configuring Signal Input Channel....39
2.3.9 Configuring 5 +≤ Long Distance =transmission....40
3 Live View....41
3.1 Introduction 41
3.2 Live View Icons....41
3.3 Live View +ode Operations....42
3.3.1 >sing the +ouse in Live View....43
3.3.2 Switching +ain/Aux Output 43
3.3.3 Quick Setting =oulbar in Live View +ode 44
3.4 Channel-sing >SB Flash Drives, >SB HDDs....103
5.14.2 Backup by Event Search....105
5.14.3 Back >p Video Clips....106
5.15 +anaging Backup Devices 107
6 Alarm Settings....108
6.1 Setting +otion Detection....108
6.2 Setting Sensor Alarms....110
6.2.1 Detecting Video Loss....112
6.2.2 Detecting Video =ampering 113
6.3 Setting All-Day Video Quality Diagnostics 115
6.3 Setting All-Day Video Quality Diagnostics 115
6.4 Handling Exceptions....116
7 Setting Alarm Response Actions....118
8 ≤OS Configuration....121
8.1 Configuring ≤OS Settings....121
8.2 Configuring Overlay Channel 125
8.3 Configuring ≤OS Alarm....126
9 VCA Alarm 128
9.1 Face Detection 128
9.2 Vehicle Detection....130
9.3 Line Crossing Detection....131
9.4 Intrusion Detection....133
9.5 Region Entrance Detection 134
9.6 Region Exiting Detection....135
9.7 Loitering Detection 136
9.8 ≤eople Gathering Detection....136
9.9 Fast +oving Detection....136
9.10 ≤arking Detection....136
9.11 >nattended Baggage Detection 137
9.12 Object Removal Detection....137
9.13 Audio Exception Detection 137
9.14 Defocus Detection....138
9.15 Sudden Scene Change....139
9.16 ≤IR Alarm....139
10 VCA Search....140
10.1 Behavior Search 140
10.2 ≤late Search....141
10.3 ≤eople Counting....142
10.4 Heat +ap....143
11 ×network Settings....144
11.1 Configuring General Settings 144
11.2 Configuring Advanced Settings....146
11.2.1 Configuring ≤≤≤oE Settings....146
11.2.2 Configuring Hik-Connect....147
11.2.3 Configuring DD×S....149
11.2.4 Configuring x=≤ Server 150
11.2.5 Configuring ×A=....151
11.2.6 Configuring +ore Settings....153
11.2.7 Configuring H==≤S ≤ort....154
11.2.8 Configuring E-+ail....156
11.2.9 Checking ×etwork =raffic....158
11.3 Configuring × network Detection ..... 159
11.3.1 =esting × network Delay and ≤acket Loss 159
11.3.2 Exporting × network ≤acket ...... 159
11.3.3 Checking ×network Status....160
11.3.4 Checking x network Statistics....161
12 RAID....162
12.1 Configuring Array 162
12.1.1 Enable RAID....163
12.1.2 One-=ouch Configuration 163
12.1.3 +anually Creating Array....165
12.1.4 Rebuilding Array....167
12.1.5 Automatically Rebuilding Array 168
12.1.6 +anually Rebuilding Array....169
12.1.7 Deleting Array 170
13 Checking and Editing Firmware 171
14 HDD +anagement 172
14.1 Initializing HDDs....172
14.2 +anaging ×etwork HDD 174
14.3 +anaging HDD Group....176
14.3.1 Setting HDD Groups 176
14.4 Setting HDD ≤property....178
14.5 Configuring Quota +ode 179
14.6 Configuring Cloud Storage 181
14.7 Configuring Disk Clone....183
14.8 Checking HDD Status....185
14.9 Checking S.+A.R.= Information....186
14.10 Detecting Bad Sectors 186
14.11 Configuring HDD Error Alarms 187
15 Camera Settings....188
15.1 Configuring OSD Settings....188
15.2 Configuring ≤rivacy +ask....190
15.3 Configuring Video ≤parameters....190
15.3.1 Configuring Image Settings....190
15.3.2 Configuring Camera ≤ parameters Settings....191
16 DVR +anagement and +aintenance....193
16.1 Viewing System Information....193
16.2 Searching Log Files....193
16.3 Importing/Exporting I≤ Camera Info....196
16.4 Importing/Exporting Configuration Files....196
16.5 >pgrading System ....197
16.5.1 >pgrading by Local Backup Device 197
16.5.2 >pgrading by F=≤....197
16.6 >pgrading Camera....198
16.7 Restoring Default Settings....199
17 Other 200
17.1 Configuring General Settings 200
17.2 Configuring RS-232 Serial ≤ort 201
17.3 Configuring DS= Settings....202
17.4 Configuring +ore Settings 202
17.5 +anaging >ser Accounts 205
17.5.1 Adding a >ser....205
17.5.2 Deleting a >ser....208
17.5.3 Editing a >ser 209
18 Appendix 212
18.1 Specifications 212
18.1.1 DS-73xxH>I-K4 212
18.1.2 DS-90xxH>I-K8 213
18.1.3 DS-73xxHQI-K4 214
18.2 Glossary....215
18.3 =roubleshooting....216
18.4 List of Compatible Hikvision I≤ Cameras....220
18.5 List of Compatible = hird-≤arty I ≤ Cameras ......220
NOTE/ Figures in this manual are for illustration only; your screens may differ.
1 Introduction
1.1 Front ≤anel

text_image
Hikvision
7
1
2
4
8
3
6
5
Figure 1, DS-73xxH>I-K4, DS-73xxHQI-K4 Front ≤anel
=able 1-1 DS-73xxH>I-K4, DS-73xxHQI-K4 Front ≤anel Description
x0. xame Function Description 1 ≤OVER =urns green when DVR is powered up READY =urnsgreen, indicating that the DVR is functioning properly S=A=>S =urns green when device is controlled by an IR remote =urns red when controlled by a keyboard and purple when IR remote and keyboard is used at the same time ALAR+ =urns red when a sensor alarm is detected HDD Flickers red when data is being read from or written to HDD =x/Rx Flickers green when network connection is functioning properly 2 DVD-R/V Slot for DVD-R/V 3 Composite Keys SHIF= Switches between the numeric or letter input and functions of the composite keys. (Input letter or numbers when the light is out; Realize functions when the light is red.) 1/+Ex> Enters numeral "1"Accessesthe main menu interface 2/ABC/F1 Enters numeral "2" Enters letters "ABC" =he F1 button when used in a list field will select all items in the list =urns on/off ≤=< light in ≤=< Control mode, and use it to zoom out the image Switches between main and spot video output in live view or playback mode. 3/DEF/F2 Enters numeral "3" Enters letters "DEF" >ses the F2 button is used to change the tab pages <ooms in the image in ≤=< control mode 4/GHI/ESC Enters numeral "4" Enters letters "GHI" Exits and back to the previous menu 5/JKL/EDI= Enters numeral "5" Enters letters "JKL" Deletescharacters before cursor Check the checkbox and select the Ox/OFF switch Starts/stops record clipping in playback 6/+×O/≤LAY Enters numeral "6" Enters letters "+×O" Accesses to playback interface in ≤slayback mode 7/≤QRS/REC Enters numeral "7" Enters letters "≤QRS" Accesses to manual record interface+ anually enables/disables record 8/=>V/≤=< Enters numeral "8" Enters letters "=>V" Accesses ≤=< control interface 9/√XY</≤REV Enters numeral "9" Enters letters "√XY<" +ulti-channel display in live view 0/A Enters numeral "0" ×0. ×ame Function Description Shifts the input methods in the editing text field. (>pper and lowercase, alphabet, symbols or numeric input). 4 DIREC=IO× ×avigates between different fields and items in menus >ses the >p and Down button s to speed up and slow down the playing of video files in ≤layback mode.=he Left and Right button will select the next and previous record files. Cycles through channels in Live View mode. Controlsthe movement of the ≤=< camera in ≤=< control mode Ex=ER Confirms selection in any of the menu modes Checks the checkbox ≤lays or pauses the playing of video files in ≤layback mode Advances the video by a single frame in single-frame ≤layback mode Stops/starts auto switch in Auto-switch mode 5 ≤OVER ≤ower on/off switch 6 JOG SH>=LE Control Moves the active selection up and down in a menu Cycles through different channels in live view mode Jumps 30s forward/backward in video files in the playback mode Controlsthe movement of the ≤=< camera in ≤=< control mode Moves the active selection up and down in a menu 7 >SB Interface >niversal Serial Bus (>SB) ports for additional devices such as >SB mous e and >SB Hard Disk Drive (HDD) 8 IR Receiver Receiver for IR remote control

text_image
1
HIKVISION
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
HITKVISION
100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100
DIN
SOT
AVTS
RLOOMA
FOCS+
INT
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
Figure 2, DS-90xxH>I-K8 Front ≤anel
=able 1-2 DS-90xxH>I-K8 Front ≤anel Description
×0. ×ame Function Description 1 ALARM Red when a sensor alarm is detected READY Blue, indicating that the DVR is functioning properly S=A=>S Blue when device is controlled by an IR remote Red when controlled by a keyboard and purple when IR remote and keyboard is used at the same time HDD Flickers red when data is being read from or written to HDD MODEM Flickers blue when network connection is functioning properly =x/Rx Blue when the device is in armed status; at this time, an alarm is enabled when an event is detected. G>ARD =urns off when the device is unarmed. =he arm/disarm status can be changed by pressing and holding on the ESC button for more than 3 seconds in live view mode. Red when a sensor alarm is detected 2 IR Receiver Receiver for IR remote 3 Front ≤anel Lock Lock or unlock the panel by the key 4 DVD-R/V Slot for DVD-R/V 5 Alphanumeric Buttons Switches to the corresponding channel in live view or ≤=< control mode Inputs numbers and characters in edit mode Switches between different channels in playback mode Blue when the corresponding channel is recording; turns red when the channel is in network transmission status; turns pink when the channel is recording and transmitting. 6 >SB Interfaces >niversal Serial Bus ports for additional devices such as >S B mouse and >SB Hard Disk Drive (HDD) 7 ESC Returns to the previous menu ≤resses for arming/disarming the device in live view mode REC/SHO= Enters the Manual Record settings menu ≤resses this button followed by a numeric button to call a ≤=< preset in ≤=< control settings =urns audio on/off in the playback mode ≤LAY/A>=0 Enters the playback mode Automatically scans in the ≤=< control menu <OOM+ No. Name Function Description A/FOC>S+ Adjusts focus in the ≤=< Control menu Switches between input methods (upper and lower case alphabet, symbols and numeric input). EDI=/IRIS+ Edits text fields. when editing text fields, it also deletes the ch aracter in front of the cursor Checks the checkbox in the checkbox fields Adjusts the iris of the camera in ≤=< control mode Generates video clips for backup in playback mode Enters/exits the folder of >SB device and eSA=A HDD MAIN/S≤O=/<OOM- Switches between main and spot output <ooms out the image in ≤=< control mode F1/LIGH= Selects all items on the list when used in a list field =urns on/off ≤=< light (if applicable) in ≤=< control mode Switches between play and reverse play in playback mode F2/A>X Cycles through tab pages Switches between channels in synchronous playback mode MEN>/VI≤ER Returns to the Main menu (after successful login) ≤resses and holds the button for five seconds to turn off audible key beep Starts wiper (if applicable) in ≤=< control mode Shows/hides the control interface in playback mode ≤REV/FOC>S- Switches between single screen and multi-screen mode Adjusts the focus in conjunction with the A/FOC>S+ button in ≤=< control mode ≤=</IRIS- Enters the ≤=< Control mode Adjusts the iris of the ≤=< camera in ≤=< control mode 8 DIREC=ION Navigates between different fields and items in menus >ses the >p and Down buttons to speed up and slow down the playing of video files in ≤slayback mode. =he Left and Right button will select the next and previous record files. Cycles through channels in Live View mode Controls the movement of the ≤=< camera in ≤=< control mode EN=ER Confirms selection in any of the menu modes. Checks the checkbox ≤lays or pauses the playing of video files in ≤slayback mode Advances the video by a single frame in single-frame ≤slayback mode Stops/starts auto switch in Auto-switch mode 9 JOG SH>=LE Control Moves the active selection up and down in a menu Cycles through different channels in live view mode Jumps 30s forward/backward in video files in the playback mode Controls the movement of the ≤=< camera in ≤=< control mode 10 ≤OVER ON/OFF ≤ower on/off switch
1.2 IR Remote Control Operations
=he DVR may also be controlled with the included IR remote control.

NOTE
If your system is secured with a password pattern, press ESC on the remote to display the password input window and input the password by using a keyboard.

NOTE
Batteries (2 × AAA) must be installed before operation.

text_image
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
ABC
JKI
TUV
MNO
MNO
ABC
JKI
TUV
MNO
ABC
JKI
TUV
MNO
ABC
JKI
TUV
MNO
ABC
JKI
TUV
MNO
ABC
JKI
TUV
MNO
ABC
JKI
TUV
MNO
ABC
JKI
TUV
MNO
ABC
JKI
TUV
MNO
ABC
JKI
TUV
MNO
ABC
JKI
TUV
Figure 3, Remote Control
=he keys on the remote control resemble the ones found on the front panel. See =able 1-3.
=able 1-3 Description of the IR Remote Control Buttons
×o. ×ame Description 1 ≤OVER ≤ower on/off the device. ≤ower on/off the device by pressing and holding the button for 5 seconds. 2 ME×> Button ≤ress the button to return to the main menu (after successful login). ≤ress and hold the button for 5 seconds will turn off audible key beep. In ≤=< Control mode, the ME×> button will start wiper (if applicable). In ≤slayback mode, it is used to show/hide the control interface. 3 REC Button Enter the Manual Record setting menu. In ≤=< control settings, press the button and then you can call a ≤=< preset by pressing ×umeric button. It is also used to turn audio on/off in the ≤slayback mode. 4 DIREC=IO× Button ×avgiate between different fields and items in menus. In the ≤slayback mode, the >p and Down button is used to speed up and slow down recorded video. =he Left and Right button will select the next and previous record files. In Live View mode, these buttons can be used to cycle through channels. In ≤=< control mode, it can control the movement of the ≤=< camera. Ex=ER Button Confirm selection in any of the menu modes. It can also be used to tick checkbox fields. In ≤slayback mode, it can be used to play or pause the video. In single-frame ≤slayback mode, pressing the button will advance the video by a single frame. 5 ≤=< Button In Auto-switch mode, it can be used to stop /start auto switch. 6 DEV Enables/Disables Remote Control. 7 Alphanumeric Buttons Switch to the corresponding channel in Live view or ≤=< Control mode. Input numbers and characters in Edit mode. Switch between different channels in the ≤slayback mode. 8 ESC Button Back to the previous menu. ≤ress for Arming/disarming the device in Live View mode. 9 ≤LAY Button =he button is used to enter the All-day ≤slayback mode. It is also used to auto scan in the ≤=< Control menu. 10 ≤REV Button Switch between single screen and multi-screen mode. In ≤=< Control mode, it is used to adjust the focus in conjunction with the A/FOC>S+ button.
1.2.1 = roubleshooting Remote Control

NOTE
+ake sure batteries have been installed properly. Also, note that the remote control must be aimed at the IR receiver on the ×VR front panel.
If there is no response after pressing any button on the remote, follow the procedure below to troubleshoot.
1. Go to M enu > Configuration > General > More Settings by operating the front control panel or the mouse.
2. Check and remember the DVR ×o. =he default DVR ×o. is 255. =his number valid for all IR remote controls.
3. ≤ress DEV on the remote control.
4. Enter the DVR ×o. in Step 2.
5. ≤ress ENTER on the remote.
If the front panel Status indicator turns blue, the remote control is operating properly. If the Status indicator does not turn blue and there is no response, check the following:
- Batteries are installed correctly and the polarities are not reversed.
- Batteries are fresh and not out of charge.
• IR receiver is not obstructed.
If the remote still does not function, change the remote and try again, or contact the device provider.
1.3 >SB +ouse Operation
A regular 3-button (Left/Right/Scroll-wheel) >SB mouse can also be used with this DVR.
1. ≤lug mouse into a >SB interface on the DVR. =he mouse should automatically be detected. If not, the mouse might not be compatible. Refer to your mouse provider.
=able 1-4 Description of the +ouse Control
xame Action Description Left-Click Single-Click Live view: Select channel and show the quick set menu.+enu: Select and enter Double-Click Live view: Switch between single-screen and multi-screen. Drag ≤=< control: Wheeling.≤rivacy mask and motion detection: Select target area.Digital zoom-in: Drag and select target area.Live view: Drag channel/time bar. Right-Click Single-Click Live view: Show menu.+enu: Exit current menu to upper level menu. Scroll-vheel Scrolling up Live view: ≤previous screen.+enu: ≤previous item. Scrolling down Live view: ×ext screen.+enu: ×ext item.
1.4 Input + method Description

text_image
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0
q w e r t y u i o p
a s d f g h j k l
↑ z x c v b n m ←x
123/..
Figure 4, Soft Keyboard
Description of the buttons on the soft keyboard:
=able 1-5 Description of the Soft Keyboard Icons
Icon Description Icon Description 0 ... 9 ×umber A ... Z English letter Lowercase/>ppercase Backspace 123/.. ABC Switch the keyboard Space ≤ositioning the cursor Enter #+= Symbols Reserved
1.5 Rear ≤anel

NOTE
=he rear panel varies by model. Refer to the actual product. =he following figures are for reference only.

text_image
AUDIO IN
AUDIO OUT
LINE IN
1 2 3 7 13
15 14
eSATA
VIDEO IN
Video Out
HDMI1
HDMI2
VGA
LAN2
RS-232
LAN1
RS-485 KR ALABIN OUT
ALABIN
1 4 2 5 8 9 12 11
Figure 5, DS-73xxH>I-K4 Rear ≤anel

text_image
AUDIO IN
AUDIO OUT
LINE IN
1 2 3 7 13
15 14
eSATA
1 2 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
VIDEO IN
Video Out
R5-232
HDMI2
VGA
LAN
RS-480
RS-A/ANIN OUT
AUDIO IN
1 4 2 5 8 9 12 11
Figure 6, DS-73xxHQI-K4 Rear ≤anel

text_image
3
7 13 6 15 14 16
VGA
CVBS LINE IN
LOOP OUT
AUDIO OUT
eSATA
RS-232 LAN2
LAN1 ALAMIN OUT
1 4 2 5 8 9 12
VIDEO OUT
HDMI2
HDMI1 VGA LAN1
AUDIO IN
Figure 7, DS-90xxH>I-K8 Rear ≤anel
Table 1-6 Description of DS-73xxH>I-K4, DS-73xxHQI-K4, and DS90xxH>I-K8 Rear ≤anel
No. Item Description 1 VIDEO IN BNC interface for TurboHD and analog video input. 2 VIDEO O>T BNC connector for video output. 3 A>DIO IN/LOO≤ O>T (for DS-90xxH>I-K8) RCA connector 4 >SB ≤ort >niversal Serial Bus (>SB) port for additional devices. 5 HDMI1/VGF Simultaneous HDMI1/VGA output. Display local video output and menu. 6 HDMI2 HDMI2 video output connector (DS-73xxH>I-K4 and DS-90xxH>I-K8) 7 A>DIO O>T RCA connector 8 Network Interface Connector for network (DS-73xxH>I-K4 and DS-90xxH>I-K8 = x2, DS-73xxH>I-K4 = x1) 9 RS -485 and Alarm Interface Connector for RS-485 devices. T+ and T- pins connect toR+ and R - pins of ≤T D+, D- pin connects to Ta, Tb pin of controller. For cascading devices, the first DVR's D+, D- pin should be connected with the D+, D- pin of the next DVR. Connector for alarm input Connector for alarm output 10 ≤ower Supply 100 to240 VAC power supply 11 ≤ower Switch Switch for turning on/off the device 12 GND Ground 13 LINE IN BNC connector for audio input 14 eSATA Connects external SATA HDD, CD/DVC-RV 15 RS-232 Interface Connector for RS-232 devices 16 ALARM O>T Connector for alarm output 17 A>DIO IN (for DS-90xxH>I-K8) RCA connector
2 Getting Started
2.1 Starting Up and Shutting Down the DVR
Purpose
≤roper startup and shutdown procedures are crucial to expanding the life of the DVR.
+efore You Start
Check that the voltage of the power supply is the same with the DVR's requirement, and the ground connection is working properly.
2.1.1 Starting the DVR
Check that the power supply is plugged into an electrical outlet. It is HIGHLY recommended that an Uninterruptible ≤ ower Supply (U ≤ S) be used in conjunction with the device.
Turn on the power switch on the rear panel, and the ≤ lower indicator LED should turn on indicating that the unit begins to start up.
After startup, the ≤ower indicator LED remains on.
2.1.2 Shutting Down/Logging Out/Rebooting the DVR
1. Go to Menu > Maintenance.

text_image
System Maintenance
System Logs
Import/Export
Upgrade
Default
Network Detect
HDD Detect
Start Time
09-23-2017
00:00:30
End Time
09-23-2017
23:59:59
Major Type
Shutdown
Miner Type
Alarm Input
Alarm Output
Motion Detect
Motion Detect
Video Tamper
Video Tamper
Kosovo Started
POS Stopped
Video Quality Diagnostics Alarm Started
Logout
Shutdown
Reboot
Cancel
Export All
Search
Figure 8, Shutdown Menu
2. Click Ⓞ (lower left corner of screen) to display the Shutdown window.
3. Click one of the following:
\- Logout – Logs the current user out of the system.
- Shutdown – Shuts system down.
- Reboot – Shuts system down and reboots.
-
text_image
Attention
? Shut down the system?
Yes No
Figure 9, Shutdown ≤rompt
2.2 Activating the Device
Purpose
For the first-time access, you need to activate the device by setting an admin password. ×o operation is allowed before activation. You can also activate the device via Veb Browser, SAD≤, or Client Software.
1. Input the same password in the
text_image
Activation
User Name
Create New Password
Confirm New Password
admin
Hikvision1
Strong
Valid password range [8-16]. You can use a combination of numbers,
lowercase, uppercase and special character for your password with at
least two kinds of them contained.
OK Cancel
Figure 10, Settings Admin ≤assword

WARNING
STRON" P4SSWOR' RENOTE
Clear text password is supported. Click 📄 to see the clear text of the password. Click the icon again and the password again becomes invisible.
3. After the device is activated, the Attention box pops up as below.

text_image
Attention
The device is activated. Properly keep your password. Export the GUID file for password resetting?
Yes No
Figure 11, Attention Window
4. (Optional) Click Yes to export the G>ID. =he Reset ≤assword interface pops up. Click Export to export the G>ID to the >SB flash drive for password resetting.

text_image
Reset Password
Device Name
USB Flash Disk 1-1
Refresh
Name Size Type Edit Date
Folder 11-18-2015 11:20:43
GUID_606524190_20161118112048.bin 128B File 11-18-2016 11:20:48
Free Space 7170.54MB
New Folder Export Back
Figure 12, Export G>ID
5. After exporting the G>ID, the Attention box pops up as below. Click Yes to duplicate the password or No to cancel it.

text_image
Attention
Duplicate the password to IP cameras
that are connected with default protocol.
Yes No
Figure 13, Duplicate the ≤assword
2.3 >sing the >nlock ≤attern for Login
Purpose
An admin can configure an unlock pattern for device login.
2.3.1 Configuring the >nlock ≤attern
After the device is activated, enter the following interface to configure the device unlock pattern.

text_image
Set Unlock Pattern
Draw the unlock pattern first.
Figure 14, Set >nlock ≤attern
1. >se the mouse to draw a pattern among the nine dots on the screen. Release the mouse when the pattern is done.

flowchart
graph TD
A["Start"] --> B{Decision}
B -->|Yes| C["OK"]
B -->|No| D["End"]
C --> E["Action"]
D --> F["Action"]
Figure 15, Draw the ≤attern
i NOTE
Connect at least four dots to draw the pattern.
Each dot can be connected only once.
2. Draw the same pattern again to confirm it. When the two patterns match, the pattern is configured successfully.

text_image
Set Unlock Pattern
Draw pattern again to confirm.
Figure 16, Confirm the ≤attern
If the two patterns are different, you must set the pattern again.

text_image
Set Unlock Pattern
The two patterns are different. Try
again.
Figure 17, Reset the ≤attern
2.3.2 Logging in via >nlock ≤attern

NOTE
Only the admin user has the permission to unlock the device.
Configure the pattern first before unlocking.
1. Right-click the mouse on the screen and select the menu to enter the interface.

text_image
Unlock
admin
Draw the unlock pattern first.
Forget My P...
Switch User
Figure 18, Draw the >nlock ≤attern
2. Draw the pre-defined pattern to unlock to enter the menu operation.
i NOTE
You can right click the mouse to log in via the normal mode.
If you have forgotten your pattern, you can select the "orget My Pattern or Switch User option to enter the normal login dialog box.
when the pattern you draw is different from the pattern you have configured, try again.
If you draw the wrong pattern seven times, the account will lock for one minute.

text_image
Login
User Name admin
Password
Forget Password OK Cancel
Figure 19, ×normal Login Dialog Box
2.3.3 Login and Logout
2.3.3.1 >ser Login
Purpose
You must log in to the device before operating the menu and other functions.
1. Select the User Name in the drop-down list.

text_image
Login
User Name admin
Password
Forget Password OK Cancel
Figure 20, Login Interface
2. Input the Password.
3. Click OK to log in.

NOTE
In the Login interface, for the admin user, if you have entered the wrong password seven times, the account will be locked for 60 seconds. For operators, if you have entered the wrong password for five times, the account will be locked for 60 seconds.

text_image
Attention
Incorrect password. You still have 6 chances.
Please try again.
OK
Figure 21, >ser Account ≤rotection for the Admin

text_image
Attention
Incorrect password. You still have 4 chances.
Please try again.
OK
Figure 22, >ser Account ≤rotection for the Operator
2.3.4 Resetting Your ≤assword
Purpose
If you forget the admin password, you can reset the password by importing the G>ID file, which was exported and saved in the local >SB flash drive after you activated the device.
1. On the user login interface, click "orget Password to enter the Import G>ID interface.

text_image
Reset Password
Device Name USB Flash Disk 1-1 Refresh
Name Size Type Edit Date Delete Play
4.bmp 6750.06KB File 09-02-2016 11:52:28
5.bmp 6750.06KB File 09-02-2016 11:52:32
6.bmp 6750.06KB File 09-02-2016 11:52:42
7.bmp 6750.06KB File 09-02-2016 11:52:10
8.bmp 6750.06KB File 09-02-2016 11:52:16
9.bmp 6750.06KB File 09-02-2016 11:52:24
GUID_583574624_20160... 12GB File 09-09-2016 14:10:37
Free Space 14.26GB
New Folder Import Back
Figure 23, Import G>ID
2. Select the G>ID file from the >SB flash drive and click Import to pop up the Reset ≤assword interface.

text_image
Reset Password
User Name admin
Create New Pass...
Confirm New Pass...
✓ Valid password range [8-16]. You can use a combination of numbers,
lowercase, uppercase and special character for your password with at
least two kinds of them contained.
OK Cancel
Figure 24, Reset ≤assword
3. Input the new password and confirm the password.
4. Click OK to save the new password. =hen the Attention box pops up as shown below.

text_image
Attention
The password is reset. The GUID file is ineffective. Export a new GUID file.
OK
Figure 25, G>ID File Imported
5. Click OK and the Attention box as below pops up to remind you to duplicate the password of the device to I ≤ cameras that are connected with default protocol. Click Yes to duplicate the password or No to cancel it.

text_image
Attention
Duplicate the password to IP cameras
that are connected with default protocol.
Yes No
Figure 26, Duplicate the ≤assword
i NOTE
=o retrieve a forgotten password, you must export the G>ID file first.
Once the password is reset, the G>ID file will be invalid. You can export a new G>ID file.
2.3.5 Adding and Connecting I≤ Cameras
2.3.5.1 Activating an I≤ Camera
Purpose
Before adding the camera, make sure the I≤ camera to be added is in active status.
1. Select Add IP Camera from the right-click menu in live view mode or go to Menu> Camera> IP Camera.
For the I≤ camera detected online in the same network segment, the Security status shows whether it is active or inactive.

text_image
Cameras Setup
IP Camera IP Camera Import/Export
Camera
Add/Delete Status Security IP Camera Add/ Edit Upgr Camera Name Protocol
D1 20E2103 HIKVISION
D2 Strong Pass... 192.168.10.4 2DE2103
Strong Pass... 192.168.10.109 4A25 HIKVISION
Active 192.168.10.2
Active 192.168.10.6
Active 192.168.10.7
Active 192.168.10.63
Active 192.168.10.110
HIKVISION
Hikvision
Hikvision
Hikvision
Hikvision
Refresh One-touch Activ Upgrade Delete One-touch Adding Custom Adding
Max. IP Camera Number: 2
Net Receive Mio Bandwidth: 120Mbps
Figure 27, I≤ Camera +anagement Interface
2. Click the inactive icon of the camera to enter the following interface to activate it. You can also select multiple cameras
from the list and click the One-touch 4activate to activate the cameras in batch.

text_image
Activation
User Name: admin
Password:
Valid password range [8-16]. You can
use a combination of numbers,
lowercase, uppercase and special
character for your password with at least
two kinds of them contained.
Confirm New Password
Ok Cancel
Figure 28, Activate the Camera
3. Set the password of the camera to activate it.
Use 4dmin Password: If you check this checkbox, the camera(s) will be configured with the admin password of the operating DVR.
text_image
Activation
User Name: admin
Password: •••••••••
RISKY
Valid password range [8-16]. You can
use a combination of numbers,
lowercase, uppercase and special
character for your password with at least
two kinds of them contained.
Confirm New Password: ••••••••••|
Ok Cancel
Figure 29, Level 0 (Inadequate) Strength ≤assword

text_image
Activation
User Name: admin
Password: **********
ATTENTION
Invalid Password
RISKY
No kind of them contained.
Confirm New Password: ********#
Ok Cancel
Figure 30, Invalid ≤assword +essay

text_image
Activation
User Name: admin
Password: •••••••••
WEAK
Valid password range [8-16]. You can
use a combination of numbers,
lowercase, uppercase and special
character for your password with at least
two kinds of them contained.
Confirm New Password: ••••••••••
Ok Cancel
Figure 31, Level 1 ≤ password Strength

text_image
Activation
User Name: admin
Password: *****
FAIR
Valid password range [8-16]. You can
use a combination of numbers,
lowercase, uppercase and special
character for your password with at least
two kinds of them contained.
Confirm New Password: *****
Ok Cancel
Figure 32, Level 2 ≤ password Strength

text_image
Activation
User Name: admin
Password: •••••••••
Strong
Valid password range [8-16]. You can
use a combination of numbers,
lowercase, uppercase and special
character for your password with at least
two kinds of them contained.
Confirm New Password: ••••••••••
Ok Cancel
Figure 33, Level 3 and Level 4 ≤ password Strength

WARNING
STRONG PASSWORD RECOMMENDED – ve highly recommend you create a strong password of your own choosing (using a minimum of eight characters, including at least three of the following categories: upper case letters, lower case letters, numbers, and special characters) in order to increase the security of your product. Ve also recommend that you reset your password regularly. Especially in high security systems, resetting the password monthly or weekly can better protect your product.
4. Click OK to finish activating the I≤ camera.=he camera security status will change to Active.
2.3.6 Adding an Online I≤ Camera
Purpose
Before you can get a live view or record of the video, add the network cameras to the device's connection list.
Before You Start
Ensure the network connection is valid and correct.
- OPTION 1
1. Select Add IP Camera from the right-click menu in live view mode or go to Menu > Camera > IP Camera.

text_image
Cameras Setup
Analog IP Camera IP Camera ImportExport
P Cameras List
Camera ID: 001200000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
IPC Status: Connected Connected and Support Preview Here Not Connected
Open
Week Px: 19.163.167
Camera 51
HKVISION DS-2CD4224F-ZS 8888
443716488
V5.3 Build 150...
Active 192 188 254...
HKVISION DS-2CD2143FW... 8888
498375488
V5.3 Build 150...
Active 192 188 254...
HKVISION DS-2CD4185F-Z 8888
510891983
V5.3 Build 150...
Active 192 188 254...
HKVISION DS-ZDE2185-DE... 8888
497555561
V5.3 Build 150...
Active 192 188 254...
HKVISION DS-2CD4333FW... 8888
506634726
V5.3 Build 151...
Active 192 188 254...
HKVISION DS-2CD4A25FW... 8888
579492463
V5.3 Build 169...
Active 192 188 254...
HKVISION DS-2CD4A5FE-ZD1 8888
511137153
V5.3 Build 169...
Active 192 188 254...
HKVISION DS-2CD4333FAD-1888
456332664
V5.3 Build 151...
Active 192 188 254...
HKVISION DS-2CD4113FW... 8888
496329537
V5.3 Build 159...
Active 192 188 254...
HKVISION DS-2CD4WMEFS... 8888
452755562
V5.3 Build 161...
Options
One-touch Active
Upgrade
Details
One-touch Adding
Custom Adding
Figure 34, I≤ Camera +anagement Interface
2. Online cameras with the same network segment will be detected and displayed in the camera list.
3. Select the I≤ camera from the list and click add the camera (with the same admin password of the DVR). Or you can click One-touch Adding to add all cameras (with the same admin password) from the list.
i NOTE
+ake sure the camera to add has already been activated by setting the admin password, and the admin password of the camera is the same as the DVR's.
4. (Optional) Check the Enable H.265 checkbox (for Initial Access) for the connected I≤ camera supporting H.265.=hen the I≤ camera will be encoded with H.265.
5. (For encoders with multiple channels only) check the Channel ≤ort checkbox in the pop-up window, as shown in the following figure, and click OK to add multiple channels.

text_image
Channel Port
✓ Channel Port ✓ 1 ✓ 2 ✓ 3 ✓ 4 ✓ 5
OK Cancel
Figure 35, Select + multiple Channels
• OPTION 2
1. On the I≤ Camera +anagement interface, click
text_image
Add IP Camera (Custom)
1 192.168.254.36 1 DS-2CD4... HIKVISION 8000
2 192.168.254.196 1 DS-2CD4... HIKVISION 8000
3 10.102.102.187 1 DS-2CD6... HIKVISION 8000
4 192.168.254.146 1 DS-2CD6... HIKVISION 8000
5 192.168.254.103 1 DS-2CD4... HIKVISION 8000
6 192.168.254.116 1 DS-2CD4... HIKVISION 8000
7 192.168.254.24 1 DS-2CD4 HIKVISION 8000
IP Camera Address 192.168.254.36
Protocol HIKVISION
Management Port 8000
User Name admin
Admin Password
Search Add Cancel
Figure 36, Custom Adding I≤ Camera Interface
2. You can edit the I ≤ address, protocol, management port, and other information of the I ≤ camera to be added.

NOTE
If the I≤ camera to add has not been activated, activate it from the I≤ camera list on the IP
text_image
IP Camera Management
Camera... Add/Delete Status Security IP Camera Address Edit Upgrade Camera No
D1 Strong Pass 10.16.1.250 IPdome
Active 10.16.2.109
Active 10.16.2.222
Refresh One-touch Activ Upgrade Delete One-touch Adding Custom Adding
Enable H.215 (For Initial Access)
Net Receive Idle Bandwidth: 318Mbps
Exit
Figure 37, Successfully Added I≤ Cameras
=able 1-7 Explanation of the Icons
Icon Explanation Icon Explanation 
EDIT (Pen): Press to edit basic IP camera parameters 
ADD (+): Press to add the detected IP camera 
DISCONNECTED (!): Camera is disconnected; click the icon to get camera's exception information 
DELETE (Trash Can): Press to delete the camera 
PLAY (Right Triangle): Play connected camera's live video 
ADVANCED (Gear): Press to go to advanced settings window. 
UPGRADE (Up Arrow): Upgrade the connected camera's firmware 
DASH: No advanced settings available for this camera 
REPAIR (?): Press to attempt to repair the connection Securitycolumn SECURITY: Shows camera status (active/inactive) or password strength (strong/medium/weak/risky)
4. (Optional) Check the E nable H.265 checkbox (For Initial Access) for the connected I≤ camera supporting H.265.=hen the I≤ camera will be encoded with H.265.
2.3.7 Editing the Connected I≤ Camera
Purpose
After adding the I≤ cameras, the basic information of the camera is listed on the interface, and you can configure the basic settings of the I≤ cameras.
1. Click ☑ to edit the parameters. You can edit the I≤ address, protocol, and other parameters.

text_image
Edit IP Camera
IP Camera No. D1
IP Camera Address 10.9.6.48
Protocol HIKVISION
Management Port 8000
Video Port 1
Camera User Name adults
Camera Password
OK Cancel
Figure 38, Edit I≤ Camera
text_image
Network Password
Advance Settings
IP Camera No. D2
IP Camera Address 10.102.102.2
Management Port 8000
Apply OK Cancel
Figure 39, ×network Configuration of the Camera
4. You can edit the camera network information and the password.

text_image
Advance Settings
Network Password
IP Camera No. D2
Current Password
New Password
Confirm
✓ Valid password range [8-16]. You can use a combination of numbers,
lowercase, uppercase and special character for your password with at
least two kinds of them contained.
Apply OK Cancel
Figure 40, ≤assword Configuration of the Camera
5. Click OK to save the settings and exit the interface.
2.3.8 Configuring Signal Input Channel

NOTE
This chapter is applicable only to DS-73xx/90xxHUI-K Series DVRs.
Purpose
You can configure the analog and I ≤ signal input types and enable 5 M ≤ long distance transmission.
1. Go to Menu > Camera > Signal Input Status.

text_image
Cameras Setup
Signal Input Status IP Camera IP Camera Import/Export
Camera HD/CVBS IP
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
A16
Max. IP Camera Number 2
5MP Long Distance Transmission
Apply
Figure 41, Signal Input Status
2. Check this checkbox to select different signal input types: HD/CVBS and I≤. If you select HD/CVBS, four types of analog signal inputs including TurboHD and CVBS can be connected randomly for the selected channel. If you select I≤, an I≤ camera can be connected to the selected channel.
3. Click 4pply to save the settings.
You can view the maximum number I≤ cameras in the Max. IP 2.3.9 Configuring 5 M≤ Long Distance Transmission

NOTE
This chapter is applicable only to HUI Series DVRs.
Purpose
You can configure 5 M≤ long distance transmission on the Signal Input Status interface.
1. Go to Menu > Camera > Signal Input Status.

text_image
Cameras Setup
Signal Import Status: IP Camera IP Camera Import/Export
Camera
A1
A2
A3
A4
Max. IP Camera Number
5MP Long Distance Transmission
HD/CVBC
Apply
Figure 42, Signal Input Status (for DS-73xx/90xxHUI Series)
2. Click enter the 5 M≤ Long Distance Transmission Settings interface.

text_image
Trigger Channel
Analog A1 A2 A3 A4
Apply OK Cancel
Figure 43, 5 +≤ Long Distance =transmission Settings
3. Check this checkbox to enable 5 +≤ Long Distance =transmission of the selected channel.
4. Click 4pply to save the settings.
3 Live View
3.1 Introduction
Live View shows the video image from each camera in real time. =he DVR will automatically enter Live View mode when powered on. It is also at the very top of the menu hierarchy, thus hitting ESC multiple times (depending on which menu you're on) will bring you back to Live View mode.
3.2 Live View Icons
In Live View mode, there are icons at the right top of the screen for each channel, showing the status of the record and alarms in the channel, so that you can know whether the channel is recorded, or if there are alarms as soon as possible.
=able 1-8 Description of Live View Icons
Icons Description 
Alarm (video loss, tampering, motion detection, VCA, or sensor alarm) [SWKS] Record (manual record, schedule record, motion detection, or alarm triggered record) [OXBS] Alarm & Record [Y8TS] Event/Exception (motion detection, sensor alarm, or exception information.
3.3 Live View Mode Operations
There are many functions provided in Live View mode. The functions are listed below.
• Single Screen: show only one screen on the monitor.
• Multi-screen: show multiple screens on the monitor simultaneously.
- Start Auto-switch: the screen is auto switched to the next one. You must set the dwell time for each screen on the configuration menu before enabling the auto-switch. Menu > Configuration > Live View > Dwell Time.
- Start Recording: normal record and motion detection record are supported.
• Output Mode: set the output mode to Standard, Bright, Gentle, or Vivid.
- Playback: play back the recorded videos for the current day.
- Aux/Main Monitor: the DVR checks the output interface connections to define the main and auxiliary output interfaces. When the aux output is enabled, the main output cannot perform any operations; you can perform some basic operations on the Live View mode for the Aux output.
There are two HDMI interfaces. HDMI1 and VGA interfaces share simultaneous output. The priority level for the main and aux output is HDMI2 > VGA/HDMI1. The CVBS output only serves as the aux output or Live View output.
Table 1-9 Priorities of Outputs
S.N. HDMI2 VGA/HDMI1 CVBS Main output Auxiliary output For Live View Output Only 1 √ √ √ or × HDMI2 VGA/HDMI1 CVBS 2 √ or × × √ or × HDMI2 CVBS VGA/HDMI1 3 × √ √ or × VGA/HDMI1 CVBS HDMI2
For other DVRs with CVBS output, the VGA/HDMI output is the main output, and the CVBS output is the aux output.
Table 1-10 Priorities of Outputs
S.N. HDMI VGA CVBS Main output Auxiliary output 1 or × or × or × VGA/HDMI CVBS

NOTE
√ means the interface is in use, × means the interface is out of use or the connection is invalid. HDMI, VGA, and CVBS can be used at the same time.
3.3.1 >sing the +ouse in Live View
Refer to =able 1-11 for the description of mouse operation in live view mode.
=able 1-11 +ouse Operation in Live View
×ame Description +enu Enter the main menu of the system by right clicking the mouse. Single Screen Switch to the single full screen by choosing channel number from the drop-down list. +ulti -Screen Adjust the screen layout by selecting from the drop-down list. ≤previous Screen Switch to the previous screen. ×ext Screen Switch to the next screen. Start/Stop Auto-Switch Enable/disable the auto-switch of the screens.
NOTE=he dwell time of the live view configuration must be set before using Start 4uto -Switch. Start Recording Start recording of all channels, Continuous Record, and +otion Detection Record are selectable from the drop-down list. Add I≤ Camera A shortcut to enter the I≤ camera management interface.(For HDVR series only) ≤layback Enter the playback interface and start playing back the video of the selected channel immediately ≤=< Control A shortcut to enter the ≤=< control interface of the selected camera. Output +ode Output +ode is configurable with Standard, Bright, Gentle and Vivid options. Aux +onitor Switch to the auxiliary output mode and the operation for the main output is disabled.
NOTEIf you enter Aux monitor mode and the Aux monitor is not connected, the mouse operation is disabled. You need to switch back to the +ain output with the F1 button on front panel or VOIP/MON button on IR remote control and then press the Enter button.

text_image
Common Menu
Menu
Single Screen
Multi-screen
Previous Screen
Next Screen
Start Auto-switch
Start Recording
Add IP Camera
Playback
PTZ Control
Output Mode
Figure 44, Right-click +enu
3.3.2 Switching +ain/Aux Output

NOTE
=he CVBS output only serves as the aux output or Live View output.
1. >se the mouse wheel to double-click on the HD+I1/VGA, or HD+I2, or HD+I/VGA output screen, and the following message box pops up.

text_image
Tip
Double-click the mouse again to
switch the auxiliary and main output?
Cancel
Figure 45, Switch Main and Aux Output
2. Use the mouse wheel to double-click on the screen ag ain to switch to the aux output, or click NOTE
You can select the Menu Output Mode under Menu > Configuration > General > More Settings to 4uto, HDMI1/VG4 and HDMI2 and then reboot the device to switch the main output.
| Symbol Description | |
![]() | Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement important points of the main text. |
![]() | Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if not avoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss, performance degradation, or unexpected results. |
![]() | Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk, which if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury. |
Safety Instructions
- Proper configuration of all passwords and other security settings is the responsibility of the installer and/or end-user. - In the use of the product, you must be in strict compliance with the electrical safety regulations of the nation and region. Please refer to technical specifications for detailed information. - Input voltage should meet both the SELV (Safety Extra Low Voltage) and the Limited Power Source with 100 to 240 VAC, 12 VDC or 48 VDC according to the IEC60950-1 standard. Refer to technical specifications for detailed information. - Do not connect several devices to one power adapter as adapter overload may cause over-heating or a fire hazard. - Please make sure that the plug is firmly connected to the power socket. - If smoke, odor or noise rise from the device, turn off the power at once and unplug the power cable, and then please contact the service center.Preventive and
Before connecting and operating your device, please be advised of the following tips:
- Ensure unit is installed in a well-ventilated, dust-free environment.
- >nit is designed for indoor use only.
- Keep all liquids away from the device.
- Ensure environmental conditions meet factory specifications.
- Ensure unit is properly secured to a rack or shelf. Major shocks or jolts to the unit as a result of dropping it may cause damage to the sensitive electronics within the unit.
- >se the device in conjunction with an >≤ S if possible.
- ≤ower down the unit before connecting and disconnecting accessories and peripherals.
- A factory recommended HDD should be used for this device.
- Improper use or replacement of the battery may result in hazard of explosion. Replace with the same or equivalent type only. Dispose of used batteries according to the instructions provided by the battery manufacturer.
- Ensure to use the attached power adaptor only and not to change the adaptor randomly.
≤roduct Key Features
"eneral
- Connectable to =urboHD and analog cameras
- Supports >=C protocol for connecting camera over coa x
- Connectable to 1 ≤ cameras
\- =he analog signal inputs including =urboHD and CVBS can be automatically recognized without configuration
• Each channel supports dual-stream. And sub-stream supports up to vD1 resolution
• =he main stream of H>I Series supports up to 5 M≤ resolution of all the channels (H>I Series)
\- 5 M≤ long distance transmission can be enabled for the analog cameras (H>1 Series)
\- Independent configuration for each channel, including resolution, frame rate, bit rate, image quality, etc.
\- =he minimum frame rate for main stream and sub-stream is 1 fps
\- Encoding for both video stream and video & audio stream; audio and video synchronization during composite stream encoding
• Supports enabling H.265+/H.264+ to ensure high video quality with lowered bit rate
\- H.265+/H.265/H.264+/H.264 encoding for the main stream, and H.265/H.264 encoding for the sub-stream of analog cameras
\- Connectable to H.265 and H.264 I≤ cameras
- Defog level, night to day sensitivity, day to night sensitivity, IR light brightness, day/night mode, and vDR switch configurable for the connected analog cameras supporting these parameters
- 4 MP/5 MP signal switch for the supported analog cameras
• Vatermark technology
Local Monitoring
• HDMI output at up to 4K (3840 × 2160) resolution
- There are two HDMI interfaces of which the HDMI1 and VGA interfaces share simultaneous output. For HDMI1/VGA output, up to 1920 × 1080 resolution is supported. For HDMI2 output, up to 4K (3840 × 2160) resolution is supported
• 1/4/6/8/9/16/25/36 screen live view is supported, and the display sequence of screens is adjustable

NOTE
If the sum of the analog and IP channels exceeds 25, up to 32-window division mode is supported for the VGA/HDMI1 output
• Live view screen can be switched in group and manual switch and automatic cycle live view are also provided, the interval of automatic cycle can be adjusted
• CVBS output only serves as the aux output or live view output
- Quick setting menu is provided for live view
- The selected live view channel can be shielded
- VCA information overlay in live view for the supported analog cameras and in smart playback for the supported analog and IP cameras
- Motion detection, video-tampering detection, video e xception alarm, video loss alarm, and VCA alarm functions
• 1-ch analog camera supports people counting and heat map functions
- HUI Series supports line crossing detection and intrusion detection of all channels, and 2-ch sudden scene change detection.
• The enhanced VCA mode conflicts with the 2K/4K output and 4 MP/5 MP signal input (HUI Series)
- Privacy mask
- Several PTZ protocols (including Omnicast VMS of Genetec) supported; PTZ preset, patrol and pattern
- Zooming in/out by clicking the mouse and PTZ tracing by dragging mouse.
H" Management
• Each disk can have a maximum of 8 TB storage capacity
- 8 network disks (8 NAS disks, 8 IP SAN disks, or n N AS disks + m IP SAN disks (n+m ≤ 8)) can be connected
- Remaining recording time of the HDD can be viewed
• Supports cloud storage
• S.+.A.R.=. and bad sector detection
- HDD sleeping function
- HDD property: redundancy, read-only, read/write (R/V)
• HDD group management
• HDD quota management; different capacity can be assigned to different channels
- Hot-swappable HDD supports RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 5, RAID 6, and RAID 10 storage schemes, and can be enabled and disabled on your demand. 16 arrays can be configured (DS-90xxH>I-K8 only)
Recording,
• Holiday recording schedule configuration
• Cycle and non-cycle recording modes
• ×normal and event video encoding parameters
- + multiple recording types: manual, continuous, alarm, motion, motion | alarm, motion & alarm, and event
• Supports ≤OS triggered recording
- Eight recording time periods with separated recording types
• Supports Channel-+ackup
- Exports data to a >SB or eSA=A device
- Exports video clips when playback
• Video and Log, Video and ≤layer, and ≤layer are selectable to export for backup
• +anagement and maintenance of backup devices
4larms and Exceptions
- Configurable arming time of alarm input/output
- Alarms for video loss, motion detection, video tampe ring, illegal login, network disconnected, I≤confliction, record/capture exception, HDD error, and HDD full, etc.
- Alarm triggers full screen monitoring, audio alarm, notifying surveillance center, sending email and alarm output
• One-key disarms the linkage actions of the alarm input
- ≤ = < linking for the VCA alarm
• VCA detection alarm is supported
• Supports ≤OS triggered alarm
• Supports coaxial alarm (requires camera with alarm I/O)
- System will automatically reboot when a problem is detected in an attempt to restore normal functionality
Other Local "unctions
• +anual and automatic video quality diagnostics
- Operable by mouse and remote control
- =hree-level user management; admin user can create m any operating account and define their operating permission, which includes the permission to access any channel
• Completeness of operation, alarm, exceptions and log writing and searching
• +anually triggering and clearing alarms
- Importing and exporting of configuration file of devices
- Getting cameras type information automatically
• >nlock pattern for device login for the admin
• Clear-text password available
- G>ID file can be exported for use in resetting the password
- + multiple connected analog cameras supporting =urboHD can be upgraded simultaneously via the DVR
Network "unctions
- Self-adaptive 100+ or 1000+ network interface
- 1 ≤ v6 is supported
- C ≤ / I ≤ protocol, ≤ ≤ ≤ oE , DHC ≤ D×S, DD×S, x = ≤ , SAD ≤ , S+= ≤ , ×FS, iSCSI, >≤ n ≤^TM , and H== ≤ S are supported
- Supports access by Hik-Connect. If you enable Hik-Connect, the device will remind you the Internet access risk and ask you to confirm the “=erms of Service” and “≤rivacy Statement” before enabling the service. You should create a verification code to connect to Hik-Connect.
- = C ≤, > D ≤ , and R = ≤ for unicast
• Auto/+anual port mapping by >≤ n≤^TM
- Remote search, playback, download, locking and unlocking the record files, and downloading files broken transfer resume
- Remote parameters setup; remote import/export of device parameters
- Remote viewing of the device status, system logs and alarm status
- Remote keyboard operation
- Remote HDD formatting and program upgrading
- Remote system restart and shutdown
• Supports upgrading via remote F=≤ server
• RS-485 transparent channel transmission
- Alarm and exception information can be sent to the remote host
- Remotely start/stop recording
- Remotely start/stop alarm output
- Remote ≤ = < control
• =wo-way audio and voice broadcasting
• Output bandwidth limit configurable
- Embedded Veb server
- If DHC≤ is enabled, you can enable D×S DHC≤ or disable it and edit the ≤referred D×S Server and Alternate D×S Server
'evvelopment Scalability
- SDK for Windows and Linux system
- Source code of application software for demo
• Development support and training for application system
Table of
≤roduct Key Features ....5
1 Introduction....15
1.1 Front ≤anel....15
1.2 IR Remote Control Operations....17
1.2.1 =roubleshooting Remote Control....19
1.3 >SB +ouse Operation....19
1.4 Input + method Description 20
1.5 Rear ≤anel 20
2 Getting Started....22
2.1 Starting >p and Shutting Down the DVR 22
2.1.1 Starting the DVR....22
2.1.2 Shutting Down/Logging Out/Rebooting the DVR 22
2.2 Activating the Device 23
2.3 >sing the >nlock ≤attern for Login 24
2.3.1 Configuring the >nlock ≤attern .....25
2.3.2 Logging in via >nlock ≤attern .....26
2.3.3 Login and Logout....27
2.3.3.1 >ser Login....27
2.3.4 Resetting Your ≤assword 28
2.3.5 Adding and Connecting I≤ Cameras....30
2.3.5.1 Activating an I≤ Camera....30
2.3.6 Adding an Online I≤ Camera 33
2.3.7 Editing the Connected I≤ Camera 37
2.3.8 Configuring Signal Input Channel....39
2.3.9 Configuring 5 +≤ Long Distance =transmission....40
3 Live View....41
3.1 Introduction 41
3.2 Live View Icons....41
3.3 Live View +ode Operations....42
3.3.1 >sing the +ouse in Live View....43
3.3.2 Switching +ain/Aux Output 43
3.3.3 Quick Setting =oulbar in Live View +ode 44
3.4 Channel-sing >SB Flash Drives, >SB HDDs....103
5.14.2 Backup by Event Search....105
5.14.3 Back >p Video Clips....106
5.15 +anaging Backup Devices 107
6 Alarm Settings....108
6.1 Setting +otion Detection....108
6.2 Setting Sensor Alarms....110
6.2.1 Detecting Video Loss....112
6.2.2 Detecting Video =ampering 113
6.3 Setting All-Day Video Quality Diagnostics 115
6.3 Setting All-Day Video Quality Diagnostics 115
6.4 Handling Exceptions....116
7 Setting Alarm Response Actions....118
8 ≤OS Configuration....121
8.1 Configuring ≤OS Settings....121
8.2 Configuring Overlay Channel 125
8.3 Configuring ≤OS Alarm....126
9 VCA Alarm 128
9.1 Face Detection 128
9.2 Vehicle Detection....130
9.3 Line Crossing Detection....131
9.4 Intrusion Detection....133
9.5 Region Entrance Detection 134
9.6 Region Exiting Detection....135
9.7 Loitering Detection 136
9.8 ≤eople Gathering Detection....136
9.9 Fast +oving Detection....136
9.10 ≤arking Detection....136
9.11 >nattended Baggage Detection 137
9.12 Object Removal Detection....137
9.13 Audio Exception Detection 137
9.14 Defocus Detection....138
9.15 Sudden Scene Change....139
9.16 ≤IR Alarm....139
10 VCA Search....140
10.1 Behavior Search 140
10.2 ≤late Search....141
10.3 ≤eople Counting....142
10.4 Heat +ap....143
11 ×network Settings....144
11.1 Configuring General Settings 144
11.2 Configuring Advanced Settings....146
11.2.1 Configuring ≤≤≤oE Settings....146
11.2.2 Configuring Hik-Connect....147
11.2.3 Configuring DD×S....149
11.2.4 Configuring x=≤ Server 150
11.2.5 Configuring ×A=....151
11.2.6 Configuring +ore Settings....153
11.2.7 Configuring H==≤S ≤ort....154
11.2.8 Configuring E-+ail....156
11.2.9 Checking ×etwork =raffic....158
11.3 Configuring × network Detection ..... 159
11.3.1 =esting × network Delay and ≤acket Loss 159
11.3.2 Exporting × network ≤acket ...... 159
11.3.3 Checking ×network Status....160
11.3.4 Checking x network Statistics....161
12 RAID....162
12.1 Configuring Array 162
12.1.1 Enable RAID....163
12.1.2 One-=ouch Configuration 163
12.1.3 +anually Creating Array....165
12.1.4 Rebuilding Array....167
12.1.5 Automatically Rebuilding Array 168
12.1.6 +anually Rebuilding Array....169
12.1.7 Deleting Array 170
13 Checking and Editing Firmware 171
14 HDD +anagement 172
14.1 Initializing HDDs....172
14.2 +anaging ×etwork HDD 174
14.3 +anaging HDD Group....176
14.3.1 Setting HDD Groups 176
14.4 Setting HDD ≤property....178
14.5 Configuring Quota +ode 179
14.6 Configuring Cloud Storage 181
14.7 Configuring Disk Clone....183
14.8 Checking HDD Status....185
14.9 Checking S.+A.R.= Information....186
14.10 Detecting Bad Sectors 186
14.11 Configuring HDD Error Alarms 187
15 Camera Settings....188
15.1 Configuring OSD Settings....188
15.2 Configuring ≤rivacy +ask....190
15.3 Configuring Video ≤parameters....190
15.3.1 Configuring Image Settings....190
15.3.2 Configuring Camera ≤ parameters Settings....191
16 DVR +anagement and +aintenance....193
16.1 Viewing System Information....193
16.2 Searching Log Files....193
16.3 Importing/Exporting I≤ Camera Info....196
16.4 Importing/Exporting Configuration Files....196
16.5 >pgrading System ....197
16.5.1 >pgrading by Local Backup Device 197
16.5.2 >pgrading by F=≤....197
16.6 >pgrading Camera....198
16.7 Restoring Default Settings....199
17 Other 200
17.1 Configuring General Settings 200
17.2 Configuring RS-232 Serial ≤ort 201
17.3 Configuring DS= Settings....202
17.4 Configuring +ore Settings 202
17.5 +anaging >ser Accounts 205
17.5.1 Adding a >ser....205
17.5.2 Deleting a >ser....208
17.5.3 Editing a >ser 209
18 Appendix 212
18.1 Specifications 212
18.1.1 DS-73xxH>I-K4 212
18.1.2 DS-90xxH>I-K8 213
18.1.3 DS-73xxHQI-K4 214
18.2 Glossary....215
18.3 =roubleshooting....216
18.4 List of Compatible Hikvision I≤ Cameras....220
18.5 List of Compatible = hird-≤arty I ≤ Cameras ......220
NOTE/ Figures in this manual are for illustration only; your screens may differ.
1 Introduction
1.1 Front ≤anel

text_image
Hikvision
7
1
2
4
8
3
6
5
Figure 1, DS-73xxH>I-K4, DS-73xxHQI-K4 Front ≤anel
=able 1-1 DS-73xxH>I-K4, DS-73xxHQI-K4 Front ≤anel Description
x0. xame Function Description 1 ≤OVER =urns green when DVR is powered up READY =urnsgreen, indicating that the DVR is functioning properly S=A=>S =urns green when device is controlled by an IR remote =urns red when controlled by a keyboard and purple when IR remote and keyboard is used at the same time ALAR+ =urns red when a sensor alarm is detected HDD Flickers red when data is being read from or written to HDD =x/Rx Flickers green when network connection is functioning properly 2 DVD-R/V Slot for DVD-R/V 3 Composite Keys SHIF= Switches between the numeric or letter input and functions of the composite keys. (Input letter or numbers when the light is out; Realize functions when the light is red.) 1/+Ex> Enters numeral "1"Accessesthe main menu interface 2/ABC/F1 Enters numeral "2" Enters letters "ABC" =he F1 button when used in a list field will select all items in the list =urns on/off ≤=< light in ≤=< Control mode, and use it to zoom out the image Switches between main and spot video output in live view or playback mode. 3/DEF/F2 Enters numeral "3" Enters letters "DEF" >ses the F2 button is used to change the tab pages <ooms in the image in ≤=< control mode 4/GHI/ESC Enters numeral "4" Enters letters "GHI" Exits and back to the previous menu 5/JKL/EDI= Enters numeral "5" Enters letters "JKL" Deletescharacters before cursor Check the checkbox and select the Ox/OFF switch Starts/stops record clipping in playback 6/+×O/≤LAY Enters numeral "6" Enters letters "+×O" Accesses to playback interface in ≤slayback mode 7/≤QRS/REC Enters numeral "7" Enters letters "≤QRS" Accesses to manual record interface+ anually enables/disables record 8/=>V/≤=< Enters numeral "8" Enters letters "=>V" Accesses ≤=< control interface 9/√XY</≤REV Enters numeral "9" Enters letters "√XY<" +ulti-channel display in live view 0/A Enters numeral "0" ×0. ×ame Function Description Shifts the input methods in the editing text field. (>pper and lowercase, alphabet, symbols or numeric input). 4 DIREC=IO× ×avigates between different fields and items in menus >ses the >p and Down button s to speed up and slow down the playing of video files in ≤layback mode.=he Left and Right button will select the next and previous record files. Cycles through channels in Live View mode. Controlsthe movement of the ≤=< camera in ≤=< control mode Ex=ER Confirms selection in any of the menu modes Checks the checkbox ≤lays or pauses the playing of video files in ≤layback mode Advances the video by a single frame in single-frame ≤layback mode Stops/starts auto switch in Auto-switch mode 5 ≤OVER ≤ower on/off switch 6 JOG SH>=LE Control Moves the active selection up and down in a menu Cycles through different channels in live view mode Jumps 30s forward/backward in video files in the playback mode Controlsthe movement of the ≤=< camera in ≤=< control mode Moves the active selection up and down in a menu 7 >SB Interface >niversal Serial Bus (>SB) ports for additional devices such as >SB mous e and >SB Hard Disk Drive (HDD) 8 IR Receiver Receiver for IR remote control

text_image
1
HIKVISION
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
HITKVISION
100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100
DIN
SOT
AVTS
RLOOMA
FOCS+
INT
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
Figure 2, DS-90xxH>I-K8 Front ≤anel
=able 1-2 DS-90xxH>I-K8 Front ≤anel Description
×0. ×ame Function Description 1 ALARM Red when a sensor alarm is detected READY Blue, indicating that the DVR is functioning properly S=A=>S Blue when device is controlled by an IR remote Red when controlled by a keyboard and purple when IR remote and keyboard is used at the same time HDD Flickers red when data is being read from or written to HDD MODEM Flickers blue when network connection is functioning properly =x/Rx Blue when the device is in armed status; at this time, an alarm is enabled when an event is detected. G>ARD =urns off when the device is unarmed. =he arm/disarm status can be changed by pressing and holding on the ESC button for more than 3 seconds in live view mode. Red when a sensor alarm is detected 2 IR Receiver Receiver for IR remote 3 Front ≤anel Lock Lock or unlock the panel by the key 4 DVD-R/V Slot for DVD-R/V 5 Alphanumeric Buttons Switches to the corresponding channel in live view or ≤=< control mode Inputs numbers and characters in edit mode Switches between different channels in playback mode Blue when the corresponding channel is recording; turns red when the channel is in network transmission status; turns pink when the channel is recording and transmitting. 6 >SB Interfaces >niversal Serial Bus ports for additional devices such as >S B mouse and >SB Hard Disk Drive (HDD) 7 ESC Returns to the previous menu ≤resses for arming/disarming the device in live view mode REC/SHO= Enters the Manual Record settings menu ≤resses this button followed by a numeric button to call a ≤=< preset in ≤=< control settings =urns audio on/off in the playback mode ≤LAY/A>=0 Enters the playback mode Automatically scans in the ≤=< control menu <OOM+ No. Name Function Description A/FOC>S+ Adjusts focus in the ≤=< Control menu Switches between input methods (upper and lower case alphabet, symbols and numeric input). EDI=/IRIS+ Edits text fields. when editing text fields, it also deletes the ch aracter in front of the cursor Checks the checkbox in the checkbox fields Adjusts the iris of the camera in ≤=< control mode Generates video clips for backup in playback mode Enters/exits the folder of >SB device and eSA=A HDD MAIN/S≤O=/<OOM- Switches between main and spot output <ooms out the image in ≤=< control mode F1/LIGH= Selects all items on the list when used in a list field =urns on/off ≤=< light (if applicable) in ≤=< control mode Switches between play and reverse play in playback mode F2/A>X Cycles through tab pages Switches between channels in synchronous playback mode MEN>/VI≤ER Returns to the Main menu (after successful login) ≤resses and holds the button for five seconds to turn off audible key beep Starts wiper (if applicable) in ≤=< control mode Shows/hides the control interface in playback mode ≤REV/FOC>S- Switches between single screen and multi-screen mode Adjusts the focus in conjunction with the A/FOC>S+ button in ≤=< control mode ≤=</IRIS- Enters the ≤=< Control mode Adjusts the iris of the ≤=< camera in ≤=< control mode 8 DIREC=ION Navigates between different fields and items in menus >ses the >p and Down buttons to speed up and slow down the playing of video files in ≤slayback mode. =he Left and Right button will select the next and previous record files. Cycles through channels in Live View mode Controls the movement of the ≤=< camera in ≤=< control mode EN=ER Confirms selection in any of the menu modes. Checks the checkbox ≤lays or pauses the playing of video files in ≤slayback mode Advances the video by a single frame in single-frame ≤slayback mode Stops/starts auto switch in Auto-switch mode 9 JOG SH>=LE Control Moves the active selection up and down in a menu Cycles through different channels in live view mode Jumps 30s forward/backward in video files in the playback mode Controls the movement of the ≤=< camera in ≤=< control mode 10 ≤OVER ON/OFF ≤ower on/off switch
1.2 IR Remote Control Operations
=he DVR may also be controlled with the included IR remote control.

NOTE
If your system is secured with a password pattern, press ESC on the remote to display the password input window and input the password by using a keyboard.

NOTE
Batteries (2 × AAA) must be installed before operation.

text_image
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
ABC
JKI
TUV
MNO
MNO
ABC
JKI
TUV
MNO
ABC
JKI
TUV
MNO
ABC
JKI
TUV
MNO
ABC
JKI
TUV
MNO
ABC
JKI
TUV
MNO
ABC
JKI
TUV
MNO
ABC
JKI
TUV
MNO
ABC
JKI
TUV
MNO
ABC
JKI
TUV
MNO
ABC
JKI
TUV
Figure 3, Remote Control
=he keys on the remote control resemble the ones found on the front panel. See =able 1-3.
=able 1-3 Description of the IR Remote Control Buttons
×o. ×ame Description 1 ≤OVER ≤ower on/off the device. ≤ower on/off the device by pressing and holding the button for 5 seconds. 2 ME×> Button ≤ress the button to return to the main menu (after successful login). ≤ress and hold the button for 5 seconds will turn off audible key beep. In ≤=< Control mode, the ME×> button will start wiper (if applicable). In ≤slayback mode, it is used to show/hide the control interface. 3 REC Button Enter the Manual Record setting menu. In ≤=< control settings, press the button and then you can call a ≤=< preset by pressing ×umeric button. It is also used to turn audio on/off in the ≤slayback mode. 4 DIREC=IO× Button ×avgiate between different fields and items in menus. In the ≤slayback mode, the >p and Down button is used to speed up and slow down recorded video. =he Left and Right button will select the next and previous record files. In Live View mode, these buttons can be used to cycle through channels. In ≤=< control mode, it can control the movement of the ≤=< camera. Ex=ER Button Confirm selection in any of the menu modes. It can also be used to tick checkbox fields. In ≤slayback mode, it can be used to play or pause the video. In single-frame ≤slayback mode, pressing the button will advance the video by a single frame. 5 ≤=< Button In Auto-switch mode, it can be used to stop /start auto switch. 6 DEV Enables/Disables Remote Control. 7 Alphanumeric Buttons Switch to the corresponding channel in Live view or ≤=< Control mode. Input numbers and characters in Edit mode. Switch between different channels in the ≤slayback mode. 8 ESC Button Back to the previous menu. ≤ress for Arming/disarming the device in Live View mode. 9 ≤LAY Button =he button is used to enter the All-day ≤slayback mode. It is also used to auto scan in the ≤=< Control menu. 10 ≤REV Button Switch between single screen and multi-screen mode. In ≤=< Control mode, it is used to adjust the focus in conjunction with the A/FOC>S+ button.
1.2.1 = roubleshooting Remote Control

NOTE
+ake sure batteries have been installed properly. Also, note that the remote control must be aimed at the IR receiver on the ×VR front panel.
If there is no response after pressing any button on the remote, follow the procedure below to troubleshoot.
1. Go to M enu > Configuration > General > More Settings by operating the front control panel or the mouse.
2. Check and remember the DVR ×o. =he default DVR ×o. is 255. =his number valid for all IR remote controls.
3. ≤ress DEV on the remote control.
4. Enter the DVR ×o. in Step 2.
5. ≤ress ENTER on the remote.
If the front panel Status indicator turns blue, the remote control is operating properly. If the Status indicator does not turn blue and there is no response, check the following:
- Batteries are installed correctly and the polarities are not reversed.
- Batteries are fresh and not out of charge.
• IR receiver is not obstructed.
If the remote still does not function, change the remote and try again, or contact the device provider.
1.3 >SB +ouse Operation
A regular 3-button (Left/Right/Scroll-wheel) >SB mouse can also be used with this DVR.
1. ≤lug mouse into a >SB interface on the DVR. =he mouse should automatically be detected. If not, the mouse might not be compatible. Refer to your mouse provider.
=able 1-4 Description of the +ouse Control
xame Action Description Left-Click Single-Click Live view: Select channel and show the quick set menu.+enu: Select and enter Double-Click Live view: Switch between single-screen and multi-screen. Drag ≤=< control: Wheeling.≤rivacy mask and motion detection: Select target area.Digital zoom-in: Drag and select target area.Live view: Drag channel/time bar. Right-Click Single-Click Live view: Show menu.+enu: Exit current menu to upper level menu. Scroll-vheel Scrolling up Live view: ≤previous screen.+enu: ≤previous item. Scrolling down Live view: ×ext screen.+enu: ×ext item.
1.4 Input + method Description

text_image
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0
q w e r t y u i o p
a s d f g h j k l
↑ z x c v b n m ←x
123/..
Figure 4, Soft Keyboard
Description of the buttons on the soft keyboard:
=able 1-5 Description of the Soft Keyboard Icons
Icon Description Icon Description 0 ... 9 ×umber A ... Z English letter Lowercase/>ppercase Backspace 123/.. ABC Switch the keyboard Space ≤ositioning the cursor Enter #+= Symbols Reserved
1.5 Rear ≤anel

NOTE
=he rear panel varies by model. Refer to the actual product. =he following figures are for reference only.

text_image
AUDIO IN
AUDIO OUT
LINE IN
1 2 3 7 13
15 14
eSATA
VIDEO IN
Video Out
HDMI1
HDMI2
VGA
LAN2
RS-232
LAN1
RS-485 KR ALABIN OUT
ALABIN
1 4 2 5 8 9 12 11
Figure 5, DS-73xxH>I-K4 Rear ≤anel

text_image
AUDIO IN
AUDIO OUT
LINE IN
1 2 3 7 13
15 14
eSATA
1 2 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
VIDEO IN
Video Out
R5-232
HDMI2
VGA
LAN
RS-480
RS-A/ANIN OUT
AUDIO IN
1 4 2 5 8 9 12 11
Figure 6, DS-73xxHQI-K4 Rear ≤anel

text_image
3
7 13 6 15 14 16
VGA
CVBS LINE IN
LOOP OUT
AUDIO OUT
eSATA
RS-232 LAN2
LAN1 ALAMIN OUT
1 4 2 5 8 9 12
VIDEO OUT
HDMI2
HDMI1 VGA LAN1
AUDIO IN
Figure 7, DS-90xxH>I-K8 Rear ≤anel
Table 1-6 Description of DS-73xxH>I-K4, DS-73xxHQI-K4, and DS90xxH>I-K8 Rear ≤anel
No. Item Description 1 VIDEO IN BNC interface for TurboHD and analog video input. 2 VIDEO O>T BNC connector for video output. 3 A>DIO IN/LOO≤ O>T (for DS-90xxH>I-K8) RCA connector 4 >SB ≤ort >niversal Serial Bus (>SB) port for additional devices. 5 HDMI1/VGF Simultaneous HDMI1/VGA output. Display local video output and menu. 6 HDMI2 HDMI2 video output connector (DS-73xxH>I-K4 and DS-90xxH>I-K8) 7 A>DIO O>T RCA connector 8 Network Interface Connector for network (DS-73xxH>I-K4 and DS-90xxH>I-K8 = x2, DS-73xxH>I-K4 = x1) 9 RS -485 and Alarm Interface Connector for RS-485 devices. T+ and T- pins connect toR+ and R - pins of ≤T D+, D- pin connects to Ta, Tb pin of controller. For cascading devices, the first DVR's D+, D- pin should be connected with the D+, D- pin of the next DVR. Connector for alarm input Connector for alarm output 10 ≤ower Supply 100 to240 VAC power supply 11 ≤ower Switch Switch for turning on/off the device 12 GND Ground 13 LINE IN BNC connector for audio input 14 eSATA Connects external SATA HDD, CD/DVC-RV 15 RS-232 Interface Connector for RS-232 devices 16 ALARM O>T Connector for alarm output 17 A>DIO IN (for DS-90xxH>I-K8) RCA connector
2 Getting Started
2.1 Starting Up and Shutting Down the DVR
Purpose
≤roper startup and shutdown procedures are crucial to expanding the life of the DVR.
+efore You Start
Check that the voltage of the power supply is the same with the DVR's requirement, and the ground connection is working properly.
2.1.1 Starting the DVR
Check that the power supply is plugged into an electrical outlet. It is HIGHLY recommended that an Uninterruptible ≤ ower Supply (U ≤ S) be used in conjunction with the device.
Turn on the power switch on the rear panel, and the ≤ lower indicator LED should turn on indicating that the unit begins to start up.
After startup, the ≤ower indicator LED remains on.
2.1.2 Shutting Down/Logging Out/Rebooting the DVR
1. Go to Menu > Maintenance.

text_image
System Maintenance
System Logs
Import/Export
Upgrade
Default
Network Detect
HDD Detect
Start Time
09-23-2017
00:00:30
End Time
09-23-2017
23:59:59
Major Type
Shutdown
Miner Type
Alarm Input
Alarm Output
Motion Detect
Motion Detect
Video Tamper
Video Tamper
Kosovo Started
POS Stopped
Video Quality Diagnostics Alarm Started
Logout
Shutdown
Reboot
Cancel
Export All
Search
Figure 8, Shutdown Menu
2. Click Ⓞ (lower left corner of screen) to display the Shutdown window.
3. Click one of the following:
\- Logout – Logs the current user out of the system.
- Shutdown – Shuts system down.
- Reboot – Shuts system down and reboots.
-
text_image
Attention
? Shut down the system?
Yes No
Figure 9, Shutdown ≤rompt
2.2 Activating the Device
Purpose
For the first-time access, you need to activate the device by setting an admin password. ×o operation is allowed before activation. You can also activate the device via Veb Browser, SAD≤, or Client Software.
1. Input the same password in the
text_image
Activation
User Name
Create New Password
Confirm New Password
admin
Hikvision1
Strong
Valid password range [8-16]. You can use a combination of numbers,
lowercase, uppercase and special character for your password with at
least two kinds of them contained.
OK Cancel
Figure 10, Settings Admin ≤assword

WARNING
STRON" P4SSWOR' RENOTE
Clear text password is supported. Click 📄 to see the clear text of the password. Click the icon again and the password again becomes invisible.
3. After the device is activated, the Attention box pops up as below.

text_image
Attention
The device is activated. Properly keep your password. Export the GUID file for password resetting?
Yes No
Figure 11, Attention Window
4. (Optional) Click Yes to export the G>ID. =he Reset ≤assword interface pops up. Click Export to export the G>ID to the >SB flash drive for password resetting.

text_image
Reset Password
Device Name
USB Flash Disk 1-1
Refresh
Name Size Type Edit Date
Folder 11-18-2015 11:20:43
GUID_606524190_20161118112048.bin 128B File 11-18-2016 11:20:48
Free Space 7170.54MB
New Folder Export Back
Figure 12, Export G>ID
5. After exporting the G>ID, the Attention box pops up as below. Click Yes to duplicate the password or No to cancel it.

text_image
Attention
Duplicate the password to IP cameras
that are connected with default protocol.
Yes No
Figure 13, Duplicate the ≤assword
2.3 >sing the >nlock ≤attern for Login
Purpose
An admin can configure an unlock pattern for device login.
2.3.1 Configuring the >nlock ≤attern
After the device is activated, enter the following interface to configure the device unlock pattern.

text_image
Set Unlock Pattern
Draw the unlock pattern first.
Figure 14, Set >nlock ≤attern
1. >se the mouse to draw a pattern among the nine dots on the screen. Release the mouse when the pattern is done.

flowchart
graph TD
A["Start"] --> B{Decision}
B -->|Yes| C["OK"]
B -->|No| D["End"]
C --> E["Action"]
D --> F["Action"]
Figure 15, Draw the ≤attern
i NOTE
Connect at least four dots to draw the pattern.
Each dot can be connected only once.
2. Draw the same pattern again to confirm it. When the two patterns match, the pattern is configured successfully.

text_image
Set Unlock Pattern
Draw pattern again to confirm.
Figure 16, Confirm the ≤attern
If the two patterns are different, you must set the pattern again.

text_image
Set Unlock Pattern
The two patterns are different. Try
again.
Figure 17, Reset the ≤attern
2.3.2 Logging in via >nlock ≤attern

NOTE
Only the admin user has the permission to unlock the device.
Configure the pattern first before unlocking.
1. Right-click the mouse on the screen and select the menu to enter the interface.

text_image
Unlock
admin
Draw the unlock pattern first.
Forget My P...
Switch User
Figure 18, Draw the >nlock ≤attern
2. Draw the pre-defined pattern to unlock to enter the menu operation.
i NOTE
You can right click the mouse to log in via the normal mode.
If you have forgotten your pattern, you can select the "orget My Pattern or Switch User option to enter the normal login dialog box.
when the pattern you draw is different from the pattern you have configured, try again.
If you draw the wrong pattern seven times, the account will lock for one minute.

text_image
Login
User Name admin
Password
Forget Password OK Cancel
Figure 19, ×normal Login Dialog Box
2.3.3 Login and Logout
2.3.3.1 >ser Login
Purpose
You must log in to the device before operating the menu and other functions.
1. Select the User Name in the drop-down list.

text_image
Login
User Name admin
Password
Forget Password OK Cancel
Figure 20, Login Interface
2. Input the Password.
3. Click OK to log in.

NOTE
In the Login interface, for the admin user, if you have entered the wrong password seven times, the account will be locked for 60 seconds. For operators, if you have entered the wrong password for five times, the account will be locked for 60 seconds.

text_image
Attention
Incorrect password. You still have 6 chances.
Please try again.
OK
Figure 21, >ser Account ≤rotection for the Admin

text_image
Attention
Incorrect password. You still have 4 chances.
Please try again.
OK
Figure 22, >ser Account ≤rotection for the Operator
2.3.4 Resetting Your ≤assword
Purpose
If you forget the admin password, you can reset the password by importing the G>ID file, which was exported and saved in the local >SB flash drive after you activated the device.
1. On the user login interface, click "orget Password to enter the Import G>ID interface.

text_image
Reset Password
Device Name USB Flash Disk 1-1 Refresh
Name Size Type Edit Date Delete Play
4.bmp 6750.06KB File 09-02-2016 11:52:28
5.bmp 6750.06KB File 09-02-2016 11:52:32
6.bmp 6750.06KB File 09-02-2016 11:52:42
7.bmp 6750.06KB File 09-02-2016 11:52:10
8.bmp 6750.06KB File 09-02-2016 11:52:16
9.bmp 6750.06KB File 09-02-2016 11:52:24
GUID_583574624_20160... 12GB File 09-09-2016 14:10:37
Free Space 14.26GB
New Folder Import Back
Figure 23, Import G>ID
2. Select the G>ID file from the >SB flash drive and click Import to pop up the Reset ≤assword interface.

text_image
Reset Password
User Name admin
Create New Pass...
Confirm New Pass...
✓ Valid password range [8-16]. You can use a combination of numbers,
lowercase, uppercase and special character for your password with at
least two kinds of them contained.
OK Cancel
Figure 24, Reset ≤assword
3. Input the new password and confirm the password.
4. Click OK to save the new password. =hen the Attention box pops up as shown below.

text_image
Attention
The password is reset. The GUID file is ineffective. Export a new GUID file.
OK
Figure 25, G>ID File Imported
5. Click OK and the Attention box as below pops up to remind you to duplicate the password of the device to I ≤ cameras that are connected with default protocol. Click Yes to duplicate the password or No to cancel it.

text_image
Attention
Duplicate the password to IP cameras
that are connected with default protocol.
Yes No
Figure 26, Duplicate the ≤assword
i NOTE
=o retrieve a forgotten password, you must export the G>ID file first.
Once the password is reset, the G>ID file will be invalid. You can export a new G>ID file.
2.3.5 Adding and Connecting I≤ Cameras
2.3.5.1 Activating an I≤ Camera
Purpose
Before adding the camera, make sure the I≤ camera to be added is in active status.
1. Select Add IP Camera from the right-click menu in live view mode or go to Menu> Camera> IP Camera.
For the I≤ camera detected online in the same network segment, the Security status shows whether it is active or inactive.

text_image
Cameras Setup
IP Camera IP Camera Import/Export
Camera
Add/Delete Status Security IP Camera Add/ Edit Upgr Camera Name Protocol
D1 20E2103 HIKVISION
D2 Strong Pass... 192.168.10.4 2DE2103
Strong Pass... 192.168.10.109 4A25 HIKVISION
Active 192.168.10.2
Active 192.168.10.6
Active 192.168.10.7
Active 192.168.10.63
Active 192.168.10.110
HIKVISION
Hikvision
Hikvision
Hikvision
Hikvision
Refresh One-touch Activ Upgrade Delete One-touch Adding Custom Adding
Max. IP Camera Number: 2
Net Receive Mio Bandwidth: 120Mbps
Figure 27, I≤ Camera +anagement Interface
2. Click the inactive icon of the camera to enter the following interface to activate it. You can also select multiple cameras
from the list and click the One-touch 4activate to activate the cameras in batch.

text_image
Activation
User Name: admin
Password:
Valid password range [8-16]. You can
use a combination of numbers,
lowercase, uppercase and special
character for your password with at least
two kinds of them contained.
Confirm New Password
Ok Cancel
Figure 28, Activate the Camera
3. Set the password of the camera to activate it.
Use 4dmin Password: If you check this checkbox, the camera(s) will be configured with the admin password of the operating DVR.
text_image
Activation
User Name: admin
Password: •••••••••
RISKY
Valid password range [8-16]. You can
use a combination of numbers,
lowercase, uppercase and special
character for your password with at least
two kinds of them contained.
Confirm New Password: ••••••••••|
Ok Cancel
Figure 29, Level 0 (Inadequate) Strength ≤assword

text_image
Activation
User Name: admin
Password: **********
ATTENTION
Invalid Password
RISKY
No kind of them contained.
Confirm New Password: ********#
Ok Cancel
Figure 30, Invalid ≤assword +essay

text_image
Activation
User Name: admin
Password: •••••••••
WEAK
Valid password range [8-16]. You can
use a combination of numbers,
lowercase, uppercase and special
character for your password with at least
two kinds of them contained.
Confirm New Password: ••••••••••
Ok Cancel
Figure 31, Level 1 ≤ password Strength

text_image
Activation
User Name: admin
Password: *****
FAIR
Valid password range [8-16]. You can
use a combination of numbers,
lowercase, uppercase and special
character for your password with at least
two kinds of them contained.
Confirm New Password: *****
Ok Cancel
Figure 32, Level 2 ≤ password Strength

text_image
Activation
User Name: admin
Password: •••••••••
Strong
Valid password range [8-16]. You can
use a combination of numbers,
lowercase, uppercase and special
character for your password with at least
two kinds of them contained.
Confirm New Password: ••••••••••
Ok Cancel
Figure 33, Level 3 and Level 4 ≤ password Strength

WARNING
STRONG PASSWORD RECOMMENDED – ve highly recommend you create a strong password of your own choosing (using a minimum of eight characters, including at least three of the following categories: upper case letters, lower case letters, numbers, and special characters) in order to increase the security of your product. Ve also recommend that you reset your password regularly. Especially in high security systems, resetting the password monthly or weekly can better protect your product.
4. Click OK to finish activating the I≤ camera.=he camera security status will change to Active.
2.3.6 Adding an Online I≤ Camera
Purpose
Before you can get a live view or record of the video, add the network cameras to the device's connection list.
Before You Start
Ensure the network connection is valid and correct.
- OPTION 1
1. Select Add IP Camera from the right-click menu in live view mode or go to Menu > Camera > IP Camera.

text_image
Cameras Setup
Analog IP Camera IP Camera ImportExport
P Cameras List
Camera ID: 001200000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
IPC Status: Connected Connected and Support Preview Here Not Connected
Open
Week Px: 19.163.167
Camera 51
HKVISION DS-2CD4224F-ZS 8888
443716488
V5.3 Build 150...
Active 192 188 254...
HKVISION DS-2CD2143FW... 8888
498375488
V5.3 Build 150...
Active 192 188 254...
HKVISION DS-2CD4185F-Z 8888
510891983
V5.3 Build 150...
Active 192 188 254...
HKVISION DS-ZDE2185-DE... 8888
497555561
V5.3 Build 150...
Active 192 188 254...
HKVISION DS-2CD4333FW... 8888
506634726
V5.3 Build 151...
Active 192 188 254...
HKVISION DS-2CD4A25FW... 8888
579492463
V5.3 Build 169...
Active 192 188 254...
HKVISION DS-2CD4A5FE-ZD1 8888
511137153
V5.3 Build 169...
Active 192 188 254...
HKVISION DS-2CD4333FAD-1888
456332664
V5.3 Build 151...
Active 192 188 254...
HKVISION DS-2CD4113FW... 8888
496329537
V5.3 Build 159...
Active 192 188 254...
HKVISION DS-2CD4WMEFS... 8888
452755562
V5.3 Build 161...
Options
One-touch Active
Upgrade
Details
One-touch Adding
Custom Adding
Figure 34, I≤ Camera +anagement Interface
2. Online cameras with the same network segment will be detected and displayed in the camera list.
3. Select the I≤ camera from the list and click add the camera (with the same admin password of the DVR). Or you can click One-touch Adding to add all cameras (with the same admin password) from the list.
i NOTE
+ake sure the camera to add has already been activated by setting the admin password, and the admin password of the camera is the same as the DVR's.
4. (Optional) Check the Enable H.265 checkbox (for Initial Access) for the connected I≤ camera supporting H.265.=hen the I≤ camera will be encoded with H.265.
5. (For encoders with multiple channels only) check the Channel ≤ort checkbox in the pop-up window, as shown in the following figure, and click OK to add multiple channels.

text_image
Channel Port
✓ Channel Port ✓ 1 ✓ 2 ✓ 3 ✓ 4 ✓ 5
OK Cancel
Figure 35, Select + multiple Channels
• OPTION 2
1. On the I≤ Camera +anagement interface, click
text_image
Add IP Camera (Custom)
1 192.168.254.36 1 DS-2CD4... HIKVISION 8000
2 192.168.254.196 1 DS-2CD4... HIKVISION 8000
3 10.102.102.187 1 DS-2CD6... HIKVISION 8000
4 192.168.254.146 1 DS-2CD6... HIKVISION 8000
5 192.168.254.103 1 DS-2CD4... HIKVISION 8000
6 192.168.254.116 1 DS-2CD4... HIKVISION 8000
7 192.168.254.24 1 DS-2CD4 HIKVISION 8000
IP Camera Address 192.168.254.36
Protocol HIKVISION
Management Port 8000
User Name admin
Admin Password
Search Add Cancel
Figure 36, Custom Adding I≤ Camera Interface
2. You can edit the I ≤ address, protocol, management port, and other information of the I ≤ camera to be added.

NOTE
If the I≤ camera to add has not been activated, activate it from the I≤ camera list on the IP
text_image
IP Camera Management
Camera... Add/Delete Status Security IP Camera Address Edit Upgrade Camera No
D1 Strong Pass 10.16.1.250 IPdome
Active 10.16.2.109
Active 10.16.2.222
Refresh One-touch Activ Upgrade Delete One-touch Adding Custom Adding
Enable H.215 (For Initial Access)
Net Receive Idle Bandwidth: 318Mbps
Exit
Figure 37, Successfully Added I≤ Cameras
=able 1-7 Explanation of the Icons
Icon Explanation Icon Explanation 
EDIT (Pen): Press to edit basic IP camera parameters 
ADD (+): Press to add the detected IP camera 
DISCONNECTED (!): Camera is disconnected; click the icon to get camera's exception information 
DELETE (Trash Can): Press to delete the camera 
PLAY (Right Triangle): Play connected camera's live video 
ADVANCED (Gear): Press to go to advanced settings window. 
UPGRADE (Up Arrow): Upgrade the connected camera's firmware 
DASH: No advanced settings available for this camera 
REPAIR (?): Press to attempt to repair the connection Securitycolumn SECURITY: Shows camera status (active/inactive) or password strength (strong/medium/weak/risky)
4. (Optional) Check the E nable H.265 checkbox (For Initial Access) for the connected I≤ camera supporting H.265.=hen the I≤ camera will be encoded with H.265.
2.3.7 Editing the Connected I≤ Camera
Purpose
After adding the I≤ cameras, the basic information of the camera is listed on the interface, and you can configure the basic settings of the I≤ cameras.
1. Click ☑ to edit the parameters. You can edit the I≤ address, protocol, and other parameters.

text_image
Edit IP Camera
IP Camera No. D1
IP Camera Address 10.9.6.48
Protocol HIKVISION
Management Port 8000
Video Port 1
Camera User Name adults
Camera Password
OK Cancel
Figure 38, Edit I≤ Camera
text_image
Network Password
Advance Settings
IP Camera No. D2
IP Camera Address 10.102.102.2
Management Port 8000
Apply OK Cancel
Figure 39, ×network Configuration of the Camera
4. You can edit the camera network information and the password.

text_image
Advance Settings
Network Password
IP Camera No. D2
Current Password
New Password
Confirm
✓ Valid password range [8-16]. You can use a combination of numbers,
lowercase, uppercase and special character for your password with at
least two kinds of them contained.
Apply OK Cancel
Figure 40, ≤assword Configuration of the Camera
5. Click OK to save the settings and exit the interface.
2.3.8 Configuring Signal Input Channel

NOTE
This chapter is applicable only to DS-73xx/90xxHUI-K Series DVRs.
Purpose
You can configure the analog and I ≤ signal input types and enable 5 M ≤ long distance transmission.
1. Go to Menu > Camera > Signal Input Status.

text_image
Cameras Setup
Signal Input Status IP Camera IP Camera Import/Export
Camera HD/CVBS IP
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
A16
Max. IP Camera Number 2
5MP Long Distance Transmission
Apply
Figure 41, Signal Input Status
2. Check this checkbox to select different signal input types: HD/CVBS and I≤. If you select HD/CVBS, four types of analog signal inputs including TurboHD and CVBS can be connected randomly for the selected channel. If you select I≤, an I≤ camera can be connected to the selected channel.
3. Click 4pply to save the settings.
You can view the maximum number I≤ cameras in the Max. IP 2.3.9 Configuring 5 M≤ Long Distance Transmission

≤roduct Key Features
"eneral
- Connectable to =urboHD and analog cameras - Supports >=C protocol for connecting camera over coa x - Connectable to 1 ≤ cameras \- =he analog signal inputs including =urboHD and CVBS can be automatically recognized without configuration • Each channel supports dual-stream. And sub-stream supports up to vD1 resolution • =he main stream of H>I Series supports up to 5 M≤ resolution of all the channels (H>I Series) \- 5 M≤ long distance transmission can be enabled for the analog cameras (H>1 Series) \- Independent configuration for each channel, including resolution, frame rate, bit rate, image quality, etc. \- =he minimum frame rate for main stream and sub-stream is 1 fps \- Encoding for both video stream and video & audio stream; audio and video synchronization during composite stream encoding • Supports enabling H.265+/H.264+ to ensure high video quality with lowered bit rate \- H.265+/H.265/H.264+/H.264 encoding for the main stream, and H.265/H.264 encoding for the sub-stream of analog cameras \- Connectable to H.265 and H.264 I≤ cameras - Defog level, night to day sensitivity, day to night sensitivity, IR light brightness, day/night mode, and vDR switch configurable for the connected analog cameras supporting these parameters - 4 MP/5 MP signal switch for the supported analog cameras • Vatermark technologyLocal Monitoring
• HDMI output at up to 4K (3840 × 2160) resolution - There are two HDMI interfaces of which the HDMI1 and VGA interfaces share simultaneous output. For HDMI1/VGA output, up to 1920 × 1080 resolution is supported. For HDMI2 output, up to 4K (3840 × 2160) resolution is supported • 1/4/6/8/9/16/25/36 screen live view is supported, and the display sequence of screens is adjustable NOTE
If the sum of the analog and IP channels exceeds 25, up to 32-window division mode is supported for the VGA/HDMI1 output • Live view screen can be switched in group and manual switch and automatic cycle live view are also provided, the interval of automatic cycle can be adjusted • CVBS output only serves as the aux output or live view output - Quick setting menu is provided for live view - The selected live view channel can be shielded - VCA information overlay in live view for the supported analog cameras and in smart playback for the supported analog and IP cameras - Motion detection, video-tampering detection, video e xception alarm, video loss alarm, and VCA alarm functions • 1-ch analog camera supports people counting and heat map functions - HUI Series supports line crossing detection and intrusion detection of all channels, and 2-ch sudden scene change detection. • The enhanced VCA mode conflicts with the 2K/4K output and 4 MP/5 MP signal input (HUI Series) - Privacy mask - Several PTZ protocols (including Omnicast VMS of Genetec) supported; PTZ preset, patrol and pattern - Zooming in/out by clicking the mouse and PTZ tracing by dragging mouse.H" Management
• Each disk can have a maximum of 8 TB storage capacity - 8 network disks (8 NAS disks, 8 IP SAN disks, or n N AS disks + m IP SAN disks (n+m ≤ 8)) can be connected - Remaining recording time of the HDD can be viewed • Supports cloud storage • S.+.A.R.=. and bad sector detection - HDD sleeping function - HDD property: redundancy, read-only, read/write (R/V) • HDD group management • HDD quota management; different capacity can be assigned to different channels - Hot-swappable HDD supports RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 5, RAID 6, and RAID 10 storage schemes, and can be enabled and disabled on your demand. 16 arrays can be configured (DS-90xxH>I-K8 only)Recording,
• Holiday recording schedule configuration
• Cycle and non-cycle recording modes
• ×normal and event video encoding parameters
- + multiple recording types: manual, continuous, alarm, motion, motion | alarm, motion & alarm, and event
• Supports ≤OS triggered recording
- Eight recording time periods with separated recording types
• Supports Channel-+ackup
- Exports data to a >SB or eSA=A device
- Exports video clips when playback
• Video and Log, Video and ≤layer, and ≤layer are selectable to export for backup
• +anagement and maintenance of backup devices
4larms and Exceptions
- Configurable arming time of alarm input/output - Alarms for video loss, motion detection, video tampe ring, illegal login, network disconnected, I≤confliction, record/capture exception, HDD error, and HDD full, etc. - Alarm triggers full screen monitoring, audio alarm, notifying surveillance center, sending email and alarm output • One-key disarms the linkage actions of the alarm input - ≤ = < linking for the VCA alarm • VCA detection alarm is supported • Supports ≤OS triggered alarm • Supports coaxial alarm (requires camera with alarm I/O) - System will automatically reboot when a problem is detected in an attempt to restore normal functionalityOther Local "unctions
• +anual and automatic video quality diagnostics - Operable by mouse and remote control - =hree-level user management; admin user can create m any operating account and define their operating permission, which includes the permission to access any channel • Completeness of operation, alarm, exceptions and log writing and searching • +anually triggering and clearing alarms - Importing and exporting of configuration file of devices - Getting cameras type information automatically • >nlock pattern for device login for the admin • Clear-text password available - G>ID file can be exported for use in resetting the password - + multiple connected analog cameras supporting =urboHD can be upgraded simultaneously via the DVRNetwork "unctions
- Self-adaptive 100+ or 1000+ network interface - 1 ≤ v6 is supported - C ≤ / I ≤ protocol, ≤ ≤ ≤ oE , DHC ≤ D×S, DD×S, x = ≤ , SAD ≤ , S+= ≤ , ×FS, iSCSI, >≤ n ≤^TM , and H== ≤ S are supported - Supports access by Hik-Connect. If you enable Hik-Connect, the device will remind you the Internet access risk and ask you to confirm the “=erms of Service” and “≤rivacy Statement” before enabling the service. You should create a verification code to connect to Hik-Connect. - = C ≤, > D ≤ , and R = ≤ for unicast • Auto/+anual port mapping by >≤ n≤^TM - Remote search, playback, download, locking and unlocking the record files, and downloading files broken transfer resume - Remote parameters setup; remote import/export of device parameters - Remote viewing of the device status, system logs and alarm status - Remote keyboard operation - Remote HDD formatting and program upgrading - Remote system restart and shutdown • Supports upgrading via remote F=≤ server • RS-485 transparent channel transmission - Alarm and exception information can be sent to the remote host - Remotely start/stop recording - Remotely start/stop alarm output - Remote ≤ = < control • =wo-way audio and voice broadcasting • Output bandwidth limit configurable - Embedded Veb server - If DHC≤ is enabled, you can enable D×S DHC≤ or disable it and edit the ≤referred D×S Server and Alternate D×S Server'evvelopment Scalability
- SDK for Windows and Linux system - Source code of application software for demo • Development support and training for application systemTable of
≤roduct Key Features ....5
1 Introduction....15
1.1 Front ≤anel....15
1.2 IR Remote Control Operations....17
1.2.1 =roubleshooting Remote Control....19
1.3 >SB +ouse Operation....19
1.4 Input + method Description 20
1.5 Rear ≤anel 20
2 Getting Started....22
2.1 Starting >p and Shutting Down the DVR 22
2.1.1 Starting the DVR....22
2.1.2 Shutting Down/Logging Out/Rebooting the DVR 22
2.2 Activating the Device 23
2.3 >sing the >nlock ≤attern for Login 24
2.3.1 Configuring the >nlock ≤attern .....25
2.3.2 Logging in via >nlock ≤attern .....26
2.3.3 Login and Logout....27
2.3.3.1 >ser Login....27
2.3.4 Resetting Your ≤assword 28
2.3.5 Adding and Connecting I≤ Cameras....30
2.3.5.1 Activating an I≤ Camera....30
2.3.6 Adding an Online I≤ Camera 33
2.3.7 Editing the Connected I≤ Camera 37
2.3.8 Configuring Signal Input Channel....39
2.3.9 Configuring 5 +≤ Long Distance =transmission....40
3 Live View....41
3.1 Introduction 41
3.2 Live View Icons....41
3.3 Live View +ode Operations....42
3.3.1 >sing the +ouse in Live View....43
3.3.2 Switching +ain/Aux Output 43
3.3.3 Quick Setting =oulbar in Live View +ode 44
3.4 Channel-sing >SB Flash Drives, >SB HDDs....103
5.14.2 Backup by Event Search....105
5.14.3 Back >p Video Clips....106
5.15 +anaging Backup Devices 107
6 Alarm Settings....108
6.1 Setting +otion Detection....108
6.2 Setting Sensor Alarms....110
6.2.1 Detecting Video Loss....112
6.2.2 Detecting Video =ampering 113
6.3 Setting All-Day Video Quality Diagnostics 115
6.3 Setting All-Day Video Quality Diagnostics 115
6.4 Handling Exceptions....116
7 Setting Alarm Response Actions....118
8 ≤OS Configuration....121
8.1 Configuring ≤OS Settings....121
8.2 Configuring Overlay Channel 125
8.3 Configuring ≤OS Alarm....126
9 VCA Alarm 128
9.1 Face Detection 128
9.2 Vehicle Detection....130
9.3 Line Crossing Detection....131
9.4 Intrusion Detection....133
9.5 Region Entrance Detection 134
9.6 Region Exiting Detection....135
9.7 Loitering Detection 136
9.8 ≤eople Gathering Detection....136
9.9 Fast +oving Detection....136
9.10 ≤arking Detection....136
9.11 >nattended Baggage Detection 137
9.12 Object Removal Detection....137
9.13 Audio Exception Detection 137
9.14 Defocus Detection....138
9.15 Sudden Scene Change....139
9.16 ≤IR Alarm....139
10 VCA Search....140
10.1 Behavior Search 140
10.2 ≤late Search....141
10.3 ≤eople Counting....142
10.4 Heat +ap....143
11 ×network Settings....144
11.1 Configuring General Settings 144
11.2 Configuring Advanced Settings....146
11.2.1 Configuring ≤≤≤oE Settings....146
11.2.2 Configuring Hik-Connect....147
11.2.3 Configuring DD×S....149
11.2.4 Configuring x=≤ Server 150
11.2.5 Configuring ×A=....151
11.2.6 Configuring +ore Settings....153
11.2.7 Configuring H==≤S ≤ort....154
11.2.8 Configuring E-+ail....156
11.2.9 Checking ×etwork =raffic....158
11.3 Configuring × network Detection ..... 159
11.3.1 =esting × network Delay and ≤acket Loss 159
11.3.2 Exporting × network ≤acket ...... 159
11.3.3 Checking ×network Status....160
11.3.4 Checking x network Statistics....161
12 RAID....162
12.1 Configuring Array 162
12.1.1 Enable RAID....163
12.1.2 One-=ouch Configuration 163
12.1.3 +anually Creating Array....165
12.1.4 Rebuilding Array....167
12.1.5 Automatically Rebuilding Array 168
12.1.6 +anually Rebuilding Array....169
12.1.7 Deleting Array 170
13 Checking and Editing Firmware 171
14 HDD +anagement 172
14.1 Initializing HDDs....172
14.2 +anaging ×etwork HDD 174
14.3 +anaging HDD Group....176
14.3.1 Setting HDD Groups 176
14.4 Setting HDD ≤property....178
14.5 Configuring Quota +ode 179
14.6 Configuring Cloud Storage 181
14.7 Configuring Disk Clone....183
14.8 Checking HDD Status....185
14.9 Checking S.+A.R.= Information....186
14.10 Detecting Bad Sectors 186
14.11 Configuring HDD Error Alarms 187
15 Camera Settings....188
15.1 Configuring OSD Settings....188
15.2 Configuring ≤rivacy +ask....190
15.3 Configuring Video ≤parameters....190
15.3.1 Configuring Image Settings....190
15.3.2 Configuring Camera ≤ parameters Settings....191
16 DVR +anagement and +aintenance....193
16.1 Viewing System Information....193
16.2 Searching Log Files....193
16.3 Importing/Exporting I≤ Camera Info....196
16.4 Importing/Exporting Configuration Files....196
16.5 >pgrading System ....197
16.5.1 >pgrading by Local Backup Device 197
16.5.2 >pgrading by F=≤....197
16.6 >pgrading Camera....198
16.7 Restoring Default Settings....199
17 Other 200
17.1 Configuring General Settings 200
17.2 Configuring RS-232 Serial ≤ort 201
17.3 Configuring DS= Settings....202
17.4 Configuring +ore Settings 202
17.5 +anaging >ser Accounts 205
17.5.1 Adding a >ser....205
17.5.2 Deleting a >ser....208
17.5.3 Editing a >ser 209
18 Appendix 212
18.1 Specifications 212
18.1.1 DS-73xxH>I-K4 212
18.1.2 DS-90xxH>I-K8 213
18.1.3 DS-73xxHQI-K4 214
18.2 Glossary....215
18.3 =roubleshooting....216
18.4 List of Compatible Hikvision I≤ Cameras....220
18.5 List of Compatible = hird-≤arty I ≤ Cameras ......220
NOTE/ Figures in this manual are for illustration only; your screens may differ.
1 Introduction
1.1 Front ≤anel

text_image
Hikvision
7
1
2
4
8
3
6
5
Figure 1, DS-73xxH>I-K4, DS-73xxHQI-K4 Front ≤anel
=able 1-1 DS-73xxH>I-K4, DS-73xxHQI-K4 Front ≤anel Description
x0. xame Function Description 1 ≤OVER =urns green when DVR is powered up READY =urnsgreen, indicating that the DVR is functioning properly S=A=>S =urns green when device is controlled by an IR remote =urns red when controlled by a keyboard and purple when IR remote and keyboard is used at the same time ALAR+ =urns red when a sensor alarm is detected HDD Flickers red when data is being read from or written to HDD =x/Rx Flickers green when network connection is functioning properly 2 DVD-R/V Slot for DVD-R/V 3 Composite Keys SHIF= Switches between the numeric or letter input and functions of the composite keys. (Input letter or numbers when the light is out; Realize functions when the light is red.) 1/+Ex> Enters numeral "1"Accessesthe main menu interface 2/ABC/F1 Enters numeral "2" Enters letters "ABC" =he F1 button when used in a list field will select all items in the list =urns on/off ≤=< light in ≤=< Control mode, and use it to zoom out the image Switches between main and spot video output in live view or playback mode. 3/DEF/F2 Enters numeral "3" Enters letters "DEF" >ses the F2 button is used to change the tab pages <ooms in the image in ≤=< control mode 4/GHI/ESC Enters numeral "4" Enters letters "GHI" Exits and back to the previous menu 5/JKL/EDI= Enters numeral "5" Enters letters "JKL" Deletescharacters before cursor Check the checkbox and select the Ox/OFF switch Starts/stops record clipping in playback 6/+×O/≤LAY Enters numeral "6" Enters letters "+×O" Accesses to playback interface in ≤slayback mode 7/≤QRS/REC Enters numeral "7" Enters letters "≤QRS" Accesses to manual record interface+ anually enables/disables record 8/=>V/≤=< Enters numeral "8" Enters letters "=>V" Accesses ≤=< control interface 9/√XY</≤REV Enters numeral "9" Enters letters "√XY<" +ulti-channel display in live view 0/A Enters numeral "0" ×0. ×ame Function Description Shifts the input methods in the editing text field. (>pper and lowercase, alphabet, symbols or numeric input). 4 DIREC=IO× ×avigates between different fields and items in menus >ses the >p and Down button s to speed up and slow down the playing of video files in ≤layback mode.=he Left and Right button will select the next and previous record files. Cycles through channels in Live View mode. Controlsthe movement of the ≤=< camera in ≤=< control mode Ex=ER Confirms selection in any of the menu modes Checks the checkbox ≤lays or pauses the playing of video files in ≤layback mode Advances the video by a single frame in single-frame ≤layback mode Stops/starts auto switch in Auto-switch mode 5 ≤OVER ≤ower on/off switch 6 JOG SH>=LE Control Moves the active selection up and down in a menu Cycles through different channels in live view mode Jumps 30s forward/backward in video files in the playback mode Controlsthe movement of the ≤=< camera in ≤=< control mode Moves the active selection up and down in a menu 7 >SB Interface >niversal Serial Bus (>SB) ports for additional devices such as >SB mous e and >SB Hard Disk Drive (HDD) 8 IR Receiver Receiver for IR remote control

text_image
1
HIKVISION
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
HITKVISION
100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100
DIN
SOT
AVTS
RLOOMA
FOCS+
INT
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
BIOM
Figure 2, DS-90xxH>I-K8 Front ≤anel
=able 1-2 DS-90xxH>I-K8 Front ≤anel Description
×0. ×ame Function Description 1 ALARM Red when a sensor alarm is detected READY Blue, indicating that the DVR is functioning properly S=A=>S Blue when device is controlled by an IR remote Red when controlled by a keyboard and purple when IR remote and keyboard is used at the same time HDD Flickers red when data is being read from or written to HDD MODEM Flickers blue when network connection is functioning properly =x/Rx Blue when the device is in armed status; at this time, an alarm is enabled when an event is detected. G>ARD =urns off when the device is unarmed. =he arm/disarm status can be changed by pressing and holding on the ESC button for more than 3 seconds in live view mode. Red when a sensor alarm is detected 2 IR Receiver Receiver for IR remote 3 Front ≤anel Lock Lock or unlock the panel by the key 4 DVD-R/V Slot for DVD-R/V 5 Alphanumeric Buttons Switches to the corresponding channel in live view or ≤=< control mode Inputs numbers and characters in edit mode Switches between different channels in playback mode Blue when the corresponding channel is recording; turns red when the channel is in network transmission status; turns pink when the channel is recording and transmitting. 6 >SB Interfaces >niversal Serial Bus ports for additional devices such as >S B mouse and >SB Hard Disk Drive (HDD) 7 ESC Returns to the previous menu ≤resses for arming/disarming the device in live view mode REC/SHO= Enters the Manual Record settings menu ≤resses this button followed by a numeric button to call a ≤=< preset in ≤=< control settings =urns audio on/off in the playback mode ≤LAY/A>=0 Enters the playback mode Automatically scans in the ≤=< control menu <OOM+ No. Name Function Description A/FOC>S+ Adjusts focus in the ≤=< Control menu Switches between input methods (upper and lower case alphabet, symbols and numeric input). EDI=/IRIS+ Edits text fields. when editing text fields, it also deletes the ch aracter in front of the cursor Checks the checkbox in the checkbox fields Adjusts the iris of the camera in ≤=< control mode Generates video clips for backup in playback mode Enters/exits the folder of >SB device and eSA=A HDD MAIN/S≤O=/<OOM- Switches between main and spot output <ooms out the image in ≤=< control mode F1/LIGH= Selects all items on the list when used in a list field =urns on/off ≤=< light (if applicable) in ≤=< control mode Switches between play and reverse play in playback mode F2/A>X Cycles through tab pages Switches between channels in synchronous playback mode MEN>/VI≤ER Returns to the Main menu (after successful login) ≤resses and holds the button for five seconds to turn off audible key beep Starts wiper (if applicable) in ≤=< control mode Shows/hides the control interface in playback mode ≤REV/FOC>S- Switches between single screen and multi-screen mode Adjusts the focus in conjunction with the A/FOC>S+ button in ≤=< control mode ≤=</IRIS- Enters the ≤=< Control mode Adjusts the iris of the ≤=< camera in ≤=< control mode 8 DIREC=ION Navigates between different fields and items in menus >ses the >p and Down buttons to speed up and slow down the playing of video files in ≤slayback mode. =he Left and Right button will select the next and previous record files. Cycles through channels in Live View mode Controls the movement of the ≤=< camera in ≤=< control mode EN=ER Confirms selection in any of the menu modes. Checks the checkbox ≤lays or pauses the playing of video files in ≤slayback mode Advances the video by a single frame in single-frame ≤slayback mode Stops/starts auto switch in Auto-switch mode 9 JOG SH>=LE Control Moves the active selection up and down in a menu Cycles through different channels in live view mode Jumps 30s forward/backward in video files in the playback mode Controls the movement of the ≤=< camera in ≤=< control mode 10 ≤OVER ON/OFF ≤ower on/off switch
1.2 IR Remote Control Operations
=he DVR may also be controlled with the included IR remote control.

NOTE
If your system is secured with a password pattern, press ESC on the remote to display the password input window and input the password by using a keyboard.

NOTE
Batteries (2 × AAA) must be installed before operation.

text_image
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
ABC
JKI
TUV
MNO
MNO
ABC
JKI
TUV
MNO
ABC
JKI
TUV
MNO
ABC
JKI
TUV
MNO
ABC
JKI
TUV
MNO
ABC
JKI
TUV
MNO
ABC
JKI
TUV
MNO
ABC
JKI
TUV
MNO
ABC
JKI
TUV
MNO
ABC
JKI
TUV
MNO
ABC
JKI
TUV
Figure 3, Remote Control
=he keys on the remote control resemble the ones found on the front panel. See =able 1-3.
=able 1-3 Description of the IR Remote Control Buttons
×o. ×ame Description 1 ≤OVER ≤ower on/off the device. ≤ower on/off the device by pressing and holding the button for 5 seconds. 2 ME×> Button ≤ress the button to return to the main menu (after successful login). ≤ress and hold the button for 5 seconds will turn off audible key beep. In ≤=< Control mode, the ME×> button will start wiper (if applicable). In ≤slayback mode, it is used to show/hide the control interface. 3 REC Button Enter the Manual Record setting menu. In ≤=< control settings, press the button and then you can call a ≤=< preset by pressing ×umeric button. It is also used to turn audio on/off in the ≤slayback mode. 4 DIREC=IO× Button ×avgiate between different fields and items in menus. In the ≤slayback mode, the >p and Down button is used to speed up and slow down recorded video. =he Left and Right button will select the next and previous record files. In Live View mode, these buttons can be used to cycle through channels. In ≤=< control mode, it can control the movement of the ≤=< camera. Ex=ER Button Confirm selection in any of the menu modes. It can also be used to tick checkbox fields. In ≤slayback mode, it can be used to play or pause the video. In single-frame ≤slayback mode, pressing the button will advance the video by a single frame. 5 ≤=< Button In Auto-switch mode, it can be used to stop /start auto switch. 6 DEV Enables/Disables Remote Control. 7 Alphanumeric Buttons Switch to the corresponding channel in Live view or ≤=< Control mode. Input numbers and characters in Edit mode. Switch between different channels in the ≤slayback mode. 8 ESC Button Back to the previous menu. ≤ress for Arming/disarming the device in Live View mode. 9 ≤LAY Button =he button is used to enter the All-day ≤slayback mode. It is also used to auto scan in the ≤=< Control menu. 10 ≤REV Button Switch between single screen and multi-screen mode. In ≤=< Control mode, it is used to adjust the focus in conjunction with the A/FOC>S+ button.
1.2.1 = roubleshooting Remote Control

NOTE
+ake sure batteries have been installed properly. Also, note that the remote control must be aimed at the IR receiver on the ×VR front panel.
If there is no response after pressing any button on the remote, follow the procedure below to troubleshoot.
1. Go to M enu > Configuration > General > More Settings by operating the front control panel or the mouse.
2. Check and remember the DVR ×o. =he default DVR ×o. is 255. =his number valid for all IR remote controls.
3. ≤ress DEV on the remote control.
4. Enter the DVR ×o. in Step 2.
5. ≤ress ENTER on the remote.
If the front panel Status indicator turns blue, the remote control is operating properly. If the Status indicator does not turn blue and there is no response, check the following:
- Batteries are installed correctly and the polarities are not reversed.
- Batteries are fresh and not out of charge.
• IR receiver is not obstructed.
If the remote still does not function, change the remote and try again, or contact the device provider.
1.3 >SB +ouse Operation
A regular 3-button (Left/Right/Scroll-wheel) >SB mouse can also be used with this DVR.
1. ≤lug mouse into a >SB interface on the DVR. =he mouse should automatically be detected. If not, the mouse might not be compatible. Refer to your mouse provider.
=able 1-4 Description of the +ouse Control
xame Action Description Left-Click Single-Click Live view: Select channel and show the quick set menu.+enu: Select and enter Double-Click Live view: Switch between single-screen and multi-screen. Drag ≤=< control: Wheeling.≤rivacy mask and motion detection: Select target area.Digital zoom-in: Drag and select target area.Live view: Drag channel/time bar. Right-Click Single-Click Live view: Show menu.+enu: Exit current menu to upper level menu. Scroll-vheel Scrolling up Live view: ≤previous screen.+enu: ≤previous item. Scrolling down Live view: ×ext screen.+enu: ×ext item.
1.4 Input + method Description

text_image
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0
q w e r t y u i o p
a s d f g h j k l
↑ z x c v b n m ←x
123/..
Figure 4, Soft Keyboard
Description of the buttons on the soft keyboard:
=able 1-5 Description of the Soft Keyboard Icons
Icon Description Icon Description 0 ... 9 ×umber A ... Z English letter Lowercase/>ppercase Backspace 123/.. ABC Switch the keyboard Space ≤ositioning the cursor Enter #+= Symbols Reserved
1.5 Rear ≤anel

NOTE
=he rear panel varies by model. Refer to the actual product. =he following figures are for reference only.

text_image
AUDIO IN
AUDIO OUT
LINE IN
1 2 3 7 13
15 14
eSATA
VIDEO IN
Video Out
HDMI1
HDMI2
VGA
LAN2
RS-232
LAN1
RS-485 KR ALABIN OUT
ALABIN
1 4 2 5 8 9 12 11
Figure 5, DS-73xxH>I-K4 Rear ≤anel

text_image
AUDIO IN
AUDIO OUT
LINE IN
1 2 3 7 13
15 14
eSATA
1 2 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
VIDEO IN
Video Out
R5-232
HDMI2
VGA
LAN
RS-480
RS-A/ANIN OUT
AUDIO IN
1 4 2 5 8 9 12 11
Figure 6, DS-73xxHQI-K4 Rear ≤anel

text_image
3
7 13 6 15 14 16
VGA
CVBS LINE IN
LOOP OUT
AUDIO OUT
eSATA
RS-232 LAN2
LAN1 ALAMIN OUT
1 4 2 5 8 9 12
VIDEO OUT
HDMI2
HDMI1 VGA LAN1
AUDIO IN
Figure 7, DS-90xxH>I-K8 Rear ≤anel
Table 1-6 Description of DS-73xxH>I-K4, DS-73xxHQI-K4, and DS90xxH>I-K8 Rear ≤anel
No. Item Description 1 VIDEO IN BNC interface for TurboHD and analog video input. 2 VIDEO O>T BNC connector for video output. 3 A>DIO IN/LOO≤ O>T (for DS-90xxH>I-K8) RCA connector 4 >SB ≤ort >niversal Serial Bus (>SB) port for additional devices. 5 HDMI1/VGF Simultaneous HDMI1/VGA output. Display local video output and menu. 6 HDMI2 HDMI2 video output connector (DS-73xxH>I-K4 and DS-90xxH>I-K8) 7 A>DIO O>T RCA connector 8 Network Interface Connector for network (DS-73xxH>I-K4 and DS-90xxH>I-K8 = x2, DS-73xxH>I-K4 = x1) 9 RS -485 and Alarm Interface Connector for RS-485 devices. T+ and T- pins connect toR+ and R - pins of ≤T D+, D- pin connects to Ta, Tb pin of controller. For cascading devices, the first DVR's D+, D- pin should be connected with the D+, D- pin of the next DVR. Connector for alarm input Connector for alarm output 10 ≤ower Supply 100 to240 VAC power supply 11 ≤ower Switch Switch for turning on/off the device 12 GND Ground 13 LINE IN BNC connector for audio input 14 eSATA Connects external SATA HDD, CD/DVC-RV 15 RS-232 Interface Connector for RS-232 devices 16 ALARM O>T Connector for alarm output 17 A>DIO IN (for DS-90xxH>I-K8) RCA connector
2 Getting Started
2.1 Starting Up and Shutting Down the DVR
Purpose
≤roper startup and shutdown procedures are crucial to expanding the life of the DVR.
+efore You Start
Check that the voltage of the power supply is the same with the DVR's requirement, and the ground connection is working properly.
2.1.1 Starting the DVR
Check that the power supply is plugged into an electrical outlet. It is HIGHLY recommended that an Uninterruptible ≤ ower Supply (U ≤ S) be used in conjunction with the device.
Turn on the power switch on the rear panel, and the ≤ lower indicator LED should turn on indicating that the unit begins to start up.
After startup, the ≤ower indicator LED remains on.
2.1.2 Shutting Down/Logging Out/Rebooting the DVR
1. Go to Menu > Maintenance.

text_image
System Maintenance
System Logs
Import/Export
Upgrade
Default
Network Detect
HDD Detect
Start Time
09-23-2017
00:00:30
End Time
09-23-2017
23:59:59
Major Type
Shutdown
Miner Type
Alarm Input
Alarm Output
Motion Detect
Motion Detect
Video Tamper
Video Tamper
Kosovo Started
POS Stopped
Video Quality Diagnostics Alarm Started
Logout
Shutdown
Reboot
Cancel
Export All
Search
Figure 8, Shutdown Menu
2. Click Ⓞ (lower left corner of screen) to display the Shutdown window.
3. Click one of the following:
\- Logout – Logs the current user out of the system.
- Shutdown – Shuts system down.
- Reboot – Shuts system down and reboots.
-
text_image
Attention
? Shut down the system?
Yes No
Figure 9, Shutdown ≤rompt
2.2 Activating the Device
Purpose
For the first-time access, you need to activate the device by setting an admin password. ×o operation is allowed before activation. You can also activate the device via Veb Browser, SAD≤, or Client Software.
1. Input the same password in the
text_image
Activation
User Name
Create New Password
Confirm New Password
admin
Hikvision1
Strong
Valid password range [8-16]. You can use a combination of numbers,
lowercase, uppercase and special character for your password with at
least two kinds of them contained.
OK Cancel
Figure 10, Settings Admin ≤assword

WARNING
STRON" P4SSWOR' RENOTE
Clear text password is supported. Click 📄 to see the clear text of the password. Click the icon again and the password again becomes invisible.
3. After the device is activated, the Attention box pops up as below.

16 DVR +anagement and +aintenance....193
16.1 Viewing System Information....193 16.2 Searching Log Files....193 16.3 Importing/Exporting I≤ Camera Info....196 16.4 Importing/Exporting Configuration Files....196 16.5 >pgrading System ....197 16.5.1 >pgrading by Local Backup Device 197 16.5.2 >pgrading by F=≤....197 16.6 >pgrading Camera....198 16.7 Restoring Default Settings....19917 Other 200
17.1 Configuring General Settings 200 17.2 Configuring RS-232 Serial ≤ort 201 17.3 Configuring DS= Settings....202 17.4 Configuring +ore Settings 202 17.5 +anaging >ser Accounts 205 17.5.1 Adding a >ser....205 17.5.2 Deleting a >ser....208 17.5.3 Editing a >ser 20918 Appendix 212
18.1 Specifications 212 18.1.1 DS-73xxH>I-K4 212 18.1.2 DS-90xxH>I-K8 213 18.1.3 DS-73xxHQI-K4 214 18.2 Glossary....215 18.3 =roubleshooting....216 18.4 List of Compatible Hikvision I≤ Cameras....220 18.5 List of Compatible = hird-≤arty I ≤ Cameras ......220 NOTE/ Figures in this manual are for illustration only; your screens may differ.1 Introduction
1.1 Front ≤anel
text_image
Hikvision 7 1 2 4 8 3 6 5| x0. | xame | Function Description | |
| 1 | ≤OVER | =urns green when DVR is powered up | |
| READY | =urnsgreen, indicating that the DVR is functioning properly | ||
| S=A=>S | =urns green when device is controlled by an IR remote | ||
| =urns red when controlled by a keyboard and purple when IR remote and keyboard is used at the same time | |||
| ALAR+ | =urns red when a sensor alarm is detected | ||
| HDD | Flickers red when data is being read from or written to HDD | ||
| =x/Rx | Flickers green when network connection is functioning properly | ||
| 2 | DVD-R/V | Slot for DVD-R/V | |
| 3 | Composite Keys | SHIF= | Switches between the numeric or letter input and functions of the composite keys. (Input letter or numbers when the light is out; Realize functions when the light is red.) |
| 1/+Ex> | Enters numeral "1"Accessesthe main menu interface | ||
| 2/ABC/F1 | Enters numeral "2" | ||
| Enters letters "ABC" | |||
| =he F1 button when used in a list field will select all items in the list | |||
| =urns on/off ≤=< light in ≤=< Control mode, and use it to zoom out the image | |||
| Switches between main and spot video output in live view or playback mode. | |||
| 3/DEF/F2 | Enters numeral "3" | ||
| Enters letters "DEF" | |||
| >ses the F2 button is used to change the tab pages | |||
| <ooms in the image in ≤=< control mode | |||
| 4/GHI/ESC | Enters numeral "4" | ||
| Enters letters "GHI" | |||
| Exits and back to the previous menu | |||
| 5/JKL/EDI= | Enters numeral "5" | ||
| Enters letters "JKL" | |||
| Deletescharacters before cursor | |||
| Check the checkbox and select the Ox/OFF switch | |||
| Starts/stops record clipping in playback | |||
| 6/+×O/≤LAY | Enters numeral "6" | ||
| Enters letters "+×O" | |||
| Accesses to playback interface in ≤slayback mode | |||
| 7/≤QRS/REC | Enters numeral "7" | ||
| Enters letters "≤QRS" | |||
| Accesses to manual record interface+ anually enables/disables record | |||
| 8/=>V/≤=< | Enters numeral "8" | ||
| Enters letters "=>V" | |||
| Accesses ≤=< control interface | |||
| 9/√XY</≤REV | Enters numeral "9" | ||
| Enters letters "√XY<" | |||
| +ulti-channel display in live view | |||
| 0/A | Enters numeral "0" | ||
| ×0. | ×ame | Function Description | |
| Shifts the input methods in the editing text field. (>pper and lowercase, alphabet, symbols or numeric input). | |||
| 4 | DIREC=IO× | ×avigates between different fields and items in menus | |
| >ses the >p and Down button s to speed up and slow down the playing of video files in ≤layback mode.=he Left and Right button will select the next and previous record files. | |||
| Cycles through channels in Live View mode. | |||
| Controlsthe movement of the ≤=< camera in ≤=< control mode | |||
| Ex=ER | Confirms selection in any of the menu modes | ||
| Checks the checkbox | |||
| ≤lays or pauses the playing of video files in ≤layback mode | |||
| Advances the video by a single frame in single-frame ≤layback mode | |||
| Stops/starts auto switch in Auto-switch mode | |||
| 5 | ≤OVER | ≤ower on/off switch | |
| 6 JOG | SH>=LE Control | Moves the active selection up and down in a menu | |
| Cycles through different channels in live view mode | |||
| Jumps 30s forward/backward in video files in the playback mode | |||
| Controlsthe movement of the ≤=< camera in ≤=< control mode | |||
| Moves the active selection up and down in a menu | |||
| 7 >SB | Interface | >niversal Serial Bus (>SB) ports for additional devices such as >SB mous e and >SB Hard Disk Drive (HDD) | |
| 8 | IR Receiver | Receiver for IR remote control | |
text_image
1 HIKVISION 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 HITKVISION 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 DIN SOT AVTS RLOOMA FOCS+ INT BIOM BIOM BIOM BIOM BIOM BIOM BIOM BIOM BIOM BIOM BIOM BIOM BIOM BIOM BIOM BIOM BIOM BIOM BIOM BIOM BIOM BIOM BIOM BIOM BIOM BIOM BIOM BIOM BIOM BIOM BIOM BIOM BIOM BIOM| ×0. | ×ame | Function Description |
| 1 | ALARM | Red when a sensor alarm is detected |
| READY | Blue, indicating that the DVR is functioning properly | |
| S=A=>S | Blue when device is controlled by an IR remote | |
| Red when controlled by a keyboard and purple when IR remote and keyboard is used at the same time | ||
| HDD | Flickers red when data is being read from or written to HDD | |
| MODEM | Flickers blue when network connection is functioning properly | |
| =x/Rx | Blue when the device is in armed status; at this time, an alarm is enabled when an event is detected. | |
| G>ARD | =urns off when the device is unarmed. =he arm/disarm status can be changed by pressing and holding on the ESC button for more than 3 seconds in live view mode. | |
| Red when a sensor alarm is detected | ||
| 2 | IR Receiver | Receiver for IR remote |
| 3 | Front ≤anel Lock | Lock or unlock the panel by the key |
| 4 | DVD-R/V | Slot for DVD-R/V |
| 5 | Alphanumeric Buttons | Switches to the corresponding channel in live view or ≤=< control mode |
| Inputs numbers and characters in edit mode | ||
| Switches between different channels in playback mode | ||
| Blue when the corresponding channel is recording; turns red when the channel is in network transmission status; turns pink when the channel is recording and transmitting. | ||
| 6 | >SB Interfaces | >niversal Serial Bus ports for additional devices such as >S B mouse and >SB Hard Disk Drive (HDD) |
| 7 | ESC | Returns to the previous menu |
| ≤resses for arming/disarming the device in live view mode | ||
| REC/SHO= | Enters the Manual Record settings menu | |
| ≤resses this button followed by a numeric button to call a ≤=< preset in ≤=< control settings | ||
| =urns audio on/off in the playback mode | ||
| ≤LAY/A>=0 | Enters the playback mode | |
| Automatically scans in the ≤=< control menu | ||
| <OOM+ | ||
| No. | Name | Function Description |
| A/FOC>S+ | Adjusts focus in the ≤=< Control menu | |
| Switches between input methods (upper and lower case alphabet, symbols and numeric input). | ||
| EDI=/IRIS+ | Edits text fields. when editing text fields, it also deletes the ch aracter in front of the cursor | |
| Checks the checkbox in the checkbox fields | ||
| Adjusts the iris of the camera in ≤=< control mode | ||
| Generates video clips for backup in playback mode | ||
| Enters/exits the folder of >SB device and eSA=A HDD | ||
| MAIN/S≤O=/<OOM- | Switches between main and spot output | |
| <ooms out the image in ≤=< control mode | ||
| F1/LIGH= | Selects all items on the list when used in a list field | |
| =urns on/off ≤=< light (if applicable) in ≤=< control mode | ||
| Switches between play and reverse play in playback mode | ||
| F2/A>X | Cycles through tab pages | |
| Switches between channels in synchronous playback mode | ||
| MEN>/VI≤ER | Returns to the Main menu (after successful login) | |
| ≤resses and holds the button for five seconds to turn off audible key beep | ||
| Starts wiper (if applicable) in ≤=< control mode | ||
| Shows/hides the control interface in playback mode | ||
| ≤REV/FOC>S- | Switches between single screen and multi-screen mode | |
| Adjusts the focus in conjunction with the A/FOC>S+ button in ≤=< control mode | ||
| ≤=</IRIS- | Enters the ≤=< Control mode | |
| Adjusts the iris of the ≤=< camera in ≤=< control mode | ||
| 8 | DIREC=ION | Navigates between different fields and items in menus |
| >ses the >p and Down buttons to speed up and slow down the playing of video files in ≤slayback mode. =he Left and Right button will select the next and previous record files. | ||
| Cycles through channels in Live View mode | ||
| Controls the movement of the ≤=< camera in ≤=< control mode | ||
| EN=ER | Confirms selection in any of the menu modes. | |
| Checks the checkbox | ||
| ≤lays or pauses the playing of video files in ≤slayback mode | ||
| Advances the video by a single frame in single-frame ≤slayback mode | ||
| Stops/starts auto switch in Auto-switch mode | ||
| 9 | JOG SH>=LE Control | Moves the active selection up and down in a menu |
| Cycles through different channels in live view mode | ||
| Jumps 30s forward/backward in video files in the playback mode | ||
| Controls the movement of the ≤=< camera in ≤=< control mode | ||
| 10 | ≤OVER ON/OFF | ≤ower on/off switch |
1.2 IR Remote Control Operations
=he DVR may also be controlled with the included IR remote control. NOTE
If your system is secured with a password pattern, press ESC on the remote to display the password input window and input the password by using a keyboard. NOTE
Batteries (2 × AAA) must be installed before operation. text_image
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ABC JKI TUV MNO MNO ABC JKI TUV MNO ABC JKI TUV MNO ABC JKI TUV MNO ABC JKI TUV MNO ABC JKI TUV MNO ABC JKI TUV MNO ABC JKI TUV MNO ABC JKI TUV MNO ABC JKI TUV MNO ABC JKI TUV| ×o. | ×ame | Description |
| 1 ≤OVER | ≤ower on/off the device. | |
| ≤ower on/off the device by pressing and holding the button for 5 seconds. | ||
| 2 ME×> Button | ≤ress the button to return to the main menu (after successful login). | |
| ≤ress and hold the button for 5 seconds will turn off audible key beep. | ||
| In ≤=< Control mode, the ME×> button will start wiper (if applicable). | ||
| In ≤slayback mode, it is used to show/hide the control interface. | ||
| 3 REC Button | Enter the Manual Record setting menu. | |
| In ≤=< control settings, press the button and then you can call a ≤=< preset by pressing ×umeric button. | ||
| It is also used to turn audio on/off in the ≤slayback mode. | ||
| 4 | DIREC=IO× Button | ×avgiate between different fields and items in menus. |
| In the ≤slayback mode, the >p and Down button is used to speed up and slow down recorded video. =he Left and Right button will select the next and previous record files. | ||
| In Live View mode, these buttons can be used to cycle through channels. | ||
| In ≤=< control mode, it can control the movement of the ≤=< camera. | ||
| Ex=ER Button | Confirm selection in any of the menu modes. | |
| It can also be used to tick checkbox fields. | ||
| In ≤slayback mode, it can be used to play or pause the video. | ||
| In single-frame ≤slayback mode, pressing the button will advance the video by a single frame. | ||
| 5 | ≤=< Button | In Auto-switch mode, it can be used to stop /start auto switch. |
| 6 | DEV | Enables/Disables Remote Control. |
| 7 | Alphanumeric Buttons | Switch to the corresponding channel in Live view or ≤=< Control mode. |
| Input numbers and characters in Edit mode. | ||
| Switch between different channels in the ≤slayback mode. | ||
| 8 ESC Button | Back to the previous menu. | |
| ≤ress for Arming/disarming the device in Live View mode. | ||
| 9 ≤LAY Button | =he button is used to enter the All-day ≤slayback mode. | |
| It is also used to auto scan in the ≤=< Control menu. | ||
| 10 ≤REV Button | Switch between single screen and multi-screen mode. | |
| In ≤=< Control mode, it is used to adjust the focus in conjunction with the A/FOC>S+ button. | ||
1.2.1 = roubleshooting Remote Control
NOTE
+ake sure batteries have been installed properly. Also, note that the remote control must be aimed at the IR receiver on the ×VR front panel. If there is no response after pressing any button on the remote, follow the procedure below to troubleshoot. 1. Go to M enu > Configuration > General > More Settings by operating the front control panel or the mouse. 2. Check and remember the DVR ×o. =he default DVR ×o. is 255. =his number valid for all IR remote controls. 3. ≤ress DEV on the remote control. 4. Enter the DVR ×o. in Step 2. 5. ≤ress ENTER on the remote. If the front panel Status indicator turns blue, the remote control is operating properly. If the Status indicator does not turn blue and there is no response, check the following: - Batteries are installed correctly and the polarities are not reversed. - Batteries are fresh and not out of charge. • IR receiver is not obstructed. If the remote still does not function, change the remote and try again, or contact the device provider.1.3 >SB +ouse Operation
A regular 3-button (Left/Right/Scroll-wheel) >SB mouse can also be used with this DVR. 1. ≤lug mouse into a >SB interface on the DVR. =he mouse should automatically be detected. If not, the mouse might not be compatible. Refer to your mouse provider. =able 1-4 Description of the +ouse Control| xame | Action | Description |
| Left-Click | Single-Click | Live view: Select channel and show the quick set menu.+enu: Select and enter |
| Double-Click | Live view: Switch between single-screen and multi-screen. | |
| Drag | ≤=< control: Wheeling.≤rivacy mask and motion detection: Select target area.Digital zoom-in: Drag and select target area.Live view: Drag channel/time bar. | |
| Right-Click Single-Click | Live view: Show menu.+enu: Exit current menu to upper level menu. | |
| Scroll-vheel | Scrolling up | Live view: ≤previous screen.+enu: ≤previous item. |
| Scrolling down | Live view: ×ext screen.+enu: ×ext item. |
1.4 Input + method Description
text_image
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 q w e r t y u i o p a s d f g h j k l ↑ z x c v b n m ←x 123/..| Icon Description | Icon Description | ||||||
| 0 ... | 9 | ×umber | A ... | Z | English letter | ||
| Lowercase/>ppercase | Backspace | ||||||
| 123/.. | ABC | Switch the keyboard | Space | ||||
| ≤ositioning the cursor | Enter | ||||||
| #+= | Symbols | Reserved | |||||
1.5 Rear ≤anel
NOTE
=he rear panel varies by model. Refer to the actual product. =he following figures are for reference only. text_image
AUDIO IN AUDIO OUT LINE IN 1 2 3 7 13 15 14 eSATA VIDEO IN Video Out HDMI1 HDMI2 VGA LAN2 RS-232 LAN1 RS-485 KR ALABIN OUT ALABIN 1 4 2 5 8 9 12 11text_image
AUDIO IN AUDIO OUT LINE IN 1 2 3 7 13 15 14 eSATA 1 2 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 VIDEO IN Video Out R5-232 HDMI2 VGA LAN RS-480 RS-A/ANIN OUT AUDIO IN 1 4 2 5 8 9 12 11text_image
3 7 13 6 15 14 16 VGA CVBS LINE IN LOOP OUT AUDIO OUT eSATA RS-232 LAN2 LAN1 ALAMIN OUT 1 4 2 5 8 9 12 VIDEO OUT HDMI2 HDMI1 VGA LAN1 AUDIO IN| No. | Item | Description |
| 1 | VIDEO IN | BNC interface for TurboHD and analog video input. |
| 2 | VIDEO O>T | BNC connector for video output. |
| 3 | A>DIO IN/LOO≤ O>T (for DS-90xxH>I-K8) | RCA connector |
| 4 | >SB ≤ort | >niversal Serial Bus (>SB) port for additional devices. |
| 5 | HDMI1/VGF | Simultaneous HDMI1/VGA output. Display local video output and menu. |
| 6 | HDMI2 | HDMI2 video output connector (DS-73xxH>I-K4 and DS-90xxH>I-K8) |
| 7 | A>DIO O>T | RCA connector |
| 8 | Network Interface | Connector for network (DS-73xxH>I-K4 and DS-90xxH>I-K8 = x2, DS-73xxH>I-K4 = x1) |
| 9 RS | -485 and Alarm Interface | Connector for RS-485 devices. T+ and T- pins connect toR+ and R - pins of ≤T |
| D+, D- pin connects to Ta, Tb pin of controller. For cascading devices, the first DVR's D+, D- pin should be connected with the D+, D- pin of the next DVR. | ||
| Connector for alarm input | ||
| Connector for alarm output | ||
| 10 | ≤ower Supply | 100 to240 VAC power supply |
| 11 | ≤ower Switch | Switch for turning on/off the device |
| 12 | GND | Ground |
| 13 | LINE IN | BNC connector for audio input |
| 14 | eSATA | Connects external SATA HDD, CD/DVC-RV |
| 15 | RS-232 Interface | Connector for RS-232 devices |
| 16 | ALARM O>T | Connector for alarm output |
| 17 | A>DIO IN (for DS-90xxH>I-K8) | RCA connector |
2 Getting Started
2.1 Starting Up and Shutting Down the DVR
Purpose
≤roper startup and shutdown procedures are crucial to expanding the life of the DVR.+efore You Start
Check that the voltage of the power supply is the same with the DVR's requirement, and the ground connection is working properly.2.1.1 Starting the DVR
Check that the power supply is plugged into an electrical outlet. It is HIGHLY recommended that an Uninterruptible ≤ ower Supply (U ≤ S) be used in conjunction with the device. Turn on the power switch on the rear panel, and the ≤ lower indicator LED should turn on indicating that the unit begins to start up. After startup, the ≤ower indicator LED remains on.2.1.2 Shutting Down/Logging Out/Rebooting the DVR
1. Go to Menu > Maintenance. text_image
System Maintenance System Logs Import/Export Upgrade Default Network Detect HDD Detect Start Time 09-23-2017 00:00:30 End Time 09-23-2017 23:59:59 Major Type Shutdown Miner Type Alarm Input Alarm Output Motion Detect Motion Detect Video Tamper Video Tamper Kosovo Started POS Stopped Video Quality Diagnostics Alarm Started Logout Shutdown Reboot Cancel Export All Search2.2 Activating the Device
Purpose
For the first-time access, you need to activate the device by setting an admin password. ×o operation is allowed before activation. You can also activate the device via Veb Browser, SAD≤, or Client Software. 1. Input the same password in theWARNING
STRON" P4SSWOR' REtext_image
Attention The device is activated. Properly keep your password. Export the GUID file for password resetting? Yes Notext_image
Reset Password Device Name USB Flash Disk 1-1 Refresh Name Size Type Edit Date Folder 11-18-2015 11:20:43 GUID_606524190_20161118112048.bin 128B File 11-18-2016 11:20:48 Free Space 7170.54MB New Folder Export Backtext_image
Attention Duplicate the password to IP cameras that are connected with default protocol. Yes No2.3 >sing the >nlock ≤attern for Login
Purpose
An admin can configure an unlock pattern for device login.2.3.1 Configuring the >nlock ≤attern
After the device is activated, enter the following interface to configure the device unlock pattern. text_image
Set Unlock Pattern Draw the unlock pattern first.flowchart
graph TD
A["Start"] --> B{Decision}
B -->|Yes| C["OK"]
B -->|No| D["End"]
C --> E["Action"]
D --> F["Action"]
i NOTE
Connect at least four dots to draw the pattern. Each dot can be connected only once. 2. Draw the same pattern again to confirm it. When the two patterns match, the pattern is configured successfully. text_image
Set Unlock Pattern Draw pattern again to confirm.text_image
Set Unlock Pattern The two patterns are different. Try again.2.3.2 Logging in via >nlock ≤attern
NOTE
Only the admin user has the permission to unlock the device. Configure the pattern first before unlocking. 1. Right-click the mouse on the screen and select the menu to enter the interface. text_image
Unlock admin Draw the unlock pattern first. Forget My P... Switch Useri NOTE
You can right click the mouse to log in via the normal mode. If you have forgotten your pattern, you can select the "orget My Pattern or Switch User option to enter the normal login dialog box. when the pattern you draw is different from the pattern you have configured, try again. If you draw the wrong pattern seven times, the account will lock for one minute. text_image
Login User Name admin Password Forget Password OK Cancel2.3.3 Login and Logout
2.3.3.1 >ser Login
Purpose
You must log in to the device before operating the menu and other functions. 1. Select the User Name in the drop-down list. text_image
Login User Name admin Password Forget Password OK CancelNOTE
In the Login interface, for the admin user, if you have entered the wrong password seven times, the account will be locked for 60 seconds. For operators, if you have entered the wrong password for five times, the account will be locked for 60 seconds. text_image
Attention Incorrect password. You still have 6 chances. Please try again. OKtext_image
Attention Incorrect password. You still have 4 chances. Please try again. OK2.3.4 Resetting Your ≤assword
Purpose
If you forget the admin password, you can reset the password by importing the G>ID file, which was exported and saved in the local >SB flash drive after you activated the device. 1. On the user login interface, click "orget Password to enter the Import G>ID interface. text_image
Reset Password Device Name USB Flash Disk 1-1 Refresh Name Size Type Edit Date Delete Play 4.bmp 6750.06KB File 09-02-2016 11:52:28 5.bmp 6750.06KB File 09-02-2016 11:52:32 6.bmp 6750.06KB File 09-02-2016 11:52:42 7.bmp 6750.06KB File 09-02-2016 11:52:10 8.bmp 6750.06KB File 09-02-2016 11:52:16 9.bmp 6750.06KB File 09-02-2016 11:52:24 GUID_583574624_20160... 12GB File 09-09-2016 14:10:37 Free Space 14.26GB New Folder Import Backtext_image
Reset Password User Name admin Create New Pass... Confirm New Pass... ✓ Valid password range [8-16]. You can use a combination of numbers, lowercase, uppercase and special character for your password with at least two kinds of them contained. OK Canceltext_image
Attention The password is reset. The GUID file is ineffective. Export a new GUID file. OKtext_image
Attention Duplicate the password to IP cameras that are connected with default protocol. Yes Noi NOTE
=o retrieve a forgotten password, you must export the G>ID file first. Once the password is reset, the G>ID file will be invalid. You can export a new G>ID file.2.3.5 Adding and Connecting I≤ Cameras
2.3.5.1 Activating an I≤ Camera
Purpose
Before adding the camera, make sure the I≤ camera to be added is in active status. 1. Select Add IP Camera from the right-click menu in live view mode or go to Menu> Camera> IP Camera. For the I≤ camera detected online in the same network segment, the Security status shows whether it is active or inactive. text_image
Cameras Setup IP Camera IP Camera Import/Export Camera Add/Delete Status Security IP Camera Add/ Edit Upgr Camera Name Protocol D1 20E2103 HIKVISION D2 Strong Pass... 192.168.10.4 2DE2103 Strong Pass... 192.168.10.109 4A25 HIKVISION Active 192.168.10.2 Active 192.168.10.6 Active 192.168.10.7 Active 192.168.10.63 Active 192.168.10.110 HIKVISION Hikvision Hikvision Hikvision Hikvision Refresh One-touch Activ Upgrade Delete One-touch Adding Custom Adding Max. IP Camera Number: 2 Net Receive Mio Bandwidth: 120Mbpstext_image
Activation User Name: admin Password: Valid password range [8-16]. You can use a combination of numbers, lowercase, uppercase and special character for your password with at least two kinds of them contained. Confirm New Password Ok Canceltext_image
Activation User Name: admin Password: ********** ATTENTION Invalid Password RISKY No kind of them contained. Confirm New Password: ********# Ok Canceltext_image
Activation User Name: admin Password: ••••••••• WEAK Valid password range [8-16]. You can use a combination of numbers, lowercase, uppercase and special character for your password with at least two kinds of them contained. Confirm New Password: •••••••••• Ok Canceltext_image
Activation User Name: admin Password: ***** FAIR Valid password range [8-16]. You can use a combination of numbers, lowercase, uppercase and special character for your password with at least two kinds of them contained. Confirm New Password: ***** Ok Canceltext_image
Activation User Name: admin Password: ••••••••• Strong Valid password range [8-16]. You can use a combination of numbers, lowercase, uppercase and special character for your password with at least two kinds of them contained. Confirm New Password: •••••••••• Ok CancelWARNING
STRONG PASSWORD RECOMMENDED – ve highly recommend you create a strong password of your own choosing (using a minimum of eight characters, including at least three of the following categories: upper case letters, lower case letters, numbers, and special characters) in order to increase the security of your product. Ve also recommend that you reset your password regularly. Especially in high security systems, resetting the password monthly or weekly can better protect your product. 4. Click OK to finish activating the I≤ camera.=he camera security status will change to Active.2.3.6 Adding an Online I≤ Camera
Purpose
Before you can get a live view or record of the video, add the network cameras to the device's connection list.Before You Start
Ensure the network connection is valid and correct.- OPTION 1
1. Select Add IP Camera from the right-click menu in live view mode or go to Menu > Camera > IP Camera. text_image
Cameras Setup Analog IP Camera IP Camera ImportExport P Cameras List Camera ID: 001200000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 IPC Status: Connected Connected and Support Preview Here Not Connected Open Week Px: 19.163.167 Camera 51 HKVISION DS-2CD4224F-ZS 8888 443716488 V5.3 Build 150... Active 192 188 254... HKVISION DS-2CD2143FW... 8888 498375488 V5.3 Build 150... Active 192 188 254... HKVISION DS-2CD4185F-Z 8888 510891983 V5.3 Build 150... Active 192 188 254... HKVISION DS-ZDE2185-DE... 8888 497555561 V5.3 Build 150... Active 192 188 254... HKVISION DS-2CD4333FW... 8888 506634726 V5.3 Build 151... Active 192 188 254... HKVISION DS-2CD4A25FW... 8888 579492463 V5.3 Build 169... Active 192 188 254... HKVISION DS-2CD4A5FE-ZD1 8888 511137153 V5.3 Build 169... Active 192 188 254... HKVISION DS-2CD4333FAD-1888 456332664 V5.3 Build 151... Active 192 188 254... HKVISION DS-2CD4113FW... 8888 496329537 V5.3 Build 159... Active 192 188 254... HKVISION DS-2CD4WMEFS... 8888 452755562 V5.3 Build 161... Options One-touch Active Upgrade Details One-touch Adding Custom Addingi NOTE
+ake sure the camera to add has already been activated by setting the admin password, and the admin password of the camera is the same as the DVR's. 4. (Optional) Check the Enable H.265 checkbox (for Initial Access) for the connected I≤ camera supporting H.265.=hen the I≤ camera will be encoded with H.265. 5. (For encoders with multiple channels only) check the Channel ≤ort checkbox in the pop-up window, as shown in the following figure, and click OK to add multiple channels. text_image
Channel Port ✓ Channel Port ✓ 1 ✓ 2 ✓ 3 ✓ 4 ✓ 5 OK Cancel• OPTION 2
1. On the I≤ Camera +anagement interface, clickNOTE
If the I≤ camera to add has not been activated, activate it from the I≤ camera list on the IP| Icon | Explanation | Icon | Explanation |
![]() | EDIT (Pen): Press to edit basic IP camera parameters | ![]() | ADD (+): Press to add the detected IP camera |
![]() | DISCONNECTED (!): Camera is disconnected; click the icon to get camera's exception information | ![]() | DELETE (Trash Can): Press to delete the camera |
![]() | PLAY (Right Triangle): Play connected camera's live video | ![]() | ADVANCED (Gear): Press to go to advanced settings window. |
![]() | UPGRADE (Up Arrow): Upgrade the connected camera's firmware | ![]() | DASH: No advanced settings available for this camera |
![]() | REPAIR (?): Press to attempt to repair the connection | Securitycolumn | SECURITY: Shows camera status (active/inactive) or password strength (strong/medium/weak/risky) |
2.3.7 Editing the Connected I≤ Camera
Purpose
After adding the I≤ cameras, the basic information of the camera is listed on the interface, and you can configure the basic settings of the I≤ cameras. 1. Click ☑ to edit the parameters. You can edit the I≤ address, protocol, and other parameters. text_image
Edit IP Camera IP Camera No. D1 IP Camera Address 10.9.6.48 Protocol HIKVISION Management Port 8000 Video Port 1 Camera User Name adults Camera Password OK Canceltext_image
Advance Settings Network Password IP Camera No. D2 Current Password New Password Confirm ✓ Valid password range [8-16]. You can use a combination of numbers, lowercase, uppercase and special character for your password with at least two kinds of them contained. Apply OK Cancel2.3.8 Configuring Signal Input Channel
NOTE
This chapter is applicable only to DS-73xx/90xxHUI-K Series DVRs.Purpose
You can configure the analog and I ≤ signal input types and enable 5 M ≤ long distance transmission. 1. Go to Menu > Camera > Signal Input Status. text_image
Cameras Setup Signal Input Status IP Camera IP Camera Import/Export Camera HD/CVBS IP A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 Max. IP Camera Number 2 5MP Long Distance Transmission ApplyNOTE
This chapter is applicable only to HUI Series DVRs.Purpose
You can configure 5 M≤ long distance transmission on the Signal Input Status interface. 1. Go to Menu > Camera > Signal Input Status. text_image
Cameras Setup Signal Import Status: IP Camera IP Camera Import/Export Camera A1 A2 A3 A4 Max. IP Camera Number 5MP Long Distance Transmission HD/CVBC Applytext_image
Trigger Channel Analog A1 A2 A3 A4 Apply OK Cancel3 Live View
3.1 Introduction
Live View shows the video image from each camera in real time. =he DVR will automatically enter Live View mode when powered on. It is also at the very top of the menu hierarchy, thus hitting ESC multiple times (depending on which menu you're on) will bring you back to Live View mode.3.2 Live View Icons
In Live View mode, there are icons at the right top of the screen for each channel, showing the status of the record and alarms in the channel, so that you can know whether the channel is recorded, or if there are alarms as soon as possible. =able 1-8 Description of Live View Icons| Icons | Description |
![]() | Alarm (video loss, tampering, motion detection, VCA, or sensor alarm) |
| [SWKS] | Record (manual record, schedule record, motion detection, or alarm triggered record) |
| [OXBS] | Alarm & Record |
| [Y8TS] | Event/Exception (motion detection, sensor alarm, or exception information. |
3.3 Live View Mode Operations
There are many functions provided in Live View mode. The functions are listed below. • Single Screen: show only one screen on the monitor. • Multi-screen: show multiple screens on the monitor simultaneously. - Start Auto-switch: the screen is auto switched to the next one. You must set the dwell time for each screen on the configuration menu before enabling the auto-switch. Menu > Configuration > Live View > Dwell Time. - Start Recording: normal record and motion detection record are supported. • Output Mode: set the output mode to Standard, Bright, Gentle, or Vivid. - Playback: play back the recorded videos for the current day. - Aux/Main Monitor: the DVR checks the output interface connections to define the main and auxiliary output interfaces. When the aux output is enabled, the main output cannot perform any operations; you can perform some basic operations on the Live View mode for the Aux output. There are two HDMI interfaces. HDMI1 and VGA interfaces share simultaneous output. The priority level for the main and aux output is HDMI2 > VGA/HDMI1. The CVBS output only serves as the aux output or Live View output. Table 1-9 Priorities of Outputs| S.N. | HDMI2 | VGA/HDMI1 | CVBS | Main output | Auxiliary output | For Live View Output Only |
| 1 | √ | √ | √ or × | HDMI2 | VGA/HDMI1 | CVBS |
| 2 | √ or × | × | √ or × | HDMI2 | CVBS | VGA/HDMI1 |
| 3 | × | √ | √ or × | VGA/HDMI1 | CVBS | HDMI2 |
| S.N. | HDMI | VGA | CVBS | Main output | Auxiliary output |
| 1 | or × | or × | or × | VGA/HDMI | CVBS |
NOTE
√ means the interface is in use, × means the interface is out of use or the connection is invalid. HDMI, VGA, and CVBS can be used at the same time.3.3.1 >sing the +ouse in Live View
Refer to =able 1-11 for the description of mouse operation in live view mode. =able 1-11 +ouse Operation in Live View| ×ame | Description |
| +enu | Enter the main menu of the system by right clicking the mouse. |
| Single Screen | Switch to the single full screen by choosing channel number from the drop-down list. |
| +ulti -Screen | Adjust the screen layout by selecting from the drop-down list. |
| ≤previous Screen | Switch to the previous screen. |
| ×ext Screen | Switch to the next screen. |
| Start/Stop Auto-Switch | Enable/disable the auto-switch of the screens. NOTE=he dwell time of the live view configuration must be set before using Start 4uto -Switch. |
| Start Recording | Start recording of all channels, Continuous Record, and +otion Detection Record are selectable from the drop-down list. |
| Add I≤ Camera | A shortcut to enter the I≤ camera management interface.(For HDVR series only) |
| ≤layback | Enter the playback interface and start playing back the video of the selected channel immediately |
| ≤=< Control | A shortcut to enter the ≤=< control interface of the selected camera. |
| Output +ode | Output +ode is configurable with Standard, Bright, Gentle and Vivid options. |
| Aux +onitor | Switch to the auxiliary output mode and the operation for the main output is disabled. NOTEIf you enter Aux monitor mode and the Aux monitor is not connected, the mouse operation is disabled. You need to switch back to the +ain output with the F1 button on front panel or VOIP/MON button on IR remote control and then press the Enter button. |
text_image
Common Menu Menu Single Screen Multi-screen Previous Screen Next Screen Start Auto-switch Start Recording Add IP Camera Playback PTZ Control Output Mode3.3.2 Switching +ain/Aux Output
NOTE
=he CVBS output only serves as the aux output or Live View output. 1. >se the mouse wheel to double-click on the HD+I1/VGA, or HD+I2, or HD+I/VGA output screen, and the following message box pops up. text_image
Tip Double-click the mouse again to switch the auxiliary and main output? Cancel3.3.3 Quick Setting Toolbar in Live View Mode
On the screen of each channel, there is a quick setting toolbar that appears when you click the screen. text_image
Screenshot of a software toolbar with icons for video, audio, audio playback, and camera control functions| Icons | Description | Icons | Description | Icons | Description |
![]() | Start/Stop Manual Recording | ![]() | Instant Playback | ![]() | 4udio On/Mute |
![]() | PTZ <ontrol | [DW23] | Digital Zoom | [BXWW] | Image Settings |
![]() | ![]() | Face Detection | [AQHW] | Information | |
| [YKC0] | [XSW4] | Live View Strategy | [WW06] | Fisheye |
natural_image
Highway scene with multiple vehicles and residential buildings in the background (no visible text or symbols)text_image
Attention Enable face detection? Yes NoNOTE
when an H.264 I≤ camera is connected, the stream type is displayed as H.264. when an I≤ camera supporting H.264+ is connected, the stream type is displayed as H.264+. when I≤ camera supporting H.265 is connected, the stream type is displayed as H.265. when I≤ camera supporting H.265+ is connected, the stream type is displayed as H.265+.  For analog cameras supporting VCA, click the icon to show the VCA information. =he configured or quadrilateral in the VCA configuration and target frame(s) will be shown on live view. Click the again to hide the VCA information. text_image
12-13-2016 Tue 10:29:36 Camera 01NOTE
In Live View, only analog cameras support VCA information overlay. Enable VCA function first before showing the VCA information. =he VCA information is hidden by default. If the connected analog camera does not support VCA, the icon displays grey and cannot be operated. For analog cameras, the VCA information includes line crossing detection and intrusion detection. =he DVR supports VCA information overlay of only one channel. If you enable the function of one channel, the other channels will disable the function automatically. Both single window and multi-window display modes support VCA information overlay. Only the main output supports VCA information overlay. When switching to the aux output, the VCA information overlay of main output is disabled. For analog cameras, if the camera number does not exceed the limit for line crossing detection and intrusion detection, the VCA information overlay can be enabled for all the analog cameras' enabled line crossing detection and intrusion detection. If the camera number exceeds the limit for line crossing detection, intrusion detection, and sudden scene change detection, only the cameras' enabled line crossing detection and intrusion detection support VCA information overlay. Disabling line crossing detection and intrusion detection remotely will not affect the VCA information overlay in the local live view.3.4 Channel-Zero Encoding
Purpose
Channel-Zero Encoding provides a way to view many channels in real time from a Veb browser or CMS (Client Management System) software by decreasing the bandwidth requirement without affecting the image quality. 1. Go to Menu > Configuration > Live View > Channel-Zero Encoding. text_image
System Configuration General View Channel-Zero Encoding Enable Channel-Zero Encoding Frame Rate 12fps Max. Bitrate Mode General Max. Bitrate(Kbps) 1024 Apply3.5 Adjusting Live View Settings
Purpose
Live View settings can be customized. You can configure the output interface, dwell time for screen to be shown, mute or turn on the audio, the screen number for each channel, etc. 1. Go to Menu > System Configuration > Live View > General. text_image
System Configuration General View Channel Zero Encoding Video Output Interface HDMI Live View Mode 4*4 Dwell Time No Switch Enable Audio Output ✓ Volume Event Output HDMI Full Screen Monitoring Dwell Time 5s Applytext_image
System Configuration General View Channel Zero Encoding Video Output Interface HDMI Live View Mode 4 * 4 Dwell Time No Switch Enable Audio Output Volume Event Output HDMI Full Screen Monitoring Dwell Time 5s ApplyNOTE
If the sum of the analog and I≤ channels exceeds 25, up to 32-window division mode is supported for the VGA/HDMI1 output.3.6 Manual Video Quality Diagnostics
Purpose
The video quality of the analog channels can be diagnosed manually and you can view the diagnostic results from a list. 1. Go to Menu > Manual > Manual Video Quality Diagnostics. text_image
Manual Video Quality Diagnostics ✓ Analog ✓ A1 ✓ A2 ✓ A3 ✓ A4 ✓ A5 ✓ A6 ✓ A7 ✓ A8 ✓ A9 ✓ A10 ✓ A11 ✓ A12 ✓ A13 ✓ A14 ✓ A15 ✓ A16text_image
Manual Video Quality Diagnostics Analog A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 Diagnostics Result Camera No. Diagnostics Result Diagnostics Time A1 Normal 25-04-2014 14:54:17 A2 Normal 25-04-2014 14:54:18 A9 Normal 25-04-2014 14:54:18 A3 Normal 25-04-2014 14:54:18 A10 Normal 25-04-2014 14:54:18 A4 Normal 25-04-2014 14:54:18 A5 Normal 25-04-2014 14:54:18 A11 Normal 25-04-2014 14:54:18 A6 Normal 25-04-2014 14:54:19 A12 Normal 25-04-2014 14:54:19 A7 Normal 25-04-2014 14:54:19 A8 Normal 25-04-2014 14:54:19 A13 Normal 25-04-2014 14:54:19 A14 Normal 25-04-2014 14:54:19 Diagnose BackNOTE
Connect the camera to the device for the video quality diagnostics. Three exception types can be diagnosed: Blurred Image, Abnormal Brightness, and Color Cast.4 ≤TZ Controls
4.1 Configuring ≤TZ Settings
Purpose
Follow the following procedure to set ≤TZ parameters. Configure ≤TZ parameters before you control the ≤TZ camera. 1. Go to Menu > Camera > ≤TZ. text_image
Cameras Setup Camera [A1] Camera 01 Preset Set Clear Clear All Call Patrol 1 Set Clear Clear All Call Pattern 1 Start Stop Clear All Linear Scan Left Limit Right Limit PTZ Parameter Enable Omnicast Control Zoom - Focus - Iris - Speed PTZNOTE
All the parameters should be exactly the same as the ≤=< camera parameters. For >=C cameras/domes connected, you can select the ≤=< protocol to >=C. +ake sure the protocol selected here is supported by the connected camera/dome. when the UTC protocol is selected, all the other parameters such as baud rate, data bit, stop bit, parity, and flow control are not configurable. 5. (Optional) Click4.2.1 Customizing ≤ resets
Purpose
Follow the steps below to set the preset location you want the ≤TZ camera to point to when an event occurs. 1. Go to Menu > Camera > ≤TZ. text_image
Cameras Setup Camera [A1] Camera 01 Preset Set Clear Clear All Call Petrol 1 Set Clear Clear All Call Pattern 1 Start Stop Clear All Linear Scan Left Limit Right Limit PTZ Parameter Enable Omnicast Control Zoom - Focus - Iris - Speed PTZPurpose
=his feature enables the camera to point to a specified position such as a window when an event takes place.
- Click PTZ in the lower-right corner of the ≤=< setting interface, or press PTZ on the front panel or click the ≤=< Control icon in the quick setting bar, or select the ≤=< option in the right-click menu to show the ≤=< control panel.
- Choose Camera in the drop-down list.
- Click PTZ to show the general settings of the ≤=< control.

text_image
PTZ Camera [A1] Camera 01 Configuration PTZ Co... One-tou... General + Zoom - + Focus - + Iris - SpeedFigure 61, ≤TZ ≤anel General
-
Click to enter the preset No. in the corresponding text field.
-
Click <all Preset to call it.
i NOTE
When the camera/dome connected and the ≤TZ protocol is set to UTC, you can call preset 95 to enter the menu of the connected camera/dome. Use the directional buttons on the ≤TZ control panel to operate the menu.
4.2.3 Customizing ≤atrols
Purpose
≤atrols can be set to move the ≤TZ camera to different key points and have it stay there for a set duration before moving on to the next key point. The key points correspond to the presets. The presets can be set following the steps above in Customizing Presets.
- Go to Menu > Camera > ≤TZ.

text_image
Cameras Setup Camera [A1] Camera 01 Preset Set Clear Clear All Call Patrol 1 Set Clear Clear All Call Pattern 1 Start Stop Clear All Linear Scan Left Limit Right Limit PTZ Parameter Enable Omnicest Control Zoom Focus Iris Speed PTZFigure 62, ≤=< Settings
- Select patrol ×o. in the ≤atrol drop-down list.
- Click Set to add key points to the patrol.

text_image
KeyPoint KeyPoint: 1 Preset 1 Duration 0 Speed 1 Add OK CancelFigure 63, Key point Configuration
- Configure key point parameters such as the key point ×o., duration to stay at one key point, and patrol speed. =he key point corresponds to the preset. =he Key Point No. determines the order the ≤=< will follow while cycling through the patrol. 'uration refers to the time span to stay at the corresponding key point. Speed defines the speed the ≤=< will move from one key point to the next.
- Click 4dd to add the next key point to the patrol, or click OK to save the key point to the patrol.
- You can delete all the key points by clicking <lear for the selected patrol, or click <lear 4ll to delete all key points for all patrols.
4.2.4 Calling ≤atrols
Purpose
Calling a patrol moves the ≤TZ according the predefined patrol path.
-
Click PTZ in the lower-right corner of the PTZ Settings interface, or press PTZ on the front panel or click the ≤TZ Control icon in the quick setting bar, or select the ≤TZ option in the right-click menu to show the ≤TZ control panel.
-
Click the "eneral tab to show the ≤TZ controls general settings."

text_image
PTZ Camera [A1] Camera 01 Configuration PTZ Co... One-tou... General Zoom - Focus - Iris - SpeedFigure 64, ≤TZ ≤anel General
-
Select a patrol in the drop-down list and click <all Patrol to call it.
-
You can click Stop Patrol to stop calling it.
4.2.5 Customizing ≤atterns
Purpose
≤atterns can be set by recording the movement of the ≤TZ. You can call the pattern to move the ≤TZ according to the predefined path.
- Go to Menu > Camera > ≤TZ.

text_image
Cameras Setup Camera [A1] Camera 01 Preset Set Clear Clear All Call Petrol 1 Set Clear Clear All Call Pattern 1 Start Stop Clear All Linear Scan Left Limit Right Limit PTZ Parameter Enable Omnicast Control Zoom - Focus - Iris - Speed PTZFigure 65, ≤=< Settings
- Choose pattern number in the drop-down list.
- Click Start and click corresponding buttons in the control panel to move the ≤=< camera. Click Stop to stop movement.
- =he movement of the ≤=< is recorded as the pattern.
4.2.6 Calling ≤atterns
Purpose
Follow the procedure below to move the ≤=< camera according to the predefined patterns.
- Click PTZ in the lower-right corner of the PTZ Settings interface, or press ≤=< on the front panel, or click the ≤=< Control icon in the quick setting bar, or select the ≤=< option in the right-click menu to show the ≤=< control panel.
- Click the "eneral tab to show the general settings of the ≤=< control.

text_image
PTZ Camera [A1] Camera 01 Configuration PTZ Co... One-tou... General + Zoom - + Focus - + Iris - SpeedFigure 66, ≤TZ ≤anel General
- Click <all Pattern to call it.
- Click Stop Pattern to stop calling it.
4.2.7 Customizing Linear Scan Limit
Purpose
The Linear Scan can be enabled to trigger the scan in the horizontal direction in the predefined range.

NOTE
This function is supported only by certain models.
- Go to Menu > Camera > ≤TZ.

text_image
Cameras Setup Camera [A1] Camera 01 Preset Set Clear Clear All Call Patrol 1 Set Clear Clear All Call Pattern 1 Start Stop Clear All Linear Scan Left Limit Right Limit PTZ Parameter Enable Omnicest Control Zoom - Focus - Iris - Speed PTZFigure 67, ≤=< Settings
-
se the directional button to point the camera to the location you want to set the limit, and click Left Limit or Right Limit to link the location to the corresponding limit.
i NOTE
=he speed dome starts linear scan from the left limit to the right limit. You must set the left limit to the left of the right limit, and the angle from the left limit to the right limit must be no more than 180^ .
4.2.8 Calling Linear Scan
Purpose
Follow the following procedure to call the linear scan in the predefined scan range.
-
Click PTZ in the lower-right corner of the PTZ Settings interface, or press PTZ on the front panel, or click the ≤ = < Control icon in the quick setting bar to enter the ≤ = < setting menu in live view mode.
-
Click the One-touch tab to show the one-touch function of the ≤ = < control.

text_image
PTZ Camera [A1] Camera 01 Configuration PTZ Co... One-tou... General Park(Quick Patrol) Park(Patrol 1) Park(Preset 1) Linear Scan RestoreFigure 68, ≤=< ≤anel One-=ouch
- Click Linear Scan to start the linear scan and click Linear Scan again to stop it.
- You can click Restore to clear the defined left limit and right limit data. =he dome needs to reboot for settings to take effect.
4.2.9 One-=ouch ≤ark
Purpose
Certain speed dome models can be configured to start a predefined park action (scan, preset, patrol, etc.) automatically after a period of inactivity (park time).
- Click P TZ in the lower-right corner of the PTZ Settings interface, or press PTZ on the front panel, or click the ≤=< Control icon in the quick setting bar to enter the ≤=< setting menu in live view mode.
- Click the One-touch tab to show the ≤ = < control's one-touch function.

text_image
PTZ Camera [A1] Camera 01 Configuration PTZ Co... One-tou... General Park(Quick Patrol) Park(Patrol 1) Park(Preset 1) Linear Scan RestoreFigure 69, ≤=< ≤anel One-touch
- =here are three one-touch park types selectable. Click the corresponding button to activate the park action.
- Park (Quick Patrol): =he dome starts the patrol from predefined preset 1 to preset 32 in order after the park time. Any undefined presets will be skipped.
- Park (Patrol 1): = he dome starts moving according to the predefined patrol 1 path after the park time.
- Park (Preset 1): =he dome moves to the predefined preset 1 location after the park time.

NOTE
=he park time can only be set through the speed dome configuration interface. =he default value is 5s.
- Click the button again to deactivate it.
4.3 ≤=< Control ≤anel
=here are two ways to enter the ≤=< control panel.
- OPTION 1
In the PTZ Settings interface, click PTZ on the lower-right corner, next to the +ack button.
- OPTION 2
In Live View mode, press PTZ <control on the front panel or on the remote control, or choose the ≤=< Control icon 📋 the quick setting bar, or select the ≤=< Control option in the right-click menu.
Click <configuration on the control panel.

NOTE
In ≤=< control mode, the ≤=< panel will be displayed when a mouse is connected to the device. If no mouse is connected, the Fseen appears in the lower-left corner of the window, indicating that this camera is in ≤=< control mode.

text_image
PTZ Camera [A1] Camera 01 Configuration PTZ Co... One-tou... General Zoom - Focus - Iris - Speed
text_image
PTZ Camera [A1] Camera 01 Configuration PTZ Co... One-tou... General Call Preset Call Patrol Stop Pa... 1 Call Patt... Stop Pa... 1
text_image
PTZ Camera [A1] Camera 01 Configuration PTZ Co... One-Iou... General Park(Quick Patrol) Park(Patrol 1) Park(Preset 1) Linear Scan RestoreFigure 70, ≤TZ Control ≤anel
Refer to Table 1-13 for description of the ≤TZ panel icons.
Table 1-13 Description of the ≤TZ ≤anel Icons
| Icon Description Icon Description Icon | Description | ||||
![]() | Direction button and the auto-cycle button | Zoom+, Focus+, Iris+ | Zoom-, Focus-, Iris- | ||
| Central | The ≤TZ movement speed | Light on/off | Viper on/off | ||
| Dress1 | 3D-Zoom | Image Centralization | Menu | ||
| Dress1 | Switch to the ≤TZ control interface | Switch to the one-touch control interface | Switch to the general settings interface | ||
| Dress1 | Exit | Minimize windows | |||
5 Recording and Capture Settings
5.1 Configuring Encoding ≤ parameters
- Make sure that an HDD has been installed. If not, install and initialize an HDD. (Menu > System Configuration > HDD)

text_image
System Configuration HDD Information Record Information Disk Mode Storage Mode Disk Clone Cloud Storage General Network HDD Live View Exceptions User RS-232 POS Label Capacity Status Property Type Free Space Gro Edit Delete Total Capacity 0MB Free Space 0MB Estimated time of recording in days/Recording Time (day)N/A/N/A Add NetHDD InitFigure 71, HDD
- Click 4advanced tab to check the HDD storage mode (Menu > HDD > Storage Mode).
1) If the HDD mode is Quota, set the maximum record capacity.
2) If the HDD mode is Group, set the HDD group.

text_image
System Configuration HDD Information Record Information Disk Mode Storage Mode Disk Clone Cloud Storage Mode Quota Camera [A1] Camera 01 Used Record Capacity 08 Used Picture Capacity 08 HDD Capacity (GB) 0 Max. Record Capacity (GB) 0 max. picture Capacity (GB) 0 Free Quota Space 0.6B Copy ApplyFigure 72, HDD – Storage Mode
- Go to Menu > Record Information > ≤ parameters.

text_image
Recording Configuration Secure Substream Capture Camera [A1]Camera 01 Schedule Resource Quality MotionDetect Trigger Holiday Camera Resolution Encoding Parameters Stream Type: Resolution Bitrate Type: Video Quality Frame Rate Max. Bitrate Mode: Max. Bitrate(Kbps) Max. Bitrate Range Recommendation: Max. Average Bitrate(Kbps) Video Encoding Enable H264+ More Settings SNP Main Stream(Continuous) Video & Audio SNP Video & Audio SNP Constant Constant 15fps General 409s 2889-4800(Kbps) 2048 H.264 H.264 Main Stream(Event) 15fps General 409s 2889-4800(Kbps) 2048 H.264 Copy ApplyFigure 73, Record ≤ parameters
- Set the recording parameters.
1) Select the Record tab to configure.
2) Select a camera from the camera drop-down list.
3) View the Camera Resolution.
hen =urboHD input is connected, you can view the information including the input signal type, resolution and frame rate (e.g., 5 +≤ 20 Hz). hen CVBS input is connected, you can view information such as ×=SC or ≤AL.
4) Configure the following parameters for the Main Stream (<ontinuous) and the Main Stream (Event).
• Stream Type: Set the stream type to be Video or Video & Audio.
• Resolution: Set recording resolution.

NOTE
H>I Series DVRs support 5 +≤ and 4 +≤ resolution on all channels.
=he analog signal inputs (=urboHD CVBS) and I≤ signal input is recognized and connect automatically.
If the configured encoding resolution conflicts with the resolution of the front-end camera, the encoding parameters will adjust automatically to meet the front-end camera. E.g., if the resolution of the front-end camera is 720p, then the encoding resolution of the main stream will adjust to 720p automatically.
Refer to the Appendix8Specifications for the supported resolutions by model.
- +itrate Type: S et the bitrate type to be Variable or Constant.
• Video Quality: Set the video quality of recording, with six levels configurable.

NOTE
=he Stream =ype, Resolution, Bitrate =ype, and Video Quality are not configurable for the Main Stream (Event) of the I≤ Camera.
• Frame Rate: Set the frame rate of recording.

NOTE
For H>I Series DVRs, when a 5 M≤ signal input is connected, the frame rate of the main stream cannot exceed 12 fps. When a 4 M≤ signal input is connected, the frame rate of the main stream cannot exceed 15 fps.
=he minimum frame rate for main stream is 1 fps.
• Max. Bitrate Mode: Set the mode to General or Custom.
• Max Bitrate (Kbps): Select or customize the maximum bit rate for recording.
- Max. Bitrate Range Recommended: A recommended max. bit rate range is provided for reference.
- Max. Average Bitrate (Kbps): Set the max. average bit rate, which refers to the average amount of data transferred per unit of time.
- Video Encoding: You can configure H.264 or H.265 for the main stream (continuous) of I≤ and analog cameras. Check the Enable H.264+ or Enable H.265+ checkbox to enable this function. Enabling it helps to ensure high video quality with a lowered bitrate.

NOTE
When the connected I≤ camera does not support H.265, only H.264 can be selected for the main stream (continuous).
=he analog and I≤ cameras support enabling H.264+/H.265+ if the video encoding is H.264/H.265 for the main stream.
After enabling H.264+ or H.265+, the Bitrate Type, Video Quality, Max. Bitrate Mode, Max. Bitrate (Kbps), and Max. Bitrate Range Recommend are not configurable.
If H.265+ is enabled, line crossing detection and region entrance detection are not supported.
For a connected I≤ camera, H.264+ or H.265+ must be supported by the camera and added to the DVR with the HIKVISIO× protocol.
- Reboot the device to activate the new settings after enabling H.264+ or H.265+.
- Click More Settings to configure additional parameters.

text_image
More Settings Pre-record 5s Post-record 5s Expired Time (day) 0 Record Audio Video Stream Main Stream OK BackFigure 74, +ore Settings of Record ≤ parameters (Quota +ode Shown)
- Pre-record: =he amount of time to record before the scheduled time or event. For example, if an alarm triggers recording at 10:00, if the pre-record time is 5 seconds, the camera starts recording at 9:59:55.
- Post-record: =he time to record after the event or scheduled time. For example, if an alarm recording ends at 11:00, if the post-record time is 5 seconds, it records until 11:00:05.
- Expired Time: =he time to keep the record files in the HDDs. Once this time is exceeded, the files will be deleted. =he files will be saved permanently if the value is set to "0." =he actual retention time for the files should be determined by the HDDs capacity.
- Redundant Record: Enabling redundant record means records will be saved in the redundant HDD.
- Record 4udio: Enable this feature to record the video with sound and disable it to record the video without sound.
• Video Stream: +ain stream, Sub-stream, and Dual-stream are selectable for recording. Sub-stream records for a longer time in the same storage space.

NOTE
Redundant Record is available only when the HDD mode is Group.
A redundant HDD is required for the redundant record function.
For network cameras, the +ain Stream (Event) parameters are not editable.
- Click 4pply to save the settings.
- Optionally, click <opy to copy the settings to other analog channels if needed.

text_image
Copy to Analog A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16
Figure 75, Copy Camera Settings
- Set encoding parameters for sub-stream.
1) Select the Sub-Stream tab.

text_image
Record Substream Camera [A1] Camera 0.1 Stream Type Video Resolution (maximum value is W...352°240(CIF) Bitrate Type Constant Video Quality Frame Rate Full Frame Max. Bitrate Mode General Max. Bitrate (Kbps) (max.: 3M) 512 Max. Bitrate Range Recommend...384~640(Kbps) Copy ApplyFigure 76, Sub-Stream Encoding
2) Select a camera in the camera drop-down list.
3) Configure the parameters.
4) Click 4pply to save the settings.
5) (Optional) If the parameters can also be used for other cameras, click <opy to copy the settings to other channels.

NOTE
=he sub-stream resolution can be selected among VD1, 4CIF, and CIF.
=he minimum frame rate for the sub-stream is 1 fps.
You can select the Video Encoding for the sub-stream of I≤ and analog cameras. For analog cameras, H.264 and H.265 are selectable. For I≤ cameras supporting H.265, you can select H.265 encoding mode.
- Set parameters for capture.
1) Select the < apture tab.

text_image
Recording Configuration Record Substream Capture Schedule Record Quality Motion Detect Trigger Holiday Camera [A1] Camera 01 Parameter Type Continuous Event Resolution 704*480(4CIF) 704*480(4CIF) Picture Quality Medium Medium Interval 2s 2s Copy BackFigure 77, Capture Settings
2) Select a camera from the drop-down list.
3) Configure the parameters.
4) Click 4pply to save the settings.
5) (Optional) If the parameters can also be used for other cameras, click <opy to copy the settings to other channels.

NOTE
The interval is the time period between two capturing actions. You can configure all the parameters on this menu upon demand.
5.2 Configuring Recording and Capture Schedule

NOTE
The DVR supports continuous, alarm, motion, motion | alarm, motion & alarm, event, and ≤OS triggered recording types.
In this chapter, the record schedule procedure is used as an example, and the same procedure can be applied to configure a recording schedule.
Purpose
Set the record schedule, then the camera will automatically start/stop recording according to the configured schedule.
- Go to Menu > Record/Capture > Schedule.

text_image
Recording Configuration Camera [A1] Front Door Enable Schedule Schedule Week Mon 24HR Type Continuous Start/End Time 00:00-00:00 Add Record Quality Motion Detect Trigger Holiday Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Sun 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 1 Mon 00:00-08:00 2 Mon 08:00-20:00 3 Mon 20:00-24:00 4 Tue 00:00-08:00 5 Tue 08:00-20:00 6 Tue 20:00-24:00 7 Continuous Event NoneFigure 78, Record Schedule
Different recording types are marked in different color icons.
• <ontinuous: Scheduled recording
• Event: Recording triggered by any event triggered alarm
• V<4/ Recording triggered by a VCA event
• None/ ×o scheduled recording
-
Choose the camera you want to configure in the <amera drop-down list.
-
Check the Enable Schedule checkbox.
-
Configure the record schedule.
-
Edit the schedule
1) Click Edit.
2) Choose the day you want to set the schedule in the message box.
3) =o schedule all-day recording, check the 4ll 'ay item checkbox.

text_image
Edit Weekday Mon All Day Type Continuous Start/End Time 00:00-08:00 Type Continuous Start/End Time 08:00-20:00 Type Event Start/End Time 20:00-21:05 Type Continuous Start/End Time 21:05-21:10 Type Event Start/End Time 21:10-24:00 Type Continuous Start/End Time 00:00-00:00 Type Continuous Start/End Time 00:00-00:00 Type Continuous Start/End Time 00:00-00:00 Type Continuous Copy Apply OK Cancel
Figure 79, Edit Schedule – All Day
4) =o arrange other schedules, leave the 24HR checkbox blank and set the Start/End time.

text_image
Record Capture Camera [A1] Camera 01 Enable Schedule Week Mon 24HR Type Continuous Start/End Time 00:00-00:00 AddFigure 80, Edit Schedule - Set =ime ≤period

NOTE
p to eight periods can be configured for each day. =ime periods cannot overlap each other.
=o enable Event, +otion, Alarm, + | A (motion or alarm), + & A (motion and alarm), and ≤OS triggered recording, you must configure the motion detection settings, alarm input settings or VCA settings as well.
5) Repeat the above steps 1 to 4 to schedule recordings for other days in the week. If the schedule can also be set for other days, click

text_image
Copy to All 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Holiday OK CancelFigure 81, Copy Schedule to Other Days

NOTE
=he Holiday option is available when you enable holiday schedule in Holiday settings.
6) Click OK to save the settings and return to the upper level menu.
- Draw the schedule
1) Click the color icon to select a record type in the event list on the right side of the interface.

text_image
Camera [A1] Front Door Enable Schedule Week Mon 24HR Type Continuous Start/End Time 00:00-00:00 Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Sun Continuous Event None *Note: Operation is invalid when the number of time segments exceeds the limit (8).Figure 82, Draw the Recording Schedule

text_image
Camera [A1] Front Door Enable Schedule Week Mon 24HR Type Continuous Start/End Time 00:00-00:00 Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Sun Continuous Event None *Note: Operation is invalid when the number of time segments exceeds the limit (8).Figure 83, Draw the Capture Schedule
2) Drag the mouse on the schedule.
3) Click an area outside of the schedule table to finish and exit from the drawing.

NOTE
Repeat to set schedule other channels. If the settings can also be used for other channels, click <opy, and then choose the channel you want to copy to.
- Click 4pply in the Record Schedule interface to save the settings.
5.3 Configuring Motion Detection Recording and Capture
Purpose
Follow these steps to set the motion detection parameters. In Live View mode, once a motion detection event takes place, the DVR can analyze it and perform many actions to handle it. Enabling the motion detection function can trigger certain channels to start recording, or trigger full screen monitoring, audio warning, notifying the surveillance center, sending e-mail, and so on.
- Go to Menu > Camera > Motion.

text_image
Recording Configuration Camera A2 Camera 01 Schedule Record Quality Motion Method Trigger Holiday Enable Motion Detection Settings Saturation Time Setting Full Screen Clear Copy ApplyFigure 84, Motion Detection
- Configure Motion Detection:
1) Choose camera you want to configure.
2) Check the Enable Motion Detection checkbox.
3) Use the mouse to drag and draw the area for motion detection. To set the motion detection for the entire area shot by the camera, click "ull Screen. To clear the motion detection area, click <lear.

text_image
Recording Configuration Camera [A1] Camera 01 Schedule Record Quality Motion Detect Trigger Holiday Enable Motion Detection Settings Set Sensitivity Zone Setting Full Screen Clear NO VIDEO Copy Apply
Figure 85, Motion Detection – Mask
4) Click Set, and the channel information message box pops up.

text_image
Settings Trigger Channel Amling Schedule Linkage Action Analog A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16Figure 86, Motion Detection Settings
5) Select the channels that you want the motion detection event to trigger recording.
6) Click 4pply to save the settings.
7) Click OK to return to the upper level menu.
8) Exit the Motion Detection menu.
-
Configure the schedule.
-
Choose Motion as the record type.
5.4 Configuring Alarm Triggered Recording and Capture
Purpose
Follow the procedure to configure alarm triggered recording or capture.
- Go to Menu > Recording Configuration > Trigger > Ala rm Input.

text_image
System Information Device Info Camera Record Alarm Network HDD No Alarm Name Alarm Type Alarm Status Triggered Camera Local<-1 N.O Not used Local<-2 N.O Not used Local<-3 N.O Not used Local<-4 N.O Not used Local<-5 N.O Not used Local<-6 N.O Not used Local<-7 N.O Not used Local<-8 N.O Not used RefreshFigure 87, Alarm Settings – Alarm Input
- Select Alarm Input ×o.
- Input Alarm xame.
- Select N.O. (normally open) or N.<. (normally closed) for alarm type.
- Check the Enable checkbox to enable alarm.
- Click Set to set the triggered channels, arming schedule, linkage actions, and ≤=< linking.

text_image
Settings Trigger Channel Arming Schedule Linkage Action Analog A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 IP Camera D1 D2 Apply OK CancelFigure 88, Alarm Handling
- Click 4pply to save the settings.
- Repeat steps 1 to 8 to configure other alarm input p parameters.
- If the settings can also be applied to other alarm inputs, click <opy and choose the alarm input number.

text_image
Copy Alarm Input to ✓Alarm Input No. Alarm Name 10.16.1.250:8000<-1 10.16.1.250:8000<-2 10.16.1.250:8000<-3 10.16.1.250:8000<-4 10.16.1.250:8000<-6 10.16.1.250:8000<-6 10.16.1.250:8000<-7 OK Cancel
Figure 89, Copy Alarm Input
5.5 Configuring Event Recording and Capture
Purpose
Event triggered recording can be configured through the menu. The events include motion detection, alarms, and VCA events (face detection/face capture, line crossing detection, intrusion detection, region entrance detection, region exiting detection, loitering detection, people gathering detection, fast moving detection, parking detection, unattended baggage detection, object removal detection, audio loss exception detection, sudden change of sound intensity detection, and defocus detection).

NOTE
The HUI Series supports line crossing detection and intrusion detection of all channels, and 2-ch sudden scene change detection. Channels with audio support audio exception detection.
For analog channels, the line crossing detection and intrusion detection conflict with other VCA detection such as sudden scene change detection, face detection, and vehicle detection. You can enable only one function.
- Go to Menu > Camera > VCA.

text_image
Cameras Setup Camera [D2] 4A25 Save VCA Picture Face Data: Line Cloud Infusion Data Region Ene Region Grid Inserting C Repage Cell Foot Mask Parking Set Unsettled Object New Profile Drop Release Re Building Re Print Enable Settings Set Rule 1 Rule Settings E-16-2022 Web 15.0x 4A25 Video Tampering De... Video Loss VCA Video Quality Diagn... Clear All ApplyFigure 90, VCA Settings
-
Select a <camera.
-
Configure the detection rules for VCA events.
-
Click Set to configure the alarm linkage actions for the VCA events.
-
Select Trigger <hannel tab and select one or more channels that will start to record when a VCA alarm is triggered.
-
Click 4 pply to save the settings.

text_image
Settings Trigger Channel Arming Schedule Linkage Action Analog A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8
Figure 91, Set Triggered Camera of VCA Alarm
- Enter Record Schedule Settings interface (Menu > Record > Schedule > Record Schedule) and set Event as the record type.
5.6 Configuring Manual Recording and Continuous Capture
Purpose
Follow these steps to set parameters for manual recording and continuous capture. Using manual recording and continuous capture, you need to manually cancel the record and capture. The manual recording and manual continuous capture is prior to the scheduled recording and capture.
- Go to Menu > Manual > Record.

text_image
Manual Record Alarm Manual Video Qualit... Analog A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 Camera D1 D2 Recording by schedule Recording by manual operation Continuous Event DetectionFigure 92, Manual Record
-
Enable manual record.
-
Click the status icon ☐ before the camera number to change it to ON, or click 4 analog to enable manual record of all channels.
-
Disable manual record.
-
Click ON to change it to ☐, or click 4 analog ON to disable manual record of all channels.

NOTE
After rebooting all the manual records enabled are canceled.
5.7 Configuring Holiday Recording and Capture
Purpose
Follow these steps to configure the record or capture holiday schedules for the year to have different recording plans on holidays.
- Go to Menu > Recording Configuration > Holiday.

text_image
Recording Configuration Schedule Record Quality Motion Detect Trigger Holiday No.Holiday Name Status Start Date End Date Exit 1 Holiday1 Disabled 1.Jan 1.Jan 2 Holiday2 Disabled 1.Jan 1.Jan 3 Holiday3 Disabled 1.Jan 1.Jan 4 Holiday4 Disabled 1.Jan 1.Jan 5 Holiday5 Disabled 1.Jan 1.Jan 6 Holiday6 Disabled 1.Jan 1.Jan 7 Holiday7 Disabled 1.Jan 1.Jan 8 Holiday8 Disabled 1.Jan 1.JanFigure 93, Holiday Settings
- Enable Edit Holiday schedule.
1) Click to enter the Edit interface.

text_image
Edit Holiday Name Enable Mode Start Date End Date Holiday5 By Month Jan 1 Jan 1 Apply OK CancelFigure 94, Edit Holiday Settings
2) Check the Enable checkbox.
3) Select Mode from the drop-down list (by Month, By Veek, and By Date are selectable).
-
Set the start and end date.
-
Click 4 pply to save settings.
-
Click OK to exit the Edit interface.
-
Go to Menu > Recording Configuration > Schedule.
-
Click on Edit.
-
Choose Holiday in the Schedule drop-down list or draw the schedule on the Holiday timeline.

text_image
Edit Weekday Mon All Day Start/End Time 00:00-00:00 Type Continuous Start/End Time 00:00-00:00 Type Continuous Start/End Time 00:00-00:00 Type Continuous Start/End Time 00:00-00:00 Type Continuous Start/End Time 00:00-00:00 Type Continuous Start/End Time 00:00-00:00 Type Continuous Start/End End Time 00:00-00:00 Type Continuous Start/End Time 00:00-00:00 Type Continuous Copy Apply OK CancelFigure 95, Edit Schedule – Holiday

NOTE
Up to eight periods can be configured for each day. Time periods cannot overlap each other.
In the channel time table, both holiday schedule and normal day schedule are displayed.
Repeat step 4 to set Holiday schedules for other channels. If the holiday schedule can be used for other channels, click <opy and choose the channel you want to apply the settings.
5.8 Configuring Redundant Recording and Capture
Purpose
Enabling redundant recording and capture saves the record files and captured pictures not only in the R/V HDD but also in the redundant HDD, to effectively enhance data safety and reliability.
+efore You Start
Set the Storage mode in the HDD advanced settings to Group before setting the HDD property to Redundant. There must be at least one other HDD in Read/Write status.
- Go to Menu > System Configuration > HDD.

text_image
System Configuration HDD Information Record Information Disk Mode Storage Mode Disk Clone Cloud Storage General Network HDD Live View Exceptions User RS-232 POS Label Capacity Status Prosperity Type Free Space Cro Edit Delete Total Capacity 0MB Free Space 0MB Estimated time of recording in day(s)/Recording Time (day) NA/NA Add NetHDD InitFigure 96, HDD Information
- Select the H" and click to enter the Local HDD Settings interface.
1) Set the HDD property to Redundant.

text_image
Local HDD Settings HDD No 1 HDD Property ● R/W ● Read-only ● Redundancy Group ● 1 ● 2 ● 3 ● 4 ● 5 ● 6 ● 7 ● 8 ● 9 ● 10 ● 11 ● 12 ● 13 ● 14 ● 15 ● 16 HDD Capacity 931.51GB Apply OK CancelFigure 97, HDD General – Editing
2) Click 4pply to save the settings.
3) Click OK to return to the upper level menu.
- Go to Menu > Record > ≤ parameters > Record.
1) Select the Camera you want to configure.
2) Click More Settings.

text_image
More Settings Pre-record 5s Post-record 5s Expired Time (day) 0 Redundant Record Record Audio Video Stream Main Stream OK BackFigure 98, More Settings
3) Check the Redundant Record checkbox.
4) Click OK to save the settings.
5) If the encoding parameters can also be used for other channels, click <opy and choose the channel you want to apply the settings.
5.9 Configuring HDD Group
Purpose
You can group the HDDs and save the record files in a certain HDD group.
- Go to Menu > HDD > Advanced > Storage Mode.
- Check whether the storage mode of the HDD is Group. If not, set it to Group.
- Select "eneral in the left bar."
-
Click to enter editing interface.
-
Configuring HDD group.
1) Choose a group number for the HDD group.
2) Click 4pply to save your settings.
3) Click OK to return to the upper level menu.
- Repeat the above steps to configure more HDD groups.
- Choose the Channels that you want to save the record files in the HDD group.
1) Go to Menu > HDD > Advanced > Storage Mode.

text_image
System Configuration HDD Information Record Information Storage Mode Cloud Storage Mode Group Record on HDD Group 1 Analog A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 P Camera D1 D2Figure 99, HDD Advanced
2) Choose Group number in the drop-down list of Record on H" "roup
3) Check the channels you want to save in this group.
4) Click 4pply to save settings.

NOTE
After you have configured the HDD groups, configure the recording settings.
5.10 Files ≤rotection
Purpose
You can lock the recorded files or set the HDD property to Read-only to protect the record files from being overwritten.
5.10.1 ≤rotect Record Files by Locking Them
- Go to Menu > File Management.

text_image
File Management Include Cameras Record Event Picture Analog A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 IP Camera D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17 D18 Start/End time of record Record Mode Main Stream Recording Mode All File Type All Start Time 09-23-2017 00:00:00 End Time 09-23-2017 23:59:59 SearchFigure 100, Export
- Select the channels you want to investigate by checking the checkbox.
- Configure the record mode, record type, file type, s tart time, and end time.
- Click Search to show the results.


text_image
Search result Camera No. Start/End Time Size Play Lock 01 05-12-2015 16:39:38-16:34.... 121.30MB 01 05-12-2015 16:34:56-17:17.... 1018.89MB 01 05-12-2015 17:17:24-18:00.... 1018.50MB 01 05-12-2015 18:00:31-19:45.... 1018.49MB 01 05-12-2015 18:45:28-19:35.... 214.99MB 01 05-12-2015 08:53:17-09:25.... 607.94MB 01 05-12-2015 09:25:24-09:27.... 43.76MB 01 05-12-2015 09:30:12-10:48.... 867.23MB 01 05-12-2015 10:05:33-10:48.... 1018.39MB 01 05-12-2015 10:46:03-11:23.... 1018.53MB 01 05-12-2015 11:23:36-12:00.... 1017.30MB 01 05-12-2015 12:00:09-12:34.... 1017.13MB 01 05-12-2015 12:34:24-13:12.... 1017.07MB 01 05-12-2015 12:12:19-13:49.... 1018.69MB 01 05-12-2015 13:48:43-14:25.... 1017.20MB 01 05-12-2015 14:25:44-15:02.... 1018.53MB 01 05-12-2015 16:05:53-16:39.... 1018.77MB 01 05-12-2015 16:39:22-16:15.... 1017.36MB Total 22 P. M Total size: 68 Export All Export BasicFigure 101, Export – Search Result
- ≤ protect the record files.
1) Find the record files you want to protect, then click Which will turn to a Indicating that the file is locked.
Record file recordings not completed cannot be locked.
2) Click to change it to to unlock and unprotect the file.
5.10.2 ≤rotect File by Setting HDD to Read-Only
+efore You Start
To edit the HDD property, set the HDD storage mode to Group.
- Go to Menu > HDD > General.
| Label | Capacity | Status | Property | Type | Free Space | Group | Edit | Delete |
| 1 | 931.51GB | Normal | R/W | Local | 865GB | 1 | - | |
| 3 | 931.51GB | Normal | R/W | Local | 931GB | 1 | - |
Figure 102, HDD General
- Click to edit the HDD you want to protect.

text_image
Local HDD Settings HDD No 1 HDD Property ● R/W ● Read-only ● Redundancy Group 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 HDD Capacity 931.51GB Apply OK CancelFigure 103, HDD General – Editing
-
Set the HDD to Read-only.
-
Click OK to save settings and return to the upper level menu.

NOTE
You cannot save files to a read-only HDD. If you want to save files to the HDD, change the property to R/V.
If there is only one HDD and it is set to read-only, the DVR cannot record any files. Only live view mode is available.
If you set the HDD to read-only when the DVR is saving files in it, the file will be saved to the next R/V HDD. If there is only one HDD, the recording will be stopped.
5.11 One-Key Enable/Disable H.264+/H.265+, Analog Cameras
Purpose
You can one-key enable or disable H.264+/H.265+ for analog cameras.
5.11.1 Enabling
- Go to Menu > Record > Advanced.

text_image
HDD Information Record Information Disk Mode Storage Mode Disk Clone Cloud Storage H.264+ for All the Analog Cameras Enable Disable Overwrite Enable HDD Sie...Figure 104, Advanced Settings
- Click E nable to enable H.264+/H.265+ for all the analog cameras and the following attention box pops up.

text_image
Attention Enable H.264+ for all analog cameras and reboot the device? Yes NoFigure 105, Attention Box
- Click Yes to enable the function and reboot the device for new settings to take effect.
5.11.2 Disabling
-
Go to Menu > Record > Advanced.
-
Click 'isable to disable H.264+ for all the analog cameras and the following attention box pops up.

text_image
Attention Disable H.264+/H.265+ for all analog cameras and reboot the device? Yes NoFigure 106, Attention Box
- Click Yes to enable the function and reboot the device to have new settings take effect.
5.12 ≤ layback
5.12.1 Instant ≤ layback by Channel
Purpose
≤lay back the recorded video files of a specific channel in Live View mode. Channel switch is supported.
- Choose a channel in Live View mode and click 📋 in the quick setting toolbar.

NOTE
In instant playback mode, only files recorded during the last five minutes on this channel will be played back.

natural_image
Four-panel composite image showing a multi-lane highway with buses and traffic, no visible text or symbols.Figure 107, Instant ≤layback Interface
5.12.2 ≤layback by ×normal Search
5.12.2.1 ≤layback by Channel
-
Enter the Playback interface.
-
Right click a channel in Live View mode and select Playback from the menu, as shown below:

text_image
Common Menu Menu Single Screen Multi-screen Previous Screen Next Screen Start Auto-switch Start Recording Add IP Camera Playback PTZ Control Output ModeFigure 108, Right-click +enu under Live View
5.12.2.2 ≤layback by Time
Purpose
≤lay back video files recorded during a specified time duration. Multi-channel simultaneous playback and channel switch are supported.
- Go to Menu > ≤ layback.
- Check the checkbox of the channel(s) in the channel list, then double-click to select a date on the calendar.

text_image
Dec 2014 S M T W T F S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 _______________________________Figure 109, ≤layback Calendar

NOTE
If there are record files for that camera on that day, the icon for that day is displayed on the calendar as . Otherwise it is displayed as .
5.12.3 ≤layback Interface
- You can select main stream or sub-stream from the playback drop-down list. You can also use the toolbar in the bottom part of Playback interface to control playing progress, as shown in the following figure.

text_image
04-28-2017 Fri 14:30:54 2DE1032017 M0242EFigure 110, ≤layback Interface
- Select the channel(s) if you want to switch playback to another channel or execute simultaneous playback of multiple channels.

text_image
Mute Volume Start/Stop Clipping Lock File Add Default Tag Add Custom Tag File Management Digital Zoom In Play Reverse Play/Stop Pause 30 s Back 30 s Forward Speed Down 1x Speed Up 2 x Previous Day Next Day Single Frame Jump ToFigure 111, ≤layback Toolbar
Table 1-14 Detailed Explanation of ≤layback Toolbar
| Button | Operation | Button | Operation | Button | Operation |
![]() | Audio on/Mute | ![]() | Start/Stop clipping | ![]() | Lock File |
![]() | Add default tag | [278K] | Add customized tag | [T60Z] | File management for video clips, captured pictures, locked files and tags |
![]() | Reverse play/≤ause | ![]() | Stop | ![]() | Digital Zoom |
![]() | 30s forward | [37XS] | 30s reverse | [KWCE8] | ≤ause/≤slay |
![]() | Fast forward | ![]() | ≤previous day | ![]() | Slow forward |
![]() | Full Screen | ![]() | Exit | [ZYXA] | Next day |
![]() | Save the clips | [8ZGC] | ≤rocess bar | [ZYXA] | Scaling up/down the time line |
| Capture ≤icture | Enable/Disable ≤OS information overlay |

NOTE
01-01-2015 00:00:23 - 14-07-2015 16:10:27 indicates the start time and end time of the record files.
■ represents normal recording (manual or schedule), ■ represents event recording (motion, alarm, motion | alarm, motion & alarm).
≤ layback progress bar: use the mouse to click any point of the progress bar to locate specific frames.
when ≤OS is enabled when playing back, the ≤OS information will be overlaid on the video. Keyword searching is supported.
5.12.4 ≤layback by Event Search
Purpose
≤lay back record files on one or several channels searched by restricting event type (motion detection, alarm input, or VCA). Channel switch is supported.
- Go to Menu > ≤ layback.
-
Click Normal and select Event to enter the Event Playback interface.
-
Select 4 alarm Input, Motion, V<4 as the event type, and specify the start time and end time for search.

text_image
File Management Record Event Picture Major Type Motion Record Mode Main Stream Start Time 09-23-2017 00:00:00 End Time 09-23-2017 23:59:59 Pre-play 30s Post-play 30s Include Cameras Analog A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 IP Camera D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17 D18 SearchFigure 112, Video Search by +otion Detection
- Click Search, and the record files matching the search conditions will be listed.
- Select and click to play back the record files.
- You can click +ack to return to the search interface.
- If there is only one channel triggered, clicking 📋 takes you to Full-screen Playback interface of this channel.
- If several channels are triggered, clicking 📄akes you to the Synchronous Playback interface. Check 📋to select one channel for playback or select multiple channels for synchronous playback.

=he maximum synchronous playback channels varies by model.

text_image
Synch Playback Analog A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 OK CancelFigure 113, Select Channels for Synchronous ≤layback
- On the Event Playback interface, select the main stream or sub-stream from the drop-down list for playback. =he toolbar in the bottom part of the Playback interface can be used to control the playing process.

text_image
Event Main Stream Sour... Start Time Play D1 13:37:00 D1 13:37:59 D1 13:38:15 D1 13:39:36 D1 13:40:51 D1 13:41:20 D1 13:41:48 D1 13:42:10 D1 13:42:29 D1 13:42:58 D1 13:43:15 D1 13:44:29 D1 13:45:29 D1 13:45:52 D1 13:49:26 Total: 20 P: 1/1 Pre-play 30s Post-play 30s BackFigure 114, Interface of ≤layback by Event
- ≤re-play and post-play can be configured for playback of event triggered record files.
- Pre-play: =he time to play back before the event. For example, if an alarm triggered the recording at 10:00, if the pre-play time is five seconds, the video starts playback from 9:59:55.
- Post-play: The time to play back after the event. For example, if an alarm triggered the recording end at 11:00, if the post-play time is five seconds, the video plays back until 11:00:05.
- Click ☑ to select the previous or next event.
5.12.5 ≤layback by Tag
Purpose
Video tags allow you to record related information such as people and locations at a certain time point during playback. You can also to use video tag(s) to search for record files and position the time point.
+efore Playing +ack by Tag
- Go to Menu > ≤ layback.
- Search and play back the record file(s).

text_image
Normal Main Stream Max. Came... Min. Camer... Camera 01 Camera 02 Camera 03 Camera 04 Pdome IPCamera 02 IPCamera 03 IPCamera 04 IPCamera 05 IPCamera 06 Jui 2017 S M T W T F S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 07-11-2017 10:20:51 - 07-30-2017 13:30:46 Normal EventFigure 115, Interface of ≤layback by Time
- Click 📋 add a default tag.
- Click 📋 to add a customized tag and input the tag name.

text_image
Add Tag Tag Time 09-12-2015 08:53:41 Tag Name 1 OK CancelFigure 116, Add =ag

NOTE
A maximum of 64 tags can be added to a single video file.
- Click to check, edit, and delete tag(s).

text_image
File Management Video Clips Playback Capture Locked File Tag Camera... Tag Name Time Edit Delete D1 TAG 07-25-2017 11:17:28 # D1 TAG 07-25-2017 11:17:34 # D1 TAG 07-25-2017 13:48:01 # D1 TAG 07-25-2017 16:16:51 # D1 1 07-25-2017 18:06:03 # Total: 5 P: 1/1 CancelFigure 117, =ag +anagement Interface
1) Select Tag from the drop-down list in the Playback interface.
2) Choose channels, edit start time and end time, then click Search to enter the Search Result interface.

NOTE
Enter a keyword into the Keyword textbox to search a tag on command.

text_image
Tag Main Stream Cam... Tag Name Play D1 TAG D1 TAG D1 TAG D1 1 D1 TAG D1 TAG D1 TAG D1 1 Total: 9 P: 1/1 Pre-play 30s Post-play 30s BackFigure 118, Video Search by =ag
-
Click to play back the file.
-
Click + ack to return to the search interface.

≤re-play and post-play can be configured.
Click
5.12.6 ≤layback by Smart Search
Purpose
=he Smart ≤layback provides an easy way to speed through less relevant information. In Smart ≤layback mode, the system will analyze the video containing the motion or VCA information, mark it in green, and play it at normal speed while video without motion will be played at 16 times speed. =he Smart ≤layback rules and areas are configurable.
+efore You Start
=o get the Smart Search result, the corresponding event type must be enabled and configured on the I≤ camera. Here we take intrusion detection as an example.
- Log into the I≤ camera via a Veb browser, and enable intrusion detection by checking the checkbox. You may enter the motion detection
configuration interface at Configuration > Advanced Configuration > Events > Intrusion Detection.

text_image
Motion Detection Video Tampering Alarm input Alarm Output Exception Face Detection Audio Exception Detection Intrusion Detection Defocus Detection Scene Change Detection Enable Intrusion DetectionFigure 119, Setting Intrusion Detection on I≤ Camera
- Configure the required intrusion detection parameter s, including area, arming schedule, and linkage methods. Refer to the Smart I≤ Camera user manual for detailed instructions.
1) Go to Menu > ≤ layback.
2) Select Smart in the drop-down list on the top-left side.
3) Select a camera in the camera list.

text_image
Smart Main Stream Camera 01 Camera 02 Camera 03 Camera 04 IPdome IPCamera 02 IPCamera 03 IPCamera 04 IPCamera 05 IPCamera 06 Jul 2017 S M T W T F S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 07-11:2017 10:20:53... 07-26:2017 13:58:46Figure 120, Smart ≤layback Interface
4) Select a date in the calendar and click to play.
=able 1-15 Detailed Explanation of Smart ≤layback =oolbar
| Button | Operation | Button | Operation | Button | Operation |
| Draw line for the line crossing detection | ![]() | Draw quadrilateral for the intrusion detection | ![]() | Draw rectangle for the intrusion detection | |
| Set full screen for motion detection | ![]() | Clear all | ![]() | Start/Stop clipping | |
| File management for video clips | ![]() | Stop playing | ![]() | ≤ause playing /≤lay | |
| Smart settings | ![]() | Search matched video files | ![]() | Filter video files by setting the target characters | |
| Show/Hide VCA information |
5) Set the Smart Search rules and areas for VCA event or motion event.
- Line <crossing Detection: Select ☐, and click on the image to specify the start point and end point of the line.
- Intrusion Detection: Click ☐, and specify four points to set a quadrilateral region for intrusion detection. Only one region can be set.
- Motion Detection: Click 📋 and then click and draw the mouse to set the detection area manually. You can also click 📋 set the full screen as the detection area.
6) Click ↗ to configure the Smart settings.

text_image
Smart Settings Skip the Non-R... Play Non-Relat... 8 Play Related Vi... 1 Pre-play (s) 5 Post-play (s) 5 OK Cancel
Figure 121, Smart Settings
- Skip the Non-Related Video: ×on-related video will not be played if this function is enabled.
- Play Non-Related Video at: Set the speed to play the non-related video. +aximum 8/4/2/1 are selectable.
- Play Related Video at: Set the speed to play the related video. +aximum 8/4/2/1 are selectable.

NOTE
≤re-play and post-play is not available for the motion event type.
-
Click search and play the matched video files.
-
(Optional) Click 📋 to filter the searched video files by setting the target characters, including the gender and age of the human and whether he/she wears glasses.

text_image
Result Filter ✓ Enable Gender All Ages All Glasses All OK CancelFigure 122, Set Result Filter

NOTE
=he Result Filter function is supported by I ≤ cameras only.
- (Optional) For cameras supporting VCA, click show the VCA information. =he configured line or quadrilateral in VCA configuration and target frame(s) will be shown on the playback interface. Click hide the VCA information.

text_image
Smart Main Stream Camera 01 Camera 02 Camera 03 Camera 04 IPdome IPCamera 02 Dec 2016 S M T W T F S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 01-01 1970 00:00:43 - 12:06-2016 11:13:29 02:43:51 Normal Event SmartFigure 123, Show VCA Information

NOTE
In smart playback, both the analog and I≤ cameras support VCA information overlay.
If the connected camera does not support VCA, the icon is grey and unavailable.
For analog cameras, the VCA information includes line crossing detection and intrusion detection. For I ≤ cameras, the VCA information includes all the VCA detections of smart I ≤ camera.
5.12.7 ≤layback by System Logs
Purpose
≤lay back record file(s) associated with channels after searching system logs.
- Go to Menu > Maintenance > System Logs.

text_image
System Maintenance Start Time 09-23-2017 06:00:00 End Time 09-23-2017 23:59:59 Major Type All Minor Type Alarm Input Alarm Output Motion Detection Started Motion Detection Stopped Video Tampering Detection Started Video Tampering Detection Stopped POS Started POS Stopped Export All SearchFigure 124, System Log Search Interface
- Set search time and type and Search.

text_image
Search Result No. Major Type Time Minor Type Parameter Play Details 1 Information 10-07-2015 09:53:59 Local HDD Infor... N/A 2 Operation 10-07-2015 09:53:59 Power On N/A 3 Information 10-07-2015 09:54:05 Start Recording N/A 4 Operation 10-07-2015 09:54:08 Local Operation:... N/A 5 Information 10-07-2015 09:54:25 HDD S.M.A.R.T. N/A 6 Information 10-07-2015 09:54:32 Start Recording N/A 7 Operation 10-07-2015 09:54:32 Local Operation:... N/A 8 Operation 10-07-2015 09:54:32 Local Operation:... N/A 9 Exception 10-07-2015 09:55:32 IP Camera Disco...N/A 10 Information 10-07-2015 10:04:09 Systemi Running... N/A Total: 1690 P: 1/17 Export BackFigure 125, Result of System Log Search
- Choose a log with record file and click 📋 to enter Playback interface.
i NOTE
If there is no record file at the time point of the log, "No result found" will pop up.
- The toolbar in the bottom part of ≤ layback interface can be used to control playing process.

natural_image
Highway traffic scene with multiple lanes, buses, and vehicles under overcast sky (no visible text or symbols)Figure 126, Interface of ≤layback by Log
5.12.8 ≤layback by Sub-≤eriods
Purpose
The video files can be played in multiple sub-periods simultaneously.
- Go to Menu > ≤ layback.
- Select S ub-periods from the drop-down list in the upper-left corner of the page to enter the Sub-periods Playback interface.
-
Select a date and start playing the video file.
-
Select the Split-screen Number from the drop-down list. Up to 16 screens are configurable.

text_image
Subperiods Main Site... 01-19-2017 Wed 15:06:37 01-19-2017 Wed 15:46:37 01-19-2017 Wed 15:06:36 01-19-2017 Wed 15:46:35 01-19-2017 Wed 15:46:34 01-19-2017 Wed 15:46:33 01-19-2017 Wed 15:46:32 01-19-2017 Wed 15:46:31 01-19-2017 Wed 15:46:30 01-19-2017 Wed 15:46:29 01-19-2017 Wed 15:46:28 01-19-2017 Wed 15:46:27 01-19-2017 Wed 15:46:26 01-19-2017 Wed 15:46:25 01-19-2017 Wed 15:46:24 01-19-2017 Wed 15:46:23 01-19-2017 Wed 15:46:22 01-19-2017 Wed 15:46:21 01-19-2017 Wed 15:46:20 01-19-2017 Wed 15:46:19 01-19-2017 Wed 15:46:18 01-19-2017 Wed 15:46:17 01-19-2017 Wed 15:46:16 01-19-2017 Wed 15:46:15 01-19-2017 Wed 15:46:14 01-19-2017 Wed 15:46:13 01-19-2017 Wed 15:46:12 01-19-2017 Wed 15:46:11 01-19-2017 Wed 15:46:10 01-19-2017 Wed 15:46:9 01-19-2017 Wed 15:46:8 01-19-2017 Wed 15:46:7 01-19-2017 Wed 15:46:6 01-19-2017 Wed 15:46:5 01-19-2017 Wed 15:46:4 01-19-2017 Wed 15:46:3 01-19-2017 Wed 15:46:2 01-19-2017 Wed 15:46:1 01-19-2017 Wed 15:46:0 Split-screen... S M T W F S 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 29 26 27 28 29 30 31Figure 127, Interface of Sub-periods ≤ layback
i NOTE
According to the defined number of split-screens, the video files on the selected date can be divided into average segments for playback. E.g., if there are video files existing between 16:00 and 22:00, and the 6-screen display mode is selected, then it can play the video files for 1 hour on each screen simultaneously.
5.12.9 ≤lay Back External Files
Purpose
≤ perform the following steps to look up and play back files in the external devices.
- Go to Menu > ≤ layback.
- Select the External File in the drop-down list on the top-left side.
- The files are listed in the right-side list.
- You can click the Refresh to refresh the file list.
- Select and click the button to play back it.

text_image
External File Device Name File Type *.mp4 USB Flash Final Data ch01_20150... ch02_20150... RefreshFigure 128, Interface of External File ≤ layback
5.13 Auxiliary Functions of ≤layback
5.13.1 ≤laying Back Frame-by-Frame
Purpose
≤lay video files frame-by-frame, in order to check image details of the video when abnormal events happen.
- Go to the ≤ layback interface and click Single frame.
until the speed changes to - One click on the playback screen represents playback of one frame. ≤ress in toolbar to stop the playing.
5.13.2 Digital
1. Click 🔒 on the playback control bar to enter the Digital
natural_image
Highway scene with vehicles and trucks, residential buildings in background (no visible text or symbols)
Figure 129, Draw Area for Digital Zoom
3. Right-click the image to exit the digital zoom interface.
5.13.3 Multi-Channel Reverse ≤layback
Purpose
You can play back record files of multi-channels reversely. Up to 16-ch simultaneous reverse playback is supported.
1. Go to Menu > ≤ layback.
2. Check more than one checkboxes to select multiple ch annels and click to select a date on the calendar.

text_image
Normal
Main Stre...
Max. Ca... Min. Ca...
Camera 01
Camera 02
Camera 03
Camera 04
Camera 05
Camera 06
Camera 07
Camera 08
Jan 2016
G M T W T F G
3 4 5 6 7 8 9
10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23
24 25 26 27 28 29 30
31
03-22-201617:24:02 - 01-20-2016 20:26:45
10:57:49
Normal Event
Figure 130, 4-ch Synchronous ≤layback Interface
3. Click play back the record files in reverse.
5.13.4 File +anagement
Purpose
You can manage the video clips, captured pictures in playback, locked files, and tags you have added in the playback mode.
1. Enter the playback interface.
2. Click 🙏 on the toolbar to enter the file management interface.

text_image
File Management
Video Clips Locked File Tag
Camera No. Start/End Time Size
Total: 0 P: 1/1 Selected clips: 0
Total size: 0B Export All Export Cancel
Figure 131, File +anagement
3. You can view the saved video clips, captured playbac k pictures, lock/unlock the files and edit the tags which you added in the playback mode.
4. If required, select the items and click Export 4ll or Export to export the clips/pictures/files/tags to local storage device.
5.14 Backup
+efore You Start
Attach the backup device(s) to the device.
5.14.1 Backup by ×normal Video/≤icture Search
Purpose
=he record files or pictures can be backed up to various devices such as >SB devices (>SB flash drives, >SB HDDs, >SB writer), SA=A writer, and e-SA=A HDD.
5.14.1.1 Using USB Flash Drives, USB HDDs
1. Go to Menu > Export > Normal/≤icture.
2. Select the cameras to search.
3. Set the search condition and click Search to enter the search result interface.

text_image
File Management
Include Cameras
Record
Analog A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8
IP Camera D1 D2
Start/End time of record 09-18-2016 08:42:47 -- 04-19-2017 16-12:40
Record Mode Main Stream
Recording Mode All
File Type All
Start Time 04-19-2017 00:00:00
End Time 04-19-2017 23:59:59
Search
Figure 132, Normal Video Search for Backup
4. The matched video files are displayed in NOTE
5.13.3 Multi-Channel Reverse ≤layback
Purpose
You can play back record files of multi-channels reversely. Up to 16-ch simultaneous reverse playback is supported. 1. Go to Menu > ≤ layback. 2. Check more than one checkboxes to select multiple ch annels and click to select a date on the calendar. text_image
Normal Main Stre... Max. Ca... Min. Ca... Camera 01 Camera 02 Camera 03 Camera 04 Camera 05 Camera 06 Camera 07 Camera 08 Jan 2016 G M T W T F G 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 03-22-201617:24:02 - 01-20-2016 20:26:45 10:57:49 Normal Event5.13.4 File +anagement
Purpose
You can manage the video clips, captured pictures in playback, locked files, and tags you have added in the playback mode. 1. Enter the playback interface. 2. Click 🙏 on the toolbar to enter the file management interface. text_image
File Management Video Clips Locked File Tag Camera No. Start/End Time Size Total: 0 P: 1/1 Selected clips: 0 Total size: 0B Export All Export Cancel5.14 Backup
+efore You Start Attach the backup device(s) to the device.5.14.1 Backup by ×normal Video/≤icture Search
Purpose
=he record files or pictures can be backed up to various devices such as >SB devices (>SB flash drives, >SB HDDs, >SB writer), SA=A writer, and e-SA=A HDD.5.14.1.1 Using USB Flash Drives, USB HDDs
1. Go to Menu > Export > Normal/≤icture. 2. Select the cameras to search. 3. Set the search condition and click Search to enter the search result interface. text_image
File Management Include Cameras Record Analog A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 IP Camera D1 D2 Start/End time of record 09-18-2016 08:42:47 -- 04-19-2017 16-12:40 Record Mode Main Stream Recording Mode All File Type All Start Time 04-19-2017 00:00:00 End Time 04-19-2017 23:59:59 SearchThe size of the currently selected files is displayed in the lower-left corner of the window.

text_image
Search result Chart List Camera No. Start/End Time Size Play Lock A1 10-07-2015 09:54:05-... 569.39MB A1 10-07-2015 18:18:30-... 24.41MB A1 13-07-2015 11:00:53-... 412.54MB A1 13-07-2015 16:54:28-... 577.05MB A1 13-07-2015 22:31:39-... 1014.32MB A1 14-07-2015 06:29:26-... 605.49MB A1 14-07-2015 14:20:28-... 408.62MB A1 14-07-2015 18:19:57-... 1014.42MB A1 15-07-2015 04:11:25-... 1014.38MB A1 15-07-2015 13:59:43-... 1014.12MB A1 15-07-2015 23:47:30-... 1014.20MB A1 16-07-2015 09:40:23-... 663.24MB A2 13-07-2015 16:54:28-... 1567.70KB Total: 99 P: 1/1 Total size: 0B Export All Export BackFigure 133, Result of ×normal Video Search for Backup
-
Select video files from the <hart or List to export, and click the button Export to enter the Export interface.
-
You can also click Export 4ll to select all the video files for backup and enter the Export interface.

text_image
Export Device Name .mp4:*.zip SaveType AVI Name Size Type Edit Date Delete Play Free Space 0B New Folder Format Export Back
Figure 134, Export by ×normal Video Search using >SB Flash Drive
-
Select the backup device from the drop-down list and you can also select the file format to filter the files existing in the backup device.
-
Select the saving type.
-
Click Export on the Export interface to start the backup process.
-
On the pop-up message box, click the radio button to export the video files, log, or the player to the backup device.
-
Click OK to confirm.

text_image
Export Video and Player.Log Video and Player Player Merge file OK CancelFigure 135, Select File or ≤layer for Backup
- A prompt message will pop up after the backup process is complete. Click OK to confirm.

text_image
Export Export finished. OKFigure 136, Export Finished

NOTE
The backup of pictures using USB writer or SATA writer has the same operating instructions. Refer to steps described above.
5.14.2 Backup by Event Search
Purpose
Back up event-related record files using USB devices (USB flash drives, USB HDDs, USB writer), SATA writer, or eSATA HDD. Quick Backup and Normal Backup are supported.
- Go to Menu > Maintenance > Import/Export.
- Select the cameras to search.
- Select the event type to alarm input, motion, VCA, or ≤OS.

text_image
Event Major Type Motion Record Mode Main Stream Start Time 02-17-2016 00:00:00 End Time 02-17-2016 23:59:59 Pre-play 30s Post-play 30s Analog A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 IP Camera D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17 D18 Search BackFigure 137, Event Search for Backup
- Set search condition and click Search to enter the search result interface. The matched video files are displayed in <hart or List display mode.
- Select video files from the <hart or List interface to export.

text_image
Search result Chart List Source Camera No. HDD Event Time Size Play D1 D1 1 13-07-2015 17:51:48-... 4535.04KB D1 D1 1 13-07-2015 17:57:53-... 2452.46KB D1 D1 1 13-07-2015 17:59:32-... 2673.78KB D1 D1 1 13-07-2015 18:00:09-... 2468.02KB D1 D1 1 13-07-2015 18:00:47-... 2485.31KB D1 D1 1 13-07-2015 18:01:57-... 2459.40KB D1 D1 1 13-07-2015 18:04:53-... 2528.10KB D1 D1 1 13-07-2015 18:06:21 - ... 2600.41KB D1 D1 1 13-07-2015 18:06:43-... 2826.09KB D1 D1 1 13-07-2015 18:07:25-... 3128.92KB D1 D1 1 13-07-2015 18:07:59-... 3160.69KB D1 D1 1 13-07-2015 18:08:35-... 2892.27KB D1 D1 1 13-07-2015 18:13:55-... 3035.90KB Total: 569 P: 1/6 Total size: OR Export All Expert Back
Figure 138, Result of Event Search
- Export the video files.
5.14.3 Back Up Video Clips
Purpose
You may export video clips in playback mode directly during ≤ layback, using USB devices (USB flash drives, USB HDDs, USB writer), or SATA writer.
- Go to Menu > ≤ layback.
- During playback, use 📋 or 📋 in the playback toolbar to start or stop clipping record file(s).
3. Click enter the file management interface.

text_image
File Management Video Clips Playback Capture Locked File Tag Camera No. Start/End Time Size D1 07-25-2017 11:17:30--11:18:39 16.88MB D1 07-25-2017 11:18:39--11:57:37 557.09MB D1 07-25-2017 13:07:12--13:40:58 481.29MB D1 07-25-2017 13:40:58--13:48:01 101.53MB D1 07-25-2017 14:36:01--14:51:51 226.69MB D1 07-25-2017 14:51:51--16:02:46 1014.17MB D1 07-25-2017 16:02:46--16:15:37 178.31MB Total: 7 P: 1/1 Camera with clip recording: 5 Start time: 07-25-2017 11:17:30 End time: 07-25-2017 11:18:39 Selected clips: 8 Total size: 0B Export All Export CancelFigure 139, Video Clips Export Interface
4. Export the video clips in playback.
5.15 +anaging Backup Devices
+anagement of >SB flash drives, >SB HDDs, and eSA=A HDDs.
- Enter the Export interface.

text_image
System Maintenance Device Name ./bin Refresh Name Size Type Edit Date Delete Play Free Space 0B New Folder Import ExportFigure 140, Storage Device +anagement
- Click New "older if you want to create a new folder in the backup device."
- Select a record file or folder in the backup device and click to delete it.
-
Click Erase to erase the files from a re-writable CD/DVD.
-
Click "ormat to format the backup device."

NOTE
If the inserted storage device is not recognized:
Click Refresh.
Reconnect device.
Check for compatibility from vendor.
6 Alarm Settings
6.1 Setting Motion Detection
- Go to Menu > Recording Configuration > Motion Detect.

text_image
Recording Configuration Schedule Record Quality Motion Detect Trigger Holiday Camera [A1] Camera 01 Enable Motion Detection Settings Set Sensitivity Zone Setting Full Screen Clear NO VIDEO Copy ApplyFigure 141, Motion Detection Setup Interface
- Select a camera you want to set up motion detection.
- Set detection area and sensitivity.
- Check checkbox to enable motion detection. Use the mouse to draw detection area(s) or click "ull Screen to set the detection area to be the full screen and drag the sensitivity bar to set sensitivity.
- Click S et to set alarm response actions.

text_image
Settings Trigger Channel Arming Schedule Linkage Action Analog A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 Apply OK CancelFigure 142, +otion Detection Settings
- Click Trigger <hannel tab and select one or more channels that are to start to record or become full-screen monitoring when motion alarm is triggered.

text_image
Settings Trigger Channel Arming Schedule Linkage Action Analog A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16
Figure 143, Set =rigger Camera of +otion Detection
-
Set arming schedule of the channel.
-
Select 4rming Schedule tab to set the channel's arming schedule.
-
Choose a day of the week, with up to eight time periods within each day. Click <opy to copy the time period settings to other day(s).

NOTE
=ime periods must not repeat or overlap.

text_image
Settings Trigger Channel Aving Schedule Linkage Action Week Mon 1 D0:00-24:00 2 D0:00-00:00 3 D0:00-00:00 4 D0:00-00:00 5 D0:00-00:00 6 D0:00-00:00 7 D0:00-00:00 8 D0:00-00:00 Copy Apply OK CancelFigure 144, Set +otion Detection Arming Schedule
- Click Linkage 4 action tab to set up alarm response actions of motion alarm.
- Repeat the above steps to set up arming schedule for other days of the week.
-
Click OK to complete the motion detection settings of the channel.
-
To set motion detection for another channel, repeat the above steps or copy the above settings to it.

NOTE
You cannot copy the "Trigger Channel" action.
6.2 Setting Sensor Alarms
Purpose
Set up handling method of an external sensor alarm.
- Go to Menu > Recording Configuration > Trigger.

text_image
Recording Configuration Alarm Input Alarm Output Schedule Record Quality Motion Detect Trigger Holiday Alarm Input No. Local<-1 Alarm Name Type N.O Enable Alarm Input Settings Set Alarm Input Status Alarm Input No. Alarm Name Alarm Type Local<-1 N.O Local<-2 N.O Local<-3 N.O Local<-4 N.O Local<-5 N.OFigure 145, Alarm Input Settings Interface
- Set the handling method of the selected alarm input.
- Check the Enable checkbox and click Set to set its alarm response actions.

text_image
Settings Trigger Channel Arming Schedule Linkage Action PTZ Linking Week Mon 1 00:00-24:00 2 00:00-00:00 3 00:00-00:00 4 00:00-00:00 5 00:00-00:00 6 00:00-00:00 7 00:00-00:00 8 00:00-00:00 Copy Apply OK CancelFigure 146, Set Arming Schedule of Alarm Input
- Select T rigger <hannel tab and select one or more channels that is to start to record or become full-screen monitoring when an external alarm input is triggered.
-
Select 4rming Schedule tab to set the channel's arming schedule.
-
Select a day of the week, with a maximum of eight time periods within each day.

NOTE
Time periods must not repeat or overlap.
-
Select Linkage 4action tab to set up alarm response actions of the alarm input.
-
Repeat the above steps to set up arming schedule for other days of the week. >se <opy to copy an arming schedule to other days.
-
(Optional) Select P TZ Linking tab and set ≤TZ linkage of the alarm input.
-
Set ≤TZ linking parameters and click OK to complete the settings of the alarm input.

NOTE
Check whether the ≤TZ or speed dome supports ≤TZ linkage.
One alarm input can trigger presets, patrol, or pattern of more than one channel. But presets, patrols, and patterns are exclusive.

text_image
Settings Trigger Channel Arming Schedule Linkage Action PTZ Linking PTZ Linking [A1] Camera 01 Call Preset Preset 1 Call Patrol Patrol 1 Call Pattern Pattern 1 Apply OK CancelFigure 147, Set ≤TZ Linking of Alarm Input
- To set the handling action of another alarm input, repeat the above steps or copy the above settings to it.

text_image
Copy to All 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Holiday OK CancelFigure 148, Copy Settings of Alarm Input
- (Optional) Enable the one-key disarming for local alarm input 1 (Local <- 1).
1) Check the Enable One-Key Disarming checkbox.
2) Click Settings to enter the linkage action settings interface.
3) Select the alarm linkage action(s) you want to disarm for the local alarm input 1. The selected linkage actions include Full Screen Monitoring, Audible Varning, Notify Surveillance Center, Send E-mail, Upload Captured ≤ictures to Cloud, and Trigger Alarm Output.

text_image
Settings Trigger Channel Aiming Schedule Linkage Action PTZ Linking Full Screen Monitoring Audible Warning Notify Surveillance Center Send Email Upload Captured Pictures To Cloud Trigger Alarm Output Apply OK CancelFigure 149, Disarm Linkage Actions

NOTE
when alarm input 1 (Local <- 1) is enabled with one-key disarming, the other alarm input settings are not configurable.
6.2.1 Detecting Video Loss
Purpose
Detect video loss of a channel and take alarm response action(s).
- Go to Menu > Camera > Video Loss.

text_image
Cameras Setup Camera [Alt] Camera 0.1 Enable Video Loss Alarm Settings Set NO VIDEO Copy ApplyFigure 150, Video Loss Setup Interface
-
Select a <amera you want to detect.
-
Set up handling method of video loss.
- Check the Enable Video Loss Alarm checkbox.
- Click Set to set up handling method of video loss.
-
Set arming schedule of the channel.
-
Select 4rming Schedule tab to set the channel's arming schedule.
-
Choose a day of the week, with up to eight time periods within each day. Click
to copy the time period settings to other day(s).

NOTE
Time periods cannot repeat or overlap.

text_image
Recording Configuration Alarm Input Alarm Output Schedule Record Quality Motion Detect Trigger Holiday Alarm Input No. Local<-1 Alarm Name Type N.O Enable Alarm Input Settings Set Alarm Input Status Alarm Input No. Alarm Name Alarm Type Local<-1 N.O Local<-2 N.O Local<-3 N.O Local<-4 N.O Local<-5 N.OFigure 151, Set Arming Schedule of Video Loss
- Repeat the above steps to set arming schedule of other days of the week. Use
to copy an arming schedule to other days. - Select Linkage 4action tab to set up alarm response action of video loss.
- Click OK to complete the video loss settings of the channel.
- Repeat the above steps to finish settings of other channels, or click <opy to copy the above settings to them.
6.2.2 Detecting Video Tampering
Purpose
Trigger alarm when the lens is covered and take alarm response action(s).
- Go to Menu > Camera > Video Tampering Detection.

text_image
Cameras Setup Camera [A1] Camera 01 Cameras OSD Image PTZ Privacy Mask Video Tampering De Video Loss VCA Video Quality Diagn... Enable Video Tampering Date... Settings Set Sensitivity NO VIDEO Copy ApplyFigure 152, Video = ampering Interface
- Select a <amera you want to detect video tampering.
- Check the Enable Video = ampering Detection checkbox.
- Drag the sensitivity bar and choose a proper sensitivity level.
- Click S et to set handling method of video tampering. Set arming schedule and alarm response actions of the channel.
- Click 4rming Schedule tab to set the response action arming schedule.
- Select a day of the week, with up to eight time periods within each day.

NOTE
=ime periods cannot repeat or overlap.

text_image
Settings Setting Variable Linkage Action Week Mon 1 00:00-24:00 2 00:00-00:00 3 00:00-00:00 4 00:00-00:00 5 00:00-00:00 6 00:00-00:00 7 00:00-00:00 8 00:00-00:00 Copy Apply OK CancelFigure 153, Set Arming Schedule of Video = ampering
- Select Linkage 4action tab to set alarm response actions of video tampering alarm.
- Repeat the above steps to set arming schedule of other days of a week. Use
to copy an arming schedule to other days. - Click OK to complete the video tampering settings of the channel.
- Repeat the above steps to finish settings of other channels, or click <opy to copy the above settings to them.
- Click 4 pply to save and activate the settings.
6.3 Setting All-Day Video Quality Diagnostics
Purpose
The device provides two ways to diagnose the video quality: manual and all-day. ≤ perform the following steps to set the threshold of the diagnosing and the linkage actions.
- Go to Menu > Camera > Video Quality Diagnostics.

text_image
Cameras Setup Camera [A1] Camera 01 Cameras OSO Image PTZ Privacy Mask Video Tampering De... Video Loss VCA Video Quality Diagn... Enable Video Quality Diagnostics Settings Set Diagnostica Mode Threshold Blurred Image 35 Abnormal Brightness 35 Color Cast 80 NO VIDEO Default Copy ApplyFigure 154, Video Quality Diagnostics Interface
- Select a <camera you want to detect video tampering.
- Check the checkbox of Enable Video Quality Diagnostics.

NOTE
To enable video quality diagnostics, the function must be supported by the selected camera.
-
Enable and set the threshold of the diagnostic types, there are +lurred Image, 4bnormal +rightness, and <olor <ast.
-
Check the corresponding checkbox of the diagnostic type, and adjust the threshold of it by dragging the bar.

NOTE
=he higher the threshold set, the harder the exception will be to detect.
- Click Set to set handling method of video quality diagnostics. Set arming schedule and alarm response actions of the channel.
1) Click 4rming Schedule tab to set the arming schedule of response action.
2) Choose a day of the week, with up to eight time periods within each day.

NOTE
=ime periods cannot repeat or overlap.

text_image
Settings Winning Schedule Linkage Action Week Mon 1 10:00-16:00 2 00:00-00:00 3 00:00-00:00 4 00:00-00:00 5 00:00-00:00 6 00:00-00:00 7 00:00-00:00 8 00:00-00:00 *For getting an accurate feedback result, it is recommended to set the testing schedule in the davtime. Copy Apply OK CancelFigure 155, Set Arming Schedule of Video Quality Diagnostics
3) Select Linkage 4action tab to set alarm response actions of video quality diagnostics alarm.
- Repeat the above steps to set arming schedule of other days of the week. >se <opy to copy an arming schedule to other days.
1) Click OK to complete the video quality diagnostics settings of the channel.
-
Click 4pply to save and activate settings.
-
(Optional) you can copy the same settings to other cameras by clicking
.
6.4 Handling Exceptions
Purpose
Exception settings refer to the handling method of various exceptions.
- H" "ull/ =he HDD is full
• HDD Error: Vriting HDD error, unformatted HDD, etc.
• Network Disconnected: Disconnected network cable
• IP <conflicted: Duplicate I≤ address
- Illegal Login: Incorrect user ID or password
- Input/Recording Resolution Mismatch: The input resolution is smaller than the recording resolution
• Record/<capture Exception: No space for saving recorded files or captured pictures
- Go to Menu > Configuration > Exceptions.

text_image
System Configuration Enable Event Hint Event Hint Settings Set Exception Type HDD Full Audible Warning Notify Surveillance Center Send Email Trigger Alarm Output ApplyFigure 156, Exception Settings Interface
- Check the Enable Event Hint checkbox to display 📄 (Event/Exception icon) when an exceptional event occurs. Click Set to select the detailed event hint for display.

text_image
System Configuration Enable Event Hint Event Hint Settings Set Exception Type HDD Full Audible Warning All Notify Surveillance Center HDD Full Send Email HDD Error Trigger Alarm Output Network Disconnected IP Conflicted Illegal Login Camera/Recording Resolution Mismatch Record Exception User ApplyFigure 157, Event Hint Settings
=he appears in the live view interface, and you can view the detailed information of the exceptional event. Click Set, then you can select the detailed event hint for display.

text_image
Alarm/Exception Information Alarm/Exception Information(Camera No., Alarm Input No., H... Motion Detection D1 10.16.1.250 Set ExitFigure 158, Detailed Event
- Set the alarm linkage actions.
- Click 4pply to save the settings.
7 Setting Alarm Response Actions
Purpose
Alarm response actions will be activated when an alarm or exception occurs, including Full Screen Monitoring, Audible Varning (buzzer), Notify Surveillance Center, Send E-mail, and Trigger Alarm Output.
• Full Screen Monitoring
When an alarm is triggered, the local monitor (HDMI, VGA, or CVBS monitor) displays in full screen the video image from the alarming channel configured for full screen monitoring.
If alarms are triggered simultaneously in several channels, their full-screen images will be switched at an interval of 10 seconds (default dwell time). A different dwell time can be set by going to Menu > Configuration > Live View.
Auto-switch will terminate once the alarm stops and you will be taken back to the Live View interface.
- 4udible Warning
Trigger an audible beep when an alarm is detected.
- Notify Surveillance
Sends an exception or alarm signal to a remote alarm host when an event occurs. The alarm host refers to a ≤ C installed with Remote Client.

NOTE
The alarm signal will be transmitted automatically at detection mode when remote alarm host is configured.
- Send E-Mail
Send an e-mail with alarm information to a user or users when an alarm is detected.
- Trigger 4larm Output
Trigger an alarm output when an alarm is triggered.
1. Go to Menu > Recording Configuration > Trigger.
2. Select an alarm output and set the alarm name and dwell time.

text_image
Recording Configuration
Alarm Input Alarm Output
Alarm Output No Local=1
Alarm Name
Dwell Time 0s
Settings Set
Alarm Output Status
Alarm Output No Alarm Name Dwell Time
Local=1 0s
Holiday
Copy Apply
Figure 159, Alarm Output Settings Interface

NOTE
If Manually Clear is selected in the Dwell Time drop-down list, clear it by going to Menu > Manual > Alarm.
3. Click Set to set the alarm output arming schedule.
4. Choose a day of the week, with up to eight time periods each day.

NOTE
=ime periods cannot repeat or overlap.

text_image
Settings
Trigger Channel Arming Schedule Linkage Action PTZ Linking
Week Mon
1 00:00-24:00
2 00:00-00:00
3 00:00-00:00
4 00:00-00:00
5 00:00-00:00
6 00:00-00:00
7 00:00-00:00
8 00:00-00:00
Copy Apply OK Cancel
Figure 160, Set Arming Schedule of Alarm Output
5. Repeat the above steps to set the arming schedule for other days of the week. Click Copy to copy an arming schedule to other days.
6. Click OK to complete the arming schedule setting of alarm output.
7. Click 4pply to save the settings.
8 ≤OS Configuration
8.1 Configuring ≤OS Settings
1. Go to Menu > System Configuration > ≤OS > ≤OS Settings.
2. Select ≤OS from the drop-down list. Up to eight ≤OS units are selectable.
3. Check the checkbox to enable the ≤OS function.

text_image
System Configuration
POS Settings Overlay Channel
Select POS
Enable
Settings
Set
POS 1
Privacy Settings
Set
POS Protocol
Universal Protocol
Advance
Connection Type TCP Connection
Set
Character Encoding Latin-1(iso-8659-1)
Overlay Mode Page
Font Size Small
Overlay Time (s) 5
Delay Time(s) 5
POS Overlay In Live View
Font Color
Copy Apply
Figure 161, ≤OS Settings
4. Filter the ≤OS privacy information if needed.
1) Click Set after Privacy Settings to enter ≤OS ≤rivacy Information Filtering interface.

text_image
POS Privacy Information Filtering
Privacy Information1
Privacy Information2
Privacy Information3
OK Cancel
Figure 162, ≤OS ≤rivacy Information Filtering
2) Edit the Privacy Information in the text field to hide the input information overlay. Up to three pieces of privacy information can be edited, with no more than 32 characters input for each piece of information.
3) Click OK to save the settings.
5. Set the ≤OS protocol to Universal ≤rotocol, E≤SON, AVE, or NUCLEUS.
• Universal Protocol
Click Advanced to expand more settings when selecting the universal protocol. You can set the start line tag, line break tag, and end line tag for the ≤OS overlay characters, and the case-sensitive property of the characters.

text_image
System Configuration
POS Settings Overlay Channel
Select POS
Enable
Settings
Set
POS 1
Privacy Settings
Set
POS Protocol
Universal Protocol
General
Connection Type
TCP Connection
Set
Start Line Tag
Hex
Line Break Tag
0D0A
Hex
End Line Tag
Hex
Case-sensitive
No Tag
Character Encoding
Latin-1(so-8659-1)
Overlay Mode
Page
Font Size
Small
Overlay Time (s)
3
Delay Time(s)
5
POS Overlay in Live View
Font Color
Copy Apply
Figure 163, Universal ≤rotocol Settings
- NUCLEUS
If you select NUCLEUS protocol, reboot the device to have the new settings take effect.
1) Click Set to enter the NUCLEUS Settings interface.
2) Edit the Employee, Shift, and Terminal information. No more than 32 characters can be input.
3) Click OK to save the settings.

NOTE
If you select NUCLEUS protocol, the connection type defaults to be RS-232, and all the other ≤OS protocol will change to be NUCLEUS.
Set Usage to be Transparent Channel for RS-232 settings in Menu > Configuration > RS-232 first.
1. Set the Connection Type to TC≤, UD≤, Multicast, RS-232, USB->RS-232, or Sniff, and click Set to configure the parameters for each connection type.
\- TCP Connection
when using TC≤ connection, the port must be set from 0 to 65535, and the port for each ≤OS machine must be unique. Input the Allowed Remote I≤ Address for connecting the DVR and the ≤OS machine via TC≤.
TCP Connection Settings Port 10010 Allowed Remote IP Address 192.0 0 64
Figure 164, TC≤ Connection Settings
- UDP Connection
When using UD≤ connection, the port must be set from 0 to 65535, and the port for each ≤OS machine must be unique. Input the Allowed Remote I≤ Address for connecting the DVR and the ≤OS machine via UD≤.
UDP Connection Settings Port 10100 Allowed Remote IP Address 192.0 .0 .64
Figure 165, UD≤ Connection Settings
• USB -> RS-232 Connection
Configure the port parameters of USB-to-RS-232 convertor, including the serial number of port, baud rate, data bit, stop bit, parity, and flow ctrl.

NOTE
when using USB -> RS-232 convertor mode, the port of USB-to-RS-232 convertor and the ≤OS must correspond to each other, e.g., ≤OS1 must be connected to port1 of the convertor.

text_image
USB->RG-232 Settings
Serial Number 1
Baud Rate 115200
Data Bit 8
Stop Bit 1
Parity None
Flow Ctrl None
OK Cancel
Figure 166, USB-to-RS-232 Settings
• RS-232 Connection
Connect the DVR and the ≤OS machine via RS-232. The RS-232 settings can be configured in Menu > Configuration > RS-232. The Usage must be set to Transparent Channel.

text_image
RS-232 Settings
Baud Rate 115200
Data Bit 8
Stop Bit 1
Parity None
Flow Ctrl None
Usage Transparent Channel
Figure 167, RS-232 Settings
- Multicast
when connecting the DVR and the ≤OS machine via +ulticast protocol, set the multicast address and port.

text_image
Multicast Settings
Address 224.0 .0 .1
Port 10400
OK Cancel
Figure 168, +ulticast Settings
- Sniff
Connect the DVR and the ≤ OS machine via Sniff. Configure the source address and destination address settings.

text_image
Sniff Settings
Enable Source Port Filter
Source Address 192 .168 .1 .1
Source Port 10200
Enable Destination Address Filter
Enable Destination Port Filter
Destination Address 192 .168 .0 .1
Destination Port 10300
OK Cancel
Figure 169, Sniff Settings
2. Set other parameters of characters overlay.
1) Select the character encoding format from the drop-down list.
2) Select the overlay mode of the characters to display in scrolling or page mode.
3) Set the font size to small, medium, or large.
4) Set the overlay time of the characters. The value ranges from 5 to 3600 sec.
5) Set the delay time of the characters. The value ranges from 5 to 3600 sec.
6) (Optional) Check the checkbox to enable the POS Overlay in Live View.
7) Select the font color for the characters.

NOTE
You can adjust the size and position of the textbox on the ≤OS settings interface live view screen by dragging the frame.
3. Click 4pply to activate the settings.
4. (Optional) Click
text_image
Copy to
All POS1 POS2 POS3
POS4 POS5 POS6
POS7 POS8
OK Cancel
Figure 170, Copy ≤OS Settings
8.2 Configuring Overlay Channel
Purpose
You can assign the ≤ OS machine to the corresponding channel on which you want to overlay.
1. Go to Menu > Configuration > ≤OS > Overlay Channel.
2. Click to select an analog or I ≤ camera from the camera list on the right, and then click a ≤ OS item from the ≤ OS list you want to overlay on the selected camera.
3. Click or to go to the previous or next page of cameras.

text_image
System Configuration
POS Settings Overlay channel
General
Network
HDD
Live View
Exceptions
User
RS-232
POS
POS
pos1
pos2
pos3
pos4
pos5
pos6
pos7
pos8
A1
pos1 ×
A2
pos2 ×
A3
pos3 ×
A4
pos4 ×
A5
pos5 ×
A6
pos6 ×
A7
pos7 ×
A8
pos8 ×
A9
X ×
A10
X ×
A11
X ×
A12
X ×
A13
X =
A14
X =
A15
X =
A16
X =
Apply
Figure 171, Overlay Channel Settings
4. You can also click to overlay all ≤OS items to the first eight channels in order. Click to clear all ≤OS overlay settings.
5. Click 4pply to save the settings.
8.3 Configuring ≤OS Alarm
Purpose
Set the ≤OS alarm parameters to trigger certain channels to start recording, or trigger full screen monitoring, audio warning, notifying the surveillance center, sending e-mail, and so on.
1. Go to Menu > Configuration > ≤OS > ≤OS Settings.
2. Follow the steps in Chapter 10.1 and 10.2 to configure the ≤OS settings.
3. Click Set to enter the alarm settings interface.

text_image
Settings
Trigger Channel Arming Schedule Handling PTZ Linking
Analog
A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6
A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12
A13 A14 A15 A16
Apply OK Cancel
Figure 172, Set Trigger Cameras of ≤OS
4. Click Trigger NOTE
=ime periods cannot repeat or overlap.

text_image
Settings
Trigger Channel Aiming Schedule Handling PTZ Linking
Week Mon
1 00:00-24:00
2 00:00-00:00
3 00:00-00:00
4 00:00-00:00
5 00:00-00:00
6 00:00-00:00
7 00:00-00:00
8 00:00-00:00
Copy Apply OK Cancel
Figure 173, Set Arming Schedule
6. Click the Handling tab to set up alarm response actions of ≤OS alarm.
7. Repeat the above steps to set up arming schedule of other days of the week.
8. Click OK to complete the ≤OS settings of the channel.
9. Select PTZ Linking tab and set ≤=< linkage of the ≤OS alarm.
10. Set ≤=< linking parameters and click OK to complete the settings of the alarm input.

NOTE
Ensure the ≤TZ or speed dome supports ≤TZ linkage.

text_image
Settings
Trigger Channel Arming Schedule Handling PTZ Linking
PTZ Linking
[A1] Camera 01
Call Preset
Preset
1
Call Patrol
Patrol
1
Call Pattern
Pattern
1
Apply OK Cancel
Figure 174, Set ≤TZ Linking
11. Click OK to save the settings.
9 VCA Alarm
ATTENTION!
Some of the features described below require special cameras. Not all features work with all cameras. Please contact your Hikvision Sales Expert for more information.
Purpose
The DVR can receive the VCA alarm (line crossing detection, intrusion detection, sudden scene change detection, and audio exception detection) sent by analog camera, and the VCA detection must be enabled and configured on the camera settings interface first. All other VCA detection features must be supported by the connected I≤ camera.

NOTE
HUI series supports line crossing detection and intrusion detection of all channels, and 2-ch sudden scene change detection. Channels with audio support audio exception detection.
For the analog channels, the line crossing detection and intrusion detection conflict with other VCA detection such as sudden scene change detection, face detection and vehicle detection. You can only enable one function.
9.1 Face Detection
Purpose
The face detection function detects faces appearing in the surveillance scene, and certain actions can be taken when the alarm is triggered.
1. Go to Menu > Cameras Setup > VCA.
2. Select the camera to configure the VCA.
3. You can check the Save V<4 Picture checkbox to save the captured VCA detection pictures.

text_image
Cameras Setup
Camera
A1] Camera 01
Save VCA Picture
Face Defec... Vehicle Def... Line Crevel... Intrusion De... Region Enter... Region Exit... Lefering D... People Cam...
Fast Movin... Parking Def... Unattached Object Ram ... Audio Exce... Defocus De... Sudden Sc... PIR Alarm
Enable
Settings
Set
Rule
1
Rule Settings
Draw Live
Draw Quadrit...
Clear All
NO VIDEO
Apply
Figure 175, Cameras Setup > VCA window
4. Set the VCA detection type to "ace 'etection."
5. Click Set to enter the face detection settings interface. Configure the trigger channel, arming schedule, linkage action, and ≤TZ linking for the face detection alarm.

text_image
Settings
Trigger Channel Arming Schedule Linkage Action PTZ Linking
PTZ Linking [A1] Camera 01
Call Preset ●
Preset 1
Call Patrol ●
Patrol 1
Call Pattern ●
Pattern 1
Apply OK Cancel
Figure 176, ≤TZ Linking
6. Click Rule Settings to set the face detection rules. You can drag the slider to set the detection sensitivity.
Sensitivity/ Range [1-5]. The higher the value, the more easily the face can be detected.

text_image
Rule Settings
No 1
Sensitivity 3
Figure 177, Set Face Detection Sensitivity
7. Click 4pply to activate the settings.
9.2 Vehicle Detection
Purpose
Vehicle Detection is available for road traffic monitoring. In Vehicle Detection, a passing vehicle can be detected and the picture of its license plate can be captured. You can send an alarm signal to notify the surveillance center and upload the captured picture to an FT≤ server.
1. Go to Menu > Camera > VCA.
2. Select the camera to configure the VCA.
3. You can check the Save V<4 Picture checkbox to save the captured VCA detection pictures.
4. Select the VCA detection type to Vehicle 'etection.
5. Check the Enable checkbox to enable this function.

text_image
Cameras Setup
Camera
[A1] Camera 01
Save VCA Picture
Face Defec
Vehicle Del
Line Cross...
Intrusion De...
Region Entr...
Region Exit...
Letterong D
People Gath
Fast Movin...
Parking Del
Unattended
Object Rum
Audio Exce...
Defocus De
Sudden Sc...
PIR Alarm
Enable
Settings
Set
Rule
1
Rule Settings
Draw Line
Draw Quadril...
Clear All
NO VIDEO
Apply
Figure 178, Set Vehicle Detection
6. Click Set to configure the trigger channel, arming schedule, linkage action, and ≤TZ linking.

NOTE
≤TZ linking is applicable only to other list, not to whitelist and blacklist.
7. Click Rule Settings to enter the rule settings interface. Configure the lane, upload picture, and overlay content settings. Up to four lanes are selectable.

text_image
Rule Settings
Basic Picture Overlay Content
No. 1
Scene No. Vehicle Detection Scene 1
Scene Name
Lane Number 1
Apply OK Cancel
Figure 179, Rule Settings
8. Click Save to save the settings.

NOTE
Refer to the network camera's user manual for detailed vehicle detection instructions.
9.3 Line Crossing Detection
Purpose
This function detects people, vehicles, and objects crossing a set virtual line. The line crossing direction can be set as bidirectional, from left to right, or from right to left. You can set the duration for the alarm response actions such as full screen monitoring, audible warning, etc.
1. Go to Menu > Camera > VCA.
2. Select the camera to configure the VCA.
3. Check the Save V<4 Picture checkbox to save the captured VCA detection pictures.
4. Set the VCA detection type to Line B, A->B or B->A.
A<->B: Only the arrow on the B side shows. When an object goes across the configured line, both directions can be detected and alarms are triggered.
A->B: Only an object crosses the configured line from the A side to the B side can be detected.
B->A: Only an object crossing the configured line from the B side to the A side can be detected.
2) Drag the slider to set the detection sensitivity.
Sensitivity: Range [1-100%. =he higher the value, the more easily the detection alarm will be triggered.
3) Click OK to save the rule settings and return to the line crossing detection settings interface.

text_image
Rule Settings
No. 1
Direction A<->B
Sensitivity 50
Figure 180, Set Line Crossing Detection Rules
8. Click d set two points in the preview window to draw a virtual line.
9. >se to clear the existing virtual line and re-draw it.

NOTE
>p to four rules can be configured.

text_image
Cameras Setup
Camera
A1] Camera 01
Save VCA Picture
Face Defect...
Vehicle Det...
Line Crash...
Intrusion De...
Region Entr...
Region Exit...
Lettering D...
People Cash...
Fast Movin...
Parking Det...
Unattended
Object Ram
Audio Excel...
Defocus De...
Sudden Sc...
PIR Alarm
Enable
Settings
Set
Rule
1
Rule Settings
NO VIDEO
Draw Live
Draw Quadrail...
Clear All
Apply
Figure 181, Draw Line for Line Crossing Detection
10. Click Apply to activate the settings.

NOTE
Sudden scene change detection and line crossing detection cannot be enabled on the same channel.
9.4 Intrusion Detection
Purpose
The intrusion detection function detects people, vehicles, or other objects that enter and loiter in a pre-defined virtual region. Certain actions can be taken when the alarm is triggered.
1. Go to Menu > Camera > VCA.
2. Select the camera to configure the VCA.
3. Check the Save V<4 Picture checkbox to save the captured VCA detection pictures.
4. Set the VCA detection type to Intrusion 'etection.
5. Check the Enable checkbox to enable this function.
6. Click Set to configure the trigger channel, arming schedule, linkage action, and ≤TZ linking for the intrusion detection alarm.
7. Click Rule Settings to set the intrusion detection rules. Set the following parameters.
- Threshold/ Range [1s-10s], the threshold for the time the object loiters in the region. When the duration of the object in the defined detection area is longer than the set time, the alarm will be triggered.
- Sensitivity/ R range [1-100]. The value of the sensitivity defines the size of the object that will trigger the alarm. The higher the value, the more easily the detection alarm is triggered.
- Percentage/ Range [1-100]. ≤percentage defines the ratio of the in-region part of the object that will trigger the alarm. For example, if the percentage is set to 50%, when the object enters the region and occupies half of the whole region, the alarm is triggered.

text_image
Rule Settings
No. 1
Time Threshold (s) 5
Sensitivity 50
Percentage 0
Figure 182, Set Intrusion Crossing Detection Rules
8. Click OK to save the rule settings and back to the line crossing detection settings interface.
9. Click ☐ I draw a quadrilateral in the preview window by specifying four vertexes of the detection region, and right click to complete drawing. Only one region can be configured. Use ☐ clear the existing virtual line and re-draw it.

NOTE
Up to four rules can be configured.

text_image
Cameras Setup
Camera
A1] Camera 01
Save VCA Picture
Face Dates...
Vehicle Dat...
Line Cross...
Intrusion De...
Region Enter...
Region Exit...
Lettering D...
People Gain...
Fast Movin...
Parking Dat...
Unattended
Object Rem...
Audio Exce...
Defocus De...
Sudden Sc...
Pilt Nom...
Enable
Settings
Set
Rule
1
Rule Settings
Draw Line
Draw Quadni...
Clear All
NO VIDEO
Apply
Figure 183, Draw Area for Intrusion Detection
10. Click 4pply to save the settings.

NOTE
Sudden scene change detection and intrusion detection cannot be enabled at the same channel.
9.5 Region Entrance Detection
Purpose
The region entrance detection function detects people, vehicles, or other objects that enter a pre-defined virtual region, and certain actions can be taken when the alarm is triggered.
1. Go to Menu > Camera > VCA.
2. Select the camera to configure the VCA.
3. Check the Save V<4 Picture checkbox to save the captured VCA detection pictures.
4. Set the VCA detection type to Region Entrance 'etection.
5. Check the Enable checkbox to enable this function.
6. Click Set to configure the trigger channel, arming schedule, linkage action, and ≤TZ linking for the region entrance detection alarm.
7. Click Rule Settings to set the sensitivity of the region entrance detection.
Sensitivity/ Range [0-100%. =he higher the value, the more easily the detection alarm will be triggered.
8. Click 📋 and draw a quadrilateral in the preview window by specifying four vertexes of the detection region, and right click to complete drawing. Only one region can be configured. >se 📋 clear the existing virtual line and re-draw it.

text_image
Cameras Setup
Camera [A1] Camera 01 Save VCA Picture
Face Detec... Vehicle Det... Line Cross... Intrusion De... Region Enth... Region End... Lettering D... People Gath...
Fast Moin... Parking Det... Unattended... Object Rem... Audio Exce... Defocus De... Sudden Sc... PIR Alarm
Enable
Settings Set
Rule 1 Rule Settings
NO VIDEO
Draw Line
Draw Quadrit ...
Clear All
Apply
Figure 184, Set Region Entrance Detection

NOTE
>p to four rules can be configured.
9. Click 4pply to save the settings.
9.6 Region Exiting Detection
Purpose
=he region exiting detection function detects people, vehicles, or other objects that exit from a pre-defined virtual region, and certain actions can be taken when the alarm is triggered.

NOTE
>p to four rules can be configured.
9.7 Loitering Detection
Purpose
=he loitering detection function detects people, vehicles, or other objects that loiter in a pre-defined virtual region for a period of time, and a series of actions can be taken when the alarm is triggered.
- Threshold [1s-10s% in the Rule Settings defines the time the object can loiter in the region. If you set the value to 5, an alarm is triggered after the object loiters in the region for 5s; and if you set the value to 0, an alarm is triggered immediately if the object enters the region.
• >p to four rules can be configured.
9.8 ≤eople Gathering Detection
Purpose
=he people gathering detection alarm is triggered when people gather around in a pre-defined virtual region, and a series of actions can be taken when the alarm is triggered.
=he Percentage in the Rule Settings defines the gathering density of the people in the region. If the percentage is small, the alarm will be triggered when a small number of people gathered in the defined detection region.
>p to four rules can be configured.
9.9 Fast +oving Detection
Purpose
=he fast moving detection alarm is triggered when people, vehicles, or other objects move fast in a pre-defined virtual region, and a series of actions can be taken when the alarm is triggered.
- Sensitivity in the Rule Settings defines the moving speed of the object that can trigger the alarm. =he higher the value, the more easily a moving object will trigger the alarm.
• >p to four rules can be configured.
9.10 ≤arking Detection
Purpose
=he parking detection function detects illegal parking in places such as a highway, one-way street, etc., and a series of actions can be taken when the alarm is triggered.
- Threshold [5s-20s% in the Rule Settings defines the time of the vehicle parking in the region. If you set the value as 10, an alarm is triggered after the vehicle stays in the region for 10s.
• >p to four rules can be configured.
9.11 Unattended Baggage Detection
Purpose
The unattended baggage detection function detects objects left in a pre-defined region such as baggage, purse, dangerous materials, etc., and a series of actions can be taken when the alarm is triggered.
- Threshold [5s-20s] in the Rule Settings defines the time of the objects left in the region. If you set the value to 10, an alarm is triggered after the object is left and stays in the region for 10s.
- Sensitivity defines the similarity degree of the background image. When the sensitivity is high, a very small object left in the region can trigger the alarm.
• Up to four rules can be configured.
9.12 Object Removal Detection
Purpose
The object removal detection function detects objects removed from a pre-defined region such as exhibits on display, and a series of actions can be taken when the alarm is triggered.
- Threshold [5s-20s] in the Rule Settings defines the time of the objects removed from the region. If you set the value to 10, an alarm is triggered after the object disappears from the region for 10s.
- Sensitivity defines the similar degree of the background image. If the sensitivity is high, a very small object taken from the region can trigger the alarm.
• Up to four rules can be configured.
9.13 Audio Exception Detection
Purpose
The audio exception detection function detects abnormal sounds in the surveillance scene such as sudden increase/decrease in sound intensity, and specific actions can be taken when the alarm is triggered.

NOTE
Audio exception detection is supported by all analog channels.
1. Go to Menu > Camera > VCA.
2. Select the camera to configure the VCA.
3. Check the Save V<4 Picture checkbox to save the captured VCA detection pictures.
4. Set the VCA detection type to 4udio Exception 'etection.
5. Click Set to configure the trigger channel, arming schedule, linkage action, and ≤=< linking for the audio exception alarm.
6. Click Rule Settings to set the audio exception rules.

text_image
Rule Settings
No. 1
Audio Loss Exception
Sudden Increase of Sound Intensity...
Sensitivity 50
Sound Intensity Threshold 50
Sudden Decrease of Sound Intensit...
Sensitivity 50
OK Cancel
Figure 185, Set Audio Exception Detection Rules
7. Check the 4udio Loss Exception checkbox to enable the audio loss detection function.
8. Check the Sudden Increase of Sound Intensity 'etection' checkbox to detect a steep sound rise in the surveillance scene. Set the detection sensitivity and threshold for a steep sound rise.
- Sensitivity: Range [1-100%, the smaller the value, the more severe the change to trigger the detection.
• Sound Intensity Threshold: Range [1-100%, filters the sound in the environment, the louder the environment sound, the higher the value should be. Adjust it according to the environment.
9. Check the Sudden 'ecrease of Sound Intensity 'etection checkbox to detect a steep sound drop in the surveillance scene. Set the detection sensitivity [1-100% for a steep sound drop.
10. Click 4pply to activate the settings.
9.14 Defocus Detection
Purpose
Image blur caused by lens defocus can be detected, and specific actions can be taken when the alarm is triggered.
\- Sensitivity in the Rule Settings ranges from 1 to 100. =he higher the value, the more easily the defocused image will trigger the alarm.
9.15 Sudden Scene Change
Purpose
The scene change detection function detects change of the surveillance environment affected by external factors such as intentional rotation of the camera, and specific actions can be taken when the alarm is triggered.
- Sensitivity in the Rule Settings ranges from 1 to 100, and the higher the value, the more easily the change of scene will trigger the alarm.
- For analog cameras, line crossing detection and intrusion detection conflict with other VCA detections such as sudden scene change detection, face detection, and vehicle detection. You can enable only one function. If you have enabled line crossing detection or intrusion detection, when you enable sudden scene change detection and apply the settings, the following attention box pops up to remind you there are not enough resources and asks you to disable the enabled VCA type(s) of the selected channel(s).

text_image
Attention
No enough resource. Please disable the following
function(s) in "VCA" settings menu:
1.A1 Line Crossing Detection or Intrusion
Detection.
OK
Figure 186, Disable Other VCA Type(s)
9.16 ≤IR Alarm
Purpose
A ≤IR (≤assive Infrared) alarm is triggered when an intruder moves within the detector's field of view. The heat energy dissipated by a person, or any other warm blooded creatures such as dogs, cats, etc., can be detected.
1. Go to Menu > Camera > VCA.
2. Select the camera to configure the VCA.
3. Check the Save V<4 Picture checkbox to save the captured VCA detection pictures.
4. Select the VCA detection type to PIR 4larm.
5. Click Set to configure the trigger channel, arming schedule, linkage action and ≤TZ linking for the ≤IR alarm.
6. Click Rule Settings to set the rules.
7. Click 4 pply to activate the settings.
10 VCA Search
With the configured VCA detection, the device supports VCA search for the behavior search, face search, plate search, people counting, and heat map results of the I ≤ cameras.
10.1 Behavior Search
Purpose
The behavior analysis detects a series of suspicious behavior based on VCA detection, and specific linkage methods will be enabled if the alarm is triggered.
1. Go to Menu > VCA Search > Behavior Search.
2. Select the camera(s) for the behavior search.
3. Specify the start time and end time for searching the matched pictures.

text_image
VCA Search
Include Cameras
Behavior Search
Face Search
Plate Search
People Counting
Heat Map
IP Camera D1 D2
Start/End Time
Start Time 06-14-2017 00:00:00
End Time 06-14-2017 23:59:59
Type All
Search
Figure 187, Behavior Search Interface
4. Select the VCA detection type from the drop-down list, including the line crossing detection, intrusion detection, unattended baggage detection, object removal detection, region entrance detection, region exiting detection, parking detection, loitering detection, people gathering detection, and fast moving detection.
5. Click Search to start searching. The search results of pictures are displayed in list or in chart.

text_image
Behavior Search
Chart List
Cam... Start Time Behavior Type Play
D3 12-12-2014 12:32:36 Region Exiting Detection
D3 12-12-2014 15:10:44 Region Exiting Detection
D3 12-12-2014 16:11:21 Intrusion Detection
D3 12-12-2014 16:55:30 Region Exiting Detection
D3 12-12-2014 16:59:15 Region Exiting Detection
D3 12-12-2014 17:05:05 Region Exiting Detection
D3 12-12-2014 17:09:54 Region Exiting Detection
D3 12-12-2014 17:14:40 Region Exiting Detection
Total: 8 P: 1/1
Picture Record Export All Export Back
Figure 188, Behavior Search Results
6. ≤lay the behavior analysis picture related video file.
7. You can double-click a picture from the list to play its related video file in the view window on the top right, or select a picture item and click 📐 to play it.
8. You can click stop playing, or click / the previous/next file.
9. If you want to export the captured pictures to a local storage device, connect the storage device to the device and click Export 4ll to enter the Export interface.
10. Click Export to export all pictures to the storage device.
10.2 ≤late Search
Purpose
You can search and view the matched captured vehicle plate picture and related information according to the plate searching conditions including the start time/end time, country and plate No.
1. Go to Menu > VCA Search > ≤late Search.
2. Select the camera(s) for the plate search.
3. Specify the start time and end time for searching the matched plate pictures.

text_image
VCA Search
Include Cameras
Behavior Search
Face Search
Plate Search
People Counting NEW
Heat Map NEW
IP Camera
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8
D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16
D17 D18
Start/End Time
Start Time 09-23-2017 00:00:00
End Time 09-23-2017 23:59:59
Country All
Plate No.
Search
Figure 189, ≤late Search
4. Select a country from the drop-down list for searching the vehicle plate location.
5. Input the plate No. in the field for search.
6. Click Search to start searching. The search results of detected vehicle plate pictures are displayed in list or in chart.
10.3 ≤eople Counting

NOTE
Requires camera(s) that support the counting feature.
Purpose
≤people Counting is used to calculate the number of people entered or left a certain configured area and form in daily/weekly/monthly/annual reports for analysis.
1. Go to Menu > VCA Search > ≤eople Counting.
2. Select the camera for the people counting.
3. Select the report type to Daily Report, Weekly Report, Monthly Report, or Annual Report.
4. Set the statistics time.
5. Click
text_image
VCA Search
Camera [A1] Camera 01
Repeat Type Daily Report Counting
Statistics Time 09-23-2017 Export
Number of People People Entered People Exted
Hour
Figure 190, ≤eople Counting Interface
6. You can click Export to export the statistics report in Microsoft Excel format.
10.4 Heat Map
Purpose
Heat map is a graphical representation of data represented by colors. The heat map function is usually used to analyze the visit times and dwell time of customers in a configured area.
1. Go to Menu > VCA Search > Heat Map.
2. Select the camera for the heat map processing.
3. Select the report type to Daily Report, Weekly Report, Monthly Report, or Annual Report.
4. Set the statistics time.

text_image
VCA Search
Camera [A1] Camera 01
Report Type Daily Report
Statistics Time 09-23-2017
Counting
Export
Behavior Search
Face Search
Plate Search
People Counting NEW
Heat Map NEW >
NO VIDEO
Figure 191, Heat Map Interface
5. Click NOTE
As shown in Figure 10-8, red color block (255, 0, 0) indicates the most welcome area, and blue color block (0, 0, 255) indicates the less-popular area.
6. You can click Export to export the statistics report in Microsoft Excel format.
11 Network Settings
11.1 Configuring General Settings
Purpose
Network settings must be properly configured before operating the DVR over a network. On the "eneral Settings" interface, you can configure working Mode (DS-73xxHUI-K4 and DS-90xxHUI-K8 only), NIC Type, I≤v4 Address, I≤v4 Gateway, MTU, DNS Server, and Main NIC.
1. Go to Menu > System Configuration > Network > General.

text_image
System Configuration
General Platform Access DONS Email NAT More Settings
NIC Type 10M/100M/1000M Self-ada
Enable DHCP
IPv4 Address 5 IPv6 Address 1 fe80::bead:26ff.feab:3386/64
IPv4 Subnet Mask IPv6 Address 2
IPv4 Default Gateway IPv6 Default Gateway
MTU(Bytes) 1500 MAC Address bc:ad:26:ab:33:86
DNS Server
Enable DNS DHCP
Preferred DNS Server
Alternate DNS Server
Apply
Figure 192, ×network Settings Interface (DS-73xxHQI-K4)

text_image
System Configuration
General DDNS Email SNMP NAT More Settings
Working Mode Multi-address
Select NIC LAN1 Default Route LAN1
NIC Type 10M/100M/1000M So
Enable DHCP
IPv4 Address 192.168.0 .64 IPv6 Address 1
IPv4 Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0 IPv6 Address 2
IPv4 Default Gateway IPv6 Default Gateway
MTU(Bytes) 0 MAC Address 00.00.00.00.00.00
DNS Server
Preferred DNS Server
Alternate DNS Server
Internal NIC IPv4 Addr...
Refresh Apply
Figure 193, ×network Settings Interface (DS-73xxHQI-K4)
2. (DS-73xxH>I-K4 and DS-90xxH>I-K8 only) Select one ×IC card as default route, and the system will connect with the extranet and the data will be forwarded through the default route.
Working Mode – =here are two 10+/100+/1000+ ×IC cards provided, and they allow the device to work in +ulti-address and ×et-fault =olerance.
- Multi-address Mode: The parameters of the two NIC cards can be configured independently. You can select LAN1 or LAN2 in the NIC type field for parameter settings.
- Net-fault Tolerance Mode: The two NIC cards use the same I≤ address, and you can select the Main NIC to LAN1 or LAN2. By this way, in case of one NIC card failure, the device will automatically enable the other standby NIC card so as to ensure the normal running of the whole system.

NOTE
The valid value of MTU is from 500 to 1500.
If the DHC≤ server is available, you can check the checkbox of Enable DH11.2 Configuring Advanced Settings
NOTE
The alarm signal will be transmitted automatically at detection mode when remote alarm host is configured.- Send E-Mail
Send an e-mail with alarm information to a user or users when an alarm is detected.- Trigger 4larm Output
Trigger an alarm output when an alarm is triggered. 1. Go to Menu > Recording Configuration > Trigger. 2. Select an alarm output and set the alarm name and dwell time. text_image
Recording Configuration Alarm Input Alarm Output Alarm Output No Local=1 Alarm Name Dwell Time 0s Settings Set Alarm Output Status Alarm Output No Alarm Name Dwell Time Local=1 0s Holiday Copy ApplyNOTE
If Manually Clear is selected in the Dwell Time drop-down list, clear it by going to Menu > Manual > Alarm. 3. Click Set to set the alarm output arming schedule. 4. Choose a day of the week, with up to eight time periods each day. NOTE
=ime periods cannot repeat or overlap. text_image
Settings Trigger Channel Arming Schedule Linkage Action PTZ Linking Week Mon 1 00:00-24:00 2 00:00-00:00 3 00:00-00:00 4 00:00-00:00 5 00:00-00:00 6 00:00-00:00 7 00:00-00:00 8 00:00-00:00 Copy Apply OK Cancel8 ≤OS Configuration
8.1 Configuring ≤OS Settings
1. Go to Menu > System Configuration > ≤OS > ≤OS Settings. 2. Select ≤OS from the drop-down list. Up to eight ≤OS units are selectable. 3. Check the checkbox to enable the ≤OS function. text_image
System Configuration POS Settings Overlay Channel Select POS Enable Settings Set POS 1 Privacy Settings Set POS Protocol Universal Protocol Advance Connection Type TCP Connection Set Character Encoding Latin-1(iso-8659-1) Overlay Mode Page Font Size Small Overlay Time (s) 5 Delay Time(s) 5 POS Overlay In Live View Font Color Copy Applytext_image
POS Privacy Information Filtering Privacy Information1 Privacy Information2 Privacy Information3 OK Cancel• Universal Protocol
Click Advanced to expand more settings when selecting the universal protocol. You can set the start line tag, line break tag, and end line tag for the ≤OS overlay characters, and the case-sensitive property of the characters. text_image
System Configuration POS Settings Overlay Channel Select POS Enable Settings Set POS 1 Privacy Settings Set POS Protocol Universal Protocol General Connection Type TCP Connection Set Start Line Tag Hex Line Break Tag 0D0A Hex End Line Tag Hex Case-sensitive No Tag Character Encoding Latin-1(so-8659-1) Overlay Mode Page Font Size Small Overlay Time (s) 3 Delay Time(s) 5 POS Overlay in Live View Font Color Copy Apply- NUCLEUS
If you select NUCLEUS protocol, reboot the device to have the new settings take effect. 1) Click Set to enter the NUCLEUS Settings interface. 2) Edit the Employee, Shift, and Terminal information. No more than 32 characters can be input. 3) Click OK to save the settings. NOTE
If you select NUCLEUS protocol, the connection type defaults to be RS-232, and all the other ≤OS protocol will change to be NUCLEUS. Set Usage to be Transparent Channel for RS-232 settings in Menu > Configuration > RS-232 first. 1. Set the Connection Type to TC≤, UD≤, Multicast, RS-232, USB->RS-232, or Sniff, and click Set to configure the parameters for each connection type. \- TCP Connection when using TC≤ connection, the port must be set from 0 to 65535, and the port for each ≤OS machine must be unique. Input the Allowed Remote I≤ Address for connecting the DVR and the ≤OS machine via TC≤.| TCP Connection Settings | |
| Port | 10010 |
| Allowed Remote IP Address | 192.0 0 64 |
- UDP Connection
When using UD≤ connection, the port must be set from 0 to 65535, and the port for each ≤OS machine must be unique. Input the Allowed Remote I≤ Address for connecting the DVR and the ≤OS machine via UD≤.| UDP Connection Settings | |
| Port | 10100 |
| Allowed Remote IP Address | 192.0 .0 .64 |
• USB -> RS-232 Connection
Configure the port parameters of USB-to-RS-232 convertor, including the serial number of port, baud rate, data bit, stop bit, parity, and flow ctrl. NOTE
when using USB -> RS-232 convertor mode, the port of USB-to-RS-232 convertor and the ≤OS must correspond to each other, e.g., ≤OS1 must be connected to port1 of the convertor. text_image
USB->RG-232 Settings Serial Number 1 Baud Rate 115200 Data Bit 8 Stop Bit 1 Parity None Flow Ctrl None OK Cancel• RS-232 Connection
Connect the DVR and the ≤OS machine via RS-232. The RS-232 settings can be configured in Menu > Configuration > RS-232. The Usage must be set to Transparent Channel. text_image
RS-232 Settings Baud Rate 115200 Data Bit 8 Stop Bit 1 Parity None Flow Ctrl None Usage Transparent Channel- Multicast
when connecting the DVR and the ≤OS machine via +ulticast protocol, set the multicast address and port.

text_image
Multicast Settings
Address 224.0 .0 .1
Port 10400
OK Cancel
Figure 168, +ulticast Settings
- Sniff
Connect the DVR and the ≤ OS machine via Sniff. Configure the source address and destination address settings.

text_image
Sniff Settings
Enable Source Port Filter
Source Address 192 .168 .1 .1
Source Port 10200
Enable Destination Address Filter
Enable Destination Port Filter
Destination Address 192 .168 .0 .1
Destination Port 10300
OK Cancel
Figure 169, Sniff Settings
2. Set other parameters of characters overlay.
1) Select the character encoding format from the drop-down list.
2) Select the overlay mode of the characters to display in scrolling or page mode.
3) Set the font size to small, medium, or large.
4) Set the overlay time of the characters. The value ranges from 5 to 3600 sec.
5) Set the delay time of the characters. The value ranges from 5 to 3600 sec.
6) (Optional) Check the checkbox to enable the POS Overlay in Live View.
7) Select the font color for the characters.

NOTE
You can adjust the size and position of the textbox on the ≤OS settings interface live view screen by dragging the frame.
3. Click 4pply to activate the settings.
4. (Optional) Click
text_image
Copy to
All POS1 POS2 POS3
POS4 POS5 POS6
POS7 POS8
OK Cancel
Figure 170, Copy ≤OS Settings
8.2 Configuring Overlay Channel
Purpose
You can assign the ≤ OS machine to the corresponding channel on which you want to overlay.
1. Go to Menu > Configuration > ≤OS > Overlay Channel.
2. Click to select an analog or I ≤ camera from the camera list on the right, and then click a ≤ OS item from the ≤ OS list you want to overlay on the selected camera.
3. Click or to go to the previous or next page of cameras.

text_image
System Configuration
POS Settings Overlay channel
General
Network
HDD
Live View
Exceptions
User
RS-232
POS
POS
pos1
pos2
pos3
pos4
pos5
pos6
pos7
pos8
A1
pos1 ×
A2
pos2 ×
A3
pos3 ×
A4
pos4 ×
A5
pos5 ×
A6
pos6 ×
A7
pos7 ×
A8
pos8 ×
A9
X ×
A10
X ×
A11
X ×
A12
X ×
A13
X =
A14
X =
A15
X =
A16
X =
Apply
Figure 171, Overlay Channel Settings
4. You can also click to overlay all ≤OS items to the first eight channels in order. Click to clear all ≤OS overlay settings.
5. Click 4pply to save the settings.
8.3 Configuring ≤OS Alarm
Purpose
Set the ≤OS alarm parameters to trigger certain channels to start recording, or trigger full screen monitoring, audio warning, notifying the surveillance center, sending e-mail, and so on.
1. Go to Menu > Configuration > ≤OS > ≤OS Settings.
2. Follow the steps in Chapter 10.1 and 10.2 to configure the ≤OS settings.
3. Click Set to enter the alarm settings interface.

text_image
Settings
Trigger Channel Arming Schedule Handling PTZ Linking
Analog
A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6
A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12
A13 A14 A15 A16
Apply OK Cancel
Figure 172, Set Trigger Cameras of ≤OS
4. Click Trigger NOTE
=ime periods cannot repeat or overlap.

text_image
Settings
Trigger Channel Aiming Schedule Handling PTZ Linking
Week Mon
1 00:00-24:00
2 00:00-00:00
3 00:00-00:00
4 00:00-00:00
5 00:00-00:00
6 00:00-00:00
7 00:00-00:00
8 00:00-00:00
Copy Apply OK Cancel
Figure 173, Set Arming Schedule
6. Click the Handling tab to set up alarm response actions of ≤OS alarm.
7. Repeat the above steps to set up arming schedule of other days of the week.
8. Click OK to complete the ≤OS settings of the channel.
9. Select PTZ Linking tab and set ≤=< linkage of the ≤OS alarm.
10. Set ≤=< linking parameters and click OK to complete the settings of the alarm input.

NOTE
Ensure the ≤TZ or speed dome supports ≤TZ linkage.

text_image
Settings
Trigger Channel Arming Schedule Handling PTZ Linking
PTZ Linking
[A1] Camera 01
Call Preset
Preset
1
Call Patrol
Patrol
1
Call Pattern
Pattern
1
Apply OK Cancel
Figure 174, Set ≤TZ Linking
11. Click OK to save the settings.
9 VCA Alarm
ATTENTION!
Some of the features described below require special cameras. Not all features work with all cameras. Please contact your Hikvision Sales Expert for more information.
Purpose
The DVR can receive the VCA alarm (line crossing detection, intrusion detection, sudden scene change detection, and audio exception detection) sent by analog camera, and the VCA detection must be enabled and configured on the camera settings interface first. All other VCA detection features must be supported by the connected I≤ camera.

NOTE
HUI series supports line crossing detection and intrusion detection of all channels, and 2-ch sudden scene change detection. Channels with audio support audio exception detection.
For the analog channels, the line crossing detection and intrusion detection conflict with other VCA detection such as sudden scene change detection, face detection and vehicle detection. You can only enable one function.
9.1 Face Detection
Purpose
The face detection function detects faces appearing in the surveillance scene, and certain actions can be taken when the alarm is triggered.
1. Go to Menu > Cameras Setup > VCA.
2. Select the camera to configure the VCA.
3. You can check the Save V<4 Picture checkbox to save the captured VCA detection pictures.

text_image
Cameras Setup
Camera
A1] Camera 01
Save VCA Picture
Face Defec... Vehicle Def... Line Crevel... Intrusion De... Region Enter... Region Exit... Lefering D... People Cam...
Fast Movin... Parking Def... Unattached Object Ram ... Audio Exce... Defocus De... Sudden Sc... PIR Alarm
Enable
Settings
Set
Rule
1
Rule Settings
Draw Live
Draw Quadrit...
Clear All
NO VIDEO
Apply
Figure 175, Cameras Setup > VCA window
4. Set the VCA detection type to "ace 'etection."
5. Click Set to enter the face detection settings interface. Configure the trigger channel, arming schedule, linkage action, and ≤TZ linking for the face detection alarm.

text_image
Settings
Trigger Channel Arming Schedule Linkage Action PTZ Linking
PTZ Linking [A1] Camera 01
Call Preset ●
Preset 1
Call Patrol ●
Patrol 1
Call Pattern ●
Pattern 1
Apply OK Cancel
Figure 176, ≤TZ Linking
6. Click Rule Settings to set the face detection rules. You can drag the slider to set the detection sensitivity.
Sensitivity/ Range [1-5]. The higher the value, the more easily the face can be detected.

text_image
Rule Settings
No 1
Sensitivity 3
Figure 177, Set Face Detection Sensitivity
7. Click 4pply to activate the settings.
9.2 Vehicle Detection
Purpose
Vehicle Detection is available for road traffic monitoring. In Vehicle Detection, a passing vehicle can be detected and the picture of its license plate can be captured. You can send an alarm signal to notify the surveillance center and upload the captured picture to an FT≤ server.
1. Go to Menu > Camera > VCA.
2. Select the camera to configure the VCA.
3. You can check the Save V<4 Picture checkbox to save the captured VCA detection pictures.
4. Select the VCA detection type to Vehicle 'etection.
5. Check the Enable checkbox to enable this function.

text_image
Cameras Setup
Camera
[A1] Camera 01
Save VCA Picture
Face Defec
Vehicle Del
Line Cross...
Intrusion De...
Region Entr...
Region Exit...
Letterong D
People Gath
Fast Movin...
Parking Del
Unattended
Object Rum
Audio Exce...
Defocus De
Sudden Sc...
PIR Alarm
Enable
Settings
Set
Rule
1
Rule Settings
Draw Line
Draw Quadril...
Clear All
NO VIDEO
Apply
Figure 178, Set Vehicle Detection
6. Click Set to configure the trigger channel, arming schedule, linkage action, and ≤TZ linking.

NOTE
≤TZ linking is applicable only to other list, not to whitelist and blacklist.
7. Click Rule Settings to enter the rule settings interface. Configure the lane, upload picture, and overlay content settings. Up to four lanes are selectable.

text_image
Rule Settings
Basic Picture Overlay Content
No. 1
Scene No. Vehicle Detection Scene 1
Scene Name
Lane Number 1
Apply OK Cancel
Figure 179, Rule Settings
8. Click Save to save the settings.

NOTE
Refer to the network camera's user manual for detailed vehicle detection instructions.
9.3 Line Crossing Detection
Purpose
This function detects people, vehicles, and objects crossing a set virtual line. The line crossing direction can be set as bidirectional, from left to right, or from right to left. You can set the duration for the alarm response actions such as full screen monitoring, audible warning, etc.
1. Go to Menu > Camera > VCA.
2. Select the camera to configure the VCA.
3. Check the Save V<4 Picture checkbox to save the captured VCA detection pictures.
4. Set the VCA detection type to Line B, A->B or B->A.
A<->B: Only the arrow on the B side shows. When an object goes across the configured line, both directions can be detected and alarms are triggered.
A->B: Only an object crosses the configured line from the A side to the B side can be detected.
B->A: Only an object crossing the configured line from the B side to the A side can be detected.
2) Drag the slider to set the detection sensitivity.
Sensitivity: Range [1-100%. =he higher the value, the more easily the detection alarm will be triggered.
3) Click OK to save the rule settings and return to the line crossing detection settings interface.

text_image
Rule Settings
No. 1
Direction A<->B
Sensitivity 50
Figure 180, Set Line Crossing Detection Rules
8. Click d set two points in the preview window to draw a virtual line.
9. >se to clear the existing virtual line and re-draw it.

NOTE
>p to four rules can be configured.

text_image
Cameras Setup
Camera
A1] Camera 01
Save VCA Picture
Face Defect...
Vehicle Det...
Line Crash...
Intrusion De...
Region Entr...
Region Exit...
Lettering D...
People Cash...
Fast Movin...
Parking Det...
Unattended
Object Ram
Audio Excel...
Defocus De...
Sudden Sc...
PIR Alarm
Enable
Settings
Set
Rule
1
Rule Settings
NO VIDEO
Draw Live
Draw Quadrail...
Clear All
Apply
Figure 181, Draw Line for Line Crossing Detection
10. Click Apply to activate the settings.

NOTE
Sudden scene change detection and line crossing detection cannot be enabled on the same channel.
9.4 Intrusion Detection
Purpose
The intrusion detection function detects people, vehicles, or other objects that enter and loiter in a pre-defined virtual region. Certain actions can be taken when the alarm is triggered.
1. Go to Menu > Camera > VCA.
2. Select the camera to configure the VCA.
3. Check the Save V<4 Picture checkbox to save the captured VCA detection pictures.
4. Set the VCA detection type to Intrusion 'etection.
5. Check the Enable checkbox to enable this function.
6. Click Set to configure the trigger channel, arming schedule, linkage action, and ≤TZ linking for the intrusion detection alarm.
7. Click Rule Settings to set the intrusion detection rules. Set the following parameters.
- Threshold/ Range [1s-10s], the threshold for the time the object loiters in the region. When the duration of the object in the defined detection area is longer than the set time, the alarm will be triggered.
- Sensitivity/ R range [1-100]. The value of the sensitivity defines the size of the object that will trigger the alarm. The higher the value, the more easily the detection alarm is triggered.
- Percentage/ Range [1-100]. ≤percentage defines the ratio of the in-region part of the object that will trigger the alarm. For example, if the percentage is set to 50%, when the object enters the region and occupies half of the whole region, the alarm is triggered.

text_image
Rule Settings
No. 1
Time Threshold (s) 5
Sensitivity 50
Percentage 0
Figure 182, Set Intrusion Crossing Detection Rules
8. Click OK to save the rule settings and back to the line crossing detection settings interface.
9. Click ☐ I draw a quadrilateral in the preview window by specifying four vertexes of the detection region, and right click to complete drawing. Only one region can be configured. Use ☐ clear the existing virtual line and re-draw it.

NOTE
Up to four rules can be configured.

text_image
Cameras Setup
Camera
A1] Camera 01
Save VCA Picture
Face Dates...
Vehicle Dat...
Line Cross...
Intrusion De...
Region Enter...
Region Exit...
Lettering D...
People Gain...
Fast Movin...
Parking Dat...
Unattended
Object Rem...
Audio Exce...
Defocus De...
Sudden Sc...
Pilt Nom...
Enable
Settings
Set
Rule
1
Rule Settings
Draw Line
Draw Quadni...
Clear All
NO VIDEO
Apply
Figure 183, Draw Area for Intrusion Detection
10. Click 4pply to save the settings.

NOTE
Sudden scene change detection and intrusion detection cannot be enabled at the same channel.
9.5 Region Entrance Detection
Purpose
The region entrance detection function detects people, vehicles, or other objects that enter a pre-defined virtual region, and certain actions can be taken when the alarm is triggered.
1. Go to Menu > Camera > VCA.
2. Select the camera to configure the VCA.
3. Check the Save V<4 Picture checkbox to save the captured VCA detection pictures.
4. Set the VCA detection type to Region Entrance 'etection.
5. Check the Enable checkbox to enable this function.
6. Click Set to configure the trigger channel, arming schedule, linkage action, and ≤TZ linking for the region entrance detection alarm.
7. Click Rule Settings to set the sensitivity of the region entrance detection.
Sensitivity/ Range [0-100%. =he higher the value, the more easily the detection alarm will be triggered.
8. Click 📋 and draw a quadrilateral in the preview window by specifying four vertexes of the detection region, and right click to complete drawing. Only one region can be configured. >se 📋 clear the existing virtual line and re-draw it.

text_image
Cameras Setup
Camera [A1] Camera 01 Save VCA Picture
Face Detec... Vehicle Det... Line Cross... Intrusion De... Region Enth... Region End... Lettering D... People Gath...
Fast Moin... Parking Det... Unattended... Object Rem... Audio Exce... Defocus De... Sudden Sc... PIR Alarm
Enable
Settings Set
Rule 1 Rule Settings
NO VIDEO
Draw Line
Draw Quadrit ...
Clear All
Apply
Figure 184, Set Region Entrance Detection

NOTE
>p to four rules can be configured.
9. Click 4pply to save the settings.
9.6 Region Exiting Detection
Purpose
=he region exiting detection function detects people, vehicles, or other objects that exit from a pre-defined virtual region, and certain actions can be taken when the alarm is triggered.

NOTE
>p to four rules can be configured.
9.7 Loitering Detection
Purpose
=he loitering detection function detects people, vehicles, or other objects that loiter in a pre-defined virtual region for a period of time, and a series of actions can be taken when the alarm is triggered.
- Threshold [1s-10s% in the Rule Settings defines the time the object can loiter in the region. If you set the value to 5, an alarm is triggered after the object loiters in the region for 5s; and if you set the value to 0, an alarm is triggered immediately if the object enters the region.
• >p to four rules can be configured.
9.8 ≤eople Gathering Detection
Purpose
=he people gathering detection alarm is triggered when people gather around in a pre-defined virtual region, and a series of actions can be taken when the alarm is triggered.
=he Percentage in the Rule Settings defines the gathering density of the people in the region. If the percentage is small, the alarm will be triggered when a small number of people gathered in the defined detection region.
>p to four rules can be configured.
9.9 Fast +oving Detection
Purpose
=he fast moving detection alarm is triggered when people, vehicles, or other objects move fast in a pre-defined virtual region, and a series of actions can be taken when the alarm is triggered.
- Sensitivity in the Rule Settings defines the moving speed of the object that can trigger the alarm. =he higher the value, the more easily a moving object will trigger the alarm.
• >p to four rules can be configured.
9.10 ≤arking Detection
Purpose
=he parking detection function detects illegal parking in places such as a highway, one-way street, etc., and a series of actions can be taken when the alarm is triggered.
- Threshold [5s-20s% in the Rule Settings defines the time of the vehicle parking in the region. If you set the value as 10, an alarm is triggered after the vehicle stays in the region for 10s.
• >p to four rules can be configured.
9.11 Unattended Baggage Detection
Purpose
The unattended baggage detection function detects objects left in a pre-defined region such as baggage, purse, dangerous materials, etc., and a series of actions can be taken when the alarm is triggered.
- Threshold [5s-20s] in the Rule Settings defines the time of the objects left in the region. If you set the value to 10, an alarm is triggered after the object is left and stays in the region for 10s.
- Sensitivity defines the similarity degree of the background image. When the sensitivity is high, a very small object left in the region can trigger the alarm.
• Up to four rules can be configured.
9.12 Object Removal Detection
Purpose
The object removal detection function detects objects removed from a pre-defined region such as exhibits on display, and a series of actions can be taken when the alarm is triggered.
- Threshold [5s-20s] in the Rule Settings defines the time of the objects removed from the region. If you set the value to 10, an alarm is triggered after the object disappears from the region for 10s.
- Sensitivity defines the similar degree of the background image. If the sensitivity is high, a very small object taken from the region can trigger the alarm.
• Up to four rules can be configured.
9.13 Audio Exception Detection
Purpose
The audio exception detection function detects abnormal sounds in the surveillance scene such as sudden increase/decrease in sound intensity, and specific actions can be taken when the alarm is triggered.

NOTE
Audio exception detection is supported by all analog channels.
1. Go to Menu > Camera > VCA.
2. Select the camera to configure the VCA.
3. Check the Save V<4 Picture checkbox to save the captured VCA detection pictures.
4. Set the VCA detection type to 4udio Exception 'etection.
5. Click Set to configure the trigger channel, arming schedule, linkage action, and ≤=< linking for the audio exception alarm.
6. Click Rule Settings to set the audio exception rules.

text_image
Rule Settings
No. 1
Audio Loss Exception
Sudden Increase of Sound Intensity...
Sensitivity 50
Sound Intensity Threshold 50
Sudden Decrease of Sound Intensit...
Sensitivity 50
OK Cancel
Figure 185, Set Audio Exception Detection Rules
7. Check the 4udio Loss Exception checkbox to enable the audio loss detection function.
8. Check the Sudden Increase of Sound Intensity 'etection' checkbox to detect a steep sound rise in the surveillance scene. Set the detection sensitivity and threshold for a steep sound rise.
- Sensitivity: Range [1-100%, the smaller the value, the more severe the change to trigger the detection.
• Sound Intensity Threshold: Range [1-100%, filters the sound in the environment, the louder the environment sound, the higher the value should be. Adjust it according to the environment.
9. Check the Sudden 'ecrease of Sound Intensity 'etection checkbox to detect a steep sound drop in the surveillance scene. Set the detection sensitivity [1-100% for a steep sound drop.
10. Click 4pply to activate the settings.
9.14 Defocus Detection
Purpose
Image blur caused by lens defocus can be detected, and specific actions can be taken when the alarm is triggered.
\- Sensitivity in the Rule Settings ranges from 1 to 100. =he higher the value, the more easily the defocused image will trigger the alarm.
9.15 Sudden Scene Change
Purpose
The scene change detection function detects change of the surveillance environment affected by external factors such as intentional rotation of the camera, and specific actions can be taken when the alarm is triggered.
- Sensitivity in the Rule Settings ranges from 1 to 100, and the higher the value, the more easily the change of scene will trigger the alarm.
- For analog cameras, line crossing detection and intrusion detection conflict with other VCA detections such as sudden scene change detection, face detection, and vehicle detection. You can enable only one function. If you have enabled line crossing detection or intrusion detection, when you enable sudden scene change detection and apply the settings, the following attention box pops up to remind you there are not enough resources and asks you to disable the enabled VCA type(s) of the selected channel(s).

text_image
Attention
No enough resource. Please disable the following
function(s) in "VCA" settings menu:
1.A1 Line Crossing Detection or Intrusion
Detection.
OK
Figure 186, Disable Other VCA Type(s)
9.16 ≤IR Alarm
Purpose
A ≤IR (≤assive Infrared) alarm is triggered when an intruder moves within the detector's field of view. The heat energy dissipated by a person, or any other warm blooded creatures such as dogs, cats, etc., can be detected.
1. Go to Menu > Camera > VCA.
2. Select the camera to configure the VCA.
3. Check the Save V<4 Picture checkbox to save the captured VCA detection pictures.
4. Select the VCA detection type to PIR 4larm.
5. Click Set to configure the trigger channel, arming schedule, linkage action and ≤TZ linking for the ≤IR alarm.
6. Click Rule Settings to set the rules.
7. Click 4 pply to activate the settings.
10 VCA Search
With the configured VCA detection, the device supports VCA search for the behavior search, face search, plate search, people counting, and heat map results of the I ≤ cameras.
10.1 Behavior Search
Purpose
The behavior analysis detects a series of suspicious behavior based on VCA detection, and specific linkage methods will be enabled if the alarm is triggered.
1. Go to Menu > VCA Search > Behavior Search.
2. Select the camera(s) for the behavior search.
3. Specify the start time and end time for searching the matched pictures.

text_image
VCA Search
Include Cameras
Behavior Search
Face Search
Plate Search
People Counting
Heat Map
IP Camera D1 D2
Start/End Time
Start Time 06-14-2017 00:00:00
End Time 06-14-2017 23:59:59
Type All
Search
Figure 187, Behavior Search Interface
4. Select the VCA detection type from the drop-down list, including the line crossing detection, intrusion detection, unattended baggage detection, object removal detection, region entrance detection, region exiting detection, parking detection, loitering detection, people gathering detection, and fast moving detection.
5. Click Search to start searching. The search results of pictures are displayed in list or in chart.

text_image
Behavior Search
Chart List
Cam... Start Time Behavior Type Play
D3 12-12-2014 12:32:36 Region Exiting Detection
D3 12-12-2014 15:10:44 Region Exiting Detection
D3 12-12-2014 16:11:21 Intrusion Detection
D3 12-12-2014 16:55:30 Region Exiting Detection
D3 12-12-2014 16:59:15 Region Exiting Detection
D3 12-12-2014 17:05:05 Region Exiting Detection
D3 12-12-2014 17:09:54 Region Exiting Detection
D3 12-12-2014 17:14:40 Region Exiting Detection
Total: 8 P: 1/1
Picture Record Export All Export Back
Figure 188, Behavior Search Results
6. ≤lay the behavior analysis picture related video file.
7. You can double-click a picture from the list to play its related video file in the view window on the top right, or select a picture item and click 📐 to play it.
8. You can click stop playing, or click / the previous/next file.
9. If you want to export the captured pictures to a local storage device, connect the storage device to the device and click Export 4ll to enter the Export interface.
10. Click Export to export all pictures to the storage device.
10.2 ≤late Search
Purpose
You can search and view the matched captured vehicle plate picture and related information according to the plate searching conditions including the start time/end time, country and plate No.
1. Go to Menu > VCA Search > ≤late Search.
2. Select the camera(s) for the plate search.
3. Specify the start time and end time for searching the matched plate pictures.

text_image
VCA Search
Include Cameras
Behavior Search
Face Search
Plate Search
People Counting NEW
Heat Map NEW
IP Camera
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8
D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16
D17 D18
Start/End Time
Start Time 09-23-2017 00:00:00
End Time 09-23-2017 23:59:59
Country All
Plate No.
Search
Figure 189, ≤late Search
4. Select a country from the drop-down list for searching the vehicle plate location.
5. Input the plate No. in the field for search.
6. Click Search to start searching. The search results of detected vehicle plate pictures are displayed in list or in chart.
10.3 ≤eople Counting

NOTE
Requires camera(s) that support the counting feature.
Purpose
≤people Counting is used to calculate the number of people entered or left a certain configured area and form in daily/weekly/monthly/annual reports for analysis.
1. Go to Menu > VCA Search > ≤eople Counting.
2. Select the camera for the people counting.
3. Select the report type to Daily Report, Weekly Report, Monthly Report, or Annual Report.
4. Set the statistics time.
5. Click
text_image
VCA Search
Camera [A1] Camera 01
Repeat Type Daily Report Counting
Statistics Time 09-23-2017 Export
Number of People People Entered People Exted
Hour
Figure 190, ≤eople Counting Interface
6. You can click Export to export the statistics report in Microsoft Excel format.
10.4 Heat Map
Purpose
Heat map is a graphical representation of data represented by colors. The heat map function is usually used to analyze the visit times and dwell time of customers in a configured area.
1. Go to Menu > VCA Search > Heat Map.
2. Select the camera for the heat map processing.
3. Select the report type to Daily Report, Weekly Report, Monthly Report, or Annual Report.
4. Set the statistics time.

text_image
VCA Search
Camera [A1] Camera 01
Report Type Daily Report
Statistics Time 09-23-2017
Counting
Export
Behavior Search
Face Search
Plate Search
People Counting NEW
Heat Map NEW >
NO VIDEO
Figure 191, Heat Map Interface
5. Click NOTE
As shown in Figure 10-8, red color block (255, 0, 0) indicates the most welcome area, and blue color block (0, 0, 255) indicates the less-popular area.
6. You can click Export to export the statistics report in Microsoft Excel format.
text_image
Multicast Settings Address 224.0 .0 .1 Port 10400 OK Cancel- Sniff
Connect the DVR and the ≤ OS machine via Sniff. Configure the source address and destination address settings.

text_image
Sniff Settings
Enable Source Port Filter
Source Address 192 .168 .1 .1
Source Port 10200
Enable Destination Address Filter
Enable Destination Port Filter
Destination Address 192 .168 .0 .1
Destination Port 10300
OK Cancel
Figure 169, Sniff Settings
2. Set other parameters of characters overlay.
1) Select the character encoding format from the drop-down list.
2) Select the overlay mode of the characters to display in scrolling or page mode.
3) Set the font size to small, medium, or large.
4) Set the overlay time of the characters. The value ranges from 5 to 3600 sec.
5) Set the delay time of the characters. The value ranges from 5 to 3600 sec.
6) (Optional) Check the checkbox to enable the POS Overlay in Live View.
7) Select the font color for the characters.

NOTE
You can adjust the size and position of the textbox on the ≤OS settings interface live view screen by dragging the frame.
3. Click 4pply to activate the settings.
4. (Optional) Click
text_image
Copy to
All POS1 POS2 POS3
POS4 POS5 POS6
POS7 POS8
OK Cancel
Figure 170, Copy ≤OS Settings
8.2 Configuring Overlay Channel
Purpose
You can assign the ≤ OS machine to the corresponding channel on which you want to overlay.
1. Go to Menu > Configuration > ≤OS > Overlay Channel.
2. Click to select an analog or I ≤ camera from the camera list on the right, and then click a ≤ OS item from the ≤ OS list you want to overlay on the selected camera.
3. Click or to go to the previous or next page of cameras.

text_image
System Configuration
POS Settings Overlay channel
General
Network
HDD
Live View
Exceptions
User
RS-232
POS
POS
pos1
pos2
pos3
pos4
pos5
pos6
pos7
pos8
A1
pos1 ×
A2
pos2 ×
A3
pos3 ×
A4
pos4 ×
A5
pos5 ×
A6
pos6 ×
A7
pos7 ×
A8
pos8 ×
A9
X ×
A10
X ×
A11
X ×
A12
X ×
A13
X =
A14
X =
A15
X =
A16
X =
Apply
Figure 171, Overlay Channel Settings
4. You can also click to overlay all ≤OS items to the first eight channels in order. Click to clear all ≤OS overlay settings.
5. Click 4pply to save the settings.
8.3 Configuring ≤OS Alarm
Purpose
Set the ≤OS alarm parameters to trigger certain channels to start recording, or trigger full screen monitoring, audio warning, notifying the surveillance center, sending e-mail, and so on.
1. Go to Menu > Configuration > ≤OS > ≤OS Settings.
2. Follow the steps in Chapter 10.1 and 10.2 to configure the ≤OS settings.
3. Click Set to enter the alarm settings interface.

text_image
Settings
Trigger Channel Arming Schedule Handling PTZ Linking
Analog
A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6
A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12
A13 A14 A15 A16
Apply OK Cancel
Figure 172, Set Trigger Cameras of ≤OS
4. Click Trigger NOTE
=ime periods cannot repeat or overlap.

text_image
Sniff Settings Enable Source Port Filter Source Address 192 .168 .1 .1 Source Port 10200 Enable Destination Address Filter Enable Destination Port Filter Destination Address 192 .168 .0 .1 Destination Port 10300 OK Cancel2. Set other parameters of characters overlay.
1) Select the character encoding format from the drop-down list. 2) Select the overlay mode of the characters to display in scrolling or page mode. 3) Set the font size to small, medium, or large. 4) Set the overlay time of the characters. The value ranges from 5 to 3600 sec. 5) Set the delay time of the characters. The value ranges from 5 to 3600 sec. 6) (Optional) Check the checkbox to enable the POS Overlay in Live View. 7) Select the font color for the characters. NOTE
You can adjust the size and position of the textbox on the ≤OS settings interface live view screen by dragging the frame. 3. Click 4pply to activate the settings. 4. (Optional) Click8.2 Configuring Overlay Channel
Purpose
You can assign the ≤ OS machine to the corresponding channel on which you want to overlay. 1. Go to Menu > Configuration > ≤OS > Overlay Channel. 2. Click to select an analog or I ≤ camera from the camera list on the right, and then click a ≤ OS item from the ≤ OS list you want to overlay on the selected camera. 3. Click or to go to the previous or next page of cameras. text_image
System Configuration POS Settings Overlay channel General Network HDD Live View Exceptions User RS-232 POS POS pos1 pos2 pos3 pos4 pos5 pos6 pos7 pos8 A1 pos1 × A2 pos2 × A3 pos3 × A4 pos4 × A5 pos5 × A6 pos6 × A7 pos7 × A8 pos8 × A9 X × A10 X × A11 X × A12 X × A13 X = A14 X = A15 X = A16 X = Apply8.3 Configuring ≤OS Alarm
Purpose
Set the ≤OS alarm parameters to trigger certain channels to start recording, or trigger full screen monitoring, audio warning, notifying the surveillance center, sending e-mail, and so on. 1. Go to Menu > Configuration > ≤OS > ≤OS Settings. 2. Follow the steps in Chapter 10.1 and 10.2 to configure the ≤OS settings. 3. Click Set to enter the alarm settings interface. text_image
Settings Trigger Channel Arming Schedule Handling PTZ Linking Analog A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 Apply OK Canceltext_image
Settings Trigger Channel Aiming Schedule Handling PTZ Linking Week Mon 1 00:00-24:00 2 00:00-00:00 3 00:00-00:00 4 00:00-00:00 5 00:00-00:00 6 00:00-00:00 7 00:00-00:00 8 00:00-00:00 Copy Apply OK CancelNOTE
Ensure the ≤TZ or speed dome supports ≤TZ linkage. text_image
Settings Trigger Channel Arming Schedule Handling PTZ Linking PTZ Linking [A1] Camera 01 Call Preset Preset 1 Call Patrol Patrol 1 Call Pattern Pattern 1 Apply OK Cancel9 VCA Alarm
ATTENTION!
Some of the features described below require special cameras. Not all features work with all cameras. Please contact your Hikvision Sales Expert for more information.Purpose
The DVR can receive the VCA alarm (line crossing detection, intrusion detection, sudden scene change detection, and audio exception detection) sent by analog camera, and the VCA detection must be enabled and configured on the camera settings interface first. All other VCA detection features must be supported by the connected I≤ camera. NOTE
HUI series supports line crossing detection and intrusion detection of all channels, and 2-ch sudden scene change detection. Channels with audio support audio exception detection. For the analog channels, the line crossing detection and intrusion detection conflict with other VCA detection such as sudden scene change detection, face detection and vehicle detection. You can only enable one function.9.1 Face Detection
Purpose
The face detection function detects faces appearing in the surveillance scene, and certain actions can be taken when the alarm is triggered. 1. Go to Menu > Cameras Setup > VCA. 2. Select the camera to configure the VCA. 3. You can check the Save V<4 Picture checkbox to save the captured VCA detection pictures. text_image
Cameras Setup Camera A1] Camera 01 Save VCA Picture Face Defec... Vehicle Def... Line Crevel... Intrusion De... Region Enter... Region Exit... Lefering D... People Cam... Fast Movin... Parking Def... Unattached Object Ram ... Audio Exce... Defocus De... Sudden Sc... PIR Alarm Enable Settings Set Rule 1 Rule Settings Draw Live Draw Quadrit... Clear All NO VIDEO Applytext_image
Settings Trigger Channel Arming Schedule Linkage Action PTZ Linking PTZ Linking [A1] Camera 01 Call Preset ● Preset 1 Call Patrol ● Patrol 1 Call Pattern ● Pattern 1 Apply OK Canceltext_image
Rule Settings No 1 Sensitivity 39.2 Vehicle Detection
Purpose
Vehicle Detection is available for road traffic monitoring. In Vehicle Detection, a passing vehicle can be detected and the picture of its license plate can be captured. You can send an alarm signal to notify the surveillance center and upload the captured picture to an FT≤ server. 1. Go to Menu > Camera > VCA. 2. Select the camera to configure the VCA. 3. You can check the Save V<4 Picture checkbox to save the captured VCA detection pictures. 4. Select the VCA detection type to Vehicle 'etection. 5. Check the Enable checkbox to enable this function. text_image
Cameras Setup Camera [A1] Camera 01 Save VCA Picture Face Defec Vehicle Del Line Cross... Intrusion De... Region Entr... Region Exit... Letterong D People Gath Fast Movin... Parking Del Unattended Object Rum Audio Exce... Defocus De Sudden Sc... PIR Alarm Enable Settings Set Rule 1 Rule Settings Draw Line Draw Quadril... Clear All NO VIDEO ApplyNOTE
≤TZ linking is applicable only to other list, not to whitelist and blacklist. 7. Click Rule Settings to enter the rule settings interface. Configure the lane, upload picture, and overlay content settings. Up to four lanes are selectable. text_image
Rule Settings Basic Picture Overlay Content No. 1 Scene No. Vehicle Detection Scene 1 Scene Name Lane Number 1 Apply OK CancelNOTE
Refer to the network camera's user manual for detailed vehicle detection instructions.9.3 Line Crossing Detection
Purpose
This function detects people, vehicles, and objects crossing a set virtual line. The line crossing direction can be set as bidirectional, from left to right, or from right to left. You can set the duration for the alarm response actions such as full screen monitoring, audible warning, etc. 1. Go to Menu > Camera > VCA. 2. Select the camera to configure the VCA. 3. Check the Save V<4 Picture checkbox to save the captured VCA detection pictures. 4. Set the VCA detection type to Linetext_image
Rule Settings No. 1 Direction A<->B Sensitivity 50NOTE
>p to four rules can be configured. text_image
Cameras Setup Camera A1] Camera 01 Save VCA Picture Face Defect... Vehicle Det... Line Crash... Intrusion De... Region Entr... Region Exit... Lettering D... People Cash... Fast Movin... Parking Det... Unattended Object Ram Audio Excel... Defocus De... Sudden Sc... PIR Alarm Enable Settings Set Rule 1 Rule Settings NO VIDEO Draw Live Draw Quadrail... Clear All ApplyNOTE
Sudden scene change detection and line crossing detection cannot be enabled on the same channel.9.4 Intrusion Detection
Purpose
The intrusion detection function detects people, vehicles, or other objects that enter and loiter in a pre-defined virtual region. Certain actions can be taken when the alarm is triggered. 1. Go to Menu > Camera > VCA. 2. Select the camera to configure the VCA. 3. Check the Save V<4 Picture checkbox to save the captured VCA detection pictures. 4. Set the VCA detection type to Intrusion 'etection. 5. Check the Enable checkbox to enable this function. 6. Click Set to configure the trigger channel, arming schedule, linkage action, and ≤TZ linking for the intrusion detection alarm. 7. Click Rule Settings to set the intrusion detection rules. Set the following parameters. - Threshold/ Range [1s-10s], the threshold for the time the object loiters in the region. When the duration of the object in the defined detection area is longer than the set time, the alarm will be triggered. - Sensitivity/ R range [1-100]. The value of the sensitivity defines the size of the object that will trigger the alarm. The higher the value, the more easily the detection alarm is triggered. - Percentage/ Range [1-100]. ≤percentage defines the ratio of the in-region part of the object that will trigger the alarm. For example, if the percentage is set to 50%, when the object enters the region and occupies half of the whole region, the alarm is triggered. text_image
Rule Settings No. 1 Time Threshold (s) 5 Sensitivity 50 Percentage 0NOTE
Up to four rules can be configured. text_image
Cameras Setup Camera A1] Camera 01 Save VCA Picture Face Dates... Vehicle Dat... Line Cross... Intrusion De... Region Enter... Region Exit... Lettering D... People Gain... Fast Movin... Parking Dat... Unattended Object Rem... Audio Exce... Defocus De... Sudden Sc... Pilt Nom... Enable Settings Set Rule 1 Rule Settings Draw Line Draw Quadni... Clear All NO VIDEO ApplyNOTE
Sudden scene change detection and intrusion detection cannot be enabled at the same channel.9.5 Region Entrance Detection
Purpose
The region entrance detection function detects people, vehicles, or other objects that enter a pre-defined virtual region, and certain actions can be taken when the alarm is triggered. 1. Go to Menu > Camera > VCA. 2. Select the camera to configure the VCA. 3. Check the Save V<4 Picture checkbox to save the captured VCA detection pictures. 4. Set the VCA detection type to Region Entrance 'etection. 5. Check the Enable checkbox to enable this function. 6. Click Set to configure the trigger channel, arming schedule, linkage action, and ≤TZ linking for the region entrance detection alarm. 7. Click Rule Settings to set the sensitivity of the region entrance detection. Sensitivity/ Range [0-100%. =he higher the value, the more easily the detection alarm will be triggered. 8. Click 📋 and draw a quadrilateral in the preview window by specifying four vertexes of the detection region, and right click to complete drawing. Only one region can be configured. >se 📋 clear the existing virtual line and re-draw it. text_image
Cameras Setup Camera [A1] Camera 01 Save VCA Picture Face Detec... Vehicle Det... Line Cross... Intrusion De... Region Enth... Region End... Lettering D... People Gath... Fast Moin... Parking Det... Unattended... Object Rem... Audio Exce... Defocus De... Sudden Sc... PIR Alarm Enable Settings Set Rule 1 Rule Settings NO VIDEO Draw Line Draw Quadrit ... Clear All ApplyNOTE
>p to four rules can be configured. 9. Click 4pply to save the settings.9.6 Region Exiting Detection
Purpose
=he region exiting detection function detects people, vehicles, or other objects that exit from a pre-defined virtual region, and certain actions can be taken when the alarm is triggered. NOTE
>p to four rules can be configured.9.7 Loitering Detection
Purpose
=he loitering detection function detects people, vehicles, or other objects that loiter in a pre-defined virtual region for a period of time, and a series of actions can be taken when the alarm is triggered. - Threshold [1s-10s% in the Rule Settings defines the time the object can loiter in the region. If you set the value to 5, an alarm is triggered after the object loiters in the region for 5s; and if you set the value to 0, an alarm is triggered immediately if the object enters the region. • >p to four rules can be configured.9.8 ≤eople Gathering Detection
Purpose
=he people gathering detection alarm is triggered when people gather around in a pre-defined virtual region, and a series of actions can be taken when the alarm is triggered. =he Percentage in the Rule Settings defines the gathering density of the people in the region. If the percentage is small, the alarm will be triggered when a small number of people gathered in the defined detection region. >p to four rules can be configured.9.9 Fast +oving Detection
Purpose
=he fast moving detection alarm is triggered when people, vehicles, or other objects move fast in a pre-defined virtual region, and a series of actions can be taken when the alarm is triggered. - Sensitivity in the Rule Settings defines the moving speed of the object that can trigger the alarm. =he higher the value, the more easily a moving object will trigger the alarm. • >p to four rules can be configured.9.10 ≤arking Detection
Purpose
=he parking detection function detects illegal parking in places such as a highway, one-way street, etc., and a series of actions can be taken when the alarm is triggered. - Threshold [5s-20s% in the Rule Settings defines the time of the vehicle parking in the region. If you set the value as 10, an alarm is triggered after the vehicle stays in the region for 10s. • >p to four rules can be configured.9.11 Unattended Baggage Detection
Purpose
The unattended baggage detection function detects objects left in a pre-defined region such as baggage, purse, dangerous materials, etc., and a series of actions can be taken when the alarm is triggered. - Threshold [5s-20s] in the Rule Settings defines the time of the objects left in the region. If you set the value to 10, an alarm is triggered after the object is left and stays in the region for 10s. - Sensitivity defines the similarity degree of the background image. When the sensitivity is high, a very small object left in the region can trigger the alarm. • Up to four rules can be configured.9.12 Object Removal Detection
Purpose
The object removal detection function detects objects removed from a pre-defined region such as exhibits on display, and a series of actions can be taken when the alarm is triggered. - Threshold [5s-20s] in the Rule Settings defines the time of the objects removed from the region. If you set the value to 10, an alarm is triggered after the object disappears from the region for 10s. - Sensitivity defines the similar degree of the background image. If the sensitivity is high, a very small object taken from the region can trigger the alarm. • Up to four rules can be configured.9.13 Audio Exception Detection
Purpose
The audio exception detection function detects abnormal sounds in the surveillance scene such as sudden increase/decrease in sound intensity, and specific actions can be taken when the alarm is triggered. NOTE
Audio exception detection is supported by all analog channels. 1. Go to Menu > Camera > VCA. 2. Select the camera to configure the VCA. 3. Check the Save V<4 Picture checkbox to save the captured VCA detection pictures. 4. Set the VCA detection type to 4udio Exception 'etection. 5. Click Set to configure the trigger channel, arming schedule, linkage action, and ≤=< linking for the audio exception alarm. 6. Click Rule Settings to set the audio exception rules. text_image
Rule Settings No. 1 Audio Loss Exception Sudden Increase of Sound Intensity... Sensitivity 50 Sound Intensity Threshold 50 Sudden Decrease of Sound Intensit... Sensitivity 50 OK Cancel9.14 Defocus Detection
Purpose
Image blur caused by lens defocus can be detected, and specific actions can be taken when the alarm is triggered. \- Sensitivity in the Rule Settings ranges from 1 to 100. =he higher the value, the more easily the defocused image will trigger the alarm.9.15 Sudden Scene Change
Purpose
The scene change detection function detects change of the surveillance environment affected by external factors such as intentional rotation of the camera, and specific actions can be taken when the alarm is triggered. - Sensitivity in the Rule Settings ranges from 1 to 100, and the higher the value, the more easily the change of scene will trigger the alarm. - For analog cameras, line crossing detection and intrusion detection conflict with other VCA detections such as sudden scene change detection, face detection, and vehicle detection. You can enable only one function. If you have enabled line crossing detection or intrusion detection, when you enable sudden scene change detection and apply the settings, the following attention box pops up to remind you there are not enough resources and asks you to disable the enabled VCA type(s) of the selected channel(s). text_image
Attention No enough resource. Please disable the following function(s) in "VCA" settings menu: 1.A1 Line Crossing Detection or Intrusion Detection. OK9.16 ≤IR Alarm
Purpose
A ≤IR (≤assive Infrared) alarm is triggered when an intruder moves within the detector's field of view. The heat energy dissipated by a person, or any other warm blooded creatures such as dogs, cats, etc., can be detected. 1. Go to Menu > Camera > VCA. 2. Select the camera to configure the VCA. 3. Check the Save V<4 Picture checkbox to save the captured VCA detection pictures. 4. Select the VCA detection type to PIR 4larm. 5. Click Set to configure the trigger channel, arming schedule, linkage action and ≤TZ linking for the ≤IR alarm. 6. Click Rule Settings to set the rules. 7. Click 4 pply to activate the settings.10 VCA Search
With the configured VCA detection, the device supports VCA search for the behavior search, face search, plate search, people counting, and heat map results of the I ≤ cameras.10.1 Behavior Search
Purpose
The behavior analysis detects a series of suspicious behavior based on VCA detection, and specific linkage methods will be enabled if the alarm is triggered. 1. Go to Menu > VCA Search > Behavior Search. 2. Select the camera(s) for the behavior search. 3. Specify the start time and end time for searching the matched pictures. text_image
VCA Search Include Cameras Behavior Search Face Search Plate Search People Counting Heat Map IP Camera D1 D2 Start/End Time Start Time 06-14-2017 00:00:00 End Time 06-14-2017 23:59:59 Type All Searchtext_image
Behavior Search Chart List Cam... Start Time Behavior Type Play D3 12-12-2014 12:32:36 Region Exiting Detection D3 12-12-2014 15:10:44 Region Exiting Detection D3 12-12-2014 16:11:21 Intrusion Detection D3 12-12-2014 16:55:30 Region Exiting Detection D3 12-12-2014 16:59:15 Region Exiting Detection D3 12-12-2014 17:05:05 Region Exiting Detection D3 12-12-2014 17:09:54 Region Exiting Detection D3 12-12-2014 17:14:40 Region Exiting Detection Total: 8 P: 1/1 Picture Record Export All Export Back10.2 ≤late Search
Purpose
You can search and view the matched captured vehicle plate picture and related information according to the plate searching conditions including the start time/end time, country and plate No. 1. Go to Menu > VCA Search > ≤late Search. 2. Select the camera(s) for the plate search. 3. Specify the start time and end time for searching the matched plate pictures. text_image
VCA Search Include Cameras Behavior Search Face Search Plate Search People Counting NEW Heat Map NEW IP Camera D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17 D18 Start/End Time Start Time 09-23-2017 00:00:00 End Time 09-23-2017 23:59:59 Country All Plate No. Search10.3 ≤eople Counting
NOTE
Requires camera(s) that support the counting feature.Purpose
≤people Counting is used to calculate the number of people entered or left a certain configured area and form in daily/weekly/monthly/annual reports for analysis. 1. Go to Menu > VCA Search > ≤eople Counting. 2. Select the camera for the people counting. 3. Select the report type to Daily Report, Weekly Report, Monthly Report, or Annual Report. 4. Set the statistics time. 5. Click10.4 Heat Map
Purpose
Heat map is a graphical representation of data represented by colors. The heat map function is usually used to analyze the visit times and dwell time of customers in a configured area. 1. Go to Menu > VCA Search > Heat Map. 2. Select the camera for the heat map processing. 3. Select the report type to Daily Report, Weekly Report, Monthly Report, or Annual Report. 4. Set the statistics time. text_image
VCA Search Camera [A1] Camera 01 Report Type Daily Report Statistics Time 09-23-2017 Counting Export Behavior Search Face Search Plate Search People Counting NEW Heat Map NEW > NO VIDEO11 Network Settings
11.1 Configuring General Settings
Purpose
Network settings must be properly configured before operating the DVR over a network. On the "eneral Settings" interface, you can configure working Mode (DS-73xxHUI-K4 and DS-90xxHUI-K8 only), NIC Type, I≤v4 Address, I≤v4 Gateway, MTU, DNS Server, and Main NIC. 1. Go to Menu > System Configuration > Network > General. text_image
System Configuration General Platform Access DONS Email NAT More Settings NIC Type 10M/100M/1000M Self-ada Enable DHCP IPv4 Address 5 IPv6 Address 1 fe80::bead:26ff.feab:3386/64 IPv4 Subnet Mask IPv6 Address 2 IPv4 Default Gateway IPv6 Default Gateway MTU(Bytes) 1500 MAC Address bc:ad:26:ab:33:86 DNS Server Enable DNS DHCP Preferred DNS Server Alternate DNS Server Applytext_image
System Configuration General DDNS Email SNMP NAT More Settings Working Mode Multi-address Select NIC LAN1 Default Route LAN1 NIC Type 10M/100M/1000M So Enable DHCP IPv4 Address 192.168.0 .64 IPv6 Address 1 IPv4 Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0 IPv6 Address 2 IPv4 Default Gateway IPv6 Default Gateway MTU(Bytes) 0 MAC Address 00.00.00.00.00.00 DNS Server Preferred DNS Server Alternate DNS Server Internal NIC IPv4 Addr... Refresh ApplyNOTE
The valid value of MTU is from 500 to 1500. If the DHC≤ server is available, you can check the checkbox of Enable DH11.2 Configuring Advanced Settings
11.2.1 Configuring ≤≤≤oE Settings
Purpose
The DVR allows access by ≤oint-to-≤oint ≤rotocol over Ethernet (≤≤≤oE).
- Go to Menu > System Configuration > Network > ≤≤≤oE.

text_image
Enable PPPoE User Name PasswordFigure 194, ≤≤≤oE Settings Interface
- Check the Enable PPPoE checkbox to enable this feature.
- Enter User Name and Password for ≤≤≤oE access.

NOTE
The User Name and ≤ password should be assigned by your IS ≤ .
- Click 4pply to save the settings.
- After successful settings, the system asks you to reboot the device to enable the new settings, and the ≤≤≤ oE dial-up is automatically connected after reboot.
- You can go to Menu > Maintenance > System Info > Net work interface to view the status of ≤≤≤oE connection.
11.2.2 Configuring Hik-Connect
Purpose
Hik-Connect provides the mobile phone application and the service platform page (www.hik-connect.com) to access and manage your connected DVR, which enables you to get a convenient remote access to the surveillance system.

NOTE
Hik-Connect can be enabled via operation on SAD≤ software, GUI, and veb browser. Ve introduce the GUI operation steps in this section.
- Go to Menu > System Configuration > Network > ≤ platform Access.

text_image
System Configuration General Platform Access DDNS Email SNMP NAT More Settings Enable Access Type Hik-Connect Server Address dev.us.hik-connect Custom Enable Stream Encryption Verification Code 12345abcde Status Online NEW RS-232 POS ApplyFigure 195, Hik-Connect Settings
- Check the Enable checkbox to activate the function. Then the Service Terms interface pops up, as below.

text_image
Service Terms Verification Code To enable Hik-Connect service, you need to create a verification code or edit the default verification code. □ The Hik-Connect service will require internet access. Please read Service Terms and Privacy Statement before enabling the service. Use your mobile phone to scan the OR code to obtain Terms of Service and Privacy Statement. OK CancelFigure 196, Service Terms
-
Create the verification code and enter the code in the Verification <code text field.
-
Check the “=he Hik-Connect service will require internet access. Checkbox. ≤lease read Service =erms and ≤rivacy Statement.”
-
Scan the QR code on the interface to read the Service = erms and the ≤rivacy Statement.
-
Click OK to save the settings and return to the Hik-Connect interface.

NOTE
Hik-Connect is disabled by default.
=he verification code is empty when the device leaves the factory.
=he verification code must contain 6 to 12 letters or numbers and is case sensitive.
Every time you enable Hik-Connect, the Service = erms interface pops up and you should check the checkbox before enabling it.
-
(Optional) Check the <custom checkbox and input the Server 4address.
-
(Optional) Check the Enable Stream Encryption checkbox.
Once this feature is enabled, the verification code is required for remote access and live view.

NOTE
You can use the scanning tool of your phone to quickly get the device code by scanning the QR code as shown below.

text_image
System Configuration General Platform Access DDNS Email SNMP NAT More Settings Enable Access Type Hik-Connect Server Address dev.us.hik-connector Custom Enable Stream Encryption Verification Code 12345abcde Status Online NEW RS-232 POS ApplyFigure 197, Hik-Connect Settings Interface
- Click 4pply to save the settings.
After configuration, you can access and manage the DVR by your mobile phone on which the Hik-Connect application is installed or by the Website (www.hik-connect.com).
i NOTE
Refer to the help file on the official Website (www.hik-connect.com) and the Hik8Connect Mobile Client User Manual for adding the device to Hik-Connect and more operating instructions.
11.2.3 Configuring DDNS
Purpose
If the DVR is set to use ≤≤≤ oE as its default network connection, you may set Dynamic DNS (DDNS) to be used for network access.
≤rior registration with your IS≤ is required before configuring the system to use DDNS.
-
Go to Menu > System Configuration > Network > DDNS.
-
Check the Enable "NS checkbox to enable this feature.
-
Select "NS Type. Three different DDNS types are selectable: DynDNS, ≤eanutHull, and NO-I≤.
- 'yn'NS
1) Enter Server 4address for DynDNS (i.e., members.dyndns.org).
2) In the 'evice 'omain Name text field, enter the domain obtained from the DynDNS website.
3) Enter the User Name and Password registered in the DynDNS website.

text_image
System Configuration General Platform Access DDNS Email NAT More Settings Enable DDNS DDNS Type DynDNS Area/Country Custom Server Address Device Domain Name Status DDNS is disabled. User Name Password ApplyFigure 198, DynDNS Settings Interface
- PeanutHull/ Enter the User Name and Password obtained from the ≤ peanutHull website.
- NO-IP: Enter the account information in the corresponding fields. Refer to the DynDNS settings.
1) Enter Server 4address for NO-I≤.
2) In the Device Domain Name text field, enter the domain obtained from the NO-1≤ website (www.no-ip.com).
3) Enter the User Name and Password registered in the NO-I≤Website.
- Click 4 pply to save and exit the interface.
11.2.4 Configuring NT≤ Server
Purpose
A Network Time ≤rotocol (NT≤) Server can be configured on your DVR to ensure the system date/time accuracy.
- Go to Menu > System Configuration > Date/Time.

text_image
System Configuration Time/Date Display More Settings Time/Date Date Format MM-DD-YYYY System Date 09-23-2017 System Time 07:02:51 Time Zone Time Zone (GMT-08:00) Pacific Time(U.S. & C Enable DST Customize Enable NTP Interval (min) 60 NTP Server NTP Part 123 ApplyFigure 199, NT≤ Settings Interface
-
Check the Enable NTP checkbox to enable this feature.
-
Configure the following NT≤ settings:
-
Interval: Time interval between the two synchronizing actions with NT≤ server. The unit is minute.
-
NTP Server: I ≤ address of NT ≤ server.
• NTP Port: ≤ort of NT≤ server. -
Click 4pply to save and exit the interface.

NOTE
The time synchronization interval can be set from 1 to 10080 minutes, and the default value is 60 minutes. If the DVR is connected to a public network, use an NT≤ server that has a time synchronization function such as the server at the National Time Center (I≤ Address: 210.72.145.44). If the DVR is set in a customized network, NT≤ software can be used to establish a NT≤ server used for time synchronization.
11.2.5 Configuring NAT
Purpose
Universal ≤lug and ≤lay (U≤n≤TM) can permit the device seamlessly to discover the presence of other network devices on the network and establish functional network services for data sharing, communications, etc. You can use the U≤n≤TM function to enable fast connection of the device to the VAN via a router without port mapping.
+efore You Start
If you want to enable the U ≤ n ≤^TM function of the device, you must enable the U ≤ n ≤^TM function of the router to which your device is connected. When the network working mode of the device is set as multi-address, the Default Route of the device should be in the same network segment as that of the LAN I ≤ address of the router.
- Go to Menu > System Configuration > Network > NAT.

text_image
System Configuration General Platform Access DDNS Email NAT More Settings Enable UPnP Mapping Type Auto UPNP Reporting, Authorized users ... Port Type Edit External Port External IP Address Port UPnP Status HTTP Port 36618 47.184.130.109 90 Active RTDP Port 67484 47.184.130.109 1055+ Active Server Port 45601 47.184.130.109 8000 Active HTTPS Port 26614 47.184.130.109 443 Active HK-CONNECT AT 9018 0.0.0 9010 Inactive Refresh ApplyFigure 200, U≤n≤TM Settings Interface
-
Check Enable UPnP checkbox to enable U≤n≤TM.
-
Select the Mapping Type as +anual or Auto in the drop-down list.
OPTION 1: Auto
If you select 4uto, the ≤ ort +apping items are read-only, and the external ports are set by the router automatically.
1) Click 4pply to save the settings.
2) Click Refresh to get the latest status of the port mapping.

text_image
General Platform Access: DONE Email Enable UPHP Mapping Type Auto UPHP Reporting: Authorized users Port Type Edit External Port External IP Address Port UPHP Status HTTP Port 38910 42.184.130 123 90 Active BFTP Port 55444 47.168.130 100 1035A Active Server Port 45501 47.164.130 109 9009 Active HTTP Port 36516 47.164.130 109 443 Active HSC-CONNECT As 9510 0.8.0.0 9015 InitiateFigure 201, >≤ n≤^TM Settings Finished - Auto
OPTION 2: +anual
If you select Manual as the mapping type, you can edit the external port on demand by clicking 📋 to activate the External Port Settings dialog box.
1) Click 🔒 to activate the External Port Settings dialog box. Configure the external port ×o. for server port, http port and R=S≤ port respectively.

NOTE
You can use the default port ×o. or change it according to actual requirements.
External ≤ort indicates the port ×o. for port mapping in the router.
=he value of the R=S≤ port ×o. should be 554 or between 1024 and 65535, while the value of the other ports should be between 1 and 65535 and the value must be different from each other. If multiple devices are configured for the >≤n≤™ settings under the same router, the value of the port ×o. for each device should be unique.

text_image
External Port Settings Port Type Server Port External Port 8000 OK CancelFigure 202, External ≤ort Settings Dialog Box
2) Click 4pply to save the settings.
3) Click Refresh to get the latest status of the port mapping.

text_image
General Platform Access DDNS Email NAT More Settings Enable UPnP Mapping Type Manual UPNP Reporting Authorized users Port Type Edit External Port External IP Address Port UPnP Status HTTP Port 30 0.0.0 80 Inactive RTSP Port 10554 0.0.0 10554 Inactive Server Port 8000 0.0.0 8000 Inactive HTTPS Port 443 0.0.0 443 Inactive Refresh ApplyFigure 203, U≤n≤TM Settings Finished – Manual
11.2.6 Configuring More Settings
- Go to Menu > System Configuration > Network > More Settings.

text_image
System Configuration General Platform Access DDNS Email NAT More Services Alarm Host Alarm Host IP Alarm Host Port 0 Port Server Port 8000 HTTP Port 80 RTSP Port 10554 More Multicast IP Output Bandwidth Limit Output Bandwidth (Mbps) 128 ApplyFigure 204, More Settings Interface
- Configure the remote alarm host, server port, HTT≤ port, multicast, and RTS≤ port.
- 4Alarm Host IP/Port: with a remote alarm host configured, the device will send the alarm event or exception message to the host when an alarm is triggered. The remote alarm host must have the CMS (Client Management System) software installed.
The 4larm Host IP refers to the I≤ address of the remote ≤C on which the CMS (Client Management System) software (e.g., iVMS-4200) is installed, and the 4larm Host Port must be the same as the alarm monitoring port configured in the software (default port is 7200).
- Multicast IP: =he multicast can be configured to realize live view for more than the maximum number of cameras through network. A multicast address spans the Class-D I≤ range of 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255. It is recommended to use the I≤ address ranging from 239.252.0.0 to 239.255.255.255.
When adding a device to the C+S (Client +anagement System) software, the multicast address must be the same as the device's multicast I≤.
- RTSP Port: =he R=S≤ (Real =ime Streaming ≤rotocol) is a network control protocol designed for use in entertainment and communications systems to control streaming media servers.
Enter the R=S≤ port in the text field of RTSP Port. =he default R=S≤ port is 554, and you can change it according to different requirements.
- Server Port and HTTP Port: Enter the Server Port and HTTP Port in the text fields. =he default Server ≤ort is 8000 and the H==≤ ≤ort is 80, and you can change them according to different requirements.

NOTE
=he Server ≤ort should be set to the range of 2000-65535 and it is used for remote client software access. =he H==≤ port is used for remote IE access.
- Output +andwidth Limit: Check this checkbox to enable output bandwidth limit.
- Output +andwidth: After enabling the output bandwidth limit, input the output bandwidth in the text field.

NOTE
=he output bandwidth limit is used for the remote live view and playback.
=he default output bandwidth is the maximum limit.
- Click 4pply to save and exit the interface.
11.2.7 Configuring H==≤S ≤ort
Purpose
H==≤S provides authentication of the veb site and associated veb server that one is communicating with, which protects against man-in-the-middle attacks. ≤erform the following steps to set the https port number.
Example/ If you set the port number to 443 and the I≤ address is 192.0.0.64, you may access the device by inputting https://192.0.0.64:443 via the Veb browser.

NOTE
The HTT≤S port can be configured only through the veb browser.
- Open Veb browser, input the I≤ address of device, and the Veb server will select the language automatically according to the system language and maximize the Veb browser.
- Input the correct user name and password, and click Login to log in to the device.
- Go to Menu > System Configuration > Remote Configuration > Network Settings > HTT≤S.
- Create the self-signed certificate or authorized certificate.

text_image
HTTPS Enable HTTPS Create Create Create Self-signed Certificate Create Create Certificate Request Install Signed Certificates Certificate Path Browse Upload Created Request Created Request Delete Downloads Installed Certificate Installed Certificate Delete SaveFigure 205, HTT≤S Settings
OPTION 1: Create the self-signed certificate
1) Click <create to create the following dialog box.

text_image
Country CN * example CN HostnameIP 172.6.23.67 * Validity 200 Day* range:1-5000 Password State or province Locality Organization Organizational Unit Email OK Cancel
Figure 206, Create Self-signed Certificate
2) Enter the country, host name/l≤, validity, and other information.
3) Click OK to save the settings.
OPTION 2: Create the authorized certificate
1) Click <create to create the certificate request.
2) Download the certificate request and submit it to the trusted certificate authority for signature.
3) After receiving the signed valid certificate, import the certificate to the device.
- There will be the certificate information after you successfully create and install the certificate.

text_image
Installed Certificate Installed Certificate C=CN, HIP=172.6.23.110 Delete Property Subject: C=CN, H/IP=172.6.23.110 Issuer: C=CN, H/IP=172.6.23.110 Validity: 2013-06-28 10:42.40 ~ 2013-06-30 10:42.40
Figure 207, Installed Certificate ≤property
- Check the checkbox to enable the HTT≤S function.
- Click Save to save the settings.
11.2.8 Configuring E-Mail
Purpose
The system can be configured to send an e-mail notification to all designated users if an event is detected, e.g. an alarm or motion event is detected, etc.
Before configuring the e-mail settings, the DVR must be connected to a local area network (LAN) that maintains an SMT≤ mail server. The network must also be connected to either an intranet or the Internet depending on the location of the e-mail accounts to which you want to send notification. Additionally, the ≤referred DNS server must be configured.
+efore You Start
Make sure you have configured the I≤v4 Address, I≤v4 Subnet Mask, I≤v4 Gateway, and the ≤referred DNS Server in the Network Settings menu.
- Go to Menu > System Configuration > Network > Email.
- Select the Email tab to enter the Email Settings interface.

text_image
System Configuration General Platform Access DDNG Select NAT More Settings Enable Server Authentication User Name Password SMTP SMTP Server SMTP Port 25 Enable SSL/TLS Sender Receiver Sender Name Select Reciverser Receiver 1 Sender's Address Receiver Enable Attached Picture Receiver's Address Interval 25 Test ApplyFigure 208, Email Settings Interface
- Configure the following e-mail settings:
Enable Server Authentication (optional): Check the checkbox to enable the server authentication feature.
User Name: =he user account of sender's e-mail for S+=≤ server authentication.
Password: =he password of sender's e-mail for S+=≤ server authentication.
SMTP Server: =he S+=≤ Server I≤ address or host name (e.g., smtp.263xmail.com).
SMTP Port: =he default =C≤/I≤ port used for S+=≤ is 25.
Enable SSL (optional): Click the checkbox to enable SSL if required by the S+=≤ server.
Sender: =he name of sender.
Sender's 4address: =he e-mail address of sender.
Select Receivers: Select the receiver. >p to three receivers can be configured.
Receiver: =he name of the receiver of the e-mail.
Receiver's 4address: =he e-mail address of the receiver.
Enable 4ttached Picture: Check the checkbox if you want to send email with attached alarm images. =he interval is the time between two captures of the alarm images.

NOTE
For I≤ cameras, the alarm images are directly sent as attached pictures by e-mail. Up to one picture can be sent for one I≤ camera. The attached pictures of the linked cameras cannot be sent.
For analog cameras, three attached pictures can be sent for one analog camera when the alarm is triggered.
Interval: The interval refers to the time between two actions of sending attached pictures.
E-mail Test: Sends a test message to verify that the SMT≤ server can be reached.
-
Click 4 pply to save the e-mail settings.
-
You can click Test to test whether your e-mail settings work. The corresponding Attention message box pops up.

text_image
Attention Failed to send test email, please check the parameters or network status. OK
text_image
Attention Email test succeeded. OKFigure 209, Email Testing Attention
11.2.9 Checking Network Traffic
Purpose
You can check the network traffic to obtain real-time information of the DVR such as linking status, MTU, sending/receiving rate, etc.
- Go to Menu > Maintenance > Net Detect > Traffic.

text_image
System Maintenance Traffic Network Detection Network Stat 1Kbps bond0 Sending: 0bps Receiving: 0bps Name Linking Status Type MAC Address MTUB NC Type Traffic bond0 Failed Bond 18.86.2b-a4.59.33 1500Figure 210, Network Traffic Interface
- You can view the sending rate and receiving rate information on the interface. The traffic data is refreshed every second.
11.3 Configuring Network Detection
Purpose
You can obtain network connecting status of DVR through the network detection function, including network delay, packet loss, etc.
11.3.1 Testing Network Delay and ≤acket Loss
- Go to Menu > Maintenance > Net Detect > Network Detection.

text_image
System Maintenance Traffic Network Detection Network Stat. Network Delay: Packet Loss Test Select NIC LAN1 Destination Address Test Network Packet Export Device Name USB Flash Disk 1-1 Refresh LAN1 10.18 6.112 8Kbps Export Status NetworkFigure 211, Network Detection Interface
- Select a NIC to test network delay and packet loss.
- Enter the destination address in the text field of 'estination 4address.
- Click Test to start testing network delay and packet loss.
11.3.2 Exporting Network ≤acket
Purpose
By connecting the DVR to a network, the captured network data packet can be exported to a USB flash disk, SATA, or other local backup device.
-
Go to Menu > Maintenance > Net Detect > Network Detection.
-
Select the backup device from the 'evice Name drop-down list.
Click Refresh if the connected local backup device cannot be displayed. If it fails to detect the backup device, check whether it is compatible with the DVR. You can format the backup device if the format is incorrect.

text_image
System Maintenance Traffic Network Detection Network Stat. Network Delay, Packet Loss Test Select NIC bond0 Destination Address Test Network Packet Export Device Name Refresh bond0 192.168.1.64 0bps Export Status NetworkFigure 212, Export Network ≤acket
-
Click Export to start exporting.
-
After exporting is complete, click OK to finish the packet export.

text_image
Attention Packet export succeeded. OKFigure 213, ≤acket Export Attention
i NOTE
Up to 1 MB of data can be exported each time.
11.3.3 Checking Network Status
Purpose
You can also check the network status and quick set the network parameters in this interface.
- Go to Menu > Maintenance > Net Detect > Network Detection.
- Click Status on the right bottom of the interface.

text_image
System Maintenance Traffic Network Detection Network Stat System Legs Import/Export Upgrade Default Network Detect HDD Detect Type Bandwidth IP Camera 0fps Remote Live View 0fps Remote Playback 0fps Net Total Rate 250Mbps RefreshFigure 214, Checking × network Status
- If the network is normal the following message box pops out.

text_image
Result Network status is normal. OKFigure 215, ×network Status Checking Result
- If the message box pops out with other information instead of this one, click Network to show the quick setting interface of the network parameters.

text_image
Network NIC Type 10M/100M Self-adaptive Enable DHCP ✓ IPv4 Address 10 .16 .5 .20 IPv4 Subnet Mask 255.255 .255 .0 IPv4 Default Gateway 10 .16 .5 .254 Enable DNS DHCP Preferred DNS Serv... Alternate DNS Server Apply OK CancelFigure 216, ×network ≤parameters Configuration
11.3.4 Checking × network Statistics
Purpose
Check the network statistics to obtain real-time information of the device.
- Go to Menu > Maintenance> Net Detect > Network Stat.

text_image
System Maintenance Traffic Network Detection Network Slot System Legs Import/Export Upgrade Default Network Detect > HDD Detect Type Bandwidth IP Camera 0fps Remote Live View 0fps Remote Playback 0fps Net Tube Tube 250Mbps RefreshFigure 217, Network Stat. Interface
- View the bandwidth of Remote Live View, bandwidth of Remote ≤ layback, and bandwidth of Net Total Idle.
- Click Refresh to get the latest bandwidth statistics.
12 RAID
12.1 Configuring Array
Purpose
RAID (redundant array of independent disks) is a storage technology that combines multiple disk drive components into a logical unit. A RAID setup stores data over multiple hard disk drives to provide enough redundancy so that data can be recovered if one disk fails. Data is distributed across the drives in one of several ways called “RAID levels,” depending on what level of redundancy and performance is required.
The DVR supports software disk arrays. You can enable the RAID function on demand.

NOTE
The DVR supports RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 5, RAID 6, and RAID 10 array types.
+efore You Start
Install the HDD(s) properly (it is recommended to use the same enterprise-level HDDs, including model and capacity, for array creation and configuration so as to maintain reliable and stable running of the disks).
Introduction
The DVR can store the data (e.g., record, picture, log information) in the HDD only after you have created the array or you have configured network HDD. There are two ways to create an array, including one-touch configuration and manual configuration. The following flow chart shows the process of creating an array.

flowchart
graph TD
A["Start"] --> B["Enter Disk Mode Interface"]
B -->|Enable RAID| C["Enter Physical Disk Interface"]
C --> D["Manual Creation"]
C --> E["One-touch Creation"]
D --> F["Creating Array Finished"]
F --> G["Array Initialization"]
E --> H["Creating Array Finished"]
H --> I["Enter HDD Information Interface"]
I --> J["Normal HDD"]
J --> K["End"]
style A fill:#99CCFF
style K fill:#99CCFF
Figure 218, RAID forkflow
12.1.1 Enable RAID
Purpose
You must enable the RAID function before you can create the disk array.
- Enter the Disk Mode configuration interface, Menu > System Configuration > HDD

text_image
HDD Information Record Information Disk Mode Storage Mode Disk Clone Cloud Storage Enable RAIDFigure 219, Enable RAID Interface
- Check the Enable R4I' checkbox.
- Click 4pply to save the settings.
- Reboot the device to have the RAID take effect.
12.1.2 One-Touch Configuration
Purpose
Through one-touch configuration, you can quickly create the disk array. By default, the array type to be created is RAID 5.
+efore You Start
The RAID function should be enabled.
As the default array type is RAID 5, install at least three HDDs in you device. If more than 10 HDDs are installed, two arrays can be configured.
- Enter the RAID configuration interface, Menu > System Configuration > RAID.

text_image
System Configuration Physical Disk Array Firmware No. Capacity Array Type Status Model Hot Spare One-touch Config CreateFigure 220, ≤hysical Disk Interface
-
Check the corresponding HDD No. checkbox to select i t.
-
Click One-touch <config to enter the One-touch Array Configuration interface.

text_image
One-touch Array Configuration Array Name OK Cancel
Figure 221, One-touch Array Configuration
- Edit the array name in the 4ray Name text filed and click OK to start configuring the array.
i NOTE
If you install four HDDs or more for one-touch configuration, a hot spare disk will be set by default. It is recommended to set a hot spare disk to automatically rebuild the array if the array becomes abnormal.
-
when the array configuration is completed, click OK in the pop-up message box to finish the settings.
-
Click 4ray tab to view the information of the successfully created array.

NOTE
By default, one-touch configuration creates an array and a virtual disk.

text_image
System Configuration Physical Disk Array Firmware General Network HDD Live View Exceptions User RS-232 RAD PCS No. Name Free Space Physical Disk Hot Spare Status LFigure 222, Array Settings Interface
- A created array displays as an HDD in the HDD information interface.

text_image
HDD Information L... Capacity Status Property Type Free Space Gr... Edit D... 1 931.52GB Initializing 82% RAW Array 0MB 1 - -Figure 223, HDD Information Interface
12.1.3 Manually Creating Array
Purpose
You can manually create a RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 5, RAID6, or RAID 10 array.

NOTE
In this chapter, we take RAID 5 as an example to describe the manual configuration of array and virtual disk.
- Enter the ≤physical Disk Settings interface, Menu > HDD > RAID > ≤physical Disk

text_image
System Configuration Physical Disk Array Firmware General Network HDD Live View Exceptions User RS-232 RAD POS No. Capacity Array Type Status Model Hot Spare One-touch Config CreateFigure 224, ≤hysical Disk Settings Interface
- Click Create to enter the Create Array interface.

text_image
Create Array Array Name array RAID Level RAID 5 Initialization Type Initialize (Fast) Physical Disk 2 6 7 Array Capacity (Estimated): 931GB OK CancelFigure 225, Create Array Interface
- Edit the Array ×ame, set the RAID Level to RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 5, RAID 6 or RAID 10, select the ≤physical Disk on which to configure the array.
If you choose RAID 0, at least two HDDs must be installed.
If you choose RAID 1, two HDDs need to be configured for RAID 1.
If you choose RAID 5, at least three HDDs must be installed.
If you choose RAID 6, at least four HDDs must be installed.
If you choose RAID 10, the number of HDDs installed should be even in the range of four to 16.
- Click O K to create the array.

NOTE
If the number of HDDs you select is not compatible with the requirement of the RAID level, the error message box will pop up.

text_image
Attention Physical disk count error. OKFigure 226, Error +message Box
- Click Array tab to view the successfully created array.

text_image
System Configuration Physical Disk Array Firmware General Network HDD Live View Exceptions User RS-232 RAD PCS No. Name Free Space Physical Disk Hot Spare Status LFigure 227, Array Settings Interface
12.1.4 Rebuilding Array
Purpose
=he working status of an array includes Functional, Degraded, and Offline. By viewing the array status, you can take immediate and proper maintenance for the disks so as to ensure the high security and reliability of the data stored in the disk array.
when there is no disk loss in the array, the working status of array will change to Functional; if the number of lost disks has exceeded the limit, the working status of array will change to Offline; in other conditions, the working status is Degraded.
when the virtual disk is in Degraded status, you can restore it to Functional by array rebuilding.
+efore You Start
Make sure the hot spare disk is configured.
- Enter the ≤physical Disk Settings interface to configure the hot spare disk.

text_image
No Capacity Array Type Status Model Hot Sp 1 931.51GB Normal Functional ST31000340NS 3 931.51GB RAID5 Array Functional ST31000526SV 5 931.51GB RAID5 Array Functional WDC WD10EVVS-8 7 931.51GB RAID5 Array Functional WDC WD10EVVS-8 One-touch C... CreateFigure 228, ≤hysical Disk Settings Interface
- Select a disk and click to set it as the hot spare disk.

Only global hot spare mode is supported.
12.1.5 Automatically Rebuilding Array
Purpose
When the virtual disk is in Degraded status, the device can start rebuilding the array automatically with the hot spare disk to ensure the high security and reliability of the data.
- Enter the Array Settings interface, Menu > System Configuration > HDD > RAID > Array. The status of the array is Degraded. Since the hot spare disk is configured, the system will automatically start rebuilding using it.

text_image
System Configuration Physical Disk Array Firmware General Network HDD Live View Exceptions User RS-232 RAID POS No. Name Free Space Physical Disk Hot Spare Status LFigure 229, Array Settings Interface
- If there is no hot spare disk after rebuilding, it is recommended to install an HDD into the device and set is as a hot spare disk to ensure the high security and reliability of the array.
12.1.6 Manually Rebuilding Array
Purpose
If the hot spare disk has not been configured, you can rebuild the array manually to restore the array when the virtual disk is in Degraded status.
- Enter the Array Settings interface, Menu > System Configuration > HDD > RAID > Array.

text_image
System Configuration Physical Disk Array Firmware General Network HDD Live View Exceptions User RS-232 RAID PCS No. Name Free Space Physical Disk Hot Spare Status LFigure 230, Array Settings Interface
- Click the Array tab to return to the Array Settings interface and click to configure the array rebuild.


NOTE
At least one available physical disk must exist for rebuilding the array.

text_image
Rebuild Array Array Name array1_1 RAID Level RAID 5 Array Disk 2 6 Physical Disk ●7 OK CancelFigure 231, Rebuild Array Interface
- Select the available physical disk and click OK to confirm rebuilding the array.
- The "Do not unplug the physical disk when it is under rebuilding" message box pops up. Click OK to start rebuilding.
- Enter the Array Settings interface to view the rebuilding status.
- After rebuilding successfully, the array and virtual disk will restore to Functional.
12.1.7 Deleting Array

NOTE
Deleting an array will cause deletion of all data saved on the disk.
- Enter the Array Settings interface, Menu > System Configuration > HDD > RAID > Array.

text_image
System Configuration Physical Disk Array Firmware General Network HDD Live View Exceptions User RS-232 RAID PCS No. Name Free Space Physical Disk Hot Spare Status LFigure 232, Array Settings Interface
- Select an array and click to delete the array.

text_image
Attention The removal of the array will cause ALL data on it to be deleted. Continue? Yes NoFigure 233, Confirm Array Deletion
- In the pop-up message box, click Y es to confirm the array deletion.

NOTE
Deleting an array will delete all data in the array.
13 Checking and Editing Firmware
Purpose
You can view the firmware information and set the background task speed on the Firmware interface.
- Enter the Firmware interface to check the firmware information, including the version, maximum physical disk quantity, maximum array quantity, auto-rebuild status, etc.

text_image
System Configuration Physical Disk Array Firmware Version 1.1.0.0003 Physical Disk Count 4 Array Count 4 Virtual Disk Count 0 RAD Level 0 1 5 € 10 Hot Spare Type Global Hot Spare Support Rebuild Yes Background Task Speed Medium Speed ApplyFigure 234, Firmware Interface
- You can set the Background Task Speed in the drop-down list.
- Click 4pply to save the settings.
14 HDD Management
14.1 Initializing HDDs
Purpose
A newly installed hard disk drive (HDD) must be initialized before it can be used with the DVR.
- Go to Menu > System Configuration > HDD.

text_image
System Configuration HDD Information Record Information Disk Mode Storage Mode Cloud Storage General Network HDD Live View Exceptions User RS-232 RAD PCS Label Capacity Status Property Type Free Space Gro.. Edit Delete Total Capacity 0MB Free Space 0MB Estimated time of recording in day(s)/Recording Time (day) N/A/N/A Add NetHDD InitFigure 235, HDD Information Interface
- You can view the Total Capacity, Free Space, and Remaining Recording Time of the HDD. The algorithm of the Remaining Recording Time is to use average bit rate for the channel enabling smart encoding to raise accuracy.
- Select HDD to be initialized.
- Click Init.

text_image
Initialize Initialization will erase all data on the HDD. Continue? OK CancelFigure 236, Confirm Initialization
- Select OK to start initialization.

text_image
L... Capacity Status Property Type Free Space Gr... Edit D... 1 931.51GB Formatting 34% R/W Local 0MB 1 -Figure 237, Start Initialization
- After the HDD has been initialized, the HDD status will change from Uninitialized to Normal.

text_image
L... Capacity Status Property Type Free Space Gr... Edit D... 1 931.51GB Normal R/W Local 927GB 1 -Figure 238, HDD Status Changes to Normal

NOTE
Initializing the HDD will erase all data on it.
HDDs that are free of working for a long time can be enabled to sleep, thus to decrease the power consumption of the device and extend the life of the HDDs.
- Go to Menu > System Configuration > HDD > Advanced.

text_image
HDD Information Record Information Storage Mode Cloud Storage H.264+/H.265+ for All the Analog ... Enable Enable HDD Sleeping Overwrite ✓ Enable HDD Sleep...✓Figure 239, Enable HDD Sleeping
Check the Enable H" Sleeping (by default) checkbox, and the HDDs that are free of working for a long time will be set to sleep.
Uncheck the Enable H" Sleeping checkbox, and the HDDs will never sleep.
14.2 Managing Network HDD
Purpose
You can add the allocated NAS or I≤ SAN disk to the DVR, and use it as a network HDD.
- Go to Menu > System Configuration > HDD.

text_image
System Configuration HDD Information Record Information Disk Mode Storage Mode Cloud Storage General Network HDD Live View Exceptions User RS-232 RAD PCS Label Capacity Status Property Type Free Space Gro... Edit Delete Total Capacity 0MB Free Space 0MB Estimated time of recording in day(s)/Recording Time (day) N/A/N/A Add NetHDD InitFigure 240, HDD Information Interface
- Click 4dd to enter the 4dd NetH" interface.

text_image
Add NetHDD NetHDD NetHDD 1 Type NAS NetHDD IP Address NetHDD Directory Search OK CancelFigure 241, NetHDD Information Interface
- Add the allocated NetHDD.
- Set the type to NAS or I≤SAN.
- Configure the NAS or I≤ SAN settings.
- 4dd N4S disk
1) Enter the ×etHDD I ≤ address in the text field.
2) Click Search to search the available ×AS disks.
3) Select the ×AS disk from the list shown below, or manually enter the directory in the NetH" 'irectory text field.
4) Click OK to add the configured ×AS disk.

NOTE
p to eight ×AS disks can be added.

text_image
Add NetHDD NetHDD NetHDD 1 Type NAS NetHDD IP Address 172.6 .24 .201 NetHDD Directory /dvr/dvr_1 No Directory 1 /dvr/dvr_2 2 /dvr/dvr_1 3 /mnt/backup/indexbackup Search OK CancelFigure 242, Add ×AS Disk
- 4dd IP S4N
1) Enter the ×etHDD I≤ address in the text field.
2) Click Search to the available I≤ SA× disks.
3) Select the I≤ SA× disk from the list shown below.
4) Click OK to add the selected I≤ SA× disk.

NOTE
p to eight I≤ SA× disks can be added.

text_image
Add NetHDD NetHDD NetHDD 1 Type IP SAN NetHDD IP Address . . . NetHDD Directory Search OK CancelFigure 243, Add I≤ SAN Disk
5) After having successfully added the NAS or I≤ SAN disk, return to the HDD Information menu. The added NetHDD will be displayed in the list.

NOTE
If the added NetHDD is uninitialized, select it and click Init for initialization.

text_image
L... Capacity Status Property Type Free Space Gr... Edit D... ✓ 1 931.51GB Normal R/W Local 906GB 1 ✓ 17 40,000MB Normal R/W IP SAN 22,528MB 1Figure 244, Initialize Added NetHDD
14.3 Managing HDD Group
14.3.1 Setting HDD Groups
Purpose
Multiple HDDs can be managed in groups. Video from specified channels can be recorded onto a particular HDD group through HDD settings.
- Go to Menu > System Configuration > HDD.
- Set the Mode to Group, as shown below.

text_image
System Configuration HDD Information Record information Storage Mode Cloud Storage Mode Group Record on HDD Group 1 Analog A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A5 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 IP Camera D1 D2 Live View Exceptions User RS-232 POS ApplyFigure 245, Storage Mode Interface
- Click 4pply and the following Attention box will pop up.

text_image
Attention Reboot to take effect of the changing of the storage mode. Continue? Yes NoFigure 246, Attention for Reboot
- Click Yes to reboot the device to activate the changes.
- After rebooting the device, go to Menu > System Configuration > HDD > General.
- Select HDD from the list and click ✅ to enter the Local H" Settings interface, as shown below.

text_image
Local HDD Settings HDD No 5 HDD Property ● R/W ● Read-only ● Redundancy Group ● 1 ● 2 ● 3 ● 4 ● 5 ● 6 ● 7 ● 8 ● 9 ● 10 ● 11 ● 12 ● 13 ● 14 ● 15 ● 16 HDD Capacity 931GB Apply OK CancelFigure 247, Local HDD Settings Interface
- Select the Group number for the current HDD.

NOTE
The default group No. for each HDD is 1.
- Click OK to confirm the settings.

text_image
Attention Regroup the cameras for HDD if the HDD group number is changed. Yes NoFigure 248, Confirm HDD Group Settings
- In the pop-up Attention box, click Yes to finish the settings.
14.4 Setting HDD ≤ property
Purpose
The HDD property can be set to redundancy, read-only, or read/write (R/V). Before setting the HDD property, set the storage mode to Group.
An HDD can be set to read-only to prevent important recorded files from being overwritten when the HDD becomes full in overwrite recording mode.
When the HDD property is set to redundancy, the video can be recorded both onto the redundancy HDD and the R/V HDD simultaneously so as to ensure high security and reliability of video data.
- Go to Menu > HDD > General.
- Select HDD from the list and click 📋 to enter the Local H" Settings interface, as shown below.

text_image
Local HDD Settings HDD No 1 HDD Property ● R/W ● Read-only ● Redundancy Group ● 1 ● 2 ● 3 ● 4 ● 5 ● 6 ● 7 ● 8 ● 9 ● 10 ● 11 ● 12 ● 13 ● 14 ● 15 ● 16 HDD Capacity 931.51GB Apply OK CancelFigure 249, Set HDD ≤ property
-
Set the HDD property to R/V, Read-only, or Redundancy.
-
Click OK to save the settings and exit the interface.
In the HDD Information menu, the HDD property will be displayed in the list.

NOTE
At least two hard disks must be added to your DVR to set an HDD to Redundancy, and one HDD with R/V property.
14.5 Configuring Quota Mode
Purpose
Each camera can be configured with allocated quota for the storage of recorded files.
-
Go to Menu > System Configuration > HDD > Advanced > Storage Mode.
-
Set the Mode to Quota, as shown below.

NOTE
The DVR must be rebooted to enable the changes to take effect.

text_image
System Configuration HDD Information Record Information Disk Mode Storage Mode Cloud Storage General Network HDD Live View Exceptions User RS-232 RAD POS Mode Quota Camera [A1] Camera 01 Used Record Capacity 0B Used Picture Capacity 0B HDD Capacity (GB) 0 Max. Record Capacity (GB) 0 Max. Picture Capacity (GB) 0 Free Quota Space @ GB Copy ApplyFigure 250, Storage +ode Settings Interface
-
Select a camera for which you want to configure quota.
-
Enter the storage capacity in the text field of Max. Record <capacity (G+).
-
You can copy the quota settings of the current camera to other cameras if required. Click <opy to enter the <opy <camera interface, as shown below.

text_image
Copy to Analog A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 IP Camera D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17 D18 OK Cancel
Figure 251, Copy Settings to Other Camera(s)
-
Select the camera(s) to be configured with the same quota settings. You can also click the checkbox of Analog to select all cameras.
-
Click OK to finish the Copy settings and return to the Storage +ode interface.
-
Click 4pply to apply the settings.

NOTE
If the quota capacity is set to O , then all cameras will use the total capacity of the HDD for record.
14.6 Configuring Cloud Storage
Purpose
Cloud storage facilitates uploading and downloading the recorded files at any time and any place, which can highly enhance the efficiency.
- Go to Menu > System Configuration > HDD > General > Cloud Storage.
- Check the Enable <loud checkbox to enable the feature.
- Select the <loud Type from the drop-down list to One Drive, Google Drive, or Drop Box.

text_image
System Configuration HDD Information Record Information Storage Mode Cloud Storage Enable Cloud Cloud Type OneDrive Authorization Code Status Offline Use a mobile browser to scan the QR code to log in the selected cloud to get the authorization code. Camera A1) Camera 0 Upload Type Record Enable Event Upload *Note: Only sub-stream recorded files can be uploaded to the Cloud Storage. Please configure the event triggered recording schedule and enable the corresponding event type. Copy Apply
Figure 252, Cloud Storage Interface
- According to the prompts, you are required to use a mobile browser to scan the QR code to log in the selected cloud to get the authentication code, and then copy the authentication code to the 4authentication <code text filed.
- Click 4pply and then go back to the main menu.
- Enter the cloud storage interface again about 20s later. when the Status shows online, it indicates the successful registration.
- Configure the recording schedule.
- Go back to enter the record interface, choose a camera from the <camera drop-down list and check the Enable Schedule checkbox to enable the schedule recording.

text_image
Recording Configuration Camera Camera 01(A1) Enable Schedule Week Mon 24HR Type Continuous Start/End Time 00:00:00:00 Add Record Quality Motion Detect Trigger Holiday Mon Mon 00:00-24:00 Tue Tue 00:00-24:00 Wed Wed 00:00-24:00 Thu Thu 00:00-24:00 Fri Fri 00:00-24:00 Sat Sat 00:00-24:00 Sun Sun 00:00-24:00 Continuous Event None Edit Copy Apply
Figure 253, Record Schedule
-
pload the event triggered recording files to the cloud storage.
1) Return to the cloud storage interface and select the camera you have set in the recording schedule interface.
2) Select the upload type in the Upload Type text filed.
3) Check the Enable Event Upload checkbox.
4) Click 4pply to finish the settings.

text_image
System Configuration HDD Information Record Information Storage Mode Cloud Storage Enable Cloud Cloud Type OneDrive Authorization Code Status Offline Use a mobile browser to scan the QR code to log in the selected cloud to get the authorization code. Camera A1 Camera 0 Uploaded Type Record Enable Event Upload *Note: Only sub-stream recorded files can be uploaded to the Cloud Storage. Please configure the event triggered recording schedule and enable the corresponding event type. Copy ApplyFigure 254, >pload to Cloud Storage Interface

NOTE
Only the sub-stream recorded files can be uploaded to the Cloud Storage.
5) Configure the event triggered recording schedule and enable the corresponding event type.
6) (Optional) You can click <opy to copy the cloud storage settings to other cameras. You can also click the checkbox of Analog/l≤ Camera to select all cameras.
7) Click OK to go back to the cloud storage interface and click 4pply to finish the settings.

text_image
Copy to Analog A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 IP Camera D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17 D18 OK Cancel
Figure 255, Copy to Interface
14.7 Configuring Disk Clone

NOTE
This chapter is applicable to only DVRs with eSATA.
Purpose
If the S.M.A.R.T. detection result declares the HDD is abnormal, you can choose to clone all the data on the HDD to an inserted eSATA disk manually.
+efore You Start
An eSATA disk should be connected to the device.
-
Enter the HDD Advanced Setting interface, Menu > System Configuration > HDD > Advanced.
-
Click the 'isk <lone tab to enter the disk clone configuring interface.

text_image
Disk Mode Storage Mode Disk Clone Clone Source Label Capacity Status Property Type Free Space Gr... 4 931.51GB Normal R/W Local 914GB 1 Clone Destination eSATA eSATAI Refresh Usage Export Set Total Capacity 931.51GB Clone Back
Figure 256, Disk Clone Configuration Interface
- +ake sure the usage of the eSA=A disk is set as Export. If not, click Set to set it. Choose Export and click OK.

text_image
eSATA Usage eSATA1: Export Record/Ca... OK CancelFigure 257, Setting eSA=A >sage
=he capacity of the destination disk must be the same as that of the clone source disk.
-
Check the checkbox of the HDD to be cloned in the Clone Source list.
-
Click <lone and a message box pops up.

text_image
Attention The clone operation will stop the record task, lasting about 7 hours. Continue? Yes No
Figure 258, +essay Box for Disk Clone
6. Click Yes to continue.
- You can check the clone progress in the HDD status.
| Label | Capacity | Status | Property | Type | Free Space | Gr... |
| 4 | 931.51GB | Cloning 01% | RAW | Local | OMB | 1 |
Figure 259, Check Disk Clone ≤rogress
14.8 Checking HDD Status
Purpose
You can check the status of the installed HDDs on the DVR so as to take immediate check and maintenance in case of HDD failure.
- Go to Menu > System Configuration > HDD.
- Check the status of each HDD that is displayed on the list, as shown below.

text_image
System Configuration HDD Information Record Information Disk Mode Storage Mode Cloud Storage General Network HDD Live View Exceptions User RS-232 RAID PCS Label Capacity Status Property Type Free Space Gro. Edit Delete Total Capacity 0MB Free Space 0MB Estimated time of recording in day(s)/Recording Time (day) N/A/N/A Add NetHDD InitFigure 260, View HDD Status (1)

NOTE
If the status of HDD is Normal or Sleeping, it works normally. If the status is Uninitialized or Abnormal, initialize the HDD before use. If the HDD initialization has failed, replace it with a new one.
Checking HDD Status in System Information Interface
- Go to Menu > Maintenance > System Info > HDD.
- View the status of each HDD displayed on the list, as shown below.
| Label | Status | Capacity | Free Space | Property | Type | Group |
| 1 | Normal | 931.51GB | 900GB | R/W | Local | 1 |
| 17 | Normal | 199.97GB | 182GB | Redundancy | NAS | 1 |
Figure 261, View HDD Status (2)
14.9 Checking S.M.A.R.T. Information
Purpose
The S.M.A.R.T. (Self-Monitoring, Analysis and Reporting Technology) is a monitoring system for HDD to detect and report on various indicators of reliability in the hopes of anticipating failures.
-
Go to Menu > Maintenance > HDD Detect > S.M.A.R.T. Settings.
-
Select the HDD to view its S.M.A.R.T. information list, as shown below.

NOTE
To use the HDD even when the S.M.A.R.T. checking has failed, check the checkbox before the <continue to use this disk when self-evaluation is failed item.

text_image
System Maintenance S.M.A.R.T. Control Batch Under Detection Continues to use this data when self evaluation is tested H30 Test test Status Not tested Test Test Test Temperature(°C) Power On play(s) Soft Evaluation Abvaluation 25 4 Pass Uncontrolled S.M.A.R.T. information No. | Access Name | Value | Metric | Performance | Value | Word | Time Values 0x1 | Base Load Cycle Rate | OK | 27 | 91 | 200 | 200 | 0 0x3 | Spin Up Time | OK | 27 | 26 | 137 | 136 | 413 | 0x4 | Start/Stop Count | OK | 32 | 0 | 100 | 100 | 25 0x5 | Reset/Reset Sector Count | OK | 33 | 183 | 200 | 200 | 0 0x7 | Gate Error Rate | OK | 26 | 0 | 200 | 200 | 0 0x8 | Power on House Users | OK | 32 | 0 | 100 | 100 | 116 0x9 | Spin Up Frequency Count | OK | 32 | 0 | 100 | 253 | 0 Apply
Figure 262, S.M.A.R.T. Settings Interface
14.10 Detecting Bad Sectors
Purpose
You can detect the bad sector(s) of the HDD to check the status of the HDD.
- Go to Menu > Maintenance > HDD Detect > Bad Sector Detection.
- Select an HDD and click Detect to start detecting.

text_image
System Maintenance S.M.A.R.T. Settings Bad Sector Detection HDD No: 2 Key Area Detection Detect System Logs Import/Export Upgrade Default Network Detect HDD Detect HDD Capacity 1063.02GB Block Capacity 465.76MB Status Not tested Error Count 0 Error Info Pause Cancel Normal Damaged ShieldFigure 263, Bad Sector Detecting
- Click Pause to pause the detection and click Resume to resume the detection.
- If there is error information about the HDD, Click Error Info to view the information.
14.11 Configuring HDD Error Alarms
Purpose
You can configure the HDD error alarms when the HDD status is Uninitialized or Abnormal.
- Go to Menu > System Configuration > Exceptions.
- Select the Exception Type to H" Error from the drop-down list.
- Check the checkbox(s) below to select the linkage action(s) for an HDD error, as shown in Figure 12-26.
- The linkage actions can be selected to: Audible Varning, Notify Surveillance Center, Send Email, and Trigger Alarm Output.

text_image
System Configuration Enable Event Hint Event Hint Settings Set Exception Type HDD Full Audible Warning Notify Surveillance Center Send Email Trigger Alarm Output Apply General Network HDD Live View Exceptions User RS 232 RAD POSFigure 264, Configure HDD Error Alarm
-
When Trigger 4 alarm Output is selected, you can also select the alarm output to be triggered from the list below.
-
Click 4pply to save the settings.
15 Camera Settings
15.1 Configuring OSD Settings
Purpose
Configure the OSD (On-Screen Display) settings for the camera, including date/time, camera name, etc. as follows.
- Go to Menu > Cameras Setup > OSD.
- Select the camera for which to configure OSD settings.
- Edit the <amera Name in the text field.
- Configure the 'isplay Name, 'isplay 'ate, and 'isplay Week by checking the checkbox.
- Select the Date Format, Time Format, Display Mode, and the OSD Font.

text_image
Cameras Setup Camera [A1] Camera 01 Camera Name Camera 01 Display Name ✓ Display Date ✓ Display Week ✓ Date Format MM-DD-YYYY Time Format 24-hour Display Mode Non-Transparent & Not Flash OSD Font 32x32 NO VIDEO Copy Apply
Figure 265, OSD Configuration Interface
-
se the mouse to drag the text frame on the preview window to adjust the OSD position.
- Copy Camera Settings
1) =o copy the OSD settings of the current camera to other cameras, click <opy to enter the <opy <camera interface.

text_image
Copy to Analog A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 OK Cancel
Figure 266, Copy Settings to Other Cameras
2) Select the camera(s) to be configured with the same OSD settings. You can also check the 4nalog checkbox to select all cameras.
3) Click OK to finish the <opy settings and go back to the OS' <configuration interface.
- Click 4pply to apply the settings.
15.2 Configuring ≤rivacy Mask
Purpose
To configure the four-sided privacy mask zones that cannot be viewed or recorded by the operator as follows.
-
Go to Menu > Cameras Setup > ≤ rivacy Mask.
-
Select the camera to set privacy mask.
-
Check the Enable Privacy Mask checkbox to enable this feature.

text_image
Cameras Setup Camera [A1] Camera 01 Enable Privacy Mask Zone Setting Clear All Clear Zone 1 Clear Zone 2 Clear Zone 3 Clear Zone 4 Video Tampering De... Video Loss VCA Video Quality Diagn... NO VIDEO Copy ApplyFigure 267, ≤rivacy Mask Settings Interface
- Use the mouse to draw a zone on the window. The zones will be marked with different frame colors.

NOTE
Up to four privacy mask zones can be defined, and the size of each area can be adjusted.
-
The configured privacy mask zones on the window can be cleared by clicking the corresponding <lear Zone1-4 icons on the right side of the window, or click <lear All to clear all zones.
-
You can click
to copy the privacy mask settings of the current camera to other cameras. -
Click Apply to save the settings.
15.3 Configuring Video ≤ parameters
15.3.1 Configuring Image Settings
- Go to Menu > Cameras Setup > Image > Image Settings.

text_image
Cameras Setup Image Settings Camera Parameters Settings Camera [A] Camera 01 Time Segment 00:00-24:00 Mode Standard Brightness 128 Contrast 128 Saturation 128 Hue 128 Sharpness 1 Denoising 2 NO VIDEO Default Copy ApplyFigure 268, Image Settings Interface
-
Select the camera for which to set image parameters.
-
Two periods for different image settings are provided. Select the period name in the drop-down list.

NOTE
The time periods cannot overlap.
- Select the mode from the drop-down list of Mode, there are four modes selectable for analog cameras: Standard, Indoor, Dim Light, and Outdoor.
- Adjust the image parameters according to actual need s. The parameters include Brightness, Contrast, Saturation, Hue, Sharpness, and Denoising for analog cameras and Brightness, Contrast, and Saturation for I ≤ cameras. You can click Restore to set the parameters to the default settings.
- Click <opy to copy the image settings of the current camera to other cameras.
- Click 4pply to save the settings.
15.3.2 Configuring Camera ≤ parameters Settings
- Go to Menu > Camera > Image > Camera ≤ parameters Settings.

text_image
Cameras Setup Image Settings Camera Parameters Settings! Camera [A1] Camera 01 Signal Switch Not Support Enable Defog Day to Night Sensitivity... 1 Night to Day Sensitivity... 1 IR Light Brightness 1 Defog Level 1 Day/Night Mode Not Support WDR Switch Default Copy Apply CAMeras OSD Image PTZ Privacy Mask Video Tampering De... Video Loss VCA Video Cuality Diagn...Figure 269, Camera ≤ parameters Settings
- Select the <amera from the drop-down list.
- Configure the parameters.
1) Switch the 4 +≤ or 5 +≤ signal from the Signal Switch drop-down list. 4 +≤ 25/30 fps and 5 +≤ 20 fps are selectable. =he 4 +≤ 25 fps and 4 +≤ 30 fps signals are self-adaptive for the camera.
2) Check Enable Defog to enable the defog function of the selected camera, and set the Defog Level from 1 to 4.
3) Adjust the parameters including Day to ×ight Sensitivity, ×ight to Day Sensitivity, and IR Light Brightness for the analog cameras.
4) Select the Day/Night Mode of the camera from the drop-down list.
5) Check the WDR Switch checkbox to enable the function of the camera.
- (Optional) Click Default to set the parameters to the default settings.
- (Optional) Click <opy to copy the parameters of the current camera to other analog cameras.
- Click 4pply to save the settings.
i NOTE
=he camera parameters settings is applicable only for analog cameras.
=he 4 +≤/5 +≤ Signal Switch, Defog, Day to ×ight Sensitivity, ×ight to Day Sensitivity, IR Light Brightness, Day/×ight +ode, and VDR Switch functions must be supported by the connected analog camera. You
cannot set the parameters if the connected analog camera does not support them or there is no video signal.
The parameters are saved to the connected analog camera and are not saved to the DVR.
The default value of Day to Night Sensitivity, Night to Day Sensitivity, and IR Light Brightness is 5. The effective values range from 1 to 9.
If you exit from the interface and enter it again, the parameters displayed are those you set the last time.
The DVR connects to the analog camera via Hikvision-C protocol and there is no response mechanism. Even if the Hikvision-C protocol is abnormal, the parameters are still displayed to be set successfully.
16 DVR Management and Maintenance
16.1 Viewing System Information
-
Go to Menu > Maintenance > System Info.
-
Click the 'evice Info, <amera, Record, 4larm, Network, and H" tabs to view the system information of the device.

text_image
System Information Device Info Camera Record Alarm Network HDD Device Name Embedded Net DVR Model DS-7316HUI-K4 Serial No. 1620176724CCWR800405981WCVL Firmware Version V3.5.25, Build 170724 Hardware Version 0xa4100 Please scan the QR code via VMS client. QR code
Figure 270, System Information Interface
16.2 Searching Log Files
Purpose
The operation, alarm, exception, and information of the DVR can be stored in log files, which can be viewed and exported at any time.
- Go to Menu > Maintenance > Log Information.

text_image
System Maintenance System Logs Import/Export Upgrade Default Network Detect HDD Detect Start Time 09-23-2017 00:00:00 End Time 09-23-2017 23:59:59 Major Type All Minor Type Alarm Input Alarm Output Motion Detection Started Motion Detection Stopped Video Tampering Detection Started Video Tampering Detection Stopped POS Started POS Stopped Export All SearchFigure 271, Log Search Interface
- Set the log search conditions to refine your search, including the Start =ime, End =ime, +ajor =ype, and +inor =ype.
- Click Search to start searching the log files.
- +atched log files will be displayed on the list shown below.

NOTE
p to 2000 log files can be displayed each time.

text_image
Search Result No. Major Type Time Minor Type Parameter Play Details 1 Information 10-07-2015 09:53:59 Local HDD Infor... N/A 2 Operation 10-07-2015 09:53:59 Power On N/A 3 Information 10-07-2015 09:54:05 Start Recording N/A 4 Operation 10-07-2015 09:54:08 Local Operation... N/A 5 Information 10-07-2015 09:54:25 HDD S.M.A.R.T. N/A 6 Information 10-07-2015 09:54:32 Start Recording N/A 7 Operation 10-07-2015 09:54:32 Local Operation... N/A 8 Operation 10-07-2015 09:54:32 Local Operation... N/A 9 Exception 10-07-2015 09:55:32 IP Camera Disco... N/A 10 Information 10-07-2015 10:04:09 System Running... N/A Total: 2000 P: 1/20 Export BackFigure 272, Log Search Results
- Click of each log or double-click it to view its detailed information. You can also click Go view the related video files if available.

text_image
Log Information Time 11-12-2015 08:52:15 Type Information--Local HDD Information Local User N/A Host IP Address N/A Parameter Type N/A HDD 1 Description: HDD: 1 Serial: WD-WCAV58050978 Firmware: 01.00A01 Model: WDC WD10EVVS-63M5B0 Previous Next OKFigure 273, Log Information Interface
- =o export the log files, click Export to enter the Export menu, as shown below.

text_image
Export Device Name USB Flash Disk 1-1 *.mp4;*.zip Refresh Name Size Type Edit Date Delete Play Final Data Folder 01-12-2013 09:29:56 ch01_2015071600... 992.56MB File 16-07-2015 14:12:16 ch02_2015071613... 76.55MB File 16-07-2015 14:13:22 Free Space 6367.23MB New Folder Format Export BackFigure 274, Export Log Files
-
Select the backup device from the 'evice Name drop-down list.
-
Click Export to export the log files to the selected backup device. You can click New "older" to create a new folder in the backup device, or click "ormat" to format the backup device before log export.

NOTE
Connect the backup device to the DVR before operating log export.
=he log files exported to the backup device are named by export time, e.g., 20110514124841logBack.txt.
16.3 Importing/Exporting I≤ Camera Info
Purpose
The added I≤ camera information can be saved into a Microsoft Excel file and exported to the local device for backup, including the I≤ address, manage port, admin password, etc. The exported file can be edited on a ≤C, like adding or deleting the content, and copy the setting to other devices by importing the Excel file to it.
- Go to Menu > Camera > Camera > I ≤ Camera Import/Export.
-
Click Export to export configuration files to the selected local backup device.
-
To import a configuration file, select the file from the selected backup device and click Import. After the importing process is completed, you must reboot the DVR.
16.4 Importing/Exporting Configuration Files
Purpose
The DVR configuration files can be exported to a local device for backup, and the configuration files of one DVR can be imported to multiple DVR devices if they are to be configured with the same parameters.
- Go to Menu > Maintenance > Import/Export.

text_image
System Maintenance Device Name USB Flash Disk 1-1 2.bin Refresh Name Size Type Eot Date Dmole Play 1.jpg Folder 11-09-2016 08:35:22 2.jpg Folder 11-08-2016 09:36:04 3 Folder 11-08-2016 10:23:16 GUID_622098083_201... 128B File 11-23-2016 14:24:38 TVR45HD_config_2016... 6252.26KB File 11-07-2016 18:04:28 Free Space 14.50GB New Folder Import ExportFigure 275, Import/Export Configuration File
-
Click Export to export configuration files to the selected local backup device.
-
To import a configuration file, select the file from the selected backup device and click Import. After the import process is completed, you must reboot the DVR.

NOTE
After finishing importing configuration files, the device will reboot automatically.
16.5 Upgrading System
Purpose
The firmware on your DVR can be upgraded by a local backup device or remote FT≤ server.
16.5.1 Upgrading by Local Backup Device
- Connect your DVR to a local backup device with the updated firmware file.
- Go to Menu > Maintenance > Upgrade > Local Upgrade.

text_image
System Maintenance Device Name USB Flash Disk 1-1 "avr,*.mav Refresh Name Size Type Edit Date Delete Play 1.jpg Folder 11.08-2016 09:35:22 7.jpg Folder 11.08-2016 09:16:04 3 Folder 11.08-2016 10:23:16 Default Network Detected HDD Detected UpgradeFigure 276, Local Upgrade Interface
- Select the update file from the backup device.
- Click Upgrade to start upgrading.
- After upgrading is done, reboot the DVR to activate the new firmware.
16.5.2 Upgrading by FT≤
+efore You Start
Configure ≤C (running FT≤ server) and DVR to the same LAN. Run third-party TFT≤ software on the ≤C and copy the firmware to TFT≤ root directory.
- Go to Menu > Maintenance > Upgrade > FT≤.

text_image
System Maintenance Local Upgrade FTP Upgrade Camera Upgrade FTP Server Address Upgrade Default Network Detect HDD Defect UpgradeFigure 277, FT≤ Upgrade Interface
- Enter the FT≤ Server Address in the text field.
- Click Upgrade to start upgrading.
- After upgrading is complete, reboot the DVR to activate the new firmware.
16.6 Upgrading Camera
Purpose
You can upgrade multiple connected analog cameras supporting TurboHD signal simultaneously with the DVR.
- Go to Menu > Maintenance > Upgrade > Camera Upgrade.

text_image
System Maintenance Local Upgrade FTP Upgrade Camera Upgrade Analog Device Name Size Type Edit Date Delete Play Name Refresh UpgradeFigure 278, Camera Upgrade
- Check the checkbox(es) of the analog camera(s) for upgrading.

NOTE
The analog camera must support TurboHD signal.
-
Select the update file from the backup device.
-
Click Upgrade to start upgrading.
16.7 Restoring Default Settings
- Go to Menu > Maintenance > Default.

text_image
System Maintenance System Logs Import/Export Upgrade Default Network Detect HDD Detect Restore Defaults Simply restore the settings. Factory Defaults Restore all parameters to default settings. Restore to inactive Restore the device to inactive status.Figure 279, Restore Defaults
- Select the restoring type from the following three options.
Restore 'efaults/ Restore all parameters, except the network (including I≤ address, subnet mask, gateway, MTU, NIC working mode, default route, server port, etc.) and user account parameters, to the factory default settings.
"factory 'efaults/ Restore all parameters to the factory default settings.
Restore to Inactive/ Restore the device to the inactive status.
- Click OK to restore the default settings.

NOTE
The device will reboot automatically after restoring to the default settings.
17 Other
17.1 Configuring General Settings
Purpose
You can configure the output resolution, system time, mouse pointer speed, etc.
- Go to Menu > System Configuration > General > Genera I.

text_image
System Configuration Time/Date Display More Settings Language English Output Standard NTSC VGA/HDMI Resolution 1280*1024/60HZ Mouse Pointer Speed Double Click Speed Enable Password *Double-click on a blank area to test click speed.Figure 280, General Settings Interface
- Configure the following settings:
• Language: The default language used is English.
• Output Standard: Select the output standard to be ≤AL or NTSC.
- VG4/HDMI Resolution: Select the output resolution, which must be the same as the resolution of the VGA/HDMI display.

NOTE
VG4/HDMI1 Resolution and HDMI2 Resolution can be configured separately. Up to 1920 × 1080/60 Hz resolution is supported for VGA/HDMI1 output and up to 4K (3840 × 2160)/30 Hz resolution is supported for HDMI2 output.
• Time Zone: Select the time zone.
- Date Format: Select the date format.
• System Date: Select the system date.
• System Time: Select the system time.
- Mouse Pointer Speed: Set the speed of mouse pointer; four levels are configurable.
- Enable Password: Enable/disable the use of the login password.

text_image
System Configuration Time/Date Display More Settings Time/Date Date Format MM-DD-YYYY System Date 06-05-2017 System Time 16:41:52 Time Zone Time Zone (GMT-08:00) Pacific Time(U.S. & C Enable DST Customize Enable NTP Interval (min) 50 NTP Server: NTP Port 123 ApplyFigure 281, Time/Date Setting

NOTE
If you check the Enable Password checkbox, every time you log in to the DVR, the Unlock ≤attern interface will appear. If you uncheck the Enable Password checkbox, when you log in to the DVR, the Unlock ≤attern interface will not appear.
- Click 4pply to save the settings.
17.2 Configuring RS-232 Serial ≤ort
Purpose
The RS-232 port can be used in two ways:
- Parameters <configuration/ Connect a ≤C to the DVR through the ≤C serial port. Device parameters can be configured by using software such as HyperTerminal. The serial port parameters must be the same as the DVR's when connecting with the ≤C serial port.
- Transparent <channel/ Connect a serial device directly to the DVR. It will be controlled remotely by the ≤C through the network and the protocol of the serial device.
- Go to Menu > System Configuration > RS-232.

text_image
System Configuration General Network HDD Live View Exceptions User RIS-233 RAID POS Baud Rate 115200 Data Bit 8 Stop Bit 1 Parity None Flow Ctrl None Usage Console ApplyFigure 282, RS-232 Settings Interface
- Configure RS-232 parameters (baud rate, data bit, stop bit, parity, flow control, usage).
- Click 4pply to save the settings.
17.3 Configuring DST Settings
- Go to Menu > System Configuration > General > DST Settings.

text_image
System Configuration Time/Date Display More Settings Time/Date DST Settings Auto DST Adjustment From Mar 2nd Sun D 80 To Nov 1st Sun 2 80 DST Bits 50 Minutes Apply OK Cancel ApplyFigure 283, DST Settings Interface
- Check the checkbox before the 4uto 'ST 4adjustment item, or manually check the Enable 'ST checkbox and choose the date of the DST period.
17.4 Configuring More Settings
- Go to Menu > System Configuration > General > More Settings.

text_image
System Configuration Time/Date Display More Settings General Network HDD Live View Exceptions User Device Name Embedded Net DVR Device No. 255 CVBS Output Brightness Auto Logout 5 Minutes Menu Output Mode Auto Enhanced VCA ModeFigure 284, +ore Settings Interface
- Configure the following settings:
• Device Name: Edit the name of the DVR.
- Device No.: Edit the DVR serial number. =he Device ×o. can be set in the range of 1 to 255, and the default ×o. is 255.
- 4uto Logout: Set timeout time for menu inactivity. E.g., when the timeout time is set to 5 Minutes, the system will exit from the current operation menu to live view screen after 5 minutes of menu inactivity.
- <V+S Output +rightness: Adjust the video output brightness via the CVBS interface.
- Menu Output Mode: You can choose the menu display on different video output. 4uto, HDMI1/VG4, and HDMI2 are selectable.
- Enhanced V<4 Mode: =he enhanced VCA mode conflicts with the 2K/4K output and 4 +≤/5 +≤ signal input. You can enable or disable VCA mode.
Enable Enhanced V<4 Mode
1) Check the checkbox to enable enhanced VCA mode.
2) Click 4pply and the attention box pops up as below.

text_image
Attention ? Enhanced VCA mode will enable all-channel line crossing detection and intrusion detection, and disable 4 MP/5 MP signal input. New settings will take effect after reboot. Click "Yes" to reboot now or "No" to restore the olds settings. Yes NoFigure 285, Enable Enhanced VCA +ode (1)

text_image
Attention Enhanced VCA mode will enable all-channel line crossing detection and intrusion detection, and disable 4 MP/5 MP signal input. New settings will take effect after reboot. Click "Yes" to reboot now or "No" to restore the olds settings. Yes NoFigure 286, Enable Enhanced VCA +ode (2)
3) Click Yes to apply the function and reboot the device.
'isable Enhanced V<4 Mode
1) >ncheck the checkbox to disable enhanced VCA mode.
2) Click 4pply and the attention box pops up as below.

text_image
Attention Disable enhanced VCA mode, and the line crossing detection and intrusion detection will be supported by 2-ch only. New settings will take effect after reboot. Click "Yes" to reboot now or "No" to restore the old settings. Yes NoFigure 287, Disable Enhanced VCA +ode (1)

text_image
Attention Disable enhanced VCA mode, the 4 MP/5 MP signal input will be supported, and the line crossing detection and intrusion detection will be supported by 2-ch only. New settings will take effect after reboot. Click "Yes" to reboot now or "No" to restore the olds settings. Yes NoFigure 288, Disable Enhanced VCA +ode (2)
3) Click Yes to apply the function and reboot the device.

NOTE
If you have configured 2K/4K output, or connected 4 +≤/5 +≤ signal input, when you enable enhanced VCA mode and the device reboots, the output resolution will decrease to 1080p, and the 4 +≤/5 +≤ signal input will display no video.
- Click 4pply to save the settings.
17.5 Managing User Accounts
Purpose
There is a default account in the DVR: Administrator. The Administrator user name is admin and the password is set when you start the device for the first time. The Administrator has permission to add and delete users and configure user parameters.
17.5.1 Adding a User
- Go to Menu > System Configuration > User.

text_image
System Configuration User Management No. User Name Security Level User's MAC Address Par Edit Delete admin Weak Pass Admin 00:00:00:00:00 AddFigure 289, User Management Interface
- Click Add to enter the Add User interface.

text_image
Add User User Name manager Password 12345678a Weak Confirm ****** Level Guest User's IP Address 0 .0 .0 .0 User's MAC Address 00 :00 :00 :00 :00 :00 ✓ Valid password range [8-16]. You can use a combination of numbers, lowercase, uppercase and special character for your password with at least two kinds of them contained. OK CancelFigure 290, Add User Menu
- Enter information for the new user, including User Name, Password, <onfirm, Level, and User's M4< 4address.
- Password: Set the password for the user account.

WARNING
STRON" P4SSWORD RE<OMMENDED – ve highly recommend you create a strong password of your own choosing (using a minimum of eight characters, including at least three of the following categories: upper case letters, lower case letters, numbers, and special characters) in order to increase the security of your product. ve also recommend that you reset your password regularly. Especially in a high security system, resetting the password monthly or weekly can better protect your product.
- Level/ Set the user level to Operator or Guest. Different user levels have different operating permission.
- Operator/ =he Operator user level has permission of =wo-way Audio in Remote Configuration and all operating permissions in Camera Configuration by default.
- "uest/ =he Guest user has no permission of =wo-way Audio in Remote Configuration and only has the local/remote playback in the Camera Configuration by default.
- User's M4< 4address/ =he +AC address of the remote ≤C that logs onto the DVR. If it is configured and enabled, it allows only the remote user with this +AC address to access the DVR.
- Click O K to save the settings and go back to the User Management interface. =he added new user will be displayed on the list, as shown below.

text_image
User Management No. User Name Security Level User's MAC Address Per... Edit Delete 1 admin Strong Pas... Admin 00:00:00:00:00 00:00:00:00:00 00:00:00:00:00 00:00:00:00:00 00:00:00:00:00 00:00:00:00:00 00:00:00:00:00 00:00:00
Figure 291, Added >ser Listed in >ser +anagement Interface
- You can assign permissions for the added user.
1) Select the user from the list and then click to enter the Permission Settings interface, as shown below.

text_image
Permission Local Configuration Remote Configuration Camera Configuration ✓ Local Log Search □ Local Parameters Settings □ Local Camera Management □ Local Advanced Operation □ Local Shutdown / Reboot Apply OK CancelFigure 292, >ser ≤ermission Settings Interface
2) Set the operating permission of Local Configuration, Remote Configuration, and Camera Configuration for the user.
Local
- Local Log Search: Searching and viewing logs and system information of device
- Local Parameters Settings: Configuring parameters, restoring factory default parameters and importing/exporting configuration files
- Local Remote
- Remote Log Search: Remotely viewing logs that are saved on the device
- Remote Parameters Settings: Remotely configuring parameters, restoring factory default parameters, and importing/exporting configuration files
- Remote
- Remote Live View: Remotely viewing live video of the selected camera(s)
- Local Manual Operation: Locally starting/stopping manual recording, picture capturing, and alarm output of the selected camera(s)
- Remote Manual Operation: Remotely starting/stopping manual recording, picture capturing, and alarm output of the selected camera(s)
- Local Playback: Locally playing back recorded files of the selected camera(s)
- Remote Playback: Remotely playing back recorded files of the selected camera(s)
- Local PTZ NOTE
Local Camera Management is provided for I ≤ cameras only.
- Click OK to save the settings and exit.
17.5.2 Deleting a User
- Go to Menu > System Configuration > User.
- Select the user to be deleted from the list, as shown below.

text_image
User Management No. User Name Security Level User's MAC Address Per... Edit Delete 1 admin Strong Pas... Admin 00:00:00:00:00:00 - - - 2 example 1 Strong Pas... Guest 00:00:00:00:00:00 - - -Figure 293, User List
- Click to delete the selected user account.
17.5.3 Editing a User
Purpose
For the added user accounts, you can edit the parameters.
- Go to Menu > System Configuration > User.
-
Select the user to be edited from the list.
-
Click 📋 to enter the Edit User interface, as shown below.

text_image
Edit User User Name Change Password Password Confirm Level Operator User's IP Address 0 .0 .0 .0 User's MAC Address 00 :00 :00 :00 :00 :00 ✓ Valid password range [8-16]. You can use a combination of numbers, lowercase, uppercase and special character for your password with at least two kinds of them contained. OK CancelFigure 294, Edit User Interface
- Edit the corresponding parameters.
- Operator and "uest
You can edit user information, including user name, password, permission level, and MAC address. Check <change Password checkbox to change the password; input new password in Password and <onfirm text fields. A strong password is recommended.
- 4dmin
You are allowed only to edit the password and +AC address. Check the <change Password checkbox if you want to change the password, and input the correct old password and the new password in the Password and <onfirm text field.

WARNING
STRON" P4SSWOR' RE<OMMEN'E' – ve highly recommend you create a strong password of your own choosing (using a minimum of eight characters, including at least three of the following categories: upper case letters, lower case letters, numbers, and special characters) in order to increase the security of your product. ve also recommend you reset your password regularly. Especially in a high security system, resetting the password monthly or weekly can better protect your product.

NOTE
Hold down the icon to see the clear text of the password. Release the mouse and the content of the password again becomes invisible.
- Edit the unlock pattern for the admin user account.
1) Check the Enable Unlock Pattern checkbox to enable the use of the unlock pattern when logging in to the device.
2) >se the mouse to draw a pattern among the nine dots on the screen. Release the mouse when the pattern is done.
3) Confirm the pattern again with the mouse.

text_image
Set Unlock Pattern Draw the unlock pattern first.Figure 295, Set >nlock ≤atter for Admin >ser
- (Optional) Click 🙏 after 'raw Unlock Pattern to modify the pattern.
- (Optional) Click 🙏 after Export "UI" to display the Reset ≤assword interface. Click Export to export the G>ID to the >SB flash drive to retrieve a forgotten password. A G>ID file will be saved.

text_image
Read Password Device Name: USB Flash Disk 1-1 Name Size Type Edit Date Delete Play 1.8.mp 6750.06KB File 09-03-2016 11:47:04 10.mp 6750.06KB File 09-06-2016 10:20:07 11.mp 6750.06KB File 09-06-2016 10:20:15 12.mp 6750.06KB File 09-06-2016 10:20:19 13.mp 6750.06KB File 09-06-2016 11:47:01 14.mp 6750.06KB File 09-06-2016 11:47:08 15.mp 6750.06KB File 09-06-2016 11:47:13 Free Splice 14.28GB New Folder Export BackFigure 296, Export G>ID

NOTE
Input the correct old password of the admin before exporting the G>ID.
-
Click OK to save the settings and exit from the menu.
-
(Optional) For the Operator or "uest user account, you can also click on the User Management interface to edit the permission.

18 Appendix
18.1 Specifications
18.1.1 DS-73xxHUI-K4
| Model | DS-7304HUI-K4 | DS-7308HUI-K4 | DS-7316HUI-K4 | |
| Video/Audio Input | Video Compression | H.265+/H.265/H.264+/H.264 | ||
| Analog Video Input | 4-ch | 8-ch | 16-ch | |
| BNC interface (1.0 Vp-p, 75 Ω), supporting Hikvision-C connection | ||||
| HDTV1 Input | 5 MP, 4 MP, 3 MP, 1080p25, 1080p30, 720p25, 720p30, 720p50, 720p6 | |||
| CVBS Input | Supported | |||
| IP Video Input | 2-ch (up to 6-ch) | 2-ch (up to 10-ch) | 2-ch (up to 18-ch) | |
| Up to 8 MP resolution | ||||
| Supports H.265+/H.265/H.264+/H.264 IP cameras | ||||
| Network Bandwidth | 200 Mbps | 260 Mbps | ||
| Audio Compression | G.711u | |||
| Audio Input | 4-ch, RCA (2.0 Vp-p, 1 KΩ) | |||
| Video/Audio Output | CVBS Output | 1-ch, BNC (1.0 Vp-p, 75 Ω), resolution: PAL: 704 × 576, NTSC: 704 × 480 | ||
| HDMI1/VGAOutput | 1-ch, 1920 × 1080/6C Hz, 1280 × 1024/6C Hz, 1280 × 720/6C Hz, 1024 × 768/6C Hz | |||
| HDMI2 Output | 1-ch, 4K (3840 × 2160)/3C Hz, 2K (2560 × 1440)/6C Hz, 1920 × 1080/6C Hz, 1280 × 1024/6C Hz, 1280 × 720/6C Hz, 1024 × 768/6C Hz | |||
| Encoding Resolution | 5 MP/4 MP/3 MP/1080p/720p/VD1/4CIF/VGA/CI | |||
| Frame Rate | Main stream: 5 MP @ 12 fps; 4 MP @ 15 fps; 3 MP @ 18 fps; 1080p/720p/VD1/4CIF/VGA/CIF @ 25 fps (P)/30 fps (N) | |||
| Sub-stream: VD1/4CIF/CIF @ 25 fps (P)/3Cfps (N) | ||||
| Video Bit Rate | 32 Kbps to 10 Mbps | |||
| Audio Output | 2-ch, RCA (Linear, 1 KΩ) | |||
| Audio Bit Rate | 64 Kbps | |||
| Dual Stream | Supported | |||
| Stream Type | Video, Video & Audio | |||
| Synchronous Playback | 4-ch | 8-ch | 16-ch | |
| Network Management | Remote Connections | 128 | ||
| Network Protocols | TCP/IP, PPPoE, DHCP,Hik-Connect, DNS, DDNS, NTP, SADP, NFS, iSGSI, UPnPTM, HTTPS, ONVIF, SNMP | |||
| Hard Disk | SATA | 4 SATA interfaces | ||
| eSATA | Supported | |||
| Capacity | Up to 8 TB capacity for each disk | |||
| Disk Array | Array type | RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 5, RAID 6, RAID 10 | ||
| External Interface | Two-wayAudio Input | 1-ch, RCA (2.0 Vp-p, 1 KΩ) (independent) | ||
| Network Interface | 2, RJ-45 10M/100M/1000M self-adaptive Ethernet interface | |||
| USB Interface | Front panel: 2 ×USB 2.0Rear panel: 1 × USB 3.0 | |||
| Serial Interface | RS-232, RS-485 (full -duplex), keyboard | |||
| Alarm In/Out | 16/4 | |||
| General | Power Supply | 100 to 240 VAC | ||
| Consumption (w/o HDD) | ≤35 V ≤45 V ≤65 V | |||
| Vorking Temperature | -10° to +55°C (+14° to +131°F) | |||
| Vorking Humidity | 10% to 90% | |||
| Dimensions (V × D × H) | 445 × 390 × 70 mm (17.5 × 15.4 × 2.8 inch) | |||
| Weight (w/o HDD) | ≤ 5 kg (11.0 lb) | |||
| Model | DS-9008HUI-K8 | DS-9016HUI-K8 | |
| Video/Audio Input | Video Compression | H.265+/H.265/H.264+/H.264 | |
| Analog Video Input | 8-ch | 16-ch | |
| BNC interface (1.0 Vp-p, 75 Ω), supporting Hikvision-C connection | |||
| HDTV1 Input | 5 MP, 4 MP, 3 MP,1080p25, 1080p30, 720p25, 720p30, 720p50, 720p60 | ||
| CVBS Input | Supported | ||
| IP Video Input | 10-ch (up to 18-ch) | 18-ch (up to 32-ch) | |
| Up to 12 MP resolution | |||
| Supports H.265+/H.265/H.264+/H.264 IP cameras | |||
| Network Bandwidth | 260 Mbps | 320 Mbps | |
| Audio Compression | G.711u | ||
| Audio Input | 8-ch | 16-ch | |
| RCA (2.0 Vp-p, 1 KΩ) | |||
| Video/Audio Output | CVBS Output | 1-ch, BNC (1.0 Vp-p, 75 Ω), resolution: PAL: 704 × 576, NTSC: 704 × 480 | |
| HDMI1/VGA Output | 1-ch, 1920 × 1080/60Hz, 1280 × 1024/6 Hz, 1280 ×720/6C Hz, 1024 × 768/6Hz | ||
| HDMI2 Output | 1-ch, 4K (3840 × 2160)/3CHz, 2K (2560 × 1440)/6C Hz, 1920 × 1080/6C Hz, 1280 × 1024/6Hz, 1280 × 720/6C Hz, 1024 × 768/6C Hz | ||
| Video Loop | Supported | ||
| Encoding Resolution | 5 MP/4 MP/3 MP/1080p/720p/VD1/4CIF/VGA/CI | ||
| Frame Rate | Main stream: 5 MP @ 12 fps; 4 MP @ 15 fps; 3 MP @ 18 fps; 1080p/720p/VD1/4CIF/VGA/CIF @25 fps (P)/3C fps (N) | ||
| Sub-stream: VD1/4CIF/CIF @ 25 fps (P)/30 fps (N) | |||
| Video Bit Rate | 32 Kbps to 10 Mbps | ||
| Audio Output | 2-ch, RCA (Linear, 1KΩ) | ||
| Audio Bit Rate | 64 Kbps | ||
| Dual Stream | Support | ||
| Stream Type | Video, Video & Audio | ||
| Synchronous Playback | 8-ch | 16-ch | |
| Network Management | Remote Connections | 128 | |
| Network Protocols | TCP/IP, PPPoE, DHCP,Hik-Connect, DNS, DDNS, NTP, SADP, NFS, iSCSI, UPiPTM, HTTPS, ONVIF, SNMP | ||
| Hard Disk | SATA | 8 SATA interfaces | |
| eSATA | Supported | ||
| Capacity | Up to 8 TB capacityfor each disk. | ||
| Disk Array | Array Type | RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 5, RAID 6, RAID 10 | |
| External Interface | Two-Vay Audio Input | 1-ch, RCA (2.0 Vp-p, 1 KΩ) (independent) | |
| Network Interface | 2, RJ-45 10M/100M/1000M self-adaptive Ethernet interface | ||
| USB Interface | Front panel: 2× USB 2.0Rear panel: 1× USB 3.0 | ||
| Serial Interface | RS-232, RS-485 (full-duplex),keyboard | ||
| Alarm In/Out | 16/8 | ||
| General | Power Supply | 100 to 240 VAC | |
| Consumption (w/o HDD) | ≤45 √ ≤65 √ | ||
| Vorking Temperature | -10° to +55°C (+14° to +131°F) | ||
| Vorking Humidity | 10% to 90% | ||
| Dimensions (V × D × H) | 445 × 470 × 90 mm (17.5 × 18.5 × 3.5 inch) | ||
| Weight (w/o HDD) | ≤8 kg (17.6 lb) | ||
18.1.3 DS-73xxHQI-K4
| Model | DS-7304HQI-K4 | DS-7308HQI-K4 | DS-7316HQI-K4 | |
| Video/Audio Input | Video Compression | H.265+/H.265/H.264+/H.264 | ||
| Analog Video Input | 4-ch | 8-ch | 16-ch | |
| BNC interface (1.0 Vp-p, 75 Ω), supporting Hikvision-C connection | ||||
| HDTV1 Input | 3 MP, 1080p25, 1080p30, 720p25, 720p30, 720p50, 720p60Note: The 3 MP signal input is available only for channel 1 of DS-7304HQI-K4, channel 1/2 of DS-7308HQI-K4, and channel 1/2/3/4 of DS-7316HQI-K4. | |||
| CVBS Input | PAL/NTSC | |||
| IP Video Input | 2-ch (up to 6-ch) | 2-ch (up to 10-ch) | 2-ch (up to 18-ch) | |
| Up to 4 MP resolution | ||||
| Supports H.265+/H.265/H.264+/H.264 IP cameras | ||||
| Audio Compression | G.711u | |||
| Audio Input | 4-ch, RCA (2.0 Vp-p, 1 KΩ) | |||
| Video/Audio Output | CVBS Output | 1-ch, BNC (1.0 Vp-p, 75 Ω), resolution: PAL: 704 × 576, NTSC: 704 × 480 | ||
| HDMI/VGA Output | HDMI: 1-ch, 4K (3840 × 2160)/30 Hz, 2K (2560 × 1440)/60 Hz, 1920 × 1080/60 Hz, 1280 × 1024/60 Hz, 1280 × 720/60 Hz, 1024 × 768/60 Hz | |||
| VGA: 1-ch, 1920 × 1080/60 Hz, 1280 × 1024/60 Hz, 1280 × 720/60 Hz, 1024 × 768/60 Hz | ||||
| Encoding Resolution | vhen 1080p Lite mode not enabled: 3 MP/1080p/720p/VGA/vD1/4CIF/CIFvhen 1080p Lite mode enabled: 3 MP/1080p lite/720p lit e/VGA/vD1/4CIF/CIF | |||
| Frame Rate | Main stream: vhen 1080p Lite mode not enabled:For 3 MP stream access: 3 MP/1080p/720p/VGA/vD1/4CIF/CIF @ 15 fpsFor 1080p stream access: 1080p/720p @ 15 fps; VGA/vD1/4CIF/CIF @ 25 fps (P)/30 fps (N)For 720p stream access: 720p/VGA/vD1/4CIF/CIF @ 25 fps (P)/30 fps (N)vhen 1080p Lite mode enabled:3 MP @ 15 fps1080p lite/720p lite/VGA/vD1/4CIF/CIF @ 25fps (P)/30 fps (N) | |||
| Sub-stream: vD1/4CIF @ 12 fps; CIF @ 25 fps (P)/30 fps (N) | ||||
| Video Bit Rate | 32 Kbps to 6 Mbps | |||
| Audio Output | 2-ch, RCA (linear, 1 KΩ) | |||
| Audio Bit Rate | 64 Kbps | |||
| Dual Stream | Supported | |||
| Stream Type | Video, Video & Audio | |||
| Synchronous Playback | 4-ch | 8-ch | 16-ch | |
| Network Management | Remote Connections | 128 | ||
| Network Protocols | TCP/IP, PPPoE, DHCP, Hik-Connect, DNS, DDNS, NTP, SADP, NFS, iSCSI, UPnPTM, HTTPS, ONVIF | |||
| Hard Disk | SATA | 4 SATA interfaces | ||
| eSATA | Supported | |||
| Capacity | Up to 8 TB capacity for each disk | |||
| External Interface | Two-Vay Audio Input | 1-ch, RCA (2.0 Vp-p, 1 KΩ) (independent) | ||
| Network Interface | 1, RJ-45 10M/100M/1000M self-adaptive Ethernet interface | |||
| USB Interface | Front panel: 2 × USB 2.0Rear panel: 1 × USB 3.0 | |||
| Serial Interface | RS-232, RS 485 (full-duplex), keyboard | |||
| Alarm In/Out | 16/4 | |||
| General | Power Supply | 100 to 240 VAC | ||
| Consumption (w/o HDD) | ≤30 √ | ≤40 √ | ≤55 √ | |
| Vorking Temperature | -10 to +55°C (+14 to +131°F) | |||
| Vorking Humidity | 10% to 90% | |||
| Dimensions (V × D × H) | 445 mm × 390 mm × 70 mm (17.5" × 15.4" × 2.8") | |||
| Weight ( w/o HDD) | ≤5 kg (11.0 lb) | |||
18.2 Glossary
- Dual-Stream: A technology used to record high resolution video locally while transmitting a lower resolution stream over the network. =he two streams are generated by the DVR, with the main stream having a maximum resolution of 1080p and the sub-stream having a maximum resolution of CIF.
- DVR: Digital Video Recorder. A DVR is device that is able to accept video signals from analog cameras, compress the signal and store it on its hard drives.
- HDD: Hard Disk Drive. A storage medium which stores digitally encoded data on platters with magnetic surfaces.
- DH<P: Dynamic Host Configuration ≤rotocol is a network application protocol used by devices (DHC≤ clients) to obtain configuration information for operation in an Internet ≤rotocol network.
- HTTP: Hypertext = transfer ≤ protocol. A protocol to transfer hypertext request and information between servers and browsers over a network
- PPPoE: ≤oint-to-≤oint ≤rotocol over Ethernet is a network protocol for encapsulating ≤oint-to-≤oint ≤rotocol (≤≤≤) frames inside Ethernet frames. It is used mainly with ADSL services where individual users connect to the ADSL transceiver (modem) over Ethernet and in plain +etro Ethernet networks.
- DDNS: Dynamic D×S is a method, protocol, or network service that provides the capability for a networked device, such as a router or computer system using the Internet ≤rotocol Suite, to notify a domain name server to change, in real time (ad-hoc) the active D×S configuration of its configured hostnames, addresses or other information stored in D×S.
• Hybrid DVR: A combination of a DVR and ×VR. - NTP: ×network = ime ≤rotocol. A protocol designed to synchronize the clocks of computers over a network.
- NTS<: ×ational = television System Committee. ×=SC is an analog television standard used in such countries as the >nited States and Japan. Each frame of an ×=SC signal contains 525 scan lines at 60Hz.
- NVR: ×network Video Recorder. An ×VR can be a ≤C-based or embedded system used for centralized management and storage for I≤ cameras, I≤ Domes and other DVRs.
- P4L: ≤hase Alternating Line. ≤AL is also another video standard used in broadcast televisions systems in large parts of the world. ≤AL signal contains 625 scan lines at 50Hz.
- PTZ: ≤an, =ilt, <oom. ≤=< cameras are motor driven systems that allow the camera to pan left and right, tilt up and down and zoom in and out.
- US+: >niversal Serial Bus. >SB is a plug-and-play serial bus standard to interface devices to a host computer.
18.3 Troubleshooting
- No image is displayed on the monitor after the device starts up normally.
Possible Reasons:
— No VGA or HDMI connection
— Connection cable is damaged
— Input mode of the monitor is incorrect
Step 1 Verify the device is connected with the monitor via HDMI or VGA cable. If not, connect the device with the monitor and reboot.
Step 2 Verify the connection cable is good.
If there is still no image displayed on the monitor after rebooting, check if the connection cable is good, change the cable, and connect again.
Step 3 Verify the monitor input mode is correct.
Check that the monitor input mode matches the output mode of the device (e.g., if the output mode of the DVR is HDMI, then the monitor input mode must be HDMI). If not, modify the monitor input mode.
Step 4 Check if the fault is solved by step 1 to step 3.
If it is solved, finish the process.
If not, contact an engineer from our company to do further analysis.
- There is a beep after a new device starts up.
Possible Reasons:
— No HDD is installed in the device.
— The installed HDD has not been initialized.
— The installed HDD is not compatible with the device or is broken.
Step 1 Verify at least one HDD is installed in the device.
1) If not, install a compatible HDD.

NOTE
Refer to the "Quick Operation Guide" for the HDD installation steps.
2) If you do not want to install an HDD, select "Menu > Configuration > Exceptions," and uncheck the "HDD Error" Audible Varning checkbox.
Step 2 Verify the HDD is initialized.
1) Select "Menu > System Configuration > HDD > General."
2) If the HDD status is "Uninitialized," check the corresponding HDD checkbox and click the "Init" button.
Step 3 Verify the HDD is detected and is in good condition.
1) Select "Menu > System Configuration > HDD > General."
2) If the HDD is not detected or the status is "Abnormal," replace the dedicated HDD according to the requirement.
Step 4 Check if the fault is solved by step 1 to step 3.
1) If it is solved, finish the process.
2) If not, contact an engineer from our company for further analysis.
• Live view becomes stuck when video outputs locally.
Possible Reasons:
— The frame rate has not reached the real-time frame rate.
Step 1 Check the parameters of Main Stream (Continuous) and Main Stream (Event).
Step 2 Select "Menu > Record > ≤ parameters > Record," and set the resolution of Main Stream (Event) the same as the one of Main Stream (Continuous).
Step 3 Verify the frame rate is real-time frame rate.
Step 4 Select "Menu > Record > ≤ parameters > Record," and set the Frame Rate to Full Frame.
Step 5 Check if the fault is solved by the above steps.
Step 6 If it is solved, finish the process.
Step 7 If not, contact an engineer from our company for further analysis.
- When using the device to get live view audio, there is no sound, there is too much noise, or the volume is too low.
Possible Reasons:
— Cable between the pickup and camera is not connected well; impedance mismatches or is incompatible.
— The stream type is not set to "Video & Audio."
Step 1 Verify the cable between the pickup and camera is connected well, the impedance matches, and is compatible.
Step 2 Verify the setting parameters are correct.
Step 3 Select "Menu > Record > ≤ parameters > Record," and set the Stream Type to "Audio & Video."
Step 4 Check if the fault is solved by the above steps.
Step 5 If it is solved, finish the process.
Step 6 If not, contact an engineer from our company for further analysis.
- The image gets stuck when DVR is playing back by single or multi-channel cameras.
Possible Reasons:
— The frame rate is not the real-time frame rate.
— The DVR supports up to 16-channel synchronize playback at the resolution of 4CIF, if you want a 16-channel synchronize playback at the resolution of 720p, the frame extracting may occur, which leads to a slight delay.
Step 1 Verify the frame rate is real-time frame rate.
Step 2 Select "Menu > Record > ≤ parameters > Record," and set the Frame Rate to "Full Frame."
Step 3 Verify the hardware can support the playback.
Step 4 Reduce the channel number of playback.
Step 5 Select "Menu > Record > Encoding > Record", and set the resolution and bitrate to a lower level.
Step 6 Reduce the number of local playback channel.
Step 7 Select "Menu > ≤ layback," and uncheck the checkbox of unnecessary channels.
Step 8 Check if the fault is solved by the above steps.
Step 9 If it is solved, finish the process.
Step 10 If not, contact an engineer from our company for further analysis.
- No record file found in the device local HDD, and the prompt "No record file found" pops up when you search the record files.
Possible Reasons:
— The time setting of system is incorrect.
— The search condition is incorrect.
— The HDD is error or not detected.
Step 1 Verify the system time setting is correct.
Step 2 Select "Menu > Configuration > General > General," and verify the "System Time" is correct.
Step 3 Verify the search condition is correct.
Step 4 Select “≤layback,” and verify the channel and time a re correct.
Step 5 Verify the HDD status is normal.
Step 6 Select "Menu > System Configuration > HDD > General" to view the HDD status, and verify the HDD is detected and can be read and written normally.
Step 7 Check if the fault is solved by the above steps.
Step 8 If it is solved, finish the process.
Step 9 If not, contact an engineer from our company for further analysis.
18.4 List of Compatible Hikvision IP Cameras
| Type Model Version Max. | Resolution Sub-stream Audio | ||||
| HD Network Camera | DS-2CD7153-E V5.1.0 build | 131202 1600×1200 √ × | |||
| DS-2CD754F-EI V5.1.0 build | 131202 2048×1536 √ √ | ||||
| DS-2CD783F-EI V5.1.0 build | 131202 2560×1920 √ √ | ||||
| DS-2CD7164-E V5.1.0 build | 131202 1280×720 √ × | ||||
| DS-2CD864FWD-E V5.1.0 build | 131202 1600×1200 √ √ | ||||
| DS-2CD4026FWD 14.33 V5.1.0 build5 131202 1920×1080 √ √ | |||||
| DS-2CD6233F 14.24 | V5.1.0 build5 131202 | 2048×1536 √ × | |||
| DS-2CD2012-I | V5.1.0 build 131202 | 1280×960 √ × | |||
| DS-2CD4012F | V5.1.0 build 131202 1280×1024 √ √ | ||||
| DS-2CD4232FWD-I V5.1.0 build | 131202 2048×1536 √ √ | ||||
| SD Network Camera | DS-2CD793PFWD-EI | V5.1.0 build 131202 | 704×576 | √ | √ |
| Intelligence Traffic Camera | iDS-2CD9122 | V3.5.0 build 131012 | 1920×1080 × × | ||
| iDS-2CD9121 | V3.4.2 build 130718 | 1600×1200 × × | |||
| Network Speed Dome | DS-2DF7274 | V5.1.0 build 130923 1280×960 √ √ | |||
| DS-2DE7174 | V5.0.2Build 130926 | 1280×960 √ √ | |||

NOTE
Hikvision holds the right to interpret this list.
18.5 List of Compatible Third-Party IP Cameras
| Manufacturer | Model | Version Max. Resolution | Sub-stream Audio | ||
| Axis P3304 | 5.2 | 1440×900 √ × | |||
| Sony | SNC-RH124 | 1.7.00 | 1280×720 | √ | √ |
| Samsung | SND-5080P | 3.10_130416 | 1280×1024 | √ | √ |
| Vivotek | FD8134 | 0107a | 1280×800 | √ | × |
| Bosch | Dinion NBN-921-P | V10500453 | 1280×720 | × | × |
| Panasonic | SP306H | Application: 1.34Image Data: 1.06 | 1280×960 × √ | ||
| Cannon | VB-H410 | Ver.+1.0.0 | 1280×960 | × | √ |
| Zavio | F3206 | MG.1.6.02c045 | 1920×1080 | √ | × |
| Pelco | IX30DN-ACFZHB3 | 1.8.2-20120327-2.9080-A1.7852 | 2048×1536 √ × | ||






















